DCN4TB4

Cat. No. W457-E1-07 CRT1 Series CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater Unit OPERATION MANUAL CRT1 Series CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater Unit Operation Manual Revised October 2009 iv Notice: OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual. The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual. Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property. !DANGER Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage. !WARNING Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage. !Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury, or property damage. OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product. The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means “word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense. The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller. “PC” is used, however, in some Programming Device displays to mean Programmable Controller. Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information. Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product. 1,2,3... 1. Indicates lists of one sort or another, such as procedures, checklists, etc.  OMRON, 2006 All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON. No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication. v vi TABLE OF CONTENTS PRECAUTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xvii 1 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii 2 General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii 3 Safety Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii 4 Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xix 5 Application Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xx 6 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxii SECTION 1 Features and Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1-2 Slave Unit Models . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 SECTION 2 Wiring Configurations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31 2-1 CompoNet Networks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 2-2 Wiring Formations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 2-3 Communications Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 2-4 Communications Cable Wiring Examples. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 SECTION 3 Installation and Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47 3-1 Installing Slave Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3-2 Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 3-5 Power Supply Wiring. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 SECTION 4 Basic Specifications of Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115 4-1 Basic Specifications of Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 SECTION 5 Digital I/O Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119 5-1 Status Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 5-2 Allocating I/O Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125 5-4 Units with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 197 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 282 vii TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 6 Analog I/O Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305 6-1 Analog I/O Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 6-2 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 6-3 Summary of the Analog Output Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 6-4 Status Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 6-5 Analog Data Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 6-6 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 6-7 Units with Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 SECTION 7 Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 7-1 Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 7-2 Overview of Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 7-3 Status Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 7-4 Monitoring Temperature Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 7-5 Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 SECTION 8 Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 391 8-1 Expansion Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 SECTION 9 Bit Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407 9-1 Status Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 9-2 Allocating I/O Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 9-4 Clamp Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 SECTION 10 Repeater Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 471 viii 10-1 Status Areas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 10-2 Repeater Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 11 Smart Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 479 11-1 CX-Integrator. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 11-2 Functions Common to All Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 486 11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 495 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 507 11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 530 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 540 SECTION 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 579 12-1 Indicator Meanings and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 12-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 12-3 Device Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 Appendices A CompoNet Explicit Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 591 B Object Mounting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 615 C Current Consumption Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 631 D Precautions with Connecting Two-wire DC Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 637 E I/O Power Supply Current . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 639 F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 641 Index. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 645 Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 649 ix x About this Manual: This manual describes the installation and operation of the CompoNet Slave Units, and the Repeater Unit and includes the sections described below. Please read this manual carefully and be sure you understand the information provided before attempting to install or operate a CompoNet Slave Unit or Repeater Unit. Be sure to read the precautions provided in the following section. Also be sure to read the CompoNet Master Unit Operation Manual (see following table) together with this manual. Precautions provide general precautions for using the CompoNet Slave Units, Repeater Units, Programmable Controller, and related devices. Section 1 introduces the CompoNet Slave Units and the various models that are available. Section 2 describes the configurations of CompoNet Networks. Section 3 describes how to install and wire a CompoNet Network. Section 4 provides the basic specifications of the Slave Units. Section 5 describes the Digital I/O Slave Units. Section 6 describes the Analog I/O Slave Units. Section 7 describes the Temperature Input Units. Section 8 describes the Expansion Units. Section 9 describes the Bit Slave Units. Section 10 describes the Repeater Unit. Section 11 individually describes the functions provided by CompoNet Slave Unit. The functions are divided into those supported by all CompoNet Slave Units and those supported only by specific CompoNet Slave Units. Section 12 provides troubleshooting information that can be used in the event a problem occurs in CompoNet Slave Unit operation. It also provides information on maintenance that should be performed to ensure optimum application of the CompoNet Slave Units. The Appendices provide specialized information, including information on CompoNet explicit messages, object mounting, connectable devices, current consumption, and precautions for connecting two-wire DC sensors. !WARNING Failure to read and understand the information provided in this manual may result in personal injury or death, damage to the product, or product failure. Please read each section in its entirety and be sure you understand the information provided in the section and related sections before attempting any of the procedures or operations given. xi Related Manuals: Cat. No. Models W457 CRT1 Series (this manual) W456 CS1W-CRM21 and CJ1WCRM21 W342 CS1G/H-CPU@@H CS1G/H-CPU@@-EV1 CS1D-CPU@@H Name CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater Unit Operation Manual CS/CJ-series CompoNet Master Units Operation Manual SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP Series SYSMAC One NSJ Series Communications Commands Reference Manual Description Provides the specifications of CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater Unit. Provides an overview of CompoNet Networks, communications specifications, wring methods, and CompoNet Master Unit functions. Describes the communications commands used with CS-series, CJ-series, and CPseries PLCs and NSJ Controllers. CS1D-CPU@@S CS1W-SCB@@-V1 CS1W-SCU@@-V1 CJ1G/H-CPU@@H CJ1G-CPU@@P CJ1G-CPU@@ CJ1M-CPU@@ CJ1W-SCU@@-V1 CP1H-X@@@@-@ CP1H-XA@@@@-@ CP1H-Y@@@@-@ NSJ@-@@@@(B)-G5D W464 xii NSJ@-@@@@(B)-M3D CXONE-AL@@C-EV@/ CXONE-AL@@D-EV@ SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP/NSJ Series CX-Integrator Ver. 2.3 Operation Manual Describes CX-Integrator operating methods, e.g., for setting up and monitoring networks. Read and Understand this Manual Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments. Warranty and Limitations of Liability WARRANTY OMRON's exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON. OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING NONINFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED. LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR STRICT LIABILITY. In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on which liability is asserted. IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON'S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR. xiii Application Considerations SUITABILITY FOR USE OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to the combination of products in the customer's application or use of the products. At the customer's request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine, system, or other application or use. The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for the products: • Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions or uses not described in this manual. • Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations. • Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property. Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products. NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM. PROGRAMMABLE PRODUCTS OMRON shall not be responsible for the user's programming of a programmable product, or any consequence thereof. xiv Disclaimers CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons. It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products. DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown. PERFORMANCE DATA Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON's test conditions, and the users must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON Warranty and Limitations of Liability. ERRORS AND OMISSIONS The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions. xv xvi PRECAUTIONS This section provides general precautions for using the CompoNet Slave Units, and the Repeater Unit. The information contained in this section is important for the safe and reliable application of the CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater Unit. You must read this section and understand the information contained before attempting to set up or operate a CompoNet Network using CompoNet Slave Units or Repeater Units. 1 2 3 4 5 6 Intended Audience . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Safety Precautions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Operating Environment Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1 Applicable Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2 Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3 Conformance to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xviii xviii xviii xix xx xxii xxii xxii xxii xvii 1 Intended Audience 1 Intended Audience This manual is intended for the following personnel, who must also have knowledge of electrical systems (an electrical engineer or the equivalent). • Personnel in charge of installing FA systems. • Personnel in charge of designing FA systems. • Personnel in charge of managing FA systems and facilities. 2 General Precautions The user must operate the product according to the performance specifications described in the operation manuals. Before using the product under conditions which are not described in the manual or applying the product to nuclear control systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, vehicles, combustion systems, medical equipment, amusement machines, safety equipment, and other systems, machines, and equipment that may have a serious influence on lives and property if used improperly, consult your OMRON representative. Make sure that the ratings and performance characteristics of the product are sufficient for the systems, machines, and equipment, and be sure to provide the systems, machines, and equipment with double safety mechanisms. This manual provides information for programming and operating the Unit. Be sure to read this manual before attempting to use the Unit and keep this manual close at hand for reference during operation. Be sure this manual is delivered to the persons actually using the CompoNet Slave Units and Repeater Units. !WARNING It is extremely important that a PLC and all PLC Units be used for the specified purpose and under the specified conditions, especially in applications that can directly or indirectly affect human life. You must consult with your OMRON representative before applying a PLC System to the above-mentioned applications. 3 Safety Precautions !WARNING Do not attempt to take any Unit apart and do not touch the interior of any Unit while the power is being supplied. Also, do not turn ON the power supply while the cover is open. Doing any of these may result in electric shock. !WARNING Do not input voltages or currents exceeding the rated range to the Unit. Exceeding the rated range may cause Unit failure or fire. xviii Operating Environment Precautions 4 !WARNING Provide safety measures in external circuits (i.e., not in the Slave Units), including the following items, to ensure safety in the system if an abnormality occurs due to malfunction of the PLC or another external factor affecting the PLC operation. (“PLC” includes CPU Units, other Units mounted in the PLC, and Remote I/O Terminals.) Not doing so may result in serious accidents. • Emergency stop circuits, interlock circuits, limit circuits, and similar safety measures must be provided in external control circuits. • The PLC will turn OFF all outputs when its self-diagnosis function detects any error or when a severe failure alarm (FALS) instruction is executed. As a countermeasure for such errors, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system. • The PLC outputs may remain ON or OFF due to deposits on or burning of the output relays, or destruction of the output transistors. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system. • When the 24-VDC output (service power supply) is overloaded or shortcircuited, the voltage may drop and result in the outputs being turned OFF. As a countermeasure for such problems, external safety measures must be provided to ensure safety in the system. !WARNING The CPU Unit refreshes I/O even when the program is stopped (i.e., even in PROGRAM mode). Confirm safety thoroughly in advance before changing the status of any part of memory allocated to I/O Units, Special I/O Units, or CPU Bus Units. Any changes to the data allocated to any Unit may result in unexpected operation of the loads connected to the Unit. Any of the following operation may result in changes to memory status. • Transferring I/O memory data to the CPU Unit from a Programming Device. • Changing present values in memory from a Programming Device. • Force-setting/-resetting bits from a Programming Device. • Transferring I/O memory files from a Memory Card or EM file memory to the CPU Unit. • Transferring I/O memory from a host computer or from another PLC on a network. 4 Operating Environment Precautions !Caution Do not operate the control system in the following locations: • Locations subject to direct sunlight. • Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications. • Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature. • Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases. • Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts. • Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals (including acids). • Locations subject to shock or vibration. xix 5 Application Precautions !Caution The operating environment of the PLC System can have a large effect on the longevity and reliability of the system. Improper operating environments can lead to malfunction, failure, and other unforeseeable problems with the PLC System. Make sure that the operating environment is within the specified conditions at installation and remains within the specified conditions during the life of the system. 5 Application Precautions Observe the following precautions when using a CompoNet Network. • When transporting the Unit, use special packing boxes and protect it from being exposed to excessive vibration or impact during transportation. • Do not drop any Unit or subject any Unit to excessive shock or vibration. Otherwise, Unit failure or malfunction may occur. • Mount the Units securely using DIN Track, a Mounting Bracket, or screws. • Make sure that all Slave Unit mounting screws and cable connector screws are tightened to the torque specified in the relevant manuals. Incorrect tightening torque may result in malfunction. • Make sure that the terminal blocks, communications cables, and other items with locking devices are properly locked into place. Improper locking may result in malfunction. • When installing the Units, ground to 100 Ω min. • Wire all connections correctly according to instructions in the manual. • Always separate Special Flat Cables (Standard and Sheathed) for different CompoNet systems by at least 5 mm to prevent unstable operation due to interference. Do not bundle Special Flat Cables. • Do not extend connection distances or the number of connected nodes beyond the ranges given in the specifications. • Do not allow foreign matter to enter the Units when wiring and installing the Units. • Use the correct wiring materials to wire the Units. • Use the correct tools to wire the Units. • Always use the specified communications cables and connectors. • Confirm the polarity of all terminals before wiring them. • Make sure that all terminal block screws are tightened to the torque specified in this manuals. Incorrect tightening torque may result in fire, malfunction, or failure. • Always use the power supply voltage specified in this manual. • Do not bend cables past their natural bending radius or pull on cables. • Observe the following precautions when wiring the communications cable. • Separate the communications cables from the power lines or high-tension lines. • Do not bend the communications cables past their natural bending radius. • Do not pull on the communications cables. • Do not place heavy objects on top of the communications cables. • Always lay communications cable inside ducts. xx 5 Application Precautions • Take appropriate measures to ensure that the specified power with the rated voltage and frequency is supplied. Be particularly careful in places where the power supply is unstable. An incorrect power supply may result in malfunction. • Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Insufficient safety measures against short-circuiting may result in burning. • Fail-safe measures must be taken by the customer to ensure safety in the event of incorrect, missing, or abnormal signals caused by broken signal lines, momentary power interruptions, or other causes. • Confirm voltage specifications when wiring communications, the power supply, and I/O crossovers. Incorrect wiring may result in malfunction. • Do not apply voltages or connect loads to the Output Units in excess of the maximum switching capacity. Excess voltage or loads may result in burning. • Do not apply voltages to the Input Units in excess of the rated input voltage. Excess voltages may result in burning. • After replacing Units, resume operation only after transferring to the new CPU Unit and/or Special I/O Units the contents of the DM Area, HR Area, and other data required for resuming operation. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation. • Check the user program for proper execution before actually running it on the Unit. Not checking the program may result in unexpected operation. • Check all wiring and switch settings to be sure they are correct. • Always turn OFF the power supply to the PLC and Slave Units before attempting any of the following. Not turning OFF the power supply may result in malfunction or electric shock. • Removing or attaching terminal blocks to Slave Units and Expansion Units • Removing or attaching the terminal blocks or connectors • Replacing components (e.g., relays) • Setting the DIP Switches and Rotary Switches • Connecting cables or wiring the system. • Confirm that no adverse effect will occur in the system before attempting any of the following. Not doing so may result in an unexpected operation. • Changing the operating mode of the PLC • Force-setting/force-resetting any bit in memory • Changing the present value of any word or any set value in memory from the user program • Touch a grounded piece of metal to discharge static electricity from your body before touching any Unit. • When replacing relays or other parts, be sure to confirm that the ratings of the new part are correct. Not doing so may result in malfunction or burning. • Do not attempt to disassemble, repair, or modify any Units. Any attempt to do so may result in malfunction, fire, or electric shock. • On IP54 Bit Slaves, tighten the cover screws to the specified torque after setting the rotary switches or performing wiring. The specified degree of protection will not be achieved if the screws are not tightened sufficiently. xxi 6 Conformance to EC Directives • Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations: • Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise. • Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields. • Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity. • Locations close to power supplies. 6 6-1 Conformance to EC Directives Applicable Directives • EMC Directives • Low Voltage Directive 6-2 Concepts EMC Directives The OMRON products described in this manual are designed so that they individually comply with the related EMC Directives so that they can be more easily built into other devices or the overall machine. The actual products have been checked for conformity to EMC Directives (see note). Whether the products conform to the standards in the system used by the customer, however, cannot be checked by OMRON and must be checked by the customer. EMC-related performance of the OMRON devices that comply with EC Directives will vary depending on the configuration, wiring, and other conditions of the equipment or control panel on which the OMRON devices are installed. The customer must, therefore, perform the final check to confirm that devices and the overall machine conform to EMC standards. Note Applicable EMC (Electromagnetic Compatibility) standards are as follows: EMS (Electromagnetic Susceptibility): EN 61131-2 and EN 61000-6-2 EMI (Electromagnetic Interference): EN 61131-2 and EN 61000-6-4 (Radiated emission: 10-m regulations) Low Voltage Directive Always ensure that devices operating at voltages of 50 to 1,000 VAC and 75 to 1,500 VDC meet the required safety standards. Applicable standard: EN 61131-2 6-3 Conformance to EC Directives The OMRON products described in this manual comply with the related EMC Directives. To ensure that the machine or device in which the products are used complies with EC Directives, the products must be installed as follows: 1,2,3... 1. The products must be installed within a control panel. 2. A DC power supply with reinforced insulation or double insulation that can maintain a stable output even if the input is interrupted for 10 ms must be used for communications power, internal power, and I/O power. The OMRON S82J-series Power Supply is recommended. (See note.) xxii 6 Conformance to EC Directives 3. Products complying with EC Directives also conform to the Emission Standards (EN 61131-2 and EN 61000-6-4). Radiated emission characteristics (10-m regulations) may vary depending on the configuration of the control panel used, other devices connected to the control panel, wiring, and other conditions. You must therefore confirm that the overall machine or equipment complies with EC Directives. 4. Conformance with the EC Directives was confirmed with a system configuration using I/O wiring lengths of less than 30 m. Note Conformance with the EMC Directive was confirmed when using the recommended power supply. xxiii Conformance to EC Directives xxiv 6 SECTION 1 Features and Slave Units This section introduces the CompoNet Slave Units and the various models that are available. 1-1 1-2 Features of CompoNet Slave Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1-1-1 Overview. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1-1-2 Features of CompoNet Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 1-1-3 CompoNet Slave Unit Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Slave Unit Models. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19 1-2-1 Word Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20 1-2-2 Bit Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26 1-2-3 Repeater Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1-2-4 Slave Unit Installation and Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27 1 Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units 1-1 1-1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Overview CompoNet Slave Units do not simply input and output ON/OFF signals, they can also collect a variety of information that can improve equipment operating rates. They can also be used to build maintenance systems separate from control systems. Coexisting control and maintenance systems can contribute to reducing equipment startup time, recovery time after problems, and preventative maintenance of equipment. ■ Control System: For remote I/O communications with the PLC, I/O is allocated for each node address by default. In addition, Slave Unit status information other than I/O is allocated in an input area in the Master Unit. The allocation can be set using the CX-Integrator or explicit messages. ■ Maintenance System: Slave Units can store several kinds of equipment data. This data can be read from or written to the Slave Unit’s memory using the CX-Integrator or by sending explicit messages from the Master Unit (PLC) to the Slave Unit. 1-1-2 Features of CompoNet Slave Units CompoNet Slave Units have the following features. Main Features The functions that can be used depend on the type of Slave Unit. For details, refer to 1-1-3 CompoNet Slave Unit Functions. Operation Time Monitor The Slave Unit can quickly measure the ON/OFF timing of input and output contacts without relying on the ladder program. Contact types (IN - OUT, OUT - IN, IN - IN, OUT - OUT) and trigger patterns (ON → OFF, OFF → ON, ON → ON, OFF → OFF) can be freely combined for measurement. A time can be set in the Slave Unit memory to enable notification of the status when the measured time exceeds the set time. This data can be set or read by using the CX-Integrator. Contact Operation Monitor The number of times each input contact or output contact is turned ON can be counted at a sampling frequency of 50 Hz maximum and stored. A value can also be set in the Slave Unit to enable notification of the status if the number of contact operations reaches the set value. This data can be set or read by using the CX-Integrator. Note Total ON Time Monitor The contact operation monitor and the total ON time monitor cannot both be used for the same contact at the same time. The total ON time of sensors, relays, and other devices are stored in the Slave Unit memory. A value can also be set in the Slave Unit to enable notification of the status if the total time reaches the set value. These values can be set or read by using the CX-Integrator. Note Automatic Baud Rate Detection 2 The total ON time monitor and the contact operation monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. The baud rate is automatically set to the same baud rate as the Master Unit; therefore, there is no need to set the baud rate of the Slave Units. Features of CompoNet Slave Units Unit Conduction Time Monitor Section 1-1 The total ON time of the Slave Unit's internal circuit power supply can be stored. This value can be read using the CX-Integrator or explicit messages. A value can also be set in the Slave Unit to enable obtaining notification of the status if the total time reaches a set monitor value. This data can be read or written by using the CX-Integrator. Naming Units The user can set any name for each Unit as a comment. The names are stored in Slave Unit memory. This data can be read or written by using the CX-Integrator. Naming Connected Devices Any name can be set for each I/O contact (e.g., sensor or valve) connected to a Slave Unit. The names are stored in Slave Unit memory. This data can be read or written by using the CX-Integrator. Network Power Voltage Monitoring The network power supply voltage (present, maximum, and minimum values) can be stored in the Slave Unit memory. A monitor voltage can also be set in the Slave Unit to enable notification of the status if the voltage drops to the preset value. These values can be set or read by using the CX-Integrator. I/O Power Status Monitor The I/O power status monitor function checks if the I/O power is ON or not, and provides notification in a status area. This data can be checked by using the CX-Integrator. Communications Error History Monitor Enables storing the error condition (communication failure details, the communications power supply voltage at the time of failure, and the Unit conduction time) for the most recent 4 communication failures, within the slave unit. This data can be read by using the CX-Integrator. Input Filters The Slave Units read input values multiple times during the set period to eliminate the effect of switch chattering and data omissions caused by noise. An ON delay or OFF delay can also be implemented by using this function. These settings are made by using the CX-Integrator. Communications Error Output Setting The output value when a communications error occurs can be set for each word of an Output Unit. These settings are made by using the CX-Integrator. Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at Startup This function holds inputs from when the power is turned ON until the Unit stabilizes, i.e., inputs are not received while the I/O power is OFF and for 100 ms after the I/O power is turned ON. This contributes to eliminating input errors caused by inrush current when the I/O power is turned ON. These settings are made by using the CX-Integrator. Power Short-circuit Detection The I/O power current is monitored. If an excessive current is detected, it is assumed that a power short-circuit has occurred and the sensor power output is turned OFF forcibly. The status can be checked by using the LED indicators on the Slave Unit or by using the CX-Integrator. Load Short-circuit Detection The output load current is monitored. If an excessive current is detected, it is assumed that an load short-circuit has occurred and the output is turned OFF forcibly to prevent damage to the Unit's output circuit. The status can be checked by using the LED indicators on the Slave Unit or by using the CX-Integrator. Removable Terminal Block The terminal block can be removed. 3 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Section 1-1 Expansion Using Expansion Units One Expansion Unit can be added to a Digital I/O Slave Unit (with 2-tier terminal block and 16 points). This extends the range of possible system configurations by making it possible to expand to a variety of I/O combinations, e.g., 16 inputs and 8 outputs or 24 inputs (16 inputs + 8 inputs). Scaling Converted data can be scaled to any value by the user. Ladder program calculations for the Master Unit are not required if the scaling function is used with the Slave Unit. The offset compensation function can also be used to offset scaled values. These settings are made by using the CX-Integrator. Last Maintenance Date (Maintenance Function) The date that maintenance was performed can be written in the Slave Unit by using the CX-Integrator. Cumulated Count The cumulated count function calculates the integral time for input (or output) analog values and reads the cumulated value. Monitor values can be set in Units. If the cumulated counter value exceeds the set monitor value, the Cumulated Counter Over Flag in general status turns ON. These values can be set and read by using the CX-Integrator. Moving Average An Analog Input Unit or Temperature Input Unit can calculate the moving average of the last eight inputs and use it as the converted data. Smooth input values can be obtained by averaging the inputs if there are rapid fluctuations in the input. Settings for averaging are made by using the CX-Integrator. Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points The conversion cycle is 4 ms max. when using all 4 analog inputs. The AD conversion cycle can be made faster if fewer AD conversion points are used. Rate of Change Calculations You can find the rate of change during the set data sampling cycle for the input value to an Analog Input Unit or Temperature Input Unit. The rate of change settings are made by using the CX-Integrator. Comparator Input data captured into the Analog Input Slave Unit/Temperature Input Unit or calculation data is compared to alarm settings (Alarm Trip Point High (HH), Warning Trip Point High (H), Warning Trip Point Low (L), and Alarm Trip Point Low (LL)) and the results can be reflected in the "Analog Status Flag" (or "Temperature Data Status Flag"). The Normal Flag (pass signal) turns ON for values that are in set range. The alarm settings are made by using the CX-Integrator. Peak/Bottom Hold The peak/bottom hold function holds the maximum (peak) or the minimum (bottom) input value to an Analog Input Unit or Temperature Input Unit. The maximum (peak) or minimum (bottom) value can be compared with an alarm set value and used to turn ON an alarm flag as status data. This is called the comparator function. The peak/bottom hold settings are made by using the CX-Integrator. Top/Valley Hold The top/valley hold function holds the top or valley input value to an Analog Input Unit or Temperature Input Unit. The Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag can be used to check when top and valley values were detected. The top and valley values can be compared with an alarm set value and used as status data to turn ON alarm flags (comparator function). The top/valley hold settings are made by using the CX-Integrator. 4 Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Disconnected Line Detection With Analog Input Units, the Disconnected Line Detection Flag for each input can be used in the Master Unit to check whether the analog input lines (for voltage inputs or current inputs) are disconnected for analog inputs that are enabled under the setting of the number of AD conversion points. This function is supported only when the input range is 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA. With Temperature Input Units, disconnections can be detected for each sensor input. The status can be checked at the Master Unit using the Disconnected Line Detection Flag. User Adjustment The user adjustment function can be used to compensate offsets in input (or output) values that occur due to the features of or connection method used for input or output devices to adjust the input (or output). The conversion line is adjusted at two points: 0% and 100%. The adjustments can be made by using the CX-Integrator. Top/Valley Count With Temperature Input Units, the maximum or minimum number of times the top or valley value is reached can be counted for an application that has fixed cycles of temperature changes. Explicit messages can be used to see if the number of cycles has exceeded a monitoring set value. The settings are made by using the CX-Integrator. Temperature Range Total Time Count With Temperature Input Units, the length of time that the temperature input value is within a user-set temperature range can be measured in seconds. Explicit messages can be used to see if the measured time has exceeded a monitoring set value. The temperature range total time count settings are made by using the CXIntegrator. Input Temperature Variation Detection With Temperature Input Units, the temperature difference between two inputs for inputs 0 to 3 can be detected and compared with a monitoring set value. Explicit messages can be used to see if the temperature difference has exceeded the monitoring set value. The input temperature variation detection settings are made by using the CXIntegrator. Input Error Detection Disable Function With Temperature Input Units, if there is an unused input, detection of input errors (including disconnection) can be disabled. Input error detection is disabled by using the CX-Integrator. Other Features Rotary Switch Setting of Node Addresses Node addresses can now be set much more easily using rotary switches. (except some models) Bit-level Distribution (Bit Slaves) Slave Units are available with 2 inputs, 2 outputs, 4 inputs, 4 outputs, 1 input/1 output, or 2 inputs/2 outputs. These enable bit-level distribution of Slave Units. At the same time, unused Slave Unit I/O can be suppressed. IP54 Dust-tight, Splashproof Units (Bit Slaves) The CRT1B-@D@@SP(-1) Units conform to the IEC IP54 dust-tight, splashproof degree of protection (see note). Note For protection against human bodies and solid foreign objects, IP54 requires that dust will not penetrate inside the device to a degree that would affecting operation. For protection against water ingress, water splashing from any direction must have no adverse effect. 5 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Section 1-1 Flat Cable Included (Bit Slaves, except Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors) Models of Bit Slave Units are available with a Flat Cable included (standard or sheathed). Models with a Flat Cable included, however, do not support a baud rate of 4 Mbps. (Branching is not possible.) No I/O Power Supply Wiring Required (Bit Slaves) External I/O (sensors or actuators) connected to Bit Slaves using e-CON connectors, clamp terminals, or compact connectors are supplied power from the CompoNet communications power supply. No separate wiring is required for I/O power supply. Industry Standard Sensor e-CON Connectors (CRT1-V@D08S(-1)/ CRT1-@D@S(-1)/ CRT1-@D16SH(-1)/ CRT1B-@D02S(-1)/ CRT1B-@D0@SP(-1)/ CRT1-VAD04S/ CRT1-VDA02S) No special tools are required for connections because industry standard eCON connectors are used. Electrical cables do not need to be stripped and are simply inserted with pliers. When using e-CON connectors, there is no need to prepare special tools for wiring, and connectors from different makers can be used interchangeably. Units with MIL Connectors (CRT1-V@D@@ML(-1)/ CRT1-VAD04ML/ CRT1-VDA02ML) MIL connectors, widely used in the electronic components and semiconductor industries, help reduce wiring requirements. Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks (CRT1-@D@@SL(-1)/ CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1)) There is no need to tighten the screws because these Units use screw-less clamp terminal blocks. Connections are made simply by inserting the pin terminals. Wiring can be completed in one step. 6 Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units 1-1-3 CompoNet Slave Unit Functions Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported Unit Digital I/O Slave Units 2-tier Terminal block CRT1-@D08(-1) CRT1-@D16(-1) Input Units Output Units Input Units Output Units Function Operation Time Monitor Contact Operation Monitor Total ON Time Monitor Automatic Baud Rate Detection Unit Conduction Time Monitor Naming Units Naming Connected Devices Network Power Voltage Monitor I/O Power Status Monitor Communications Error History Monitor Input Filter Communications Error Output Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at I/O Startup Power Short-circuit Detection Unconnected Line Detection Load Short-circuit Detection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes --Yes --- Yes --Yes --Yes --- Yes Yes Yes ------- Disconnected Line Detection Removable Terminal Block Structure Expansion Using Expansion Units Scaling Last Maintenance Date Cumulated Count Moving Average Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points Rate of Change Comparator Peak/Bottom Hold Top/Valley Hold User Adjustment Top/Valley Count Temperature Range Total Time Count Input Temperature Variation Detection Input Error Detection Disable Function Note I/O Units --Yes --- Yes --Yes ------------------------- The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. 7 Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported Unit Function Operation Time Monitor Contact Operation Monitor Total ON Time Monitor Automatic Baud Rate Detection Unit Conduction Time Monitor Naming Units Naming Connected Devices Network Power Voltage Monitor I/O Power Status Monitor Communications Error History Monitor Input Filter Communications Error Output Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at I/O Startup Power Short-circuit Detection Unconnected Line Detection Load Short-circuit Detection Disconnected Line Detection Removable Terminal Block Structure Expansion Using Expansion Units Scaling Last Maintenance Date Cumulated Count Moving Average Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points Rate of Change Comparator Peak/Bottom Hold Top/Valley Hold User Adjustment Top/Valley Count Temperature Range Total Time Count Input Temperature Variation Detection Input Error Detection Disable Function Note 8 Digital I/O Slave Units 2-tier Terminal block CRT1-ROS08 CRT1-ROS16 CRT1-ROF08 CRT1-ROF16 Output Units Output Units Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ----Yes Yes --Yes --- --Yes --- --------Yes --------Yes --- Yes --- Yes --Yes ------- --Yes ------- ----------- ------------------- The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported Unit Function Operation Time Monitor Contact Operation Monitor Total ON Time Monitor Automatic Baud Rate Detection Unit Conduction Time Monitor Naming Units Naming Connected Devices Network Power Voltage Monitor I/O Power Status Monitor Communications Error History Monitor Input Filter Communications Error Output Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at I/O Startup Power Short-circuit Detection Unconnected Line Detection Load Short-circuit Detection Disconnected Line Detection Removable Terminal Block Structure Expansion Using Expansion Units Scaling Last Maintenance Date Cumulated Count Moving Average Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points Rate of Change Comparator Peak/Bottom Hold Top/Valley Hold User Adjustment Top/Valley Count Temperature Range Total Time Count Input Temperature Variation Detection Input Error Detection Disable Function Note Digital I/O Slave Units 3-tier Terminal block CRT1-@D08TA(-1) CRT1-@D08TAH(-1) (without Short-circuit and (with Short-circuit and Disconnected Line Detection) Disconnected Line Detection) Input Units Output Units Input Units Output Units Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes ----Yes --Yes Yes --Yes ----------- Yes Yes ----- ----Yes Yes Yes ----Yes ------------------------- The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. 9 Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported Unit Digital I/O Slave Units 3-tier Terminal block CRT1-@D16TA(-1) CRT1-@D16TAH(-1) (without Short-circuit and (with Short-circuit and Disconnected Disconnected Line Detection) Line Detection) Function Input Units Output I/O Units Input Units Output I/O units Units Units Operation Time Monitor Yes Contact Operation Monitor Yes Total ON Time Monitor Yes Automatic Baud Rate Detection Yes Unit Conduction Time Monitor Yes Naming Units Yes Naming Connected Devices Yes Network Power Voltage Monitor Yes I/O Power Status Monitor Yes Communications Error History Monitor Yes Input Filter Communications Error Output Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at I/O Startup Power Short-circuit Detection Unconnected Line Detection Load Short-circuit Detection Yes --Yes Disconnected Line Detection Removable Terminal Block Structure Expansion Using Expansion Units Scaling Last Maintenance Date Cumulated Count Moving Average Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points Rate of Change Comparator Peak/Bottom Hold Top/Valley Hold User Adjustment Top/Valley Count Temperature Range Total Time Count Input Temperature Variation Detection Input Error Detection Disable Function Note 10 --Yes --- Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes --Yes --- Yes Yes Yes ------- Yes Yes --- ----Yes Yes Yes Yes --- --- Yes Yes Yes ----Yes ------------------------- The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported Unit Function Operation Time Monitor Contact Operation Monitor Total ON Time Monitor Automatic Baud Rate Detection Unit Conduction Time Monitor Naming Units Naming Connected Devices Network Power Voltage Monitor I/O Power Status Monitor Communications Error History Monitor Input Filter Communications Error Output Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at I/O Startup Power Short-circuit Detection Unconnected Line Detection Digital I/O Slave Units Units with e-CON Connectors CRT1-V@D08S(-1) Input Units Output Units Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes Yes Yes ----Yes Yes ------- Load Short-circuit Detection Disconnected Line Detection Removable Terminal Block Structure Expansion Using Expansion Units --------- Scaling Last Maintenance Date Cumulated Count Moving Average Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points Rate of Change Comparator Peak/Bottom Hold Top/Valley Hold User Adjustment Top/Valley Count Temperature Range Total Time Count Input Temperature Variation Detection Input Error Detection Disable Function --Yes ------------------------- Note The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. 11 Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported Unit Digital I/O Slave Units Units with e-CON Connectors CRT1-@D16S(-1) CRT1-@D16SH(-1) (without Short-circuit and (with Short-circuit and Disconnected Disconnected Line Detection) Line Detection) Function Input Units Output I/O Units Input Units Output I/O units Units Units Operation Time Monitor Yes Contact Operation Monitor Yes Total ON Time Monitor Yes Automatic Baud Rate Detection Yes Unit Conduction Time Monitor Yes Naming Units Yes Naming Connected Devices Yes Network Power Voltage Monitor Yes I/O Power Status Monitor --Yes Yes --Yes Yes Communications Error History Monitor Yes Input Filter Communications Error Output Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at I/O Startup Power Short-circuit Detection Unconnected Line Detection Load Short-circuit Detection Yes --Yes Disconnected Line Detection Removable Terminal Block Structure Expansion Using Expansion Units Scaling Last Maintenance Date Cumulated Count Moving Average Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points Rate of Change Comparator Peak/Bottom Hold Top/Valley Hold User Adjustment Top/Valley Count Temperature Range Total Time Count Input Temperature Variation Detection Input Error Detection Disable Function Note 12 --Yes --- Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes --Yes --- Yes Yes Yes ------- Yes Yes --- ----Yes Yes Yes Yes --- --- Yes Yes ------Yes ------------------------- The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported Unit Function Operation Time Monitor Contact Operation Monitor Total ON Time Monitor Automatic Baud Rate Detection Unit Conduction Time Monitor Naming Units Naming Connected Devices Network Power Voltage Monitor I/O Power Status Monitor Communications Error History Monitor Input Filter Communications Error Output Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at I/O Startup Power Short-circuit Detection Unconnected Line Detection Load Short-circuit Detection Yes --Yes Disconnected Line Detection Removable Terminal Block Structure Expansion Using Expansion Units Scaling Last Maintenance Date Cumulated Count Moving Average Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points Rate of Change Comparator Peak/Bottom Hold Top/Valley Hold User Adjustment Top/Valley Count Temperature Range Total Time Count Input Temperature Variation Detection Input Error Detection Disable Function Note Digital I/O Slave Units Units with e-CON Connectors CRT1-@D32S(-1) CRT1-@D32SH(-1) (without Short-circuit and (with Short-circuit and Disconnected Disconnected Line Detection) Line Detection) Input Units Output I/O Units Input Units Output I/O units Units Units Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes Yes --Yes Yes Yes --Yes --- Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes --Yes --- Yes Yes Yes ------- Yes Yes --- ----Yes Yes Yes Yes --- --- Yes Yes ------Yes ------------------------- The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. 13 Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported Unit Function Operation Time Monitor Contact Operation Monitor Total ON Time Monitor Automatic Baud Rate Detection Unit Conduction Time Monitor Naming Units Naming Connected Devices Network Power Voltage Monitor I/O Power Status Monitor Communications Error History Monitor Input Filter Communications Error Output Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at I/O Startup Power Short-circuit Detection Unconnected Line Detection Load Short-circuit Detection Disconnected Line Detection Removable Terminal Block Structure Expansion Using Expansion Units Scaling Last Maintenance Date Cumulated Count Moving Average Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points Rate of Change Comparator Peak/Bottom Hold Top/Valley Hold User Adjustment Top/Valley Count Temperature Range Total Time Count Input Temperature Variation Detection Input Error Detection Disable Function Note 14 Digital I/O Slave Units Units with MIL Connectors CRT1-V@D16ML(-1) CRT1-V@D32ML(-1) Input Units Output Units Input Units Output Units I/O Units Yes --Yes --Yes --- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes --Yes --- Yes Yes Yes --------------Yes ------------------------- The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported Unit Function Operation Time Monitor Contact Operation Monitor Total ON Time Monitor Automatic Baud Rate Detection Unit Conduction Time Monitor Naming Units Naming Connected Devices Network Power Voltage Monitor I/O Power Status Monitor Communications Error History Monitor Input Filter Communications Error Output Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at I/O Startup Power Short-circuit Detection Unconnected Line Detection Load Short-circuit Detection Disconnected Line Detection Removable Terminal Block Structure Expansion Using Expansion Units Scaling Last Maintenance Date Cumulated Count Moving Average Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points Rate of Change Comparator Peak/Bottom Hold Top/Valley Hold User Adjustment Top/Valley Count Temperature Range Total Time Count Input Temperature Variation Detection Input Error Detection Disable Function Note Digital I/O Slave Units Units with Screw-less Clamp Terminals CRT1-@D08SL(-1) CRT1-@D16SL(-1) Input Units Output Units Input Units Output Units I/O Units Yes --Yes --Yes --- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes --Yes --- Yes Yes Yes --------Yes ----Yes ------------------------- The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. 15 Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported Unit Units with 2-tier Terminal block CRT1-AD04 CRT1-DA02 Input Output Units Units Function Operation Time Monitor Contact Operation Monitor Total ON Time Monitor Automatic Baud Rate Detection Unit Conduction Time Monitor Naming Units Naming Connected Devices Network Power Voltage Monitor I/O Power Status Monitor Communications Error History Monitor Input Filter Communications Error Output Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at I/O Startup Power Short-circuit Detection Unconnected Line Detection Load Short-circuit Detection Disconnected Line Detection Removable Terminal Block Structure Expansion Using Expansion Units Scaling Last Maintenance Date Cumulated Count Moving Average Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points Rate of Change Comparator Peak/Bottom Hold Top/Valley Hold User Adjustment Top/Valley Count Temperature Range Total Time Count Input Temperature Variation Detection Input Error Detection Disable Function Note 16 --- Yes Analog l I/O Slave Units Units with e-CON Connectors CRT1-VAD04S CRT1-VDA02S Input Output Units Units ------Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes ----Yes --- Units with MIL Connectors CRT1-VAD04ML CRT1-VDA02ML Input Output Units Units --- Yes --- Yes --- ------------- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ------------- ------Yes --- Yes Yes --Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes ------------- Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --------- The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported Unit Function Operation Time Monitor Contact Operation Monitor Total ON Time Monitor Automatic Baud Rate Detection Unit Conduction Time Monitor Naming Units Naming Connected Devices Network Power Voltage Monitor I/O Power Status Monitor Communications Error History Monitor Input Filter Communications Error Output Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at I/O Startup Power Short-circuit Detection Unconnected Line Detection Load Short-circuit Detection Disconnected Line Detection Removable Terminal Block Structure Expansion Using Expansion Units Scaling Last Maintenance Date Cumulated Count Moving Average Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points Rate of Change Comparator Peak/Bottom Hold Top/Valley Hold User Adjustment Top/Valley Count Temperature Range Total Time Count Input Temperature Variation Detection Input Error Detection Disable Function Note Temperature Input Units CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P Input Units ------Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes ------------Yes Yes --Yes Yes Yes Yes --Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. 17 Section 1-1 Features of CompoNet Slave Units Yes: Supported, ---: Not supported Unit Bit Slave Units CRT1B@D02S(-1) Function Input Units Output Units Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors CRT1B-@D0@SP(-1) CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1) Input Units Output I/O Units units CRT1B-@D02JS(-1) Input Units Output Units I/O units Repea ter Unit CRT1B-@D04JS(-1) Input Units CRS1RPT01 Output I/O Units units Operation Time Monitor Yes --- --- --- Contact Operation Monitor Yes --- --- --- Total ON Time Monitor Yes --- --- --- Automatic Baud Rate Detection Yes Yes Yes Yes Unit Conduction Time Monitor Yes --- --- Yes Naming Units Yes --- --- Yes Naming Connected Devices Yes --- --- --- Network Power Voltage Monitor Yes --- --- Yes I/O Power Status Monitor --- --- --- --- Communications Error History Monitor Yes --- --- Yes Input Filter Yes --- Yes --- Yes Yes --- Yes Yes --- Yes --- Communications Error Output --- Yes --- Yes Yes --- Yes Yes --- Yes Yes --- Preventing Malfunctions Caused by Inrush Current at I/O Startup Yes --- Yes --- Yes --- --- --- Power Short-circuit Detection Yes --- Yes --- Yes --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- --- Unconnected Line Detection --- Load Short-circuit Detection --- Yes --- Yes Yes Disconnected Line Detection --- --- --- --- Removable Terminal Block Structure --- --- --- --- Expansion Using Expansion Units --- --- --- --- Scaling --- --- --- --- Last Maintenance Date Yes --- --- Yes Cumulated Count --- --- --- --- Moving Average --- --- --- --- Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points --- --- --- --- Rate of Change --- --- --- --- Comparator --- --- --- --- Peak/Bottom Hold --- --- --- --- Top/Valley Hold --- --- --- --- User Adjustment --- --- --- --- Top/Valley Count --- --- --- --- Temperature Range Total Time Count --- --- --- --- Input Temperature Variation Detection --- --- --- --- Input Error Detection Disable Function --- --- --- --- Note 18 The Contact Operation Monitor and the Total ON Time Monitor cannot be used at the same time for the same contact. Section 1-2 Slave Unit Models 1-2 Slave Unit Models CompoNet Slave Units can be classified into the following groups. Word Slave Units Word Slave Units are Slave Units that are allocated units of 16 bits (i.e., 1 word) in I/O memory of the CPU Unit. Digital I/O Slave Units: Slave Units with digital I/O Analog I/O Slave Units: Slave Units with analog I/O Temperature Input Units: Slave Units with temperature inputs Expansion Units: Bit Slave Units Units that can be used to expand the number of I/O points for Digital I/O Slave Units (with 2-tier terminal blocks and 16 points). Bit Slave Units are Slave Units that are allocated units of 2 bits in I/O memory of the CPU Unit. Bit Slave Units : Bit Slave Units are Slave Units with 2 points or 4 points of digital I/O. They come with a Standard or Sheathed Flat Cable included. Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors: Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors are Slave Units with 2 points or 4 points of digital I/O. They have built-in compact connectors for the I/O interface that support connections with communications cables using internal hook communications connectors. Repeater Units Units that can be used to expand the network by extending trunk lines or branching. 19 Section 1-2 Slave Unit Models 1-2-1 Word Slave Units Digital I/O Slave Units Terminal Block with Screws Type Digital I/O Slave Units with 2-tier Terminal Block Appearance WO MS RD NO OM DE AD R 0 RO N 1 2 OU 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 3 14 121 15 Model CRT1-ID08 8 inputs (PNP) CRT1-ID08-1 8 outputs (NPN) CRT1-OD08 8 outputs (PNP) CRT1-OD08-1 16 inputs (NPN) CRT1-ID16 16 inputs (PNP) CRT1-ID16-1 16 outputs (NPN) CRT1-OD16 16 outputs (PNP) CRT1-OD16-1 T X1 X10 63] [0- NS I/O capacity 8 inputs (NPN) 8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16 (NPN) 8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16-1 (PNP) 20 8 outputs (relay outputs) 8 outputs (SSR outputs) CRT1-ROS08 16 outputs (relay outputs) 16 outputs (SSR outputs) CRT1-ROS16 Features • Terminal blocks can be attached/ removed from the Unit. • Expansion Units cannot be added. • Terminal blocks can be attached/ removed from the Unit. • Expansion Units can be added. • Terminal blocks can be attached/ removed from the Unit. • Expansion Units cannot be added. CRT1-ROF08 CRT1-ROF16 • Terminal blocks can be attached/ removed from the Unit. • Expansion Units can be added. Section 1-2 Slave Unit Models Type Digital I/O Slave Units with 3-tier Terminal Block Appearance Without Short-circuit and Disconnected Line Detection With Short-circuit and Disconnected Line Detection Without Short-circuit and Disconnected Line Detection With Short-circuit and Disconnected Line Detection I/O capacity 8 inputs (NPN) Model CRT1-ID08TA 8 inputs (PNP) CRT1-ID08TA-1 8 outputs (NPN) CRT1-OD08TA 8 outputs (PNP) CRT1-OD08TA-1 8 inputs (NPN) CRT1-ID08TAH 8 inputs (PNP) CRT1-ID08TAH-1 8 outputs (NPN) CRT1-OD08TAH 8 outputs (PNP) CRT1-OD08TAH-1 16 inputs (NPN) CRT1-ID16TA 16 inputs (PNP) CRT1-ID16TA-1 16 outputs (NPN) CRT1-OD16TA 16 outputs (PNP) CRT1-OD16TA-1 Features • Terminal blocks can be attached/removed from the Unit. • Expansion Units cannot be added. 8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16TA (NPN) 8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16TA-1 (PNP) 16 inputs (NPN) CRT1-ID16TAH 16 inputs (PNP) CRT1-ID16TAH-1 16 outputs (NPN) CRT1-OD16TAH 16 outputs (PNP) CRT1-OD16TAH-1 8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16TAH (NPN) 8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16TAH-1 (PNP) 21 Section 1-2 Slave Unit Models Units with Connectors Type Digital I/O Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Appearance Without Shortcircuit and Disconnected Line Detection With Shortcircuit and Disconnected Line Detection Without Shortcircuit and Disconnected Line Detection With Shortcircuit and Disconnected Line Detection 22 I/O capacity Model 8 inputs (NPN) CRT1-VID08S 8 inputs (PNP) CRT1-VID08S-1 8 outputs (NPN) CRT1-VOD08S 8 outputs (PNP) CRT1-VOD08S-1 16 inputs (NPN) CRT1-ID16S 16 inputs (PNP) CRT1-ID16S-1 16 outputs (NPN) CRT1-OD16S 16 outputs (PNP) CRT1-OD16S-1 8 inputs and 8 outputs (NPN) 8 inputs and 8 outputs (PNP) 16 inputs (NPN) CRT1-MD16S 16 inputs (PNP) CRT1-ID16SH-1 16 outputs (NPN) CRT1-OD16SH 16 outputs (PNP) CRT1-OD16SH-1 8 inputs and 8 outputs (NPN) 8 inputs and 8 outputs (PNP) 32 inputs (NPN) CRT1-MD16SH 32 inputs (PNP) CRT1-ID32S-1 32 outputs (NPN) CRT1-OD32S 32 outputs (PNP) CRT1-OD32S-1 16 inputs and 16 outputs (NPN) 16 inputs and 16 outputs (PNP) 32 inputs (NPN) CRT1-MD32S 32 inputs (PNP) CRT1-ID32SH-1 32 outputs (NPN) CRT1-OD32SH 32 outputs (PNP) CRT1-OD32SH-1 16 inputs and 16 outputs (NPN) 16 inputs and 16 outputs (PNP) CRT1-MD32H CRT1-MD16S-1 CRT1-ID16SH CRT1-MD16SH-1 CRT1-ID32S CRT1-MD32S-1 CRT1-ID32SH CRT1-MD32H-1 Features • Equipped with e-CON connectors. • Expansion Units cannot be added. Section 1-2 Slave Unit Models Type Digital I/O Slave Units with MIL Connectors Appearance I/O capacity 16 inputs (NPN) Model CRT1-VID16ML 16 inputs (PNP) CRT1-VID16ML-1 16 outputs (NPN) CRT1-VOD16ML 16 outputs (PNP) CRT1-VOD16ML-1 32 inputs (NPN) CRT1-VID32ML 32 inputs (PNP) CRT1-VID32ML-1 32 outputs (NPN) CRT1-VOD32ML 32 outputs (PNP) CRT1-VOD32ML-1 16 inputs/16 outputs (NPN) 16 inputs/16 outputs (PNP) CRT1-VMD32ML Features • Equipped with MIL connectors. • Expansion Units cannot be added. CRT1-VMD32ML-1 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks Type Digital I/O Slave Units with Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks Appearance I/O capacity 8 inputs (NPN) Model CRT1-ID08SL 8 inputs (PNP) CRT1-ID08SL-1 8 outputs (NPN) CRT1-OD08SL 8 outputs (PNP) CRT1-OD08SL-1 16 inputs (NPN) CRT1-ID16SL 16 inputs (PNP) CRT1-ID16SL-1 16 outputs (NPN) CRT1-OD16SL 16 outputs (PNP) CRT1-OD16SL-1 Features • Equipped with screw-less clamp terminals. • Expansion Units cannot be added. 8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16SL (NPN) 8 inputs/8 outputs CRT1-MD16SL-1 (PNP) 23 Section 1-2 Slave Unit Models Analog I/O Slave Units Terminal Block with Screws Type Analog I/O Slave Units with 2-tier Terminal Block Appearance A/D MS NS WO NO RD DE AD R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 2 ON T INPU GE 0,1 RAN T CH INPU GE 3 2,3 RAN 4 CH 5 6 I/O capacity 4 inputs Model CRT1-AD04 2 outputs CRT1-DA02 I/O capacity 4 inputs Model CRT1-VAD04S 2 outputs CRT1-VDA02S 4 inputs CRT1-VAD04ML 2 outputs CRT1-VDA02ML X1 X10 63] [0- 04 AD T1- AL CR MIN N TER RO G ALO OM AN Features I/O range: 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, −10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA Units with Connectors Type Analog I/O Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Analog I/O Slave Units with MIL Connectors 24 Appearance Features I/O range: 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V, 0 to 10 V, −10 to 10 V, 0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA Section 1-2 Slave Unit Models Temperature Input Units Type Temperature Input Units with 2-tier Terminal Block Appearance A/D MS NS WO NO RD DE AD R 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 SW1 2 ON T INPU GE 0,1 RAN T CH INPU GE 3 2,3 RAN 4 CH 5 I/O capacity 4 inputs Model CRT1-TS04T 6 X1 X10 63] [0- 04 AD T1- AL CR MIN N TER RO G ALO OM AN CRT1-TS04P Features Thermocouple input (Switchable between R, S, K, J, T, E, B, N, L, U, W, and PL2.) Platinum resistance thermometer input (PT100 only) Expansion Units Type Expansion Units with 2-tier Terminal Block Appearance I/O capacity 8 inputs (NPN) 8 inputs (PNP) 8 outputs (NPN) 8 outputs (PNP) 16 inputs (NPN) 16 inputs (PNP) 16 outputs (NPN) 16 outputs (PNP) Model XWT-ID08 XWT-ID08-1 XWT-OD08 XWT-OD08-1 XWT-ID16 XWT-ID16-1 XWT-OD16 XWT-OD16-1 Features • Expansion Units are used to add points to Digital. I/O Slave Units with 2-tier terminal blocks and 16 points. • One Expansion Unit can be added to one Slave Unit. 25 Section 1-2 Slave Unit Models 1-2-2 Bit Slave Units Slaves with Connectors Type Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Appearance I/O capacity 2 inputs (NPN) Model CRT1B-ID02S 2 inputs (PNP) CRT1B-ID02S-1 2 outputs (NPN) CRT1B-OD02S 2 outputs (PNP) CRT1B-OD02S-1 2 inputs (NPN) 2 inputs (PNP) 2 outputs (NPN) 2 outputs (PNP) CRT1B-ID02SP CRT1B-ID02SP-1 CRT1B-OD02SP CRT1B-OD02SP1 CRT1B-ID04SP CRT1B-ID04SP-1 CRT1B-ID02JS CRT1B-ID02JS-1 4 inputs (NPN) 4 inputs (PNP) 2 inputs (NPN) 2 inputs (PNP) Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors 2 outputs (NPN) 2 outputs (PNP) 1 input/1output (NPN) 1 input/1output (PNP) 4 inputs (NPN) 4 inputs (PNP) 4 outputs (NPN) 4 outputs (PNP) 2 inputs/2 outputs (NPN) 2 inputs/2 outputs (PNP) Features • Standard Flat Cable connected as standard feature. • Sheathed Flat Cable connected as standard feature. • IP54 dust-tight and splash-proof • Compact, space-saving design • Internal hook communications connectors CRT1B-OD02JS • Network power supply CRT1B-OD02JS-1 • Multidrop connections are supCRT1B-MD02JS ported for DCN4 Flat Cable I (sold separately). CRT1B-MD02JS-1 CRT1B-ID04JS CRT1B-ID04JS-1 CRT1B-OD04JS CRT1B-OD04JS-1 CRT1B-MD04JS CRT1B-MD04JS-1 Slaves with Clamp Terminal Blocks Type Bit Slave Units with Screw-less Clamp Terminal Blocks Appearance Note 26 I/O capacity 2 inputs/2 outputs (NPN) 2 inputs/2 outputs (PNP) Model Features CRT1B-MD04SLP • Sheathed Flat Cable connected as standard feature. • IP54 dust-tight and splash-proof CRT1BMD04SLP-1 Bit Slave Unit models with a Standard or Sheathed Flat Cable included do not support a baud rate of 4 Mbps. (Branching is not possible.) Section 1-2 Slave Unit Models 1-2-3 Repeater Units Appearance T RP S MS RT2 PO X1 1 RT PO 0 3] X1 -6 LY [0 01 SUPP R N RT ER AD T PR DE RO 1-P K POW NO OM S CR 1-2-4 OR TW NE 24V DC PUT IN Specification Two communications connectors (Upstream port and downstream port) One downstream port power supply connector Up to 64 Units can be connected for each Master Unit. Model CRS1-RPT01 Features • For trunk line-branch line formations, sub-trunk lines can be connected under a Repeater Unit just like they can be under the Master Unit. • For unrestricted branching formations, there are no restrictions on the connections. • Repeater Units enable branching the trunk line, adding more nodes, increasing the connection distance, and changing the type of cable upstream and downstream of the Repeater Unit. Slave Unit Installation and Connection Installing Slave Units Refer to the following table for the installation and wiring methods for the Slave Units. Slave Unit Installation and Wiring Methods Name Digital With 2-tier TerI/O minal Block Slave Units With 3-tier Terminal Block Model CRT1-ID08(-1) CRT1-OD08(-1) CRT1-ID16(-1) Slave Unit I/O connection installation method DIN Track Terminal block with M3 screws Internal power External power An external I/O Supplied along with communica- power supply is required for contions power nected devices. CRT1-OD16(-1) CRT1-MD16(-1) CRT1-ROS08 CRT1-ROF08 CRT1-ROS16 CRT1-ROF16 CRT1-ID08TA(-1) CRT1-OD08TA(-1) CRT1-ID08TAH(-1) CRT1-OD08TAH(-1) CRT1-ID16TA(-1) CRT1-OD16TA(-1) CRT1-MD16TA(-1) CRT1-ID16TAH(-1) CRT1-OD16TAH(-1) CRT1-MD16TAH(-1) 27 Section 1-2 Slave Unit Models Name Digital With e-CON I/O Connectors Slave Units Model CRT1-VID08S(-1) DIN Track or Mounting Bracket CRT1-VOD08S(-1) CRT1-ID16S(-1) CRT1-OD16S(-1) CRT1-MD16S(-1) CRT1-ID16SH(-1) CRT1-OD16SH(-1) CRT1-MD16SH(-1) CRT1-ID32S(-1) CRT1-OD32S(-1) CRT1-MD32S(-1) CRT1-ID32SH(-1) CRT1-OD32SH(-1) CRT1-MD32SH(-1) 28 Slave Unit I/O connection installation method DIN Track e-CON connectors Internal power External power Shared with comSupplied along with communica- munications power supply. (See note.) tions power I/O power must be supplied externally for connected devices. Shared with communications power supply. (See note.) I/O power must be supplied externally for connected devices. Shared with communications power supply only for inputs. (See note.) Shared with communications power supply. (See note.) I/O power must be supplied externally for connected devices. Shared with communications power supply only for inputs. (See note.) Shared with communications power supply. (See note.) I/O power must be supplied externally for connected devices. Shared with communications power supply only for inputs. (See note.) Shared with communications power supply. (See note.) I/O power must be supplied externally for connected devices. Shared with communications power supply only for inputs. (See note.) Section 1-2 Slave Unit Models Name Model Digital With MIL ConI/O nectors Slave Units CRT1-VID16ML(-1) CRT1-VOD16ML(-1) CRT1-VID32ML(-1) CRT1-VOD32ML(-1) CRT1-VMD32ML(-1) With Screw-less CRT1-ID08SL(-1) Clamp Terminal CRT1-OD08SL(-1) Blocks CRT1-ID16SL(-1) CRT1-OD16SL(-1) CRT1-MD16SL(-1) AnaWith 2-tier CRT1-AD04 log I/O Terminal Block CRT1-DA02 Slave With e-CON CRT1-VAD04S Units Connectors CRT1-VDA02S With MIL CRT1-VAD04ML Connectors CRT1-VDA02ML Temperature Input Units CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P Digital I/O Slave Units XWT-ID08(-1) Expansion Units XWT-OD08(-1) XWT-ID16(-1) XWT-OD16(-1) CRT1B-ID02S(-1) With Bit Slave e-CON CRT1B-OD02S(-1) Units ConnecIP54 CRT1B-ID02SP(-1) tors CRT1B-OD02SP(-1) CRT1B-ID04SP(-1) With IP54 CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1) Screwless Clamp Terminal Blocks With Compact CRT1B-ID02JS(-1) Connectors CRT1B-OD02JS(-1) CRT1B-ID04JS(-1) CRT1B-OD04JS(-1) CRT1B-MD02JS(-1) CRT1B-MD04JS(-1) Repeater Units CRS1-RPT01 Note Slave Unit I/O connection installation method DIN Track or Mounting Bracket MIL connectors DIN Track Screw-less clamp terminal block Terminal block with M3 screws Internal power External power I/O power must be Supplied along with communica- supplied externally for connected tions power devices. --- e-CON DIN Track or Mounting connectors Bracket MIL connectors DIN Track Terminal block with M3 screws Refer to the following section. M4 screw installation e-CON connectors Supplied along with communications power (See note.) Screw-less clamp terminal block M4 screen mounting using CRT1BATT03 Mounting Bracket Compact connectors DIN Track or M4 screw installation --- Communications power for the downstream line must be supplied from the communications power supply connector. For Bit Slave Units, the external I/O (sensor and actuator) power is also provided through the Flat Cable from the communications power supply connected to the Master Unit or the Repeater Unit. When calculating the output current of the communications power supply, always include the external I/O current consumption for Bit Slave Units. 29 Section 1-2 Slave Unit Models Supplying I/O Power to Expansion Units Supply I/O power to Expansion Slave Units according to the following table. Combination I/O power supply to Expansion Slave Unit Digital Input Slave Unit with Expansion Input Unit Not required (The Expansion Unit uses the same I/O power Example: CRT1-ID16 + XWT-ID16 (or XWT-ID08) supply as the Digital I/O Slave Unit.) Digital Input Slave Unit with Expansion Output Unit Required (I/O power must be Example: CRT1-ID16 + XWT-OD16 (or XWT-OD08) supplied to both Units.) Digital Output Slave Unit with Expansion Input Unit Required (I/O power must be Example: CRT1-OD16 + XWT-ID16 (or XWT-ID08) supplied to both Units.) Digital Output Slave Unit with Expansion Output Required (I/O power must be Unit supplied to both Units.) Example: CRT1-OD16 + XWT-OD16 (or XWTOD08) Devices for Connection to CompoNet Communications Refer to the following for information on cables and connectors for connection to CompoNet communications. • 2-3-1 Cables That Can Be Used • 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors • 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor 30 SECTION 2 Wiring Configurations This section describes the configurations of CompoNet Networks. 2-1 CompoNet Networks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 2-1-1 Overall System Configuration and Elements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32 2-1-2 Segments. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 2-2 Wiring Formations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 2-3 Communications Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 2-3-1 Cables That Can Be Used . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37 2-3-2 Criteria for Selecting Cables. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38 2-3-3 Maximum Distance and Number of Connected Units for Types of Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40 Communications Cable Wiring Examples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 2-4-1 Round Cable I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 2-4-2 Round Cable II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43 2-4-3 Flat Cable I/II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 2-4 31 Section 2-1 CompoNet Networks 2-1 2-1-1 CompoNet Networks Overall System Configuration and Elements A CompoNet Network is a remote I/O system that consists of the following elements. System Configuration Example : Repeater Unit CompoNet Master Unit : Terminating Resistor : T-branch Branch line : Multidrop Slave Unit Trunk line Sub-trunk line Repeater Unit Terminating Resistor Branch line Repeater Unit Repeater Unit Branch line Slave Unit Repeater Unit Terminating Resistor Sub-trunk line Terminating Resistor Branch line Sub-trunk line Branch line Terminating Resistor Sub-trunk line Sub-trunk line Repeater Unit Branch line Terminating Resistor Branch line Sub-branch lines Terminating Resistor Multidrop connection on branch line Communications Cables CompoNet Networks use round cable I, round cable II, Flat Cable I (DCA44F10 Standard Flat Cable), and Flat Cable II (DCA5-4F10 Sheathed Flat Cable) for Communications Cables. Master Unit The Master Unit manages the CompoNet Network and transfers I/O data between the PLC and the Slave Units. There is only one Master Unit per network. The Master Unit must be connected to the trunk line. 32 Section 2-1 CompoNet Networks Slave Units Some Slave Units receive output data from the Master Unit across the CompoNet Network and output it. Other Slave Units send data that has been input across the network to the Master Unit. There are two types of Slave Unit according to the I/O capacity of the Slave Unit. • Word Slave Units: A Word Slave Unit is allocated 16 bits (i.e., 16 I/O points) in the I/O memory of the CPU Unit. • Bit Slave Units: A Bit Slave Unit is allocated 2 bits (i.e., 2 I/O points) in the I/O memory of the CPU Unit. Repeater Unit Using Repeater Units enables expanding network connections as follows: • Extending the Communications Cable • Increasing the number of nodes (Units) • Creating long-distance T-branches from the trunk line and sub-trunk lines (See note.) • Converting between different types of cable (round cable I, round cable II, Flat Cable I, and Flat Cable II) A sub-trunk line downstream from a Repeater Unit can be connected with the same communications specifications (i.e., distances and number of Slave Units) as the trunk line. Up to 64 Repeater Units can be connected per network (i.e., per Master Unit). When Repeater Units are connected in series from the Master Unit, up to two layers can be created. Note Terminating Resistors With a CompoNet Network, the Master Unit is located at one end of the trunk line and a Terminating Resistor is connected to the other end of the trunk line. If Repeater Units are used, each Repeater Unit is treated like a Master Unit, i.e., Terminating Resistor is connected to the most remote end of the subtrunk line downstream from the Repeater Unit. Note Trunk Lines and Branch Lines The physical layer is not connected across a Repeater Unit. The connection is thus different from a branch connection, which branches the same physical layer. A Terminating Resistor reduces signal bouncing to stabilize communications and must always be connected to the most remote end of the network lines below the Master Unit and each Repeater Unit. Always connect a Terminating Resistor to ensure the quality of the transmission path. The trunk lines and branch lines in a CompoNet Network are defined as follows: • Trunk line: The transmission path between the Master Unit and the Terminating Resistor. • Sub-trunk line: The transmission path between the Repeater Unit and the Terminating Resistor (when a Repeater Unit is used) • Branch line: The transmission path created using a T-branch from the trunk line or sub-trunk line. • Sub-branch line: The transmission path created using a T-branch from a branch line. (T-branching is not possible from sub-branch lines.) Note Branches Due to differences in functionality, the same type of cable must be used between the trunk line and a branch line, a sub-trunk line and a branch line, and a branch line and a sub-branch line. Different types of cable can be used between the trunk line and a sub-trunk line. There are two ways to create branch lines. 33 Section 2-1 CompoNet Networks 1) T-branch Connections • T-branch connections using Flat Connectors (when Flat Cable I or Flat Cable II is used) • T-branch connections using commercially available relay terminals (when round cable I or round cable II is used) 2) Multidrop Connections • Multidrop connections using Flat Connectors and Multidrop Connectors (when Flat Cable I or Flat Cable II is used) • Multidrop connections using Open Type Connectors (when round cable I or round cable II is used) Note Communications Power Supply Flat Connectors can also be used to extend the Communications Cable. This is the power supply for communications and internal operations for each Unit. A commercially available 24-VDC power supply is used for communications and internal operations in each Unit. One communications power supply can be connected for a trunk line or a subtrunk line. Communications power is supplied to the trunk line from the Master Unit and to a sub-trunk line from the Repeater Unit. One power supply cannot be used to supply communications power to more than one line (i.e., to the trunk line and sub-trunk line or to two sub-trunk lines). I/O Power Supply 2-1-2 A commercially available 24-VDC power supply is used to power the I/O operations of the external I/O device connected to a Unit. It is connected to the I/O power supply terminal of the Unit. Segments Segment Layers When Repeater Units are used, the CompoNet Network is divided into segments by the Repeater Units. Each segment is connected to the network, but is isolated electrically. Three layers of these isolated segments can be configured, called segments 1, 2, and 3, counted in order from the Master Unit. Repeater Units can be used to add a maximum of two extra segment layers. Therefore, up to two extra segment layers can be created from the Master Unit using Repeater Units. Accordingly, you can expand the length of one trunk line and one branch line to up to 1,500 m (500 m × 3, 93.75 kbps). Including Repeater Units connected using multidrop connections, a maximum of 64 Repeater Units can be connected in a single network (i.e., to a single Master Unit). 34 Section 2-2 Wiring Formations : Repeater Unit Master Unit : Terminating Resistor : T-branch Branch line Slave Unit : Multidrop Segment 2 Trunk line Sub-trunk line Repeater Unit Segment 1 Terminating Resistor Branch line Repeater Unit Repeater Unit Slave Unit Segment 3 Terminating Resistor Sub-trunk line Branch line Branch line Repeater Unit Sub-trunk line Terminating Resistor Segment 3 Branch line Terminating Resistor Segment 3 Sub-trunk line Segment 2 Sub-trunk line Repeater Unit Terminating Resistor Branch line Branch line Sub-trunk line Terminating Resistor Multidrop Number of Units Per Segment 2-2 A maximum of 32 Slave Units and Repeater Units can be connected in one segment. Wiring Formations There are two possible wiring formations for a CompoNet Network. Trunk Line-Branch Line Formation With this wiring formation, the trunk line is differentiated from branch lines and there are restrictions on the number of branches and the number of connections. Master Unit Trunk line Terminating Resistor Branch line Slave Unit Branch line Slave Unit Branch line Slave Unit 35 Section 2-2 Wiring Formations Unrestricted Wiring Formation With this wiring formation, there is no distinction between the trunk line and branch lines. Wiring can be performed without restrictions as long as the total cable length per segment is no longer than 200 m. There is also no limit in the number of branches. Master Unit Segment range Terminating Resistor Segment range Repeater Unit Slave Unit Slave Unit Slave Unit Terminating Resistor Slave Unit Slave Unit Relation between Baud Rate and Communications Cable The Cables that can be used and the required baud rates are automatically determined by whether a trunk line-branch line formation or an unrestricted wiring formation is used. Cable type Round cable I Round cable II Flat Cable I Flat Cable II Note Baud rate 4 Mbps 3 Mbps 1.5 Mbps Trunk line Trunk line Trunk line branch line wir- branch line wir- branch line wiring formation ing formation ing formation (See note 1.) --- (See note 2.) 93.75 kbps Trunk line branch line wiring formation Unrestricted wiring formations (1) If a baud rate of 4 Mbps is used, branching is not possible from the trunk line. (Only multidrop connections are possible.) (2) If a baud rate of 4 Mbps is used, branching and multidrop connections are not possible from the trunk line. (There are no Multidrop Connectors for Flat Cable II.) The following table shows the conditions and restrictions for each formation. Item Master Unit location Maximum number of Slave Units connected to any one branch line Terminating Resistor location 36 Wiring formation Trunk line-branch line formation Unrestricted wiring formation End of network Anywhere in network (not necessarily at the end) 1 or 3 depending on the cable type and No restrictions baud rate On the opposite ends of the trunk line and On the most remote ends from the Master all sub-trunk lines from the Master Unit and Unit and each Repeater Unit each Repeater Unit Section 2-3 Communications Cable 2-3 2-3-1 Communications Cable Cables That Can Be Used The following four types of cable can be used in a CompoNet network. Round cable I Check with the manufacturer for applicable CompoNet products. Use commercially available VCTF cable with two 0.75-mm2 conductors (JIS C3306) that meet CompoNet specifications. Blue or black: BDL Round cable II White: BDH Check with the manufacturer for applicable CompoNet products. Use commercially available VCTF cable with four 0.75-mm2 conductors (JIS C3306) that meet CompoNet specifications. Red: BS+ White: BDH Green or Blue: BDL Black: BS− Flat Cable I (DCA4-4F10 Standard Flat Cable) Red: BS+ White: BDH Blue: BDL Black: BS− Conductor No. Insulation color 1 Red 2 White 3 4 Blue Black Application Nominal cross-section BS+ (communications power 0.75 mm2 supply positive side) BDH (signal high) 0.5 mm2 BDL (signal low) BS− (communications power supply negative side) 0.5 mm2 0.75 mm2 Allowable current (A) 5 max. ----5 max. CompoNet-compatible products other than DCA4-4F10 can be used. Confirm applicability with the manufacturer. 37 Section 2-3 Communications Cable Flat Cable II (DCA5-4F10 Sheathed Flat Cable) Red: BS+ White: BDH Blue: BDL Black: BS− Conductor No. Insulation color 1 Red 2 White 3 4 Blue Black Application Nominal cross-section BS+ (communications power 0.75 mm2 supply positive side) BDH (signal high) 0.5 mm2 BDL (signal low) BS− (communications power supply negative side) mm2 0.5 0.75 mm2 Allowable current (A) 5 max. ----5 max. CompoNet-compatible products other than DCA5-4F10 can be used. Confirm applicability with the manufacturer. Note (3) The characteristics of each conductor in Flat Cable I and Flat Cable II have been adjusted to the application. Check the line insulator colors and use each line only for the application given in the above table. (4) For information on applicable CompoNet products and manufacturers, refer to the ODVA home page. http://www.odva.org/ 2-3-2 Criteria for Selecting Cables Selecting Cable Types Item Application Slave Unit connections 38 Word Slave Units Bit Slave Units (com- IP54 Bit munications Slave section Flat Units Cable standard connection) Bit Slave Unit (communications section connector) Select the cable type using the following items as conditions. Cable type Round cable I Round cable II Flat Cable I Flat Cable II • When using com- • When using com- • To supply commu- • To supply communications power to nications power to mercially available mercially available all Slave Units with all Slave Units with cable is desirable. cable is desirable. the communicathe communica• To provide commu- • To supply commutions cable. tions cable. nications power to nications power • Applications in all Slave Units with separately. environments that the communicarequired IP54 comtions cable. pliance (drip-proof, splash-proof). Supported. Supported. (See note 2.) Not supported. (See Not supported. (See Supported. Not supported. note 1.) note 1.) Not supported. Supported. Supported. Supported. (See note 2.) Section 2-3 Communications Cable Item Wiring method for communications power supply Master Unit location Note Cable type Round cable II Flat Cable I Flat Cable II Supplied via Communications Cable. (Power is supplied from the Master Unit and Repeater Units.) Round cable I Wired separately from the Communications Cable. End of trunk line Baud rate other than 93.75 kbps: End of trunk line 93.75 kbps: Anywhere in network (1) Bit Slave that come with a flat cable already connected cannot be connected if the preconnected cable is removed. (2) If a baud rate of 4 Mbps is used, branching and multidrop connections are not possible from the trunk line. (There are no Multidrop Connectors for Flat Cable II.) Using Different Cable Types The same type of cable must be used for all lines downstream from the Master Unit (i.e., the trunk line and branch lines, sub-trunk lines and their branch lines, and branch lines and sub-branch lines must use the same type of cable). When Repeater Units are used, however, different cables can be used for the trunk line and sub-trunk lines, and for sub-trunk lines and sub-trunk lines, above and below a Repeater Unit. Master Unit The same type of cable must be used. Cable (trunk line) Different types of cable can be used. Repeater Unit Cable (sub-trunk line) Slave Unit Note The same type of cable must be used. Slave Unit Round cable I, round cable II, Flat Cable I (Standard) and Flat Cable II (Sheathed) are treated as different types of cable. Restrictions in Distance between Cables of Multiple CompoNet Systems When using more than one CompoNet System with Flat Cable I or II, operation may be unstable due to interference. To prevent this, the Flat Cables for the different CompoNet Systems must be separated from each other by at least 5 mm. 39 Section 2-3 Communications Cable 2-3-3 Maximum Distance and Number of Connected Units for Types of Communications Cables The maximum cable lengths for each segment are shown below, along with the maximum number of Slave Units that can be connected. Do not exceed these limits. Master Unit Sub-trunk line length Terminating Resistor Branch line length Sub-trunk line length Sub-trunk line length Branch line length Branch line length Sub-trunk line length Sub-trunk line length Slave Units Sub-branch line length Sub-trunk line length Branch line length Branch line length Branch line length Repeater Unit Branch line length Trunk line length Baud Rate of 4 Mbps (No Branching, See note.) Item Length per trunk line or sub-trunk line Branch line length Total branch line length Restrictions on branch line locations Round cable I/II Flat Cable I 30 m (90 m) 30 m (90 m) Lines cannot be branched from the trunk line. (Only multidrop connections are possible from the trunk line or subtrunk lines.) Number of Slave Units (including Repeater 32 32 Units) Note Bit Slave Units come with Flat Cable and cannot be connected. Also, there is no applicable connector for multidrop connections for Flat Cable II, and therefore multidrop connection cannot be made. Baud Rate of 3 Mbps Item Length per trunk line or sub-trunk line Branch line length Total branch line length Restrictions on branch line locations Number of Units per branch (See note 1.) Maximum sub-branch line length Total sub-branch line length Number of Slave Units (including Repeater Units) 40 Round cable I/II 30 m (90 m) 0.5 m 8m 3/m 1 Not supported. Not supported. 32 Flat Cable I/II 30 m (90 m) 0.5 m 8m 3/m 1 Not supported. Not supported. 32 Section 2-3 Communications Cable Baud Rate of 1.5 Mbps Item Round cable I Without With branch- branching ing Length per trunk line or sub-trunk line 100 m 30 m (300m) (90m) Branch line length Not sup- 2.5 m ported. (See note 2.) Total branch line length Not sup- 25 m ported. (See note 2.) Restrictions on branch line locations --3/m Number of Units per branch (See note 1.) 3 Maximum sub-branch line length Not supported. Total sub-branch line length Not supported. Number of Slave Units (including Repeater 32 32 Units) Note Round cable II Flat Cable I/II 30 m (90 m) 2.5 m 25 m 3/m 3 0.1 m (See note 3.) 2 m (See note 3.) 32 (1) The number of Units per branch is the maximum number of Slave Units or Repeater Units that can be connected to one branch using multidrop or T-branch connections (sub-branch lines). (2) Lines cannot be branched from the trunk line. (Only multidrop connections are possible from the trunk line or sub-trunk lines.) (3) Sub-branch lines can be branched from branch lines. Baud Rate of 93.75 kbps Item Length per trunk line or sub-trunk line Branch line length Total branch line length Restrictions on branch line locations Number of Units per branch (See note.) Maximum sub-branch line length Total sub-branch line length Number of Slave Units (including Repeater Units) Note Round cable I 500 m 6m 120 m 3/m 1 ----32 Round cable II Flat Cable I/II Unrestricted wiring is enabled for a total length of 200 m. 32 The number of Units per branch is the maximum number of Slave Units or Repeater Units that can be connected to one branch using multidrop or Tbranch connections (sub-branch lines). 41 Section 2-4 Communications Cable Wiring Examples 2-4 Communications Cable Wiring Examples The following wiring is required in a CompoNet Network. • Two communications signal lines (communications data): BDH (communications data high) and BDL (communications data low) • Two communications power supply lines (power for communications and internal Slave Unit circuits): BS+ (communications power supply plus side) and BS− (communications power supply minus side) The wiring method depends on the type of cable that is used. 2-4-1 Round Cable I • Connect the two communications signal lines in parallel between the Master Unit or Repeater Unit and multiple Slave Units. • Use Open Type Connectors (DCN4-TB4, for connecting Units) to connect Communications Cables to Master Units, Repeater Units, and Slave Units. • To supply the communications power (24 VDC), connect the two communications power supply lines to each Slave Unit separately from the Communications Cables. • Power is not supplied to the Master Unit or Repeater Units. • A Terminating Resistor (DRS1-T) must be connected at the end of the network. Master Unit or Repeater Unit Terminating Resistor (121 Ω) Relay terminal block BS+ BDH Two communications signal lines BDL BS− Communications Communications Communications Open Connector Slave Unit BS+ BS− BDH BDL Slave Unit BS+ BS− BDH BDL Slave Unit BS+ BS− BDH BDL Open Connector 24-VDC communications power supply 24-VDC communications power supply 24-VDC communications power supply Slave Units can also be connected in parallel using multidrop connections. 42 Section 2-4 Communications Cable Wiring Examples Master Unit or Repeater Unit Terminating Resistor (121 Ω) BS+ BDH BDL BS− Communications Open Connector Communications Communications Slave Unit BS+ BS− Slave Unit Slave Unit BS+ BS− BS+ BS− BDH BDL BDH BDL BDH BDL 24-VDC communications power supply 24-VDC communications power supply 24-VDC communications power supply Open Connector 2-4-2 Round Cable II • Connect the two communications signal lines and two communications power lines in parallel between the Master Unit or Repeater Unit and multiple Slave Units. • Use Open Type Connectors (DCN4-TB4, for connecting Units) to connect Communications Cables to Master Units, Repeater Units, and Slave Units. • Connect the communications power supply (24 VDC) to the communications power supply connector for the Master Unit or Repeater Unit. • Connect DCN4-TM4 Terminating Resistors and DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Sockets at the ends of the network. 43 Section 2-4 Communications Cable Wiring Examples Master Unit or Repeater Unit Communications power supply connector 24-VDC communications power supply Communications power Relay terminal block Two communications power lines Two communications signal lines Terminating Resistor (121 Ω) BS+ BDH BDL BS- Open Connector Slave Unit BS+ BDH BDL BS- Slave Unit BS+ BDH BDL BS- Slave Unit BS+ BDH BDL BS- Open Connector Slave Units can also be connected in parallel using multidrop connections. Master Unit or Repeater Unit Communications power Terminating Resistor (121 Ω) BS+ BDH BDL Two communications signal lines BS- Two communications power lines Open Connector BS+ BDH BDL BS- Slave Unit Open Connector 44 BS+ BDH BDL BS- Slave Unit BS+ BDH BDL BS- Slave Unit Section 2-4 Communications Cable Wiring Examples 2-4-3 Flat Cable I/II • The two communications signal lines and the two communications power supply lines are connected to the Master Unit, Repeater Units, and Slave Units using Flat Cable. • Connect the communications power supply (24 VDC) to the communications power supply connector for the Master Unit or Repeater Unit. • A Terminating Resistor (DCN4-TM4 or DCN5-TM4) must be connected at the end of the network. Master Unit or Repeater Unit Communications Communications power supply power supply, connector 24 VDC Flat Cable • Communications signal lines: BS+ (red) and BS− (black) • Communications power supply lines: BDH (white) and BDL (blue) Communications power Terminating Resistor (121 Ω) Communications connector Slave Unit Slave Unit Slave Units can also be connected in parallel by using multidrop connections. A DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector is required for this. (Only Flat Cable I can be used.) Master Unit or Repeater Unit Communications power supply connector Communications power Communications power supply, 24 VDC Flat Cable I Terminating Resistor (121 Ω) Flat Connector Plug Multidrop Connector Communications connector Slave Unit Slave Unit 45 Section 2-4 Communications Cable Wiring Examples DCN4-MR4 Flat Multidrop Connectors are used for multidrop connections for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors. (Only Flat Cable I can be used.) Side of Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Master Unit or Repeater Unit Communications power supply connector Communications power supply, 24 VDC Back side of Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Communications power Flat Multidrop Connectors Terminating Resistor (121 Ω) Communications connector Flat Multidrop Connectors 46 Flat Cable I SECTION 3 Installation and Wiring This section describes how to install and wire a CompoNet Network. 3-1 3-2 3-3 3-4 3-5 3-6 Installing Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3-1-1 Installation Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48 3-1-2 Installation Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 3-1-3 Mounting to a DIN Track . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 3-1-4 Mounting with a Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 3-1-5 Mounting with Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54 3-1-6 Screw Mounting with a Mounting Bracket. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55 Connecting Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 3-2-1 Round Cable I/II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 3-2-2 Flat Cable I/II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 Preparing Flat Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58 3-3-1 Round Cable II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 3-3-2 Flat Cable I . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62 3-3-3 Flat Cable II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73 3-4-1 Connecting Communications Cable to Slave Units and Repeater Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74 3-4-2 Branching Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77 3-4-3 Extending Communications Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80 3-4-4 Connection Locations for Terminating Resistor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Power Supply Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 3-5-1 Power Supply Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86 3-5-2 Connection Locations for Communications Power Supplies . . . . . . 87 3-5-3 Connecting the I/O Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89 3-5-4 Connecting the Communications and I/O Power Supplies. . . . . . . . 91 3-5-5 Precautions when Supplying Communications Power . . . . . . . . . . . 96 3-5-6 Precautions when Providing the I/O Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98 3-5-7 Other Precautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100 3-6-1 Connecting to a Screw Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101 3-6-2 Connecting to e-CON Connector Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102 3-6-3 Connecting to MIL Connector Terminals. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 105 3-6-4 Connecting to Screw-less Clamp Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111 3-6-5 Connecting External I/O to IP54 Bit Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 3-6-6 Connecting to Compact Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 47 Section 3-1 Installing Slave Units 3-1 3-1-1 Installing Slave Units Installation Method The installation method for Slave Units and Repeater Units depends on the model. Digital I/O Slave Units Name With 2-tier Terminal Block With 3-tier Terminal Block With e-CON Connectors With MIL Connectors With Screw-less Clamp Terminal Blocks 48 Model CRT1-ID08(-1) CRT1-OD08(-1) Installation method DIN Track CRT1-ID16(-1) CRT1-OD16(-1) CRT1-MD16(-1) CRT1-ROS08 CRT1-ROF08 CRT1-ROS16 CRT1-ROF16 CRT1-ID08TA(-1) CRT1-OD08TA(-1) CRT1-ID08TAH(-1) CRT1-OD08TAH(-1) CRT1-ID16TA(-1) CRT1-OD16TA(-1) CRT1-MD16TA(-1) CRT1-ID16TAH(-1) CRT1-OD16TAH(-1) CRT1-MD16TAH(-1) CRT1-VID08S(-1) CRT1-VOD08S(-1) CRT1-ID16S(-1) CRT1-OD16S(-1) CRT1-MD16S(-1) CRT1-ID16SH(-1) CRT1-OD16SH(-1) CRT1-MD16SH(-1) CRT1-ID32S(-1) CRT1-OD32S(-1) CRT1-MD32S(-1) CRT1-ID32SH(-1) CRT1-OD32SH(-1) CRT1-MD32SH(-1) CRT1-VID16ML(-1) CRT1-VOD16ML(-1) CRT1-VID32ML(-1) CRT1-VOD32ML(-1) CRT1-VMD32ML(-1) CRT1-ID08SL(-1) CRT1-OD08SL(-1) CRT1-ID16SL(-1) CRT1-OD16SL(-1) CRT1-MD16SL(-1) DIN Track or Mounting Bracket DIN Track DIN Track or Mounting Bracket DIN Track Section 3-1 Installing Slave Units Name Analog I/O Slave Units Model With 2-tier Terminal Block With e-CON Connectors With MIL Connectors Temperature Input Units Expansion Units Bit Slave Units With e-CON Connectors IP54 With Screw-less Clamp Termi- IP54 nal Blocks Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors CRT1-AD04 CRT1-DA02 CRT1-VAD04S CRT1-VDA02S CRT1-VAD04ML CRT1-VDA02ML CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P XWT-ID08(-1) XWT-OD08(-1) XWT-ID16(-1) XWT-OD16(-1) CRT1B-ID02S(-1) CRT1B-OD02S(-1) CRT1B-ID02SP(-1) CRT1B-OD02SP(-1) CRT1B-ID04SP(-1) CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1) CRT1B-ID02JS(-1) CRT1B-OD02JS(-1) CRT1B-ID04JS(-1) Installation method DIN Track DIN Track or Mounting Bracket DIN Track Screw installation (M4) M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket CRT1B-OD04JS(-1) CRT1B-MD02JS(-1) CRT1B-MD04JS(-1) CRS1-RPT01 Repeater Unit 3-1-2 DIN Track or screw installation (M4) Installation Orientation There are no restrictions in the orientation unless otherwise specified in the instructions for the Unit. Installation is possible in any of the following six orientations. WORD NODE ADR 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 23 23 901 901 78 67 8 901 901 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT X1 67 8 45 67 8 X10 [0-63] 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 45 OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 WORD NODE ADR X1 4 56 OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 CRT1-OD16 CRT1 OD16-1 X10 [0-63] X1 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 REMOTE TERMINAL 45 45 MS NS 901 23 X10 [0-63] 23 901 23 45 23 WORD NODE ADR CRT1-OD16 CRT1 OD16-1 REMOTE TERMINAL 901 67 8 MS NS 67 8 901 3-1-3 Vertical 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 OUT WORD NODE ADR 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 X1 CRT1-OD16 CRT1 OD16-1 23 4 56 REMOTE TERMINAL 78 X10 [0-63] 78 4 56 CRT1-OD16 CRT1 OD16-1 REMOTE TERMINAL MS NS MS NS Mounting to a DIN Track Materials Required for Installation Name Model 35-mm DIN Track PFP-50N PFP-100N PFP-100N2 End Plate PFP-M Remarks Length: 50 cm Length: 100 cm Length: 100 cm Two End Plates are required for each Slave Unit and each Repeater Unit. 49 Section 3-1 Installing Slave Units Installation Orientation 1,2,3... 1. Hook the slot on the back of the Unit into the top of the DIN Track. Pull down the DIN Track mounting pin and insert the Unit. DIN Track DIN Track mounting pin 2. Hook the bottom of the End Plate on the DIN Track first, and then the top. Attach an End Plate on each side of the Unit, and tighten the screws to secure them. Check to make sure that the Unit is firmly secured. End Plate 3-1-4 Mounting with a Mounting Bracket Slave Units with e-CON connectors (CRT1-V@D08S(-1)/CRT1-VAD04S/ CRT1-VDA02S) or MIL connectors (CRT1-V@D@@ML(-1)/CRT1-VAD04ML/ CRT1-VDA02ML) can be panel-mounted or wall-mounted, either vertically or horizontally, using special Mounting Brackets. Required Brackets Name Mounting Bracket Model CRT1-ATT01 Applicable Slave Unit Units with MIL Connectors CRT1-ATT02 CRT1-V@D16ML(-1) CRT1-VAD04ML CRT1-VDA02ML Units with e-CON Connectors SRT2-ATT02 50 CRT1-V@D08S(-1) CRT1-VAD04S CRT1-VDA02S Units with MIL Connectors CRT1-V@D32ML(-1) Section 3-1 Installing Slave Units Dimensions CRT1-ATT01 13 18.7 Mounting Hole Dimensions 35 16±0.2 Two, 3.2 dia. or M3 (mm) CRT1-ATT02 13 26.7 Mounting Hole Dimensions 35 16±0.2 Two, 3.2 dia. or M3 (mm) SRT2-ATT02 7.3 32.5 Mounting Hole Dimensions Vertical Mounting 16±0.2 35 Two, 3.2 dia. or M3 (mm) Use a Mounting Bracket to vertically mount a Slave Unit to a panel or a wall. Example: Mounting a CRT1-V@D32ML Slave Unit with MIL Connectors Panel surface (wall) Vertical on panel surface (wall) SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket Mounting Procedure 1. Attach the Mounting Bracket to the panel surface (or wall) with two Phillips screws, as shown in the following diagram. For mounting hole dimensions, refer to Dimensions above. 51 Section 3-1 Installing Slave Units 2. Mount the Slave Unit to the Mounting Bracket. The Mounting Bracket is the same shape as a DIN Track, so use the same method as when mounting to a DIN Track. Horizontal Mounting Use a Mounting Bracket to horizontally mount (side mount) a Slave Unit to a panel or a wall. Example: Mounting a CRT1-V@D32ML Slave Unit with MIL Connectors Panel surface (wall) Horizontal (side) mounting to panel surface (or wall) SRT2-ATT02 Mounting Bracket Mounting Procedure 1. Attach the Mounting Bracket to the panel surface (or wall) with two Phillips screws, as shown in the following diagram. For mounting hole dimensions, refer to Dimensions above. 2. Mount the Slave Unit to the Mounting Bracket. The Mounting Bracket is the same shape as a DIN Track, so use the same method as when mounting to a DIN Track. Mounting Dimensions Vertical Mounting to a Wall 52 • Units with e-CON Connectors (CRT1-V@D08S(-1)/CRT1-VAD04S/CRT1VDA02S) Section 3-1 Installing Slave Units 45 45 • Units with MIL Connectors (CRT1-V@D@@ML(-1)/CRT1-VAD04ML/ CRT1-VDA02ML) Mounting Bracket (mm) 6.0 (The Unit shown in the diagram is the CRT1-V@D08S(-1).) 45 35 • Units with MIL Connectors (CRT1-V@D32ML(-1)) Mounting Bracket 3.3 • Units with e-CON Connectors (CRT1-V@D08S(-1)/CRT1-VAD04S/CRT1VDA02S) 45 • Units with MIL Connectors (CRT1-V@D@@ML(-1)/CRT1-VAD04ML/ CRT1-VDA02ML) Mounting Bracket 45 Horizontal Mounting to a Wall (mm) 2.45 (mm) (The Unit shown in the diagram is the CRT1-V@D08S(-1).) 53 Section 3-1 Installing Slave Units 35 • Units with MIL Connectors (CRT1-V@D32ML(-1)) 45 Mounting Bracket 0.1 3-1-5 (mm) Mounting with Screws Refer to the dimensions for the particular Unit and prepare the mounting holes in the panel. Tighten the M4 screws to a torque of 0.9 N·m, and check to be sure that the Unit is securely mounted. Mounting Bit Slave Units Using Screw Brackets The Bit Slave Units (CRT1B-ID02S(-1) and CRT1B-OD02S(-1)) are installed using the enclosed screw bracket along with screw holes in one of the two orientations shown below. Screw brackets Use the following procedure to mount the screw bracket. 1,2,3... 54 1. Insert the screw bracket into the back of the Bit Slave Unit along the guides. Section 3-1 Installing Slave Units Guides Screw bracket 2. Press the screw bracket in until the hooks on the bracket are completely locked into place. Screw bracket hook 3-1-6 Screw Mounting with a Mounting Bracket Slave Units with Compact Connectors (CRT1B-@D02JS(-1) or CRT1B@D04JS(-1)) can be mounted using special Mounting Brackets. Required Brackets Name Mounting Bracket Model CRT1-ATT03 Applicable Slave Unit Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors CRT1B-@D02JS(-1) CRT1B-@D04JS(-1) Dimensions ■ CRT1-ATT03 Mounting Hole Dimensions 38 Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 29.4 37.7 46 21 Two, 4.2 dia. or M4 Perform mounting using either of the two sets of holes. 55 Section 3-1 Installing Slave Units Mounting Dimensions ■ CRT1B-@D02JS(-1) 27.05 20.4 46 24 ■ 15 CRT1B-@D04JS(-1) 6.65 25.4 46 24 20 Mounting Procedure 1,2,3... 1. Mount the Unit using two M4 screws in the mounting holes A or the mounting holes B. Tighten the screws to the following torque. • Tightening torque: 0.9 N·m A B 2. As shown in the following figure, press in on the Unit until the internal hooks of the Mounting Bracket make a clicking sound. After mounting the Unit, be sure to check that the Bit Slave Unit with Compact Connectors is correctly mounted to the Mounting Bracket. 56 Section 3-2 Connecting Cables 3-2 Connecting Cables In a CompoNet Network, Units can be connected and cables can be branched and extended by using Communications Cable and mounting connectors to Units. The methods for connecting Communications Cables and Units and for branching depend on the cable type and branching formation used. The differences are shown in the following table. 3-2-1 Round Cable I/II Slave Unit/Repeater Unit connections Open Type Connector Cable branches T-branch connections Commercially available relay terminal block Branch line or sub-branch line Open Type Connector Relay terminal block Trunk line, sub-trunk line, or branch line Multidrop connections Open Type Connector Trunk line, sub-trunk line, or branch line Open Type Connector Slave/Repeater Unit Open Type Connector Slave/Repeater Unit Note Bits Slave Units with a Flat Cable included cannot use Open Type Connectors. Slave/Repeater Unit 57 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors 3-2-2 Flat Cable I/II Slave Unit/Repeater Unit connections Cable branches T-branch connections Multidrop connections Flat Connector Plug Flat Connector Socket + Flat Connector Multidrop Connector • Word Slave Units, Bit Slave Units with Plug Flat Connector a communications connector, or Trunk line, Multidrop Connectors Socket Trunk line, sub-trunk line, sub-trunk line, Repeater Units or branch line or branch line Branch line or sub-branch line Flat Connector Plug Branch line or sub-branch line Flat Connector Plug (or connector provided with cable) Slave/Repeater Unit Flat Connector Plug Flat Connector Plug Flat Connector Plug Slave/Repeater Unit Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors Slave/Repeater Unit • Bit Slave Unit with Flat Cable Included Multidrop Connector (DCN4-MR4) Flat Connector Plug Flat Cable (included) Trunk line, sub-trunk line, or branch line (Flat Cable) Bit Slave Unit Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors Note If a Sheathed Flat Cable II is used, multidrop connections using multidrop connectors cannot be used. Note Bit Slave Units are available with a Flat Cable included as a standard feature. Cable Extension Flat Connector Socket + Flat Connector Plug Flat Connector Socket Flat Connector Socket Trunk line and sub-trunk line Trunk line and sub-trunk line Flat Connector Plug 3-3 Flat Connector Plug Preparing Flat Connectors To connect a Terminating Resistor to round cable II, to connect Flat Cable I or II to Units and to branch or extend the wiring, Flat Connectors must be prepared and attached to the cables. Note (1) Flat Connectors cannot be reused once they have been attached. Perform the procedure with care. (2) Always hold on to the Flat Connector when connecting or disconnecting it. (3) When connecting a Flat Connector, press it all the way in and then pull on it to be sure it is locked into place. 58 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors Connectors Used Name Flat Connector I Socket Appearance Model DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector I Plug DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector II Socket DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector II Plug DCN5-BR4 Flat Multidrop Connector Plug DCN4-MR4 Application Used as a set with the DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug in the following applications: • Extending the trunk line or sub-trunk lines. • T-branching branch lines from the trunk line or sub-trunk lines. • T-branching sub-branch lines from a branch line. Used independently when connecting a DCN4TM4 Terminating Resistor to the end of the trunk line or a sub-trunk line. Used as a set with the DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Socket in the following applications: • Extending the trunk line or sub-trunk lines. • T-branching branch lines from the trunk line or sub-trunk lines. • T-branching sub-branch lines from a branch line. Used independently in the following applications: • Connecting Communications Cable to a Unit. • Connecting Communications Cable to a DCN4MD4 Multidrop Connector (when a multidrop connection is used). Used as a set with the DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug in the following applications: • Extending the trunk line or sub-trunk lines. • T-branching branch lines from the trunk line or sub-trunk lines. • T-branching sub-branch lines from a branch line. Used independently when connecting a DCN5TM4 Terminating Resistor to the end of the trunk line or a sub-trunk line. Used as a set with the DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector Socket in the following applications: • Extending the trunk line or sub-trunk lines • T-branching branch lines from the trunk line or sub-trunk lines • T-branching sub-branch lines from a branch line Used independently to connect Communications Cable to a Unit. Used independently in the following application: • Connecting Communications Cable to a Unit in a multidrop connection This connector can be used with the following Units: Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors (CRT1B-@D0@JS(-1)) 59 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors Tools Required Pliers Name Model DWT-A01 Application Crimping tool for DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Socket, DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug, or DCN4MR4 Flat Multidrop Connector Plug. Pliers DWT-A02 Crimping tool for DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector Socket or DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug 3-3-1 Appearance Round Cable II This procedure is only required to connect a Terminating Resistor. Preparing DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Sockets Component Names Cover Housing Cable labels (Black, blue/green, white, and red) Cable confirmation slot Black ■ Preparing the Cable Cut the cable perpendicular to the length, and strip the sheath as shown in the following diagram. Red White Green or blue Black ■ Setting the Cable Stopper Set the Cable Stopper. Close the cover, secure the hooks, and then press down on the cable stopper until it clicks into place. 60 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors Cable stopper ■ Attaching the Cable Confirm that the cable colors match the cable labels, and then insert the cable end all the way to the back of the cover in which the cable stopper has already been set. Location of cable stopper ■ Attaching the Housing Confirm that the cable labels match the cable colors, and then temporarily secure the housing to the cover. Housing Note The housing cannot be removed from the cover once it has been attached. The connector may be damaged if the housing is forcefully removed. ■ Pressure-welding the Connector The connector is pressure-welded using the DWT-A01 Pliers. 61 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors 1,2,3... 1. As shown below, align the center (see arrows) of the connector cover with the center of the pressure-welding block on the Pliers. Pliers Connector cover 2. Squeeze firmly on the Pliers until the lock on the connector clicks into place. Note (1) Do not pressure-weld the connector cover at the edges. (2) Do not pressure-weld the connector cover at the back of the pressurewelding block. (3) Set the connector in the correct orientation. OK NG NG 3. After attaching the cable, confirm that it is properly pressure-welded as shown below. Be sure the connector is locked on both the left and right sides. Be sure there are no gaps here. 3-3-2 Flat Cable I Preparing DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Sockets Component Names Cover Housing Cable labels (Flat cable: black, blue, white, and red) Cable confirmation slot Black 62 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors ■ Cutting the Cable (when Extending Cable or Connecting a Terminating Resistor) Cut the cable perpendicular to the length. To prevent short-circuits, cut the cable with a sharp blade, such as wire cutters, and be sure that there are no whiskers on the wires. ■ Setting the Cable Stopper (when Extending Cable or Connecting a Terminating Resistor) A stopper must be set in advance when extending a line or connecting a Terminating Resistor. Close the cover, secure the hooks, and then press down on the cable stopper until it clicks into place. Cable stopper ■ Attaching the Cable ■ 1,2,3... T-branch Connections 1. Align the cable labels and cable colors and insert the cable into the cover. 63 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors 2. Hold the cable and secure it with the hooks. ■ Line Extensions and Terminating Resistors Insert the cable end all the way into a cover with the cable stopper already set. Location of cable stopper ■ Attaching the Housing Confirm that the cable labels and cable colors match and then temporarily secure the housing to the cover. Housing Note The housing cannot be removed from the cover once it has been attached. The connector may be damaged if the housing is forcefully removed. ■ Pressure-welding the Connector The connector is pressure-welded using the DWT-A01 Pliers. 1,2,3... 1. As shown below, align the center (see arrows) of the connector cover with the center of the pressure-welding block on the Pliers. Pliers Connector cover 2. Squeeze firmly on the Pliers until the lock on the connector clicks into place. 64 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors Note (1) Do not pressure-weld the connector cover at the edges. (2) Do not pressure-weld the connector cover at the back of the pressurewelding block. (3) Set the connector in the correct orientation. OK NG NG 3. After attaching the cable, confirm that it is properly pressure-welded as shown below. Be sure the connector is locked on both the left and right sides. Be sure there are no gaps here. Processing and Mounting Procedure for DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Flat Connector Plug Component Names Black Cable labels (Flat Cable: Black, blue, white, and red) Lock lever ■ Cutting the Cable Cut the cable perpendicular to the length. To prevent short-circuits, cut the cable with a sharp blade, such as wire cutters, and be sure that there are no whiskers on the wires. 65 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors ■ Attaching the Cable Align the cable labels and cable colors and insert the cable. Confirm that the cable is inserted all the way to the back. (The cover is semitransparent.) Insert the cable to this point. ■ Crimping the Connector Crimp the connector using the DWT-A01 Pliers. 1,2,3... 1. As shown in the following figure, align the center (see arrows) of the connector cover with the center of the crimping block on the Pliers. Pliers Connector cover 2. Squeeze firmly on the Pliers until the lock on the connector clicks into place. Note (1) Do not pressure-weld the connector cover at the edges. (2) Do not pressure-weld the connector cover at the back of the pressurewelding block. (3) Set the connector in the correct orientation. OK NG NG NG 3. After attaching the cable, confirm that it is properly pressure-welded as shown below. Be sure there are no gaps here. 66 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors Preparing and Connecting DCN4-MR4 Multidrop Connectors Componet Names Cover Housing Cable labels (Black, blue/green, white, and red) Black ■ Wiring Procedure 1,2,3... 1. Align the line colors of the cable with the cable labels, and place the cable on the Connector. 2. Close the cover until the hooks lock in place. Cable Attached to Connector ■ Attaching the Housing 1,2,3... 1. Confirm the colors again, and temporarily secure the housing to the cover. ■ Pressure-welding the Connector Use the DWT-A01 Pliers to pressure-weld Connector. 1,2,3... 1. As shown in the following figure, set the connector cover so that the center of it (indicated by the arrows) is in the center of the pressure-welding block of the Pliers. 2. Squeeze the Pliers firmly until you hear the connector lock into place. 67 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors Pliers Note 3-3-3 Connector cover After pressure-welding the cable, confirm that it has been pressure-welded correctly. The tabs on the cover of the Housing must be completely locked. Flat Cable II Preparing DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector Sockets Component Names Cover ■ Cutting the Cable Cut the cable perpendicular to the length. To prevent short-circuits, cut the cable with a sharp blade, such as wire cutters, and be sure that there are no whiskers on the wires. ■ Setting the Cable Stopper (when Extending Cable or Connecting a Terminating Resistor) A stopper must be set in advance when extending a line or connecting a Terminating Resistor. Set the cable into the cover and position it so that the cable end strikes the cable stopper. Cable stopper 68 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors ■ Attaching the Cable 1,2,3... 1. As shown in the diagram below, place the cable so that the white line is in the direction of the side with the open cover, with the white line on the cable facing upward. (Top View) Connector Middle of connector Cable White line (Side with cover open) T-branch Connections White line Line Extensions and Terminating Resistor Connections 2. Hold the cable so that it does not move and close the cover. 69 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors Note When extending the cable or connecting it to a Terminating Resistor, make sure that the end of the cable is inserted all the way to the cable stopper so that it will not be pulled out. ■ Pressure-welding the Connector Use the DWT-A02 Pliers to pressure-weld the connector. 1,2,3... 1. Set the connector on the pressure-welding block of the crimping tool. As shown below, align the center (see arrows) of the connector cover with the center of the pressure-welding block on the Pliers. Connector position reference surfaces Pliers Connector cover 2. Squeeze firmly on the Pliers until the lock on the connector clicks into place. 3. After attaching the cable, confirm that it is properly pressure-welded as shown below. Be sure that the connector is locked. Be sure there are no gaps here. Preparing DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plugs Component Names Cover 70 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors ■ Cutting the Cable Cut the cable perpendicular to the length. To prevent short-circuits, cut the cable with a sharp blade, such as wire cutters, and be sure that there are no whiskers on the wires. ■ Attaching the Cable 1,2,3... 1. As shown in the diagram below, place the cable so that the white line is in the direction of the side with the open cover, with the white line on the cable facing upward. White line From the left: red, white, blue, and black (Side with cover open) 2. Hold the cable so that it does not move and close the cover. ■ Pressure-welding the Connector Use the DWT-A02 Pliers to pressure-weld the connector. 1,2,3... 1. As shown below, align the center (see arrows) of the connector cover with the center of the pressure-welding block on the Pliers. Connector position reference surfaces 71 Section 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors Pliers Connector cover 2. Squeeze firmly on the Pliers until the lock on the connector clicks into place. 3. After attaching the cable, confirm that it is properly pressure-welded as shown below. Be sure that the connector is locked. Be sure there are no gaps here. 72 Section 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor This section describes how to connect Flat Cable I/II or round cable I/II to Slave Units, Repeater Units, and Terminating Resistors, and how to extend or branch the cables. Peripheral Devices Used Name Open Type Connector (for connecting Units) Relay terminal block Appearance --- Model DCN4-TB4 Application Converts the Unit's communications connector into a screw terminal block to enable connecting round cable I or round cable II to a Slave Unit or Repeater Unit. Multidrop Connector Commercially available Used for T-branching round cable I or round cable II. DCN4-MD4 Used to connect Slave Units or Repeater Units to trunk lines, sub-trunk lines, or branch lines by using multidrop connections. Terminating Resistor DCN4-TM4 This is a Connector-type Terminating Resistor for Flat Cable I and round cable II. It is connected to a DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Socket at the end of a trunk line or subtrunk line. Terminating Resistor DCN5-TM4 This is a Connector-type Terminating Resistor for Flat Cable II. It is connected to a DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector Socket at the end of a trunk line or subtrunk line. Terminating Resistor DRS1-T This is a Terminal Block-type Terminating Resistor for round cable I. It is connected to the end of a trunk line or sub-trunk line round cable I. Terminating Resistor Specifications Type Model Resistance Rated power Accuracy Capacity between power supply lines DCN4-TM4 121 Ω 1/4 W 1% max. 0.01 µF Connector DCN5-TM4 121 Ω 1/4 W 1% max. 0.01 µF Terminal block DRS1-T 121 Ω 1/4 W ----- 73 Section 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor 3-4-1 Connecting Communications Cable to Slave Units and Repeater Units Connecting Round Cable I/II The DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector is used to convert the communications connector on the Slave Unit or Repeater Unit to a terminal block (M3) for connecting the cable wires. Open Connector M3 terminal block Communications connector Slave Unit/Repeater Unit Installation Method 1,2,3... 1. Attach the Open Type Connector to the communications connector of the Slave Unit or Repeater Unit. Orient the Open Type Connector so that the side with the open terminals is facing to the left and press in the Open Type Connector until it clicks into place. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MS NS WORD NODE ADR 456 X10 [0-63] 456 789 23 01 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT X1 01 23 456 789 01 X10 [0-63] 789 789 456 23 WORD NODE ADR CRT1-OD16CRT1 REMOTE TERM OD16 1 INAL 01 MS NS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 X1 CRT1CRT1 OD16-1 REMOTE TERM OD16 INAL Note To remove the Open Type Connector once it has been attached, firmly press in on the latches on both sides and pull out the Open Type Connector. 2. Open the terminal cover of the Open Type Connector and connect the cable wires to BDH (communications data high) and BDL (communications data low) in the terminal block. For round cable II, connect the cable wires to BS+ (communications power supply plus) and BS- (communications power supply minus). Note Before connecting the cable wires to the terminal block, first attach the M3 crimp terminals shown below to the wires. 6.0 mm max. 74 6.0 mm max. Section 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor Connecting Flat Cable I A DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug attached to a Communications Cable is connected to the communications connector of a Slave Unit or Repeater Unit. Communications connector Flat Connector Plug Slave Unit/Repeater Unit Be sure the face of the Connector on which line colors are indicated (red, white, black, and blue) is facing to the left and press in the Connector until it clicks into place. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MS NS WORD NODE ADR X10 [0-63] 456 789 789 456 X1 23 01 23 23 456 01 X10 [0-63] 789 789 456 CRT1-OD16CRT1 REMOTE TERM OD16 1 INAL 23 WORD NODE ADR 01 MS NS 01 Installation Method 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 X1 CRT1CRT1 OD16-1 REMOTE TERM OD16 INAL Note Connecting Flat Cable II To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in on the latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out. A DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug attached to a Communications Cable is connected to the communications connector of a Slave Unit or Repeater Unit. Communications connector Flat Connector Plug Slave Unit/Repeater Unit Orient the Connector so that the white line on the cable is facing to the left and press in the Connector until it clicks into place. X1 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MS NS WORD NODE ADR 456 X10 [0-63] 456 789 23 01 23 23 456 789 01 X10 [0-63] 789 789 456 23 WORD NODE ADR CRT1CRT1 OD16-1 REMOTE TERM OD16 INAL 01 MS NS 01 Installation Method 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 X1 CRT1CRT1 OD16-1 REMOTE TERM OD16 INAL Note Connecting Flat Cable I for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in on the latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out. Connect a DCN4-MR4 Flat Multidrop Connector to a Flat Cable I cable. For details, refer to Preparing and Connecting DCN4-MR4 Multidrop Connectors on page 67. 75 Section 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor Multidrop Connector Plug cover Use DWT-A01 Pliers to pressure-weld Connector. Multidrop Connector Plug housing ■ Mounting Method Align the Multidrop Connector Plug with the communications connector on the Bit Slave Unit with a Compact Connector and press it in until it clicks into place. Multidrop Connector Plug Note Flat Cable II 76 Bit Slave Unit with Compact Connector To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in on the latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out. Flat Cable II cannot be used for multidrop connections. Section 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor 3-4-2 Branching Communications Cables There are two methods that can be used to branch the trunk line, sub-trunk lines, and branch lines: T-branches and multidrop connections. T-branches Using Round Cable I/II Connect the cable wires by using a commercially available relay terminal block. Example: Round cable I Relay terminal block Slave Unit Note Before connecting the cable wires to the terminal block, first attach the M3 crimp terminals shown below to the wires. 6.0 mm max. 6.0 mm max. Using Flat Cable I Attach a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug to the DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Socket connected to Communications Cable. Flat Connector Plug Flat Connector Socket Slave Unit ■ Installation Method Be sure the surface of the Flat Connector Plug on which line colors are indicated (red, white, black, and blue) is facing downward and press in the Connector until it clicks into place. Note To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in on the latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out. 77 Section 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor Using Flat Cable II Attach a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug to the DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector Socket connected to Communications Cable. Flat Connector Plug Flat Connector Socket Slave Unit ■ Installation Method Place the Flat Connector Plug so that the white line on the cable is facing downward and press in the Connector until it clicks into place. Note To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in firmly on the latches on both sides of the front of the Connector and pull it out. Multidrop Connections Using Round Cable I/II The DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector is used to convert the communications connector on the Slave Unit or Repeater Unit to a terminal block (M3) for connecting the cable wires. Example: Round cable I Open Connector M3 terminal block Communications connector Slave Unit/Repeater Unit 78 Section 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor ■ 1. Orient the Open Type Connector so that surface with the open terminals is facing to the left and press in the Open Type Connector until it clicks into place. WORD NODE ADR 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT 23 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MS NS WORD NODE ADR 456 01 456 01 X10 [0-63] 789 23 X1 789 01 X10 [0-63] 789 456 789 23 456 CRT1CRT1 OD16-1 REMOTE TERM OD16 INAL 23 MS NS 01 1,2,3... Connection Method 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 X1 CRT1CRT1 OD16-1 REMOTE TERM OD16 INAL Note To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in firmly on the latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out. 2. Open the terminal cover of the Open Type Connector and connect the cable wires to BDH (communications data high) and BDL (communications data low) in the terminal block. For round cable II, connect the cable wires to BS+ (communications power supply plus) and BS- (communications power supply minus). Note Before connecting the cable wires to the terminal block, first attach the M3 crimp terminals shown below to the wires. 6.0 mm max. 6.0 mm max. Using Flat Cable I Attach a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector to the communications connector of the Slave Unit or Repeater Unit, and then attach two DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plugs that are already connected to Communications Cables. Flat Connector Plug Multidrop Connector Communications connector Slave Unit/Repeater Unit 1. Place the Multidrop Connector so that the surface with the printed number is facing to the left and press in the Connector until it clicks into place. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MS NS WORD NODE ADR 456 X10 [0-63] 456 789 X1 23 23 23 456 789 01 X10 [0-63] 789 789 456 CRT1-OD16CRT1 REMOTE TERM OD16 1 INAL 23 WORD NODE ADR 01 MS NS 01 1,2,3... Installation Method 01 ■ 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 X1 CRT1CRT1 OD16-1 REMOTE TERM OD16 INAL 79 Section 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor 2. Be sure the surfaces of the two Flat Connector Plugs on which line colors are indicated (red, white, black, and blue) are facing to the left and press in the Connectors until they click into place. 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 MS NS WORD NODE ADR 456 X10 [0-63] 01 CRT1CRT1 OD16-1 REMOTE TERM OD16 INAL 456 789 23 01 23 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT X1 01 23 456 789 X10 [0-63] 789 789 456 23 WORD NODE ADR 01 MS NS 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 X1 CRT1-OD16CRT1 REMOTE TERM OD16 1 INAL Note Using Flat Cable II 3-4-3 To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in on the latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out. Branching is not possible using multidrop connections. Extending Communications Cables The cable length for the trunk line, sub-trunk lines, branch lines, and subbranch lines can be extended by up to 10 levels by using Flat Connectors. The maximum extendable length, however, is the maximum trunk line length. (Refer to 2-3-3 Maximum Distance and Number of Connected Units for Types of Communications Cables.) Flat Connector Socket Flat Connector Socket Trunk line or sub-trunk line Trunk Line or Sub-trunk Line Flat Connector Plug Terminating Resistor Flat Connector Plug Up to 10 sets of Connectors can be used. Flat Cable I Attach a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug to a DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Socket connected to Communications Cable. Flat Connector Plug Flat Connector Socket Installation Method Be sure the surface of the Flat Connector Plug on which line colors are indicated (red, white, black, and blue) is facing downward and press in the Connector until it clicks into place. Note 80 To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in on the latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out. Section 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor Flat Cable II Attach a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug to a DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector Socket connected to Communications Cable. Flat Connector Socket Installation Method Flat Connector Plug Orient the Flat Connector Plug so that the white line on the cable is facing downward and press in the Connector until it clicks into place. Note To remove a Connector once it has been attached, press in firmly on the latches on both sides of the Connector and pull it out. 81 Section 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor 3-4-4 Connection Locations for Terminating Resistor A Terminating Resistor must always be connected to the trunk line and each sub-trunk line on the opposite end from the Master Unit or Repeater Unit. Connect the Terminating Resistor on the opposite end of the trunk line from the Master Unit. Master Unit Terminating Resistor Trunk line Repeater Unit Slave Unit Sub-trunk line Slave Unit Slave Unit Connect the Terminating Resistor on the opposite end of the sub-trunk line from the Repeater Unit. Terminating Resistor Note (1) Do not connect the Terminating Resistor at the same end of the cable as the Master Unit or Repeater Unit. (2) When the cable is branched at the locations shown in the figure below, connect the Terminating Resistor at the end of the line so that the length of a is greater than b. Master Unit Terminating Resistor Trunk line Repeater Unit a b Slave Unit Sub-trunk line Cable length: a > b Slave Unit Round Cable I Connect the cable wires to a DRS1-T Terminating Resistor. Round cable I Terminating Resistor 82 Section 3-4 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor Connection Method Connect the cable wires to the Terminating Resistor and tighten the screws. The Terminating Resistor has no polarity, so either wire can be connected to either terminal regardless of the color. Terminating Resistor Round cable I BDH (black) or BDL (white) BDL (white) or BDH (black) Note Before connecting the cable wires to the Terminating Resistor, first attach the M3 crimp terminals shown below to the wires. 6.0 mm max. Round Cable II 6.0 mm max. Attach a DCN4-TM4 Terminating Resistor to the DCN4-TR4 Flat Connector Socket connected to the cable. Round cable II Flat Connector Socket Connection Method Push in the Terminating Resistor until it clicks into place. Note Flat Cable I To remove a Terminating Resistor once it has been connected, press in on the latches on both sides and pull it out. Attach a DCN5-TM4 Terminating Resistor to the DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector Socket connected to Communications Cable. Flat Connector Socket Installation Method Terminating Resistor Terminating Resistor Push in the Terminating Resistor until it clicks into place. 83 Connecting Cables and Terminating Resistor Note Section 3-4 To remove a Terminating Resistor once it has been connected, press in on the latches on both sides and pull it out. When using a multidrop connection for branching a Slave Unit or Repeater Unit, the Terminating Resistor can be directly connected to the Multidrop Connector that is connected to the Unit. (This is only possible when Flat Cable I is used.) Terminating Resistor Flat Connector Multidrop Connector Slave Unit/Repeater Unit Flat Cable II Attach a DCN5-TM4 Terminating Resistor to the DCN5-TR4 Flat Connector Socket connected to Communications Cable. Flat Connector Socket Installation Method Push in the Terminating Resistor until it clicks into place. Note 84 Terminating Resistor To remove a Terminating Resistor once it has been connected, press in on the latches on both sides and pull it out. Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring 3-5 Power Supply Wiring The following power supplies are required to operate the CompoNet Network. • Communications power supply: • I/O power supply: Used for communications with individual Units and for internal circuit operations of Units. Used for I/O operations for Units with external I/O. The method for supplying communications power and I/O power depends on the types of cable and Slave Unit that are used. The differences are shown in the following table. Slave Unit classification according to power supply method Multi-power supply Cable type Round cable I Round cable II Flat Cable I/II Network power supply Round cable I Round cable II Flat Cable I/II Communications power supply I/O power supply Supplied to Units Supplied to indiindividually. vidual Units separately from the Supplied through the Communications communications Cable by supplying power supply. power to the Master Unit. Cannot be used. The communications power supply and the I/O power supply are provided together through Communications Cable. Multi-power Supply Slave Units Using Round Cable I • Communications Power Supply Supply power to the power supply terminals of the communications connectors of individual Units (or to the PORT1 connector for Repeater Units). • I/O Power Supply Supply I/O power to the I/O power supply terminals of individual Units, separately from the communications power supply. To prevent noise, be sure to use separate power supplies for I/O and communications. Communications power supply terminals BD BD BS BS H L + − I/O power supply terminals V G 24-VDC I/O power supply Master Unit BS+ BDH BDL BS− BS+ BS− Using Round Cable II or Flat Cable I/II Round cable I Overcurrent protection (current limit: 4 A) When using the UL standards, please install a unit to restrict current between the external power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications power supply) 24-VDC communications power supply • Communications Power Supply Supply communications power to the Master Unit's communications power supply connector (or to the downstream port communications power supply connectors on Repeater Units). 85 Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring • I/O Power Supply Supply I/O power to the I/O power supply terminals of individual Units, separately from the communications power supply. Communications power supply terminals Master Unit (or Repeater Unit) BD BD BS BS H L + − I/O power supply terminals V 24-VDC I/O power supply G BS+ BDH BDL Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II BS− BS+ BS− When using the UL standards, Overcurrent please install a unit to restrict protection current between the external power (current limit: 4 A) supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications power supply) 24-VDC communications power supply Communications power supply connector on Master Unit (or downstream port communications power supply connector on Repeater Unit) Network Power Supply Slave Units These Units use the same set of power supply terminals for both communications and I/O power, so there is no need to provide separate power supplies. (Bit Slave Units are sold with a Flat Cable already attached.) The common communications and I/O power supply is provided to the Master Unit's communications power supply connector (or to the downstream port communications power supply connectors on Repeater Units). BD H BD L BS + BS − Master Unit (or Repeater Unit) BS + BDH Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II BDL BS − BS + BS − Overcurrent protection (current limit: 4 A) When using the UL standards, please install a unit to restrict current between the external power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications power supply) 24-VDC communications power supply Communications power supply connector on Master Unit (or downstream port communications power supply connector on Repeater Unit) 3-5-1 Power Supply Specifications Use a communications power supply that meets the following specifications. Item Output voltage Output ripple 86 Specification 24 VDC ±10% 600 mVp-p Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring Item Output current Specification Use a power supply that equals or exceeds the following total current consumption: • The current consumption of all Word Slave Units and Repeater Units • The current consumption of all Bit Slave Units and the current consumption of their external I/O Between output and AC power and between output and chassis ground Insulation An OMRON S82-series Power Supply for the communications power supply for CompoNet Slave Units is recommended. Note (1) For network power supply Slave Units, the external I/O power supply is also provided through the Flat Cable from the communications power supply connected to the Master Unit or the Repeater Unit. When calculating the output current of the communications power supply, always include the external I/O current consumption and actual load current for network power supply Slave Units. For example, the power supply current consumption for Bit Slave Unit is expressed by the following formula. • Input Bit Slave Units: Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption × number of sensors used) • Output Bit Slave Units: Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (actual load current × number of actuators used) • I/O Bit Slave Units: Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption × number of sensors used) + (actual load current × number of actuators used) (2) Use a power supply with sufficient capacity considering the inrush current at startup. For details on current consumption for each Unit, refer to Appendix C Current Consumption Summary. 3-5-2 Connection Locations for Communications Power Supplies Round Cable I A 24-VDC power supply is connected individually to each Slave Unit. Power does not need to be supplied to the Master Unit. 24-VDC communications power supply + Master Unit Overcurrent protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) Open Type Connector − Note: When using the UL standards, please install a unit to restrict current between the external power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications power supply) Supply communications power directly to each Slave Unit. Terminating Resistor Round cable I Open Type Connector Open Type Connector Open Type Connector Communications connector Word Slave Unit Word Slave Unit Word Slave Unit 87 Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring Before connecting the power supply, first connect a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector to the communications connector to convert it to a screw terminal block. Overcurrent protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) 24-VDC communications power supply BS+ BS− Note: When using the UL standards, please install a unit to restrict current between the external power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications power supply) Connect an Open Type Connector here. When using a Repeater Unit, supply power through the BS+ and BS− terminals of the Repeater Unit's PORT1 connector. Overcurrent protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) 24-VDC communications power supply BS+ BS− Note: When using the UL standards, please install a unit to restrict current between the external power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications power supply) Round Cable II or Flat Cable I/II Master Unit Communications power supply Connect an Open Type Connector here. Connect a 24-VDC power supply to the Master Unit's communications power supply connector (BS+ and BS−). This provides communications power to each Slave Unit and Repeater Unit connected by round cable II or Flat Cable I/II. Connect only one communications power supply for the trunk line. The cable between the communications power supply and the communications power supply connector must be no longer than 3 m. Communications power supply connector Communications power supply, 24 VDC Overcurrent protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) Note: When using the UL standards, please install a unit to restrict current between the external power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications power supply) 3 m max. Terminating Resistor Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Communications connector Slave Unit Slave Unit Slave Unit When Repeater Units are used, communications power to sub-trunk lines is supplied by the downstream port communications power supply connectors (BS+ and BS−) of the Repeater Units. The cable between the communications power supply and the communications power supply connector must be no longer than 3 m. 88 Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring When using the UL standards, please install a unit to restrict current between the external power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications power supply) Overcurrent protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) 24-VDC communications power supply 3 m max. Downstream port communications power supply connector BS+ BS− Recommended Ferrules 24-VDC communications power supply The following ferrules are recommended for the communications power supply cable. Product number AI0,5-10 WH H0.5/16 orange Applicable power Crimping tool cable size 0.5 mm (AWG20) CRIMPFOX UD6 (Product No. 1204436) or CRIMPTFOX ZA3 series 0.5 mm (AWG20) Crimper PZ1.5 (Product No. 900599) Manufacturer Phoenix Contact Weidmuller The following screwdriver is recommended for use when removing ferrules. Product number XW4Z-00C 3-5-3 Manufacturer OMRON Connecting the I/O Power Supply Provide a 24-VDC I/O power supply to the I/O terminals of all Slave Units (multi-power supply models). For details on connections, refer to 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units. Connection to output I/O power supply connector (only for digital I/O slave unit (e-CON connector type)) Output Units and I/O Units with e-CON connectors have output I/O power supply connectors for supplying I/O power to external devices. A 24-VDC power supply is provided using the following method. Units with e-CON Connectors (CRT1-OD@@S(-1), MD@@S(-1), OD@@SH(-1), and MD@@SH(-1)) Connect the 24-VDC power supply line to the V terminal and G terminal of the output I/O power supply connector. 89 Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring V terminals 24-VDC power supply G terminals Output I/O power supply connector Units with e-CON Connectors (CRT1-VOD08S(-1)) Peel back the coating on the included power supply cable and connect it to the 24-VDC power supply, then attach the power supply cable connector to the output I/O power supply connector on the bottom of the unit. Bottom of Unit 24-VDC power supply Red Black Output I/O power supply connector Power supply cable (provided) Connection to the connector for the sensor power supply connector (for CRT1VAD04S only) E-CON connector type Analog Input Slave Units (CRT1-VAD04S) are equipped with a sensor power supply connector for supplying of power to the connected sensor. Peel back the coating on the included power supply cable and connect the wires to the 24-VDC power supply, then attach the power supply cable connector to the sensor power supply connector on the bottom of the unit. Bottom of Unit 24-VDC power supply Red Black Sensor power supply connector Power supply cable (provided) 90 Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring 3-5-4 Connecting the Communications and I/O Power Supplies Round Cable I When round cable I is used, the communications power cannot be supplied through the communications cable. The communications power must be supplied to each Slave Unit and Repeater Unit through separate lines. For Slave Units that require power for I/O (i.e., multi-power supply Slave Units), the I/O power must also be supplied separately. There is no need to provide an external communications power supply for the Master Unit. Not Using a Repeater Unit Master Unit BS+ BS- Communications power supply Overcurrent protection (current limit: 4 A) Power supply When using the UL standards, please install a unit to restrict current between the external power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications power supply) V G Trunk line BS+ Round cable I Terminating Resistor BDH BDL BS- BSBDL Slave Unit Multi-power supply Slave Unit Open Type Connector Slave Unit Multi-power supply Slave Unit BS+ Open Type Connector BDH BSBDL BDH Power supply Multi-power supply Slave Unit BS+ BSBDL BDH BS+ Slave Unit I/O power supply Open Type Connector V G 91 Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring Using Repeater Units Master Unit BS+ BS− BS+ BDH Note: When using the UL standards, please install a unit to restrict current between the external power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications power supply) Round cable I BDL BS− Communications power supply Communications power supply Overcurrent Repeater Unit Overcurrent protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) PORT1 (upstream) V Power supply BS+ 1 BDH 1 Open Type Connector G Power supply V protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) Round cable I G PORT2 (downstream) BDL 1 BS+ 2 BS− 1 BDH 2 Sub-trunk line Terminating Resistor BDL 2 BS− 2 BS− BDL BS+ BDH Power supply Open Type Connector Slave Unit Multi-power Slave Unit supply Slave Unit I/O power supply Round cable I BS− BDL BS+ BDH Trunk line Open Type Connector Multi-power supply Slave Unit V G Communications Overcurrent power supply Communications power supply PORT1 (upstream) BS+ 1 V Power supply protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) Repeater Unit Overcurrent protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) BDH 1 Open Type Connector G Power supply Round cable I V G PORT2 (downstream) BDL 1 BS+ 2 BS− 1 BDH 2 Sub-trunk line Terminating Resistor BDL 2 BS− 2 BS− BDL Using Round Cable II or Flat Cable I/II Multi-power supply Slave Unit BS+ I/O power supply Open Type Connector BDH Slave Unit Power supply Note BS− BDL BS+ Terminating Resistor BDH Round cable I Open Type Connector Slave Unit Multi-power supply Slave Unit V G The I/O power supply to multi-power supply Slave Units may be a source of noise depending on the connected devices. Even when supplying the communications power supply together to all Slave Units, use a separate I/O power supply so that noise does not affect the network. When round cable II or Flat Cable I/II is used, the Slave Unit communications power is supplied through the Flat Cable I/II. There is no special wiring required to provide the communications power supply to individual Slave Units. The same communications power supply is shared for the entire trunk line or sub-trunk line. For Slave Units requiring an I/O power supply (i.e., multi-power supply Slave Units), however, I/O power must be supplied separately. 92 Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring Not Using Repeater Unit Communications power supply connector Overcurrent protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) Master Unit Communications power supply Note: When using the UL standards, please install a unit to restrict current between the external power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only communications power supply) V BS+ Power supply BS− G Trunk line Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II BS+ Terminating Resistor BDH BDL BS− BS− BDL BS+ Slave Units BDH BS− BDL Slave Units BDH BS+ BS− BDL Slave Units BDH BS+ BS− BDL BS+ BDH Branch line Slave Units Network power supply Slave Units Using Repeater Units Communications power supply connector Overcurrent Master Unit Communications power supply Note: V When using the UL standards, please install a Power unit to restrict current between the external supply power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only G communications power supply) protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) BS+ BS− BS+ Downstream port communications power supply connector BDH BDL BS− Repeater Unit Overcurrent protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) Communications power supply and I/O power supply (shared) V BS+ 2 PORT1 (upstream) BS− 2 Power supply BS+ 1 PORT2 BDH 1 (downstream) BS+ 2 BDL 1 G BDH 2 BS− 1 BDL 2 BS− 2 Subtrunk line Branch line BS− PORT2 G BDH 2 BDL Overcurrent protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) Power supply (downstream) BS+ 2 BDH Slave Units Communications power supply and I/O power supply (shared) V BDL 1 BS+ Slave Units BS+ 2 BS− 2 BS− 1 BS− BDL BDH 1 BDH BS+ 1 BS+ PORT1 (upstream) BS− BDL Slave Units Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Repeater Unit BDH BS+ Trunk line Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Terminating Resistor Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Terminating Resistor Multidrop Connector BDL 2 BS− 2 Subtrunk line Branch line Slave Units BS− Multi-power supply Slave Unit BDL V G BDH Slave Units BS+ BS− BDL BDH BS+ BS− BDL BS+ Slave Units I/O power supply Power supply Note BDH Terminating Resistor Network power supply Slave Units Network power supply Slave Units (1) Do not supply communications power from more than one location for the trunk line or for any one sub-trunk line. The quality of communications will decrease and normal communications may not be possible. 93 Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring (2) Do not supply communications power to the trunk line and a sub-trunk line or to two sub-trunk lines from the same power supply. Also do not supply communications power to two or more CompoNet systems from the same power supply. The quality of communications will decrease and normal remote I/O communications may not be possible. (3) The I/O power supply to multi-power supply Slave Units may be a source of noise depending on the connected devices. Even when supplying the communications power supply together to all Slave Units, use a separate I/O power supply so that noise does not affect the network. Restrictions The following restrictions apply when supplying communications power through Round Cable II or Flat Cable I/II. • The communications power supply can be connected at only one location for the trunk line and one location each for the sub-trunk lines. • Communications power to the trunk line can be supplied only through the communications power supply connector on the Master Unit. Communications power to a sub-trunk line can be supplied only through the downstream port communications power supply connector on the Repeater Unit. Communications power cannot be supplied at any other location. Power can be supplied here. Master Unit/ Repeater Unit Communications power supply 3 m max. Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Trunk line or sub-trunk line Repeater Unit Communications power supply Sub-trunk line Power can be supplied here. Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Power cannot be supplied here. Master Unit/ Repeater Unit Trunk line or sub-trunk line Communications power supply Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Repeater Unit Slave Unit Sub-trunk line Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Slave Unit Power cannot be supplied here. Communications power supply 94 Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring • Use separate power supplies for the Master Unit trunk line and for each sub-trunk line (i.e., for the trunk line or sub-trunk line upstream from a Repeater Unit and the sub-trunk line downstream from a Repeater Unit). Separate power supplies Master Unit/ Repeater Unit Communications power supply Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Trunk line or sub-trunk line Repeater Unit Communications power supply Sub-trunk line Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Same power supply Master Unit/ Repeater Unit Communications power supply Trunk line or sub-trunk line Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Repeater Unit Sub-trunk line Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Transmission quality will not be maintained and communications errors may occur if this restriction is not observed. 95 Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring Using Round Cable I and Round Cable II or Flat Cable I/II Together One or more Repeater Units can be used in a CompoNet Network to use both round cable I and round cable II, or round cable I and Flat Cable I/II under the same Master Unit. Master Unit BS+ BS- BS+ BDH Round cable I BDL BS- Repeater Unit BS+ 2 PORT1 BS- 2 (upstream) BS+ 1 PORT2 BDH 1 (downstream) BS+ 2 BDL 1 Open Type Connector BS- 1 Downstream port communications power supply connector Communications power Overcurrent Note: supply and protection When using the UL standards, please install a I/O power supply (shared) (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) unit to restrict current between the external V power supply and this unit to 4 A. (Only Power communications power supply) supply G Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Terminating Resistor BDH 2 BDL 2 BS- 2 Branch line BSBDL BDH BS+ BSBDL Slave Unit V Power supply G Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II Terminating Resistor Multidrop Connector BDH 2 BDL 2 BS- 2 BSBDL BDH Slave Unit Network power supply Slave Unit Slave Units BS+ BS- BDL BDH Slave Unit Subtrunk line BS+ 3-5-5 BSBDL Note V G BDH Power supply BS+ Round cable I Branch line Terminating Resistor I/O power supply Network power supply Slave Units Communications power supply and I/O power supply (shared) Overcurrent protection (See note.) (current limit: 4 A) BS+ 1 PORT2 BDH 1 (downstream) BS+ 2 BDL 1 BS- 1 BS+ Slave Unit BS+ 2 PORT1 BS- 2 (upstream) Open Type Connector BDH BSBDL Slave Unit Round cable I Repeater Unit BDH BS+ Trunk line Subtrunk line Multi-power supply Slave Unit The I/O power supply to multi-power supply Slave Units may be a source of noise depending on the connected devices. Even when supplying the communications power supply together to all Slave Units, use a separate I/O power supply so that noise does not affect the network. Precautions when Supplying Communications Power When supplying communications power and I/O power, the allowable currents of cables and connections, the voltage drop, and the capacity and location of power supplies must be considered. Allowable Current Restrictions 96 Do not allow the total current consumption of all Slave Units to exceed the allowable current of the communications cables and connectors. Exceeding the allowable current may result in heating or burnout of the cables or connectors. Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring Flat Connector Plug: 5 A max. (UL: 4 A) Flat Connector Socket: 5 A max. (UL: 4A) Master Unit Power supply, 24 VDC Cable Terminating Resistor (a) Slave Unit current consumption I1 Slave Unit current consumption I2 Slave Unit current consumption In Slave Unit current consumption I3 The allowable currents for cables and connectors are given below. Allowable Currents for Cables Select the communications cable so that the total current consumption of all Slave Units does not exceed the allowable current of the cable. Cable allowable current ≥ I1 + I2 + I3 + · · · · In (For the allowable cable current for “a” in the above diagram) Allowable Currents for Connectors There are limits to the allowable current for the communications power supply connectors on the Master Unit and Repeater Units, Flat Connector Sockets, and Flat Connector Plugs. Do not allow the current flow where these connectors are used to exceed the allowable current. Name Communications power supply connectors on CS/ CJ-Master Units Communications power supply connector on Repeater Unit Flat Connector Sockets Flat Connector Plugs Multidrop Connector Flat Multidrop Connector Plug Model CS1W-CRM21 CJ1W-CRM21 CRS1-RPT01 Allowable current 5A (UL: 4 A) DCN4-TR4 DCN5-TR4 DCN4-BR4 DCN5-BR4 DCN4-MD4 DCN4-MR4 Voltage Drop Cable Voltage Drop The voltage drop must be considered so that the power supply voltage at the Slave Unit that is the farthest from the power supply will still be within the allowable power supply range. The voltage drop is expressed by the following formula. Voltage drop (V) = Current (A) × Cable conductor resistance (Ω/m) × Cable length (m) × 2 If the voltage drop is too large and power cannot be supplied to the farthest Slave Unit within the allowable range, add a Repeater Unit and supply power from the Repeater Unit. 97 Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring L1 L2 Ln L3 Terminating Resistor Master Unit 3 m max. Power supply, 24 VDC ■ Slave Unit current consumption I1 Slave Unit current consumption I2 Slave Unit current consumption I3 Slave Unit current consumption In Calculation Example The allowable power supply voltage range for Slave Units is 14 to 26.4 VDC. If a 24-VDC power supply is used, the allowable voltage drop is 10 V. The extended length of cable that can be used is expressed by the following formula: 10 (V) ≥ {(I1 + I2 + I3 + … + In) × R1 × L1 × 2} + {(I2 + I3 + … + In) × R2 × L2 × 2} + {(I3 + … + In) × R3 × L3 × 2} + … + {In × Rn × Ln × 2} To provide leeway when selecting the cable, use the following formula. 10(V) ≥ {(I1 + I2 + I3 + … + In) × R × L × 2} R = Cable conductor resistance = 0.025 Ω/m for Flat Cable Therefore the length that the cable can be extended is as follows: L (m) ≤ 200 ÷ (I1 + I2 + I3 + … + In) … For Flat Cable 3-5-6 Precautions when Providing the I/O Power Supply When installing a system, the supply methods for communications power and I/O power must be considered. Not only hardware, such as selecting the power supplies and cables based on allowable currents and voltage drop, be considered, but also system operation for power supply errors, costs, and other software issues must be considered when studying power supply methods. Supplying I/O Power from One Source When supplying I/O power to the entire system from one source, the power consumed by each device and all the loads must be considered. Select the cables so that the power supply voltage for the last Slave Unit and load will be within the allowable range. Also, give proper consideration to the power supply capacity and be sure the total line current is within the allowable current range of the cable. The following measures can be considered to keep the voltage drop within the allowable range when supplying power from one power supply. • Increase the thickness of the power supply cables. • Increase the output voltage of the power supply. • Shorten the wiring. • Locate the power supply in the middle of the network. 98 Section 3-5 Power Supply Wiring Slave Slave Load Load 1 Power supply (24 VDC) I1 I2 I3 I4 If a stable power supply voltage cannot supplied to the end load, place the power supply in the middle of the network. Supplying I/O power from multiple power supplies instead of from one power supply enables reducing the line current, reducing the voltage drop, and decreasing the size of the cable. Using multiple power supplies should also be considered to increase system safety when power supply errors occur. Slave Power supply (24 VDC) 3-5-7 Load Design the wiring so that a stable power supply voltage is supplied to the end load. 4 Power supply (24 VDC) Supplying I/O Power from Multiple Sources Load 3 2 Slave Slave Slave Slave Slave Power supply (24 VDC) Other Precautions Power Supply Errors The location of power supplies and the grouping of Slave Units should be considered based on whether the overall system is to be stopped when a power supply error occurs. If it is necessary to prevent the overall system from stopping to ensure system safety, consider placing power supplies in more than one location and consider the way Slave Units should be grouped when supplying power. Cost Considerations Also consider the power supply methods in light of the total cost, including the following items: The capacity and number of power supplies, Cable thickness (allowable current) and length (voltage drop), System safety, and Wiring work. 99 Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units This section describes how to connect external devices, such as sensors, to the I/O terminals of Slave Units. The connection method varies depending on the type of Slave Unit that is used. The following table shows the differences in external I/O connection methods according to the Slave Unit. Digital I/O Slave Units Name With 2-tier Terminal Block With 3-tier Terminal Block With e-CON Connectors With MIL Connectors With Screw-less Clamp Terminal Blocks 100 Model CRT1-ID08(-1) CRT1-OD08(-1) CRT1-ID16(-1) CRT1-OD16(-1) CRT1-MD16(-1) CRT1-ROS08 CRT1-ROF08 CRT1-ROS16 CRT1-ROF16 CRT1-ID08TA(-1) CRT1-OD08TA(-1) CRT1-ID08TAH(-1) CRT1-OD08TAH(-1) CRT1-ID16TA(-1) CRT1-OD16TA(-1) CRT1-MD16TA(-1) CRT1-ID16TAH(-1) CRT1-OD16TAH(-1) CRT1-MD16TAH(-1) CRT1-VID08S(-1) CRT1-VOD08S(-1) CRT1-ID16S(-1) CRT1-OD16S(-1) CRT1-MD16S(-1) CRT1-ID16SH(-1) CRT1-OD16SH(-1) CRT1-MD16SH(-1) CRT1-ID32S(-1) CRT1-OD32S(-1) CRT1-MD32S(-1) CRT1-ID32SH(-1) CRT1-OD32SH(-1) CRT1-MD32SH(-1) CRT1-VID16ML(-1) CRT1-VOD16ML(-1) CRT1-VID32ML(-1) CRT1-VID32ML(-1) CRT1-VMD32ML(-1) CRT1-ID08SL(-1) CRT1-OD08SL(-1) CRT1-ID16SL(-1) CRT1-OD16SL(-1) CRT1-MD16SL(-1) I/O connection method Screw terminal block (M3) e-CON connector MIL connector Screw-less clamp terminal block Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units Analog I/O Slave Units Name With 2-tier Terminal Block With e-CON Connectors With MIL Connectors Temperature Input Units Expansion Units Bit Slaves With e-CON Connectors IP54 With Screw-less Clamp Termi- IP54 nal Blocks Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Model CRT1-AD04 CRT1-DA02 CRT1-VAD04S CRT1-VDA02S CRT1-VAD04ML CRT1-VDA02ML CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P XWT-ID08(-1) XWT-OD08(-1) XWT-ID16(-1) XWT-OD16(-1) CRT1B-ID02S(-1) CRT1B-OD02S(-1) CRT1B-ID02SP(-1) CRT1B-OD02SP(-1) CRT1B-ID04SP(-1) CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1) CRT1B-ID02JS(-1) CRT1B-OD02JS(-1) CRT1B-MD02JS(-1) CRT1B-ID04JS(-1) CRT1B-OD04JS(-1) I/O connection method Screw terminal block (M3) e-CON connector MIL connector Screw terminal block (M3) e-CON connector Screw-less clamp terminal block XA-series Connector from J.S.T. Mfg CRT1B-MD04JS(-1) 3-6-1 Connecting to a Screw Terminal Block For Slave Units with screw terminal blocks, attach the following M3 crimp terminals to signal lines and then connect them to the terminal block. Tighten the terminal block screws to a torque of 0.5 N·m. 6.0 mm max. Note 6.0 mm max. Mounting and Removing Terminal Blocks When attaching a terminal block to a Slave Unit with two or three terminal blocks, tighten the mounting screws alternately a little at a time. When removing a terminal block, loosen the mounting screws alternately a little at a time. If you tighten or loosen only one of the screws all the way without tightening or loosening the other screw, the terminal block will warp, possibly causing it to crack. 101 Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units The following Slave Units have one or two terminal blocks. Digital I/O Slave Units Analog I/O Slave Units Temperature Input Units Expansion Units 3-6-2 Name Model Models with 2 terminal blocks CRT1-ID08(-1) CRT1-OD08(-1) CRT1-ID16(-1) CRT1-OD16(-1) CRT1-MD16(-1) CRT1-ROS08 CRT1-ROF08 CRT1-ROS16 CRT1-ROF16 Models with 3 terminal blocks CRT1-ID08TA(-1) CRT1-OD08TA CRT1-ID08TAH(-1) CRT1-OD08TAH(-1) CRT1-ID16TA(-1) CRT1-OD16TA(-1) CRT1-MD16TA(-1) CRT1-ID16TAH(-1) CRT1-OD16TAH(-1) CRT1-MD16TAH(-1) Models with 2 terminal blocks CRT1-AD04 CRT1-DA02 --CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P --XWT-ID08(-1) XWT-OD08(-1) XWT-ID16(-1) XWT-OD16(-1) Connecting to e-CON Connector Terminals For Slave Units with e-CON connector terminals, a special cable connector must be attached to an external device cable. Follow the procedure below to attach the connector to the cable. ■ Checking the Cable Connector and Cable Wire Size The wire size and sheath diameter of applicable cables depend on the type of cable connector. Use the following table to check that the cable connector and external device cable wire size and sheath diameter are compatible. Tyco Electronics Connectors Model 3-1473562-4 1-1473562-4 1473562-4 2-1473562-4 4-1473562-4 Housing color Orange Red Yellow Blue Green Applicable wire range sheath outer diameter: 0.9 to 1.0 mm sheath outer diameter: 0.9 to 1.0 mm sheath outer diameter: 1.0 to 1.15 mm sheath outer diameter: 1.15 to 1.35 mm sheath outer diameter: 1.35 to 1.60 mm Cross-sectional area: 0.08 to 0.5 mm2 Sumitomo 3M Connectors Model 37104-3101-000FL 37104-3122-000FL 37104-3163-000FL 102 Housing color Applicable wire range Red AWG26 (0.14 mm2) to AWG24 (0.2 mm2), sheath outer diameter: 0.8 to 1.0 mm Yellow AWG26 (0.14 mm2) to AWG24 (0.2 mm2), sheath outer diameter: 1.0 to 1.2 mm Orange AWG26 (0.14 mm2) to AWG24 (0.2 mm2), sheath outer diameter: 1.2 to 1.6 mm Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units Model Housing color Applicable wire range 37104-2124-000FL Green AWG22 (0.3 mm2) to AWG20 (0.5 mm2), sheath outer diameter: 1.0 to 1.2 mm 37104-2165-000FL Blue AWG22 (0.3 mm2) to AWG20 (0.5 mm2), sheath outer diameter: 1.2 to 1.6 mm 37104-2206-000FL Gray AWG22 (0.3 mm2) to AWG20 (0.5 mm2), sheath outer diameter: 1.6 to 2.0 mm OMRON Connectors Model XN2A-1430 Specification Applicable wire range Spring clamp type AWG28 (0.08 mm2) to AWG20 (0.5 mm2), sheath outer diameter: 1.5 mm max. ■ Preparing External Device Cables Using Tyco Electronics or Sumitomo 3M Connectors The sensor and other external device cables for connector output with transistors are normally either semi-stripped or stripped, as shown in the following diagram. Semi-stripped cable Stripped cable When the cables are prepared this way, a cable connector cannot be attached, so first cut the end and remove the cable sheath as shown in the following diagram. (Do not strip the sheaths of the core wires.) 20 mm min. Using OMRON Connectors Align the cable with the strip gauge on the side of the connector. Remove 7 to 8 mm of the wiring sheath, and twist the exposed wires several times. 7 to 8 mm ■ Inserting Cable Wires into the Cable Connector Insert the cable wires of the external device into the cable connector, and connect each wire so that the terminal number on the connector cover matches the wire color as shown in the following table. • For Digital I/O Slave Unit Terminal Using CRT1-VID08S, CRT1number ID16S(H), CRT1-MD16S(H), CRT1ID32S(H), CRT1-MD32S(H), CRT1B-ID02S, CRT1B-ID02SP, CRT1B-ID04SP 3-wire sensor (without selfdiagnostic output) 1 2 Brown (red) --- 2-wire sensor (without selfdiagnostic output) ----- Using CRT1-VID08S-1, CRT1ID16S(H)-1, CRT1-MD16S(H)-1, CRT1-ID32S(H)-1, CRT1MD32S(H)-1, CRT1B-ID02S-1, CRT1B-ID02SP-1, CRT1BID04SLP-1 3-wire sensor 2-wire sensor (without self(without selfdiagnostic diagnostic output) output) Brown (red) Brown (white) ----- 103 Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units Terminal Using CRT1-VID08S, CRT1number ID16S(H), CRT1-MD16S(H), CRT1ID32S(H), CRT1-MD32S(H), CRT1B-ID02S, CRT1B-ID02SP, CRT1B-ID04SP 3-wire sensor (without selfdiagnostic output) 3 4 Blue (black) Black (white) Note 2-wire sensor (without selfdiagnostic output) Blue (black) Brown (white) Using CRT1-VID08S-1, CRT1ID16S(H)-1, CRT1-MD16S(H)-1, CRT1-ID32S(H)-1, CRT1MD32S(H)-1, CRT1B-ID02S-1, CRT1B-ID02SP-1, CRT1BID04SLP-1 3-wire sensor 2-wire sensor (without self(without selfdiagnostic diagnostic output) output) Blue (black) Black (white) --Blue (black) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. • For Analog I/O Slave Unit The wire colors differ by external devices. Please see the catalog or manual for the specific external device. Using Tyco Electronics or Sumitomo 3M Connectors 1,2,3... 1. Confirm that the terminal number matches the wire color, and insert each wire all the way into the opening on the cable connector cover. 2. Use a tool, such as a pliers, to push the cover straight in so that it is parallel with the body. Using OMRON Connectors 1,2,3... 1. Use a flat-blade screwdriver to push the operation lever inside the connector's operation opening until it locks, as shown in the following diagram. Flat-blade screwdriver Operation opening 2. Insert the wire all the way to the back of the wire insertion opening. Check that the sheath of the line is inserted into the wire insertion opening, and that the end of the conductor has passed through the connection part. Connection part Wire sheath Wire insertion opening 3. Insert a flat-blade screwdriver into the reset opening and pull back the lever lightly. A click will be heard and the operation lever will return to its normal position. 104 Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units Operation lever (white) Reset opening 4. Lightly pull the wire to confirm that it is connected properly. Note 3-6-3 To remove a wire, push in the operation lever, check that the operation lever has locked, and then pull out the wire. After removing the wire, always return the operation lever to its normal position. Connecting to MIL Connector Terminals Use any of the following methods to connect to a MIL connector. • Use an OMRON MIL Cable. • Pressure-weld a Flat Cable to a MIL Socket. • Pressure-weld a loose-wire cable to a MIL connector. Using OMRON MIL Cable • Connecting Relay Terminals The MIL Cables for connecting OMRON Relay Terminals are shown in the following table. Select the appropriate Cable depending on the combination of Remote I/O Terminals and Relay Terminals that are used. CRT1-@D16ML(-1) CRT1-@D32ML(-1) 105 Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units Slave model MIL Cable model CRT1-VID16ML G79-I@C CRT1-VOD16ML G79-O@C CRT1-VOD16ML-1 G79-I@C G79-O@C CRT1-VID32ML G79-I50-25-D1 (50 cm) G79-I75-50-D1 (75 cm) G79-O50-25-D1 (50 cm) G79-O75-50-D1 (75 cm) CRT1-VOD32ML CRT1-VOD32ML-1 CRT1-VMD32ML CRT1-VMD32ML-1 G79-O50-25-D1 (50 cm) G79-O75-50-D1 (75 cm) G79-I50-25-D1 (50 cm) G79-I75-50-D1 (75 cm) G79-M50-25-D1 (50 cm) G79-M75-50-D1 (75 cm) G79-M50-25-D2 (50 cm) G79-M75-50-D2 (75 cm) Connected Relay Terminal G7TC-ID16 G7TC-IA16 G7TC-OC16/OC08 G7OD-SOC16/VSOC16 G7OD-FOM16/VFOM16 G7OA-ZOC16-3 G7OD-SOC08 G7OR-SOC08 G7TC-OC16-1 G7OD-SOC16-1 G7OD-FOM16-1 G7OA-ZOC16-4 G7TC-ID16 G7TC-IA16 G7TC-OC16/OC08 G7OD-SOC16/VSOC16 G7OD-FOM16/VFOM16 G7OA-ZOC16-3 G7OD-SOC08 G7OR-SOC08 G7OD-SOC16-1 G7OD-FOM16-1 G7OA-ZOC16-4 G7TC-OC16-1 Inputs: G7TC-ID16 G7TC-IA16 Outputs: G7TC-OC16/ OC08 G7OD-SOC16/ VSOC16 G7OD-FOM16 VFOM16 G7OA-ZOC16-3 G7OD-SOC08 G7OR-SOC08 Inputs: G7OA-ZIM16-5 G7OD-SOC16-1 G7OD-FOM16-1 G7OA-ZOC16-4 Remarks ----- --- ----- --- Inputs and outputs are distinguished by color. Input tube color: Red Output tube color: Yellow Inputs and outputs are distinguished by color. Input tube color: Red Output tube color: Yellow Connecting to a Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Unit The following Connector-Terminal Block Conversion Units are available. For details, refer to the SYSMAC Selection Guide (Cat. No. X066). Type Slim Through-type With common terminal 106 Series XW2D XW2B XW2C Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units Type Three-tier with common terminal Screw-less clamp terminals e-CON connector ■ Series XW2E XW2F XW2N Connecting Loose Wires to Devices The following table shows the Cables available when the Slave Unit has a MIL connector and the other device has loose wires. Use these Cables as needed. Slave model CRT1-V@D16ML 20 pins CRT1-V@D32ML 40 pins CRT1-VDA02ML CRT1-VAD04ML MIL Cable model G79-A200C (2 m) G79-A500C (5 m) G79-Y100C (1 m) G79-Y150C (1.5 m) G79-Y200C (2 m) G79-Y300C (3 m) G79-Y500C (5 m) G79-A200C-D1 (2 m) G79-A500C-D1 (5 m) G79-Y100C-D1 (1 m) G79-Y200C-D1 (2 m) G79-Y500C-D1 (5 m) 10 pins 16 pins Remarks Loose wire size: AWG24 Loose wires are cut. Forked terminals are attached to the loose wires. Forked terminal: 161071-M2 (Nippon Terminal) Loose wire size: AWG28 Loose wires are cut. Forked terminals are attached to the loose wires. Forked terminal: 161071-M2 (Nippon Terminal) Indicated cable is not available The following table shows the MIL connector pin numbers, loose wire colors, dot markings, and dot colors. 20 Pins (G79-A@@@C) Pin No. 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 Wire color Light brown Yellow Light green Gray White Dots „ Dot color Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Pin No. 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 Wire color Light brown Yellow Light green Gray White Dots „„ Dot color Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red 107 Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units 20 Pins (G79-Y@@@C) Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Wire color Light brown Dots „ Yellow Light green Gray White Dot color Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Pin No. 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Wire color Light brown Dot color Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Pin No. 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Wire color Light brown Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Light brown Dots „„ Dot color Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Dots „„„ Dot color Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red „„„„ Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Black Red Yellow Light green Gray White 40 Pins Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Wire color Light brown 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 Light brown Dots „ Yellow Light green Gray White „„ Yellow Light green Gray White Yellow Light green Gray White Yellow Light green Gray White Pressure-welding a Flat Cable to a MIL Socket To make your own connecting cable by pressure-welding the flat cable to the MIL socket, use the components shown in the table below and follow the directions. • Required Components Number of connector pins 10 pins No polarity guide Uses polarity guide 16 pins XG4M-1630-T 20 pins XG4M-2030-T 40 pins XG4M-4030-T • Procedure 108 Model XG4M-1031-T XG4M-1030-T Connecting External I/O for Slave Units 1,2,3... Section 3-6 1. Using a fine flat-bladed screwdriver, open the hooks at both ends of the MIL Socket and separate the contact side and the cover side. There are two latches at each end of the Socket (i.e., the contact side, and altogether four laches). Release the bottom laches on both sides at the same time, and then release the upper two. Do not attempt to release two latches on one side without releasing the latches on the other side. 2. Insert the Flat Cable between the separated Socket sides, line it up with the contacts, align the contact side with the cover side, and lock them in place. Use an object such as a vise to firmly press them together until they mesh with the latches. Applicable wires for pressure-welding: 1.27-mm pitch Flat Cable (7-strand) • UL2651 (Standard cable) • UL20012 (Folding cable) • UL20028 (Color-coded cable) XG4M-1031-T/1030-T/1630-T/2030-T XG4M-4030-T 3. Bend back the cable as required, insert a Strain Relief, and lock the cable in place. 109 Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units XG4M-1031-T/1030-T/1630-T/2030-T XG4M-4030-T Pressure-welding a Loose-wire Cable to a MIL Connector. To prepare a connecting cable by pressure-welding a loose-wire cable to a MIL connector, assemble the connector from the components shown in the following table. 10-pin Cable Component Wire size: AWG24 Socket No polarity guide XG5M-1031-N Uses polarity guide XG5M-1032-N Semi-cover (See note.) XG5S-0501 Wire size: AWG28 to AWG26 XG5M-1034-N XG5M-1035-N 16-pin Cable Component Socket Semi-cover (See note.) Wire size: AWG24 XG5M-1632-N XG5S-0801 Wire size: AWG28 to AWG26 XG5M-1635-N 20-pin Cable Component Socket Semi-cover (See note.) Hood Cover Wire size: AWG24 XG5M-2032-N XG5S-1001 XG5S-2012 Wire size: AWG28 to AWG26 XG5M-2035-N 40-pin Cable Component Socket Semi-cover (See note.) Hood Cover Note Wire size: AWG24 XG5M-4032-N XG5S-2001 XG5S-4022 Wire size: AWG28 to AWG26 XG5M-4035-N Two Semi-covers are required per connector. For details on individual components, refer to the Connectors Group Catalog (Cat. No. G015). 110 Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units Note 3-6-4 When using a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector to branch a Communications Cable, bind together the loose wires where the cable comes out of the Hood Cover. Wire the Communications Cable and loose-wire cable so that they do not interfere with each other. Connecting to Screw-less Clamp Terminal Blocks For Slave Units with screw-less clamp terminal blocks, the terminal blocks can be easily wired by inserting pin terminals. Follow the procedure below to connect the external device cable to a screw-less clamp terminal block. ■ Applicable Pin Terminals When wiring an external device cable to a screw-less clamp terminal block, special pin terminals must be placed on the cable wires. The applicable pin terminals are listed in the following table. Name H0.5/14 orange H0.75/14 white H1.5/14 red Applicable wire size Crimp tool 0.5 mm2/AWG20 PZ6 roto 0.75 mm2/AWG18 1.5 mm2/AWG16 Manufacturer Weidmuller Co. Ltd. The pin terminal conductor should be about 8 to 10 mm in length. Conductor length: 8 to 10 mm ■ Wiring to the Screw-less Clamp Terminal Block Inserting Pin Terminals Insert the pin terminal all the way to the back of the terminal hole. Insert the pin terminal all the way to the back. Removing Pin Terminals Press down the release button next to the terminal hole with a small flat-blade screwdriver and pull out the pin terminal while the release button is down. Small flat-blade screwdriver Release button The following screwdriver is recommended for removing pin terminals. Model SD0.6 × 3.5 × 100 Flat-blade Screwdriver Manufacturer Weidmuller Co. Ltd. 111 Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units Note 3-6-5 Side Front 0.6 mm 3.5 mm Press the release button with a force of 30 N or less. Applying excessive force may damage the clamp terminal block. Connecting External I/O to IP54 Bit Slave Units Components Cover screws Cover Sealing section cover NC pin Small cable sealing pieces Housing Sealing section housing External I/O is connected to e-CON connector terminals or screw-less clamp terminals inside the housing. Connected external I/O cables are passed through the sealing. The cables are held between the sealing section cover and sealing section housing to ensure resistance to splashing. For cables with smaller outer diameters, the sealing pieces can be used to ensure splash resistance. Applicable Cables The range of outer diameters of cables that can be connected is 2.2 to 6.3 mm. When the diameter is within the range of 2.2 to less than 3.6 mm, then the sealing section for small-diameter cables must be attached. Split 112 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units Section 3-6 Installation Method 1,2,3... 1. Expand the split in the sealing piece and insert the cable. 2. Place the groove on the sealing pieces onto the inside of the housing to secure it. (See following diagram.) Handling Unconnected Terminals For terminals that are not connected, insert an NC pin into the small cable sealing piece as shown in the following diagram. Then secure the sealing piece onto the housing as described above. Tightening the Cover Finally, close the cover and tighten the cover screws. The tightening torque is 0.8 to 1.0 N·m. 3-6-6 Connecting to Compact Connectors The compact connectors use XA-series Connectors from JST Mfg. Co., Ltd. Special cable connectors must be attached for cables connecting to external devices if a Slave Unit with Compact Connectors is used. XA-series Connectors from J.S.T. Mfg. Name Applicable cable range Model Crimping Tool AWG# Wire sheath external diameter 0.08 to 0.33 28 to 22 1.2 to 1.9 SXA-001T-P0.6 YC692 or YC692R 0.22 to 0.5 24 to 20 1.5 to 1.9 SXA-01T-P0.6 YRS701 to YC701R mm2 Contacts 113 Section 3-6 Connecting External I/O for Slave Units Name Housing Note Model XAP-03V-1 (1) Automated Crimp Tools are also available. For details, contact the manufacturer. (2) For information on the processing procedure, refer to the instruction manual included with the tool or contact the manufacturer (JST Mfg. Co., Ltd.). 114 SECTION 4 Basic Specifications of Slave Units This section provides the basic specifications of the Slave Units. 4-1 Basic Specifications of Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 4-1-1 Communications Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116 4-1-2 Performance Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 4-1-3 Communications Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117 115 Section 4-1 Basic Specifications of Slave Units 4-1 Basic Specifications of Slave Units This section gives the specifications that are the same for all Slave Units. For specifications that vary with the Slave Unit, refer to the section for each Slave Unit. 4-1-1 Communications Specifications Item Communications protocol Types of communications Baud rate Modulation Coding Error control Communications media Communications distance and wiring Connectable Master Units Connectable Slave Units Maximum I/O capacity Maximum number of nodes Bits allocated per node address Maximum number of nodes per segment Applicable node addresses Repeater Unit application conditions Signal lines Power lines Connection forms 116 Specification CompoNet Network protocol Remote I/O communications (programless, constant sharing of data with Slave Units) and message communications (explicit message communications as required with Slave Units and FINS message communications as required with PLCs) 4 Mbps, 3 Mbps, 1.5 Mbps, 93.75 kbps Base-band Manchester code Manchester code rules, CRC The following media can be used. • Round cable I • Round cable II • Flat Cable I • Flat Cable II Note Round cable I, round cable II, Flat Cable I, and Flat Cable II are all different types of cable. To use more than one type of cable at a time, Repeater Units must be used to separate them on trunk lines and sub-trunk lines. Refer to 1-2-1 Cable Types, Baud Rates, and Maximum Distances in the Master Unit Operation Manual. CompoNet Master Units CompoNet Slave Units Word Slave Units: 1,024 inputs and 1,024 outputs (2,048 I/O points total) Bit Slave Units: 256 inputs and 256 outputs (512 I/O points total) Word Slave Units: 64 input nodes and 64 output nodes Bit Slave Units: 128 input nodes and 128 output nodes Repeater Units: 64 nodes Word Slave Units: 16 bits Bit Slave Units: 2 bits 32 nodes (including Repeater Units) Word Slave Units: IN0 to IN63 and OUT0 to OUT63 Bit Slave Units: IN0 to IN127 and OUT0 to OUT127 Repeater Units: 0 to 63 Up to 64 Repeater Units can be connected per network. When Repeater Units are connected in series from the Master Unit, up to 2 extra segment layers can be created (i.e., up to 2 Repeater Units are allowed between a Slave Unit and the Master Unit). Two lines: BDH (communications data high) and BDL (communications data low) Two lines: BS+ and BS− (power for communications and internal Slave Unit circuits) • Power is supplied from the Master Unit or Repeater Units. Round cable II or Flat Cable I/II at baud rate of 93.75 kbps: No restrictions Other cables or baud rates: Trunk line and branch lines Connections for Slave Units and Repeater Units: T-branch or multidrop connections Section 4-1 Basic Specifications of Slave Units 4-1-2 Performance Specifications Item Communications power supply voltage I/O power supply voltage Noise immunity Vibration resistance Shock resistance Dielectric strength Insulation resistance Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Ambient operating atmosphere Storage temperature Storage humidity Terminal block screw tightening torque (See note.) Installation Note Specification 14 to 26.4 VDC 20.4 to 26.4 VDC (24 VDC −15%/+10%) Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV (power line). 10 to 60 Hz with double-amplitude of 0.7 mm, 60 to 150 Hz and 50 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions for 80 min each 150 m/s2 (3 times each in 6 directions on 3 axes) 500 VAC (between isolated circuits) 20 MΩ min. (between isolated circuits) −10 to 55°C 25% to 85% (with no condensation) No corrosive gases −25 to 65°C 25% to 85% (with no condensation) M3 wiring screws: 0.5 N⋅m M3 mounting screws: 0.5 N⋅m Mounting with 35-mm DIN Track, M4 screws, or Mounting Brackets (depending on model) Applicable only to Slaves to which screw terminal blocks are mounted. Some of the specifications are different for the CRT1-ROS08/ROS16 (with relay outputs) and the CRT1-ROF08/ROF16 (with SSR outputs). For details, refer to 5-3-8 Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with Relay Outputs) and 5-3-9 Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with SSR Outputs). 4-1-3 Communications Indicators The communications indicators have the following meanings. MS (Module Status): Indicates the status of the node with a two-color LED (green/red). NS (Network Status): Indicates the status of communications with a two-color LED (green/red). Name MS Indicator status Lit green. Node/communications status Normal status Lit red. Fatal error Flashing red. Non-fatal error Not lit. Power OFF/Startup Meaning The Unit is operating normally. A hardware error has occurred in the Unit. The watchdog timer has timed-out. There is an error in the switch settings. An EEPROM checksum error has occurred. The power supply is OFF, the Unit is being reset, or the Unit is being initialized. 117 Section 4-1 Basic Specifications of Slave Units Name NS Indicator status Lit green. Flashing green. Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. Node/communications status Online and participating Normal communications are in progress and the node is participating in the network. Online but not participatNormal communications are in progress but the node is not ing yet participating in the network. Fatal communications The address is set out of range. error The same address has been set for more than one node. Non-fatal communications Polling has timed out. The network has timed out. error Power OFF/Baud rate not The power supply is OFF or the baud rate has not been yet detected. detected. Note 118 Meaning When flashing, indicators are lit for 0.5 s and not lit for 0.5 s. SECTION 5 Digital I/O Slave Units This section describes the Digital I/O Slave Units. 5-1 5-2 5-3 5-4 5-5 Status Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Allocating I/O Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2-1 Data Allocation for Word Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2-2 Data Allocation for Word Slave Units with Expansion Units . . . . . Units with Screw Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-1 Eight-point Input Units (2-tier Terminal Block). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-2 Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-3 Sixteen-point Input Units (2-tier Terminal Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-4 Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with Transistor Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-5 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-6 Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with Relay Outputs) 5-3-7 Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with SSR Outputs) 5-3-8 Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with Relay Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-9 Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with SSR Outputs) 5-3-10 Eight-point Input Units (3-tier Terminal Block). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-11 Eight-point Output Units (3-tier Terminal Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-12 Sixteen-point Input Units (3-tier Terminal Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-13 Sixteen-point Output Units (3-tier Terminal Block). . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3-14 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (3-tier Terminal Block) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units with Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-1 Eight-point Input Units (e-CON Connectors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-2 Eight-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-3 Sixteen-point Input Units (e-CON Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-4 Sixteen-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-5 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors) 5-4-6 Thirty-two-point Input Units (e-CON Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-7 Thirty-two-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-8 Sixteen-point Input and Sixteen-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-9 Sixteen-point Input Units (MIL Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-10 Sixteen-point Output Units (MIL Connectors). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-11 Thirty-two-point Input Units (MIL Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-12 Thirty-two-point Output Units (MIL Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4-13 Sixteen-point Input and Sixteen-point Output Units (MIL Connectors) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5-1 Eight-point Input Units (With Screw-less Clamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5-2 Eight-point Output Units (With Screw-less Clamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5-3 Sixteen-point Input Units (With Screw-less Clamps). . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5-4 Sixteen-point Output Units (With Screw-less Clamps) . . . . . . . . . . 5-5-5 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (With Screw-less Clamps) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120 121 121 123 125 125 129 134 138 142 147 152 156 161 165 172 177 183 190 197 197 203 209 214 220 228 233 239 246 252 258 266 273 282 282 286 290 295 299 119 Section 5-1 Status Areas 5-1 Status Areas A Digital I/O Slave Unit has two internal status areas: the Warning Status Area and the Alarm Status Area. The status flags in these areas are turned ON and OFF based on the threshold values set by the user for each function in that Unit. When any of the bits in the status area of the slaves connected to the Master Unit turns ON, the corresponding bit (bit 12 is for warning status area notices and bit 13 is for alarm area notices) of the status flag in the Master Unit turns ON. The Digital I/O Slave Unit's status area information can be read by using the CX-Integrator or explicit messages. Master Unit The status bit detection allocated to the master is OR of all slaves Transmitted to Master Unit Digital I/O Slave Unit The Digital I/O Slave Unit has two status areas: the Warning Status Area and the Alarm Status Area. Warning Status Area The Digital I/O Slave Unit's Warning Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These bits indicate minor errors in the Unit. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 120 Content Reserved Reserved Network Power Voltage Drop Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Voltage dropped below threshold.) Unit Maintenance Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.) Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Operation Time Monitor Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.) Connected Device Maintenance Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.) Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Description ----Monitors the voltage set as the threshold for the network power voltage monitor function. Monitors the power ON time warning value set as the threshold for the Unit Conduction Time Monitor function. --------Turns ON when the threshold set for the operation time monitor function is exceeded. Turns ON when the threshold set for the contact operation monitor function or the total ON time monitor function is exceeded. --------- Section 5-2 Allocating I/O Data Bit 14 15 Alarm Status Area Description ----- The Digital I/O Slave Unit's Alarm Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These bits indicate serious errors in the Unit. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 5-2 Content Reserved Reserved Content Reserved EEPROM Data Error Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error occurred Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved I/O Power Supply Status Flag 1 OFF: I/O power is ON ON: I/O power is not ON. I/O Power Supply Status Flag 2 OFF: I/O power is ON ON: I/O power is not ON. Reserved Reserved Operation Time Configuration Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error Reserved Reserved Reserved Description --Turns ON when there is an error in the EEPROM data. ------------Turns ON when I/O power is not being supplied. Turns ON when I/O power is not being supplied to the Expansion Unit. ----Turns ON when a threshold value is set for the operation time monitor function between a Digital I/O Slave Unit and Expansion Unit if an Expansion Unit is not connected. ------- Allocating I/O Data Input and output areas in I/O memory in the Master Unit are allocated to the I/O data of Word Slave Units in a CompoNet Network. Node address areas are allocated in order of node addresses for Slave Units of the same type. In a CompoNet Network, Units are allocated node address areas of the size required for each Unit, based on the node address set for the Unit. 5-2-1 Data Allocation for Word Slave Units Word Slave Units are allocated node address areas in units of 16 points (one word). • Units with 8 inputs or outputs are allocated one word (the node address set for the Unit). • Units with 16 inputs or outputs are allocated one word (the node address set for the Unit). • Units with 16 I/O points (8 inputs and 8 outputs) are allocated two words (the node address set for the Unit). The data is allocated to the lower bytes of the words, and the upper bytes remain unused. 121 Section 5-2 Allocating I/O Data • Units with 32 inputs or outputs are allocated two words per node (node address m and m+1 for the Input Area or Output Area). • Units with 32 I/O points (16 inputs and 16 outputs) are allocated two words per node (node address m for the Input Area, and node address m for the Output Area). Eight-point Input Unit Input Area Not used. Eight-point Output Unit 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Input Area 15 Sixteen-point Output Unit 6 Output Area Not used. Sixteen-point Input Unit 7 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Not used. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Not used. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Output Area 15 14 Sixteen-point I/O Unit Output Area Input Area Thirty-two-point Input Unit Thirty-two-point Output Unit Thirty-two-point I/O Unit Input Area 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Output Area 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Output Area 15 14 Input Area 15 122 14 Section 5-2 Allocating I/O Data 5-2-2 Data Allocation for Word Slave Units with Expansion Units When an Expansion Unit is used, memory is allocated in the same way as it would be allocated to a Word Slave Unit that includes the input and output data of the Expansion Unit. Sixteen-point Input Unit + Sixteen-point Expansion Input Unit Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Input Area and node address m+1 in the Input Area. Input Area Sixteen-point Input Unit + Eight-point Expansion Input Unit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Input Area and node address m+1 in the Input Area. Input Area 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Not used. Sixteen-point Input Unit + Sixteen-point Expansion Output Unit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Input Area and node address m in the Output Area. Output Area 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Input Area 15 Sixteen-point Input Unit + Eight-point Expansion Output Unit 14 Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Input Area and node address m in the Output Area. Output Area Not Used. 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Input Area 15 Sixteen-point Output Unit + Sixteen-point Expansion Output Unit 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Output Area and node address m+1 in the Output Area. Output Area Sixteen-point Output Unit + Eight-point Expansion Output Unit 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Output Area and node address m+1 in the Output Area. 123 Section 5-2 Allocating I/O Data Output Area 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Not Used. Sixteen-point Output Unit + Sixteen-point Expansion Input Unit 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Output Area and node address m in the Input Area. Output Area 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Input Area 15 Sixteen-point Output Unit + Eight-point Expansion Input Unit 14 Two node address areas are allocated: Node address m in the Output Area and node address m in the Input Area. Output Area 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Input Area Not Used. 124 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 5-3 5-3-1 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Eight-point Input Units (2-tier Terminal Block) CRT1-ID08/CRT1-ID08-1 Input Section Specifications Item Specification Model CRT1-ID08 I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption Weight Note CRT1-ID08-1 8 inputs NPN PNP 15 VDC min. (between each input 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 8 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 30 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 50 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 160 g max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID08 and CRT1-ID08-1) Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Input indicators 0 to 7 Communications connector I/O terminal block (removable) 125 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 7 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits CRT1-ID08 (NPN) BS+ BDL Physical layer BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) 126 V 24 VDC 0 1 Internal circuits BDH Photocoupler Photocoupler G Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks CRT1-ID08-1 (PNP) BS+ V 24 VDC Photocoupler 0 BDH Physical layer BDL 1 Internal circuits BS− Photocoupler G DC-DC converter (not isolated) Wiring CRT1-ID08 (NPN) 24 VDC 10 11 V 1 12 1 2 3 G 0 14 5 4 2 15 7 5 4 16 NC 6 NC 17 NC 7 NC 18 NC 8 NC NC 9 NC NC Brown (White) Blue (Black) Brown (Red) I/O power supply Blue (Black) + Black (White) − 13 3 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) CRT1-ID08-1 (PNP) 24 VDC 10 11 V 1 2 G 13 3 3 0 14 5 4 2 5 4 15 7 6 6 16 NC NC 17 NC 7 NC 18 NC 8 NC NC 9 NC 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Brown (White) Blue (Black) Brown (Red) I/O power supply Black (White) + Blue (Black) − 12 1 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 127 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Note Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID08 and CRT1-ID08-1) 115 Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 128 (mm) 74.4 57.6 60.3 53.2 3.14 52 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) 5-3-2 Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block) CRT1-OD08/CRT1-OD08-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Specification CRT1-OD08 Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption Output handling for communications errors Weight Note CRT1-OD08-1 8 outputs NPN PNP 0.5 A/output, 2 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the G terminal) output terminal and the V terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 8 outputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 55 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. 160 g max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. 129 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD08 and CRT1-OD08-1) Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Output indicators 0 to 7 Communications connector I/O terminal block (removable) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 7 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 130 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Internal Circuits CRT1-OD08 (NPN) BS+ Voltage drop Photocoupler BDH Physical layer 0 Internal circuits BDL V 24 VDC BS− 1 Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) G CRT1-OD08-1 (PNP) V 24 VDC BS+ Photocoupler BDH 0 Physical layer 1 Internal circuits BDL BS− Photocoupler Voltage drop DC-DC converter (not isolated) G Wiring CRT1-OD08 (NPN) 24 VDC 10 11 V 1 2 G − 12 1 13 3 3 0 4 2 14 5 5 4 15 7 6 6 16 NC NC 7 NC 18 17 NC NC NC 8 NC 9 NC + I/O power supply Solenoid valve, etc. Solenoid valve, etc. 131 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks CRT1-OD08-1 (PNP) 24 VDC 10 11 V 1 2 G − 12 1 13 3 3 0 4 2 14 5 15 7 5 4 6 6 16 NC NC 17 NC 7 NC 18 NC 8 NC NC 9 NC + I/O power supply Solenoid valve, etc. Note 132 Solenoid valve, etc. When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD08 and CRT1-OD08-1) 115 74.4 57.6 60.3 53.2 3.14 52 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 25.4 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 ■ (mm) (mm) 133 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 5-3-3 Sixteen-point Input Units (2-tier Terminal Block) CRT1-ID16/CRT1-ID16-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption Weight Note Specification CRT1-ID16 16 inputs NPN 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 1 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 16 inputs/common CRT1-ID16-1 PNP 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 55 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 85 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 141 g max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID16 and CRT1-ID16-1) Node address switches: Communications Communications indicators: MS and NS ×10 and ×1 (from left) connector WORD NODE ADR 23 23 X10 [0-63] 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 456 IN 78 78 456 9 01 MS NS Input indicators 0 to 15 X1 9 01 CRT1-ID16 REMOTE TERMINAL I/O terminal block (removable) Indicator Section Communications Indicators 134 Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks I/O Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 15 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits CRT1-ID16 (NPN) Photocoupler BS+ BDH BDL V 24 VDC 0 Physical layer 1 Internal circuits BS− Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) G CRT1-ID16-1 (PNP) V 24 VDC BS+ BDL Physical layer BS− 0 1 Internal circuits BDH Photocoupler Photocoupler G DC-DC converter (not isolated) 135 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Wiring CRT1-ID16 (NPN) 24 VDC 10 11 V 1 12 1 2 3 G 0 14 5 4 2 15 7 5 4 16 9 6 6 17 11 7 8 18 13 8 10 15 9 12 14 Brown (White) Blue (Black) Brown (Red) I/O power supply Blue (Black) + Black (White) − 13 3 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) CRT1-ID16-1 (PNP) 24 VDC 10 11 V 1 12 1 2 G 4 16 9 6 6 7 8 17 11 8 10 18 13 15 9 12 14 Brown (White) Blue (Black) Brown (Red) Black (White) 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 136 5 4 15 7 + I/O power supply Note 14 5 2 Blue (Black) − 3 0 13 3 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID16 and CRT1-ID16-1) 115 66.9 50.1 58.73 51.6 3.14 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 67.8 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 104.4 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45 25.4 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 83.9 ■ (mm) (mm) 137 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 5-3-4 Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with Transistor Outputs) CRT1-OD16/CRT1-OD16-1 Output Section Specifications Item Specification Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption Output handling for communications errors Weight Note CRT1-OD16 16 outputs NPN 0.5 A/output, 4 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the G terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 16 outputs/common CRT1-OD16-1 PNP 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the V terminal) Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 55 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 85 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. 141 g max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD16 and CRT1-OD16-1) Communications indicators: MS and NS Communications connector WORD NODE ADR 23 23 X10 [0-63] Output indicators 0 to 15 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 456 OUT 78 78 456 9 01 MS NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) X1 9 01 CRT1-OD16 CRT1 REMOTE TERMINAL I/O terminal block (removable) Indicator Section Communications Indicators 138 Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 15 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits CRT1-OD16 (NPN) Photocoupler BDH BS− V 24 VDC 0 Internal circuits BDL Physical layer Voltage drop BS+ 1 Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) G CRT1-OD16-1 (PNP) V 24 VDC BS+ Photocoupler BDH 1 BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Voltage drop Internal circuits BDL 0 Physical layer G 139 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Wiring CRT1-OD16 (NPN) 24 VDC 10 11 V 12 1 1 2 G − 13 3 3 0 14 15 5 4 2 7 5 4 16 9 6 6 7 8 18 17 11 15 13 8 10 9 14 12 + I/O power supply Solenoid valve, etc. Solenoid valve, etc. CRT1-OD16-1 (PNP) 24 VDC 10 11 V 1 2 G − 12 1 13 3 3 0 4 2 14 5 15 7 5 4 6 6 16 9 7 8 17 11 8 10 18 13 15 9 12 14 + I/O power supply Solenoid valve, etc. Note 140 Solenoid valve, etc. When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD16 and CRT1-OD16-1) 115 66.9 50.1 58.73 51.6 3.14 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 67.8 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 104.4 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45 25.4 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 83.9 ■ (mm) (mm) 141 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 5-3-5 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block) CRT1-MD16/CRT1-MD16-1 Common Specifications Item Model Installation Communications power supply current consumption Weight Specification CRT1-MD16 CRT1-MD16-1 DIN Track 35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 170 g max. Input Section Specifications Item Specification Model CRT1-MD16 I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Power supply type Note CRT1-MD16-1 8 inputs NPN 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 8 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) Multi-power supply PNP 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators 142 Specification CRT1-MD16 8 outputs NPN 0.5 A/output, 2A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the G terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 8 outputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) CRT1-MD16-1 PNP 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the V terminal) Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Item Power supply type Output handling for communications errors Note Specification Multi-power supply Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-MD16/CRT1-MD16-1) Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Input indicators 0 to 7 Communications connector Output indicators 0 to 7 I/O terminal block (removable) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the I/O indicators are given in the following table. Name LED status 0 to 7 (inputs) Lit yellow. 0 to 7 (outputs) Not lit. Meaning The input or output is ON. The input or output is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 9 0 1 Setting the Node Address I/O status Input or output ON Input or output OFF 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 143 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Internal Circuits CRT1-MD16 (NPN) Photocoupler V1 24 VDC BS+ 0 BDH BDL 1 Physical layer Photocoupler G1 Photocoupler Voltage drop Internal circuits BS- V2 24 VDC 0 DC-DC converter (not isolated) 1 Photocoupler G2 CRT1-MD16-1 (PNP) V1 24 VDC Photocoupler 0 BS+ 1 BDH BDL Physical layer Photocoupler Internal circuits BSG1 V2 24 VDC 0 Photocoupler 1 DC-DC converter (not isolated) Voltage drop Photocoupler 144 G2 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Wiring CRT1-MD16 (NPN) 24 VDC 4 Blue (black) I/O power supply 5 7 6 Brown (white) 2 Brown (red) 0 G1 3 V2 1 0 G2 Blue (black) 1 Black (white) V1 2 5 4 7 6 NC NC I/O power supply Solenoid, valve, etc. Solenoid, valve, etc. 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 3 CRT1-MD16-1 (PNP) 24 VDC 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Note 5 7 6 Blue (black) 4 Brown (red) I/O power supply 2 Blue (black) 0 G1 3 Brown (white) 1 Black (white) V1 V2 G2 1 0 3 2 5 4 NC 7 6 NC I/O power supply 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Solenoid, valve, etc. Solenoid, valve, etc. (1) The V1 and V2 terminals as well as the G1 and G2 terminals of the I/O power supply are not connected internally. Supply power separately for V1-G1 and V2-G2. (2) When using an inductive load, such as a solenoid valve, either use a builtin diode to absorb the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. (3) Wire colors have been changed according to the revised JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The previous colors are shown in parentheses. 145 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Dimensions (Same for CRT1-MD16/CRT1-MD16-1) 115 Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 146 74.4 57.6 60.3 53.2 31.4 52 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 5-3-6 Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with Relay Outputs) CRT1-ROS08 Common Specifications Item Communications power supply voltage Noise immunity Vibration resistance Specification 14 to 26.4 VDC Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV (power line). 10 to 55 Hz with double-amplitude of 0.7 mm Shock resistance Dielectric strength Insulation resistance Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Ambient operating atmosphere Storage temperature Storage humidity Terminal block screws tightening torque 100 m/s2 (3 times in 6 directions on 3 axes) 500 VAC (between isolated circuits) 20 MΩ min. (between isolated circuits) −10 to 55°C 25% to 85% (with no condensation) No corrosive gases −25 to 65°C 25% to 85% (with no condensation) M3 wiring screws: 0.5 N⋅m M3 mounting screws: 0.5 N⋅m Relay Output Section Specifications (per Output) Item Model I/O capacity Mounted Relays Rated load Rated ON current Maximum contact voltage Maximum contact current Maximum switching capacity Minimum applicable load (reference value) Mechanical service life Electrical service life Installation method Communications power supply current consumption Output hold for communications errors Weight Note Specification CRT1-ROS08 8 outputs DRTA-NY5W-K (5 VDC) Resistive load 250 VAC, 2 A, common: 8 A 30 VDC, 2 A, common: 8 A 3A 250 VAC, 125 VDC 3A 750 VA AC, 90 W DC 5 VDC, 1 mA 20,000,000 operations min. 100,000 operations min. DIN Track 95 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 150 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. 170 g max. (1) With a current of between 2 and 3 A (8 to 10 A per common), either ensure that the number of points per common that simultaneously turn ON does not exceed 4 or ensure that the temperature does not exceed 45°C. There are no restrictions if the current does not exceed 2 A (8 A per common). (2) The rated current is the value for assuring normal operation, and not for assuring durability of the relays. The relay service life depends greatly on factors such as the operating temperature, the type of load, and switching 147 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks conditions. The actual equipment must be checked under actual operating conditions. Component Names and Functions Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Output indicators 0 to 7 Communications connector Output relays I/O terminal block (removable) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 7 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 148 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Internal Circuits Photocoupler BS+ DRTA-NY5W-K 5 VDC 0 BDH Physical layer BDL 1 Internal circuits BSPhotocoupler COM DC-DC converter for internal circuits (not isolated) DC-DC converter for relay drive (not isolated) Wiring OUT1 OUT0 OUT3 OUT2 Load Load Load OUT5 OUT4 Load Load OUT7 OUT6 COM0 COM0 Load Load Load 149 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Dimensions 57.6 60.3 53.2 74.4 31.4 50 52 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) 95 Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 150 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Replacing Relays To replace output relays, first remove the cover using the following procedure. (1) Hook your fingers under the handle and bend it upwards. (2) The side will bend out in the direction of the arrow, releasing the hook. (3) Using a tool such as a screwdriver, press down on the relay socket lever and remove the Relay from the socket. The following reference data shows actual measured data from sampling in a production line. There is some variation in relay characteristics, so use this data for reference only. Durability Curve Number of operations (x104) Maximum Switching Capacity Output current (A) Reference Data 5 4 3 2 AC resistive load 1 0.5 500 120-VAC resistive load 300 30 VDC, t = 7 ms 200 240 VAC, COSφ = 0.4 120 VAC, COSφ = 0.4 100 30-VDC/240-VAC resistive load 50 30 20 10 0.4 DC resistive load 5 3 2 0.3 30 VDC, t = 40 ms 0.2 0.1 10 100 to 200 VDC t = 7 to 40 ms 20 30 50 100 200 300 500 1000 Output voltage (V) 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 3 4 5 Output current (A) 151 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 5-3-7 Eight-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with SSR Outputs) CRT1-ROF08 Common Specifications Item Communications power supply voltage Specification 14 to 26.4 VDC Noise immunity Vibration resistance Shock resistance Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV (power line). 10 to 60 Hz with double-amplitude of 0.7 mm, 60 to 150 Hz and 50 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions for 80 min each 150 m/s2 (3 times in 6 directions on 3 axes) Dielectric strength Insulation resistance Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Ambient operating atmosphere Storage temperature Storage humidity Terminal block screws tightening torque 500 VAC (between isolated circuits) 20 MΩ min. (between isolated circuits) −10 to 55°C 25% to 85% (with no condensation) No corrosive gases −25 to 65°C 25% to 85% (with no condensation) M3 wiring screws: 0.5 N⋅m M3 mounting screws: 0.5 N⋅m SSR Output Section Specifications (per Output) Item Model I/O capacity Load voltage Load current Inrush current resistivity Installation method Communications power supply current consumption Output hold for communications errors Weight Note Specification CRT1-ROF08 8 outputs 24 to 265 VAC 0.3 A (See note.) 50 A (60 Hz) DIN Track 60 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 90 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. 160 g max. The SSRs cannot be replaced. Load Current Vs. Ambient Temperature Characteristics 1 Load current (A) 0.8 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.2 0 -30 -20 0 20 40 55 60 80 100 Ambient temperature (˚C) 152 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Component Names and Functions Node address switches: Communications ×10 and ×1 (from left) indicators: Output indicators MS and NS 0 to 7 Communications connector Output SSRs I/O terminal block (removable) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 7 I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 9 0 1 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 153 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Internal Circuits Photocoupler 5 VDC BS+ 0 BDH SSR Physical layer BDL 1 Internal circuits BSSSR Photocoupler COM DC-DC converter for internal circuits (not isolated) DC-DC converter for relay drive (not isolated) Wiring OUT1 OUT5 OUT0 OUT2 OUT4 Load Load Load Load 154 OUT3 Load OUT7 OUT6 Load Load Load COM0 COM0 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Dimensions 57.6 60.3 53.2 74.4 31.4 50 52 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) 95 Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 25.4 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 ■ (mm) (mm) 155 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 5-3-8 Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with Relay Outputs) CRT1-ROS16 Common Specifications Item Communications power supply voltage Noise immunity Vibration resistance Shock resistance Dielectric strength Insulation resistance Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Ambient operating atmosphere Storage temperature Storage humidity Terminal block screws tightening torque Specification 14 to 26.4 VDC Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV (power line). 10 to 55 Hz with double-amplitude of 0.7 mm 100 m/s2 (3 times in 6 directions on 3 axes) 500 VAC (between isolated circuits) 20 MΩ min. (between isolated circuits) −10 to 55°C 25% to 85% (with no condensation) No corrosive gases −25 to 65°C 25% to 85% (with no condensation) M3 wiring screws: 0.5 N⋅m M3 mounting screws: 0.5 N⋅m Relay Output Section Specifications (per Output) Item Specification CRT1-ROS16 16 outputs DRTA-NY5W-K (5 VDC) Resistive load 250 VAC, 2 A, common: 8 A 30 VDC, 2 A, common: 8 A Rated ON current 3A Maximum contact voltage 250 VAC, 125 VDC Maximum contact current 3A Maximum switching capacity 750 VA AC, 90 W DC Minimum applicable load (reference value) 5 VDC, 1 mA Mechanical service life 20,000,000 operations min. Electrical service life 100,000 operations min. Installation method DIN Track Communications power supply current 155 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage consumption 255 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage Output hold for communications errors Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. Weight 260 g max. Model I/O capacity Mounted Relays Rated load Note 156 (1) With a current of between 2 and 3 A (8 to 10 A per common), either ensure that the number of points per common that simultaneously turn ON does not exceed 4 or ensure that the temperature does not exceed 45°C. There are no restrictions if the current does not exceed 2 A (8 A per common). Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks (2) The rated current is the value for assuring normal operation, and not for assuring durability of the relays. The relay service life depends greatly on factors such as the operating temperature, the type of load, and switching conditions. The actual equipment must be checked under actual operating conditions. Component Names and Functions Communications Node address switches: indicators: MS ×10 and ×1 (from left) and NS Communications connector Output indicators 0 to 15 Output relays I/O terminal block (removable) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 15 I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 9 0 1 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 157 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Internal Circuits DRTA-NY5W-K 5 VDC Photocoupler BS+ BDH Physical layer 1 Photocoupler Internal circuits BDL BS− 0 COM0 DRTA-NY5W-K 5 VDC Photocoupler DC-DC converter for internal circuits (not isolated) 8 9 Photocoupler COM1 DC-DC converter for relay drive (not isolated) Wiring OUT1 OUT5 OUT7 OUT0 OUT2 OUT4 OUT6 Load Load Load Load Load 158 OUT3 Load Load Load OUT8 COM0 Load OUT10 OUT12 OUT14 COM1 OUT9 OUT11 OUT13 OUT15 Load Load Load Load Load Load Load AC power supply (DC power supply is also possible.) Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Dimensions 140 74.4 57.6 60.3 53.2 3.14 50 52 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 25.4 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 ■ (mm) (mm) 159 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Replacing Relays To replace output relays, first remove the cover using the following procedure. (1) Hook your fingers under the handle and bend it upwards. (2) The side will bend out in the direction of the arrow, releasing the hook. (3) Using a tool such as a screwdriver, press down on the relay socket lever and remove the Relay from the socket. Reference Data The following reference data shows actual measured data from sampling in a production line. There is some variation in relay characteristics, so use this data for reference only. Durability Curve Number of operations (x104) Output current (A) Maximum Switching Capacity 5 4 3 2 AC resistive load 1 0.5 500 300 200 120-VAC resistive load 30 VDC, t = 7 ms 240 VAC, COSφ = 0.4 120 VAC, COSφ = 0.4 30-VDC/240-VAC resistive load 100 50 30 20 10 0.4 5 3 2 DC resistive load 0.3 30 VDC, t = 40 ms 0.2 0.1 10 100 to 200 VDC t = 7 to 40 ms 20 30 50 100 200 300 500 1000 Output voltage (V) 160 0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1 3 4 5 Output current (A) Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 5-3-9 Sixteen-point Output Units (2-tier Terminal Block with SSR Outputs) CRT1-ROF16 Common Specifications Item Communications power supply voltage Noise immunity Vibration resistance Specification 14 to 26.4 VDC Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV (power line). 10 to 60 Hz with double-amplitude of 0.7 mm, 60 to 150 Hz and 50 m/s2 in X, Y, and Z directions for 80 min each 150 m/s2 (3 times in 6 directions on 3 axes) 500 VAC (between isolated circuits) 20 MΩ min. (between isolated circuits) −10 to 55°C 25% to 85% (with no condensation) No corrosive gases −25 to 65°C 25% to 85% (with no condensation) M3 wiring screws: 0.5 N⋅m M3 mounting screws: 0.5 N⋅m Shock resistance Dielectric strength Insulation resistance Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Ambient operating atmosphere Storage temperature Storage humidity Terminal block screws tightening torque SSR Output Section Specifications (per Output) Item Model I/O capacity Load voltage Load current Inrush current resistivity Installation method Communications power supply current consumption Specification CRT1-ROF16 16 outputs 24 to 265 VAC 0.3 A (See note.) 50 A (60 Hz) DIN Track 85 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 130 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. 250 g max. Output hold for communications errors Weight The SSRs cannot be replaced. Load Current Vs. Ambient Temperature Characteristics 1 0.8 Load current (A) Note 0.6 0.4 0.3 0.2 0 -30 -20 0 20 40 55 60 80 100 Ambient temperature (˚C) 161 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Component Names and Functions Communications Node address switches: indicators: MS ×10 and ×1 (from left) and NS Communications connector Output indicators 0 to 15 Output SSRs I/O terminal block (removable) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 15 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 162 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Internal Circuits 5 VDC Photocoupler BS+ BDH Physical layer BDL 0 SSR 1 BSSSR Internal circuits Photocoupler COM0 5 VDC Photocoupler DC-DC converter for internal circuits (not isolated) 8 SSR 9 SSR Photocoupler COM1 DC-DC converter for relay drive (not isolated) Wiring OUT1 OUT3 OUT5 OUT7 OUT0 OUT2 OUT4 OUT6 Load Load Load Load Load Load Load Load OUT8 COM0 Load OUT10 OUT12 OUT14 COM1 OUT9 OUT1 1 OUT13 OUT15 Load Load Load Load Load Load Load AC power supply (DC power supply is also possible.) 163 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Dimensions 140 Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 164 74.4 57.6 60.3 53.2 3.14 52 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Section 5-3 5-3-10 Eight-point Input Units (3-tier Terminal Block) CRT1-ID08TA/CRT1-ID08TA-1/CRT1-ID08TAH/CRT1-ID08TAH-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Power supply short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Installation Power supply type Current supplied to input devices Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Weight Note Specification CRT1-ID08TA CRT1-ID08TA-1 CRT1-ID08TAH-1 CRT1-ID08TAH-1 8 inputs NPN PNP NPN PNP 15 VDC min. 15 VDC min. 10.5 VDC min. 10.5 VDC min. (between each (between each (between each (between each input terminal and input terminal and input terminal and input terminal and the V terminal) the G terminal) the V terminal) the G terminal) 5 VDC max. 5 VDC max. ----(between each (between each input terminal and input terminal and the V terminal) the G terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. --Operates at 50 mA/point min. --Operates at 0.3 mA/point max. 8 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 100 mA/points 50 mA/point 35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 30 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage voltage 60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 50 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage voltage 5 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage voltage 190 g max. 200 g max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. 165 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID08TA(-1)/CRT1-ID08TAH(-1)) Communications indicators: Node address switches: MS and NS ×10 and ×1 (from left) Communications connector 166 Input indicators 0 to 7 I/O terminal block (removable) Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. The detected status is also shown below for Slave Unit with detection functions. Name 0 to 7 LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. I/O status Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Meaning The power supply is shortcircuited. A line is not connected. CRT1-ID08TAH(-1) Only Name 0 to 7 LED status Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. Setting the Node Address The Unit is operating normally. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits CRT1-ID08TA (NPN) BS+ Physical layer BS- V 24 VDC G Photocoupler Input circuits BDL Internal circuits BDH V Input (0 to 7) G DC-DC converter (not isolated) 167 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks CRT1-ID08TA-1 (PNP) BS+ BDH Physical layer G Internal circuits BS- V 24 VDC Photocoupler Input circuits BDL G Input (0 to 7) V DC-DC converter (not isolated) CRT1-ID08TAH (NPN) G BS+ Physical layer V BS- Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) Input circuits BDL Internal circuits BDH G0 to G7 Input (0 to 7) V G V CRT1-ID08TAH-1 (PNP) V BS+ Physical layer G BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Photocoupler Input circuits BDL Internal circuits BDH V0 to V7 Input (0 to 7) G V G 168 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Wiring CRT1-ID08TA (NPN) V V V V G G G G Blue (black) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Brown (red) 7 Black (white) 1 Blue (black) 0 Brown (white) NC 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) CRT1-ID08TA-1 (PNP) V V V V G G G G Blue (black) Black (white) 7 Brown (red) 1 Blue (black) 0 Brown (white) NC 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) CRT1-ID08TAH (NPN) V V V G G G G 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Black (white) V Brown (red) 7 Blue (black) 1 Blue (black) 0 Brown (white) NC 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 169 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks CRT1-ID08TAH-1 (PNP) V0 V1 V7 G G G G 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Note Brown (red) V Black (white) 7 Blue (black) 1 Blue (black) 0 Brown (white) NC 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) (1) Do not wire NC terminals. (2) Wire colors have been changed according to the revised JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The previous colors are shown in parentheses. 170 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID08TA(-1)/CRT1-ID08TAH(-1)) 68.9 53.2 60.3 93.5 31.4 52 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 105 (mm) Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 25.4 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 ■ (mm) (mm) 171 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Section 5-3 5-3-11 Eight-point Output Units (3-tier Terminal Block) CRT1-OD08TA/CRT1-OD08TA-1/CRT1-OD08TAH/CRT1-OD08TAH-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Load short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Installation Power supply type Current supplied to output devices Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Output handling for communications errors Weight Note 172 Specification CRT1-OD08TA CRT1-OD08TA-1 CRT1-OD08TAH CRT1-OD08TAH-1 8 outputs NPN PNP NPN PNP 0.5 A/output, 2 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each output terminal and output terminal and output terminal and output terminal and the G terminal) the V terminal) the G terminal) the V terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. --Supported. --Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does not operate at over 3 mA.) 8 outputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 100 mA/point 35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 55 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 15 mA max. for 24voltage VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. 35 mA max. for 24VDC power supply voltage 190 g max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD08TA(-1)/CRT1-OD08TAH(-1)) Communications indicators: Node address switches: MS and NS ×10 and ×1 (from left) Communications connector Output indicators 0 to 7 I/O terminal block (removable) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. The detected status is also shown below for Slave Unit with detection functions. Name 0 to 7 LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. I/O status Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Meaning A load short-circuit occurred. A line is not connected. CRT1-OD08TAH(-1) Only Name 0 to 7 LED status Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 9 0 1 Setting the Node Address The Unit is operating normally. 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 173 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Internal Circuits CRT1-OD08TA (NPN) BS+ BDH Voltage drop Physical layer BDL Internal circuits BS- V 24 VDC G V Output (0 to 7) Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) G CRT1-OD08TA-1 (PNP) BS+ BDH Internal circuits BS- Voltage drop Physical layer BDL V 24 VDC G V Output (0 to 7) DC-DC converter (not isolated) G Photocoupler CRT1-OD08TAH (NPN) BS+ G BDH BDL Physical layer Voltage drop V Internal circuits BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Photocoupler Output (0 to 7) G V G V 174 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks CRT1-OD08TAH-1 (PNP) BS+ V BDH G Physical layer BDL Voltage drop Internal circuits BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Output (0 to 7) V G V G Wiring CRT1-OD08TA/ CRT1-OD08TAH (NPN) 1 7 V V V V G G G G Solenoid valve, etc. Brown (red) Pink (white) 0 Blue (black) NC 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) 1 7 V V V V G G G G Solenoid valve, etc. Note Brown (red) 0 Blue (black) NC Pink (white) CRT1-OD08TA-1/ CRT1-OD08TAH-1 (PNP) 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) (1) When using an inductive load, such as a solenoid valve, either use a builtin diode to absorb the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. (2) Use a maximum current of 500 mA for each V and G terminal accept for the I/O power supply terminals. (3) Do not wire NC terminals. 175 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD08TA(-1)/CRT1-OD08TAH(-1)) 60.3 53.2 68.9 93.5 31.4 52 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 105 (mm) Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 176 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 5-3-12 Sixteen-point Input Units (3-tier Terminal Block) CRT1-ID16TA/CRT1-ID16TA-1/CRT1-ID16TAH/CRT1-ID16TAH-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage CRT1-ID16TA 16 inputs NPN 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Power supply short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Installation Power supply type Current supplied to input devices Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Weight Specification CRT1-ID16TA-1 CRT1-ID16TAH PNP 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. ----8 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 100 mA/points 40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 55 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 5 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 330 g max. Note NPN 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) --- CRT1-ID16TAH-1 PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) --- Operates at 50 mA/point min. Operates at 0.3 mA/point max. 50 mA/points 40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 70 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 340 g max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. 177 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID16TA(-1)/CRT1-ID16TAH(-1)) Communications indicators: Node address switches: MS and NS ×10 and ×1 (from left) Input indicators 0 to 15 I/O terminal block (removable) Communications connector Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions. Name 0 to 15 LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. CRT1-ID16TAH(-1) Only Name 0 to 15 LED status Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. Setting the Node Address I/O status Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Meaning The power supply is short-circuited. A line is not connected. The Unit is operating normally. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 178 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Internal Circuits CRT1-ID16TA (NPN) V1 24 VDC Photocoupler BDL Physical layer BS- Input circuits BDH G1 Internal circuits BS+ V1 0 to 7 G1 V2 24 VDC G2 Input circuits Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) V2 8 to 15 G2 CRT1-ID16TA-1 (PNP) G1 BS- Input circuits G1 0 to 7 V1 G2 V2 24 VDC Photocoupler Input circuits BDL Physical layer Internal circuits BDH V1 24 VDC Photocoupler BS+ DC-DC converter (not isolated) G2 8 to 15 V2 CRT1-ID16TAH (NPN) G V BS+ Physical layer BS- V G V G V DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Input circuits BDL G0 to G7 Input (0 to 7) Internal circuits BDH Input circuits Photocoupler Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit G8 to G15 Input (8 to 15) V G V 179 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks CRT1-ID16TAH-1 (PNP) V G Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Input circuits Photocoupler BS+ BDH Physical layer Input (0 to 7) G Internal circuits BDL BS- V0 to V7 V G V G DC-DC converter (not isolated) Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Input circuits Photocoupler V8 to V15 Input (8 to 15) G V G Wiring CRT1-ID16TA (NPN) 15 V1 V1 V1 V1 V2 V2 V2 V2 G1 G1 G1 G1 G2 G2 G2 G2 Blue (black) Black (white) Blue (black) 3-wire sensor with 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Brown (red) 9 Black (white) 8 Blue (black) NC Brown (white) 7 Brown (red) 1 Blue (black) 0 Brown (white) NC 3-wire sensor with 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) CRT1-ID16TA-1 (PNP) V1 V1 V2 V2 V2 V2 G1 G1 G1 G1 G2 G2 G2 G2 3-wire sensor with 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 180 Black (white) V1 Brown (red) V1 Blue (black) 15 Blue (black) 9 Brown (white) 8 Black (white) NC Brown (red) 7 Blue (black) 1 Blue (black) 0 Brown (white) NC 3-wire sensor with 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks CRT1-ID16TAH (NPN) 9 15 V V V V V V V V G G0 G1 G7 G G8 G9 G15 Blue (black) Brown (white) Blue (black) Brown (white) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Black (white) 8 Brown (red) NC Blue (black) 7 Black (white) 1 Brown (red) 0 Blue (black) NC 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) CRT1-ID16TAH-1 (PNP) V1 V7 V V8 V9 V15 G G G G G G G G 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Note 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Black (white) V0 Brown (red) V Blue (black) 15 Blue (black) 9 Brown (white) 8 Black (white) NC Brown (red) 7 Blue (black) 1 Blue (black) 0 Brown (white) NC 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) (1) The V terminals on the left and right for the I/O power supply, and the G terminals on the left and right for the I/O power supply are not connected internally. Supply power separately for V-G terminals on the left side and the right side. (2) Do not wire NC terminals. (3) Wire colors have been changed according to the revised JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The previous colors are shown in parentheses. 181 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID16TA(-1)/CRT1-ID16TAH(-1)) 60.3 53.2 180 Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 182 93.5 68.9 3.14 50 52 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Section 5-3 5-3-13 Sixteen-point Output Units (3-tier Terminal Block) CRT1-OD16TA/CRT1-OD16TA-1/CRT1-OD16TAH/CRT1-OD16TAH-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Specification CRT1-OD16TA CRT1-OD16TA-1 CRT1-OD16TAH CRT1-OD16TAH-1 16 outputs NPN PNP NPN PNP 0.5 A/output, 2 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each output terminal and output terminal and output terminal and output terminal and the G terminal) the V terminal) the G terminal) the V terminal) Leakage current 0.1 mA max. ON delay 0.5 ms max. OFF delay 1.5 ms max. Number of circuits per common 8 outputs/common Load short-circuit detection --Supported. Disconnection detection --Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does not operate at over 3 mA.) Isolation method Photocoupler Output indicators LED (yellow) Installation DIN Track Power supply type Multi-power supply Current supplied to output 100 mA/points devices Communications power supply 45 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply current consumption voltage voltage 65 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 70 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage voltage I/O power supply current con15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 15 mA max. for 24- 35 mA max. for 24sumption voltage VDC power supply VDC power supply voltage voltage Output handling for communi- Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. cations errors Weight 330 g max. Note Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. 183 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD16TA(-1)/CRT1-OD16TAH(-1)) Communications Node address switches: indicators: ×10 and ×1 (from left) MS and NS Communications connector 184 Output indicators 0 to 15 I/O terminal block (removable) Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions. Name 0 to 15 LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. I/O status Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Meaning A load short-circuit occurred. A line is not connected. CRT1-OD16TAH(-1) Only Name 0 to 15 LED status Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. Setting the Node Address The Unit is operating normally. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits Voltage drop CRT1-OD16TA (NPN) BS+ BS- Output (0 to 7) Photocoupler G1 Voltage drop BDL 24 VDC V1 Physical layer Internal circuits BDH V1 G1 DC-DC converter (not isolated) V2 24 VDC G2 V2 Output (8 to 15) Photocoupler G2 185 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Voltage drop CRT1-OD16TA-1 (PNP) Physical layer G1 Output (0 to 7) BS- G1 Photocoupler Voltage drop Internal circuits BDL 24 VDC V1 BS+ BDH V1 V2 24 VDC G2 V2 DC-DC converter (not isolated) Output (8 to 15) G2 Photocoupler CRT1-OD16TAH (NPN) G1 V1 Voltage drop BS+ BDH BDL Physical layer Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Photocoupler BS- Output (0 to 7) DC-DC converter (not isolated) Internal circuits G1 V1 G1 V1 G2 Voltage drop Photocoupler V2 Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Output (8 to 15) G2 V2 G2 V2 186 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks CRT1-OD16TAH-1 (PNP) V1 Voltage drop BS+ Physical layer BDH G1 Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit BDL Photocoupler Output (0 to 7) Internal circuits BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) V1 G1 V1 G1 V2 G2 Voltage drop Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Photocoupler Output (8 to 15) V2 G2 V2 G2 Wiring CRT1-OD16TA/ CRT1-OD16TAH (NPN) 8 9 15 V1 V1 V1 V1 V2 V2 V2 V2 G1 G1 G1 G1 G2 G2 G2 G2 Solenoid valve, etc. 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Blue (black) Solenoid valve, etc. Brown (red) NC Pink (white) 7 Brown (red) 1 Pink (white) 0 Blue (black) NC 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) 187 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 7 NC 8 9 15 V1 V1 V1 V1 V2 V2 V2 V2 G1 G1 G1 G1 G2 G2 G2 G2 Solenoid valve, etc. Note Blue (black) Brown (red) 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Solenoid valve, etc. Brown (red) 1 Pink (white) 0 Pink (white) NC Blue (black) CRT1-OD16TA-1/ CRT1-OD16TAH-1 (PNP) 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) (1) The V1 and V2 terminals as well as the G1 and G2 terminals of the I/O power supply are not connected internally. Supply power separately for V1-G1 and V2-G2. (2) Use a maximum current of 500 mA for each V1, V2, G1, and G2 terminal aside from the I/O power supply terminals. (3) When using an inductive load, such as a solenoid valve, either use a builtin diode to absorb the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. (4) Do not wire NC terminals. Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD16TA(-1)/CRT1-OD16TAH(-1)) 60.3 53.2 180 Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) 188 93.5 68.9 3.14 50 52 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 25.4 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 ■ (mm) (mm) 189 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 5-3-14 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (3-tier Terminal Block) CRT1-MD16TA/CRT1-MD16TA-1/CRT1-MD16TAH/CRT1-MD16TAH-1 Common Specifications Item Model Installation Communications power supply current consumption Specification CRT1-MD16TA CRT1-MD16TA-1 CRT1-MD16TAH CRT1-MD16TAH-1 DIN Track 40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage voltage 60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 70 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage voltage 330 g max. 340 g max. Weight Input Section Specifications Item Specification CRT1-MD16TA-1 CRT1-MD16TAH Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Power supply short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Power supply type Current supplied to input devices I/O power supply current consumption Note 190 CRT1-MD16TA 8 inputs NPN PNP 15 VDC min. 15 VDC min. (between each (between each input terminal and input terminal and the G terminal) the V terminal) 5 VDC max. 5 VDC max. (between each (between each input terminal and input terminal and the G terminal) the V terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. ----8 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) Multi-power supply 100 mA/points 5 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage NPN 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) --- CRT1-MD16TAH-1 PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) --- Operates at 50 mA/point min. Operates at 0.3 mA/point max. 50 mA/points 25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Specification CRT1-MD16TA CRT1-MD16TA-1 CRT1-MD16TAH CRT1-MD16TAH-1 8 outputs NPN PNP NPN PNP 0.5 A/output, 2 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each output terminal output terminal output terminal output terminal and the G termiand the V terminal) and the G termiand the V terminal) nal) nal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. --Supported. --Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does not operate at over 3 mA.) 8 outputs/common Photocoupler Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Load short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Power supply type Current supplied to output devices I/O power supply current consumption LED (yellow) Multi-power supply 100 mA/points Output handling for communications errors Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. Note 15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 35 mA max. for 24VDC power supply voltage Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-MD16TA(-1)/CRT1-MD16TAH(-1)) Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Input indicators 0 to 7 Communications connector Output indicators 0 to 7 I/O terminal block (removable) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. 191 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks I/O Indicators The meanings of the I/O indicators are given in the following table. The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions. Name LED status 0 to 7 (inputs) Lit yellow. 0 to 7 (outputs) Not lit. I/O status Input or output ON Input or output OFF Meaning The input or output is ON. The input or output is OFF. CRT1-MD16TAH(-1) Only Name 0 to 7 (inputs) LED status Lit red. I/O status Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Flashing red. Not lit. 0 to 7 (outputs) Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. Setting the Node Address Meaning The power supply is shortcircuited. A line is not connected. The Unit is operating normally. A load short-circuit occurred. A line is not connected. The Unit is operating normally. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits CRT1-MD16TA (NPN) V1 24 VDC BS+ BS- V1 0 to 7 G1 Voltage drop BDL Physical layer Internal circuits BDH Input circuits G1 Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) V2 24 VDC G2 V2 0 to 7 Photocoupler G2 192 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks CRT1-MD16TA-1 (PNP) V1 G1 BS+ BDH Photocoupler 0 to 7 G1 V2 Voltage drop BS- Input circuits V1 Physical layer Internal circuits BDL 24 VDC 24 VDC G2 DC-DC converter (not isolated) V2 0 to 7 G2 Photocoupler CRT1-MD16TAH (NPN) V BS+ BDL G Physical layer Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Internal circuits Photocoupler Input circuits BDH V0 to V7 0 to 7 G V G Voltage drop Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Photocoupler 0 to 7 V G 193 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks CRT1-MD16TAH-1 (PNP) V BS+ G BDH Physical layer BDL Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit BSInternal circuits Input circuits Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) V0 to V7 0 to 7 G V G Voltage drop Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Photocoupler 0 to 7 V G Wiring CRT1-MD16TA (NPN) Input Output 7 V1 V1 V1 V1 V2 V2 V2 V2 G1 G1 G1 G1 G2 G2 G2 G2 Blue (black) Blue (black) Solenoid valve, etc. 3-wire sensor with 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Brown (red) 1 Pink (white) 0 Brown (red) NC Black (white) 7 Blue (black) 1 Brown (white) NC 0 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) CRT1-MD16TA-1 (PNP) Input Output 7 V1 V1 V1 V1 V2 V2 V2 V2 G1 G1 G1 G1 G2 G2 G2 G2 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 194 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Blue (black) Solenoid valve, etc. Pink (white) 1 Brown (red) 0 Black (white) NC Brown (red) 7 Blue (black) 1 Blue (black) 0 Brown (white) NC 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks CRT1-MD16TAH (NPN) Input Output 1 7 V V V V V V V V G G0 G1 G7 G G G G Black (white) Brown (white) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Solenoid valve, etc. 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Pink (white) 0 Brown (red) NC Blue (black) 7 Brown (red) 1 Blue (black) 0 Blue (black) NC 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) CRT1-MD16TAH-1 (PNP) Input Output 7 V V0 V1 V7 V V V V G G G G G G G G 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Note Black (white) 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Solenoid valve, etc. Pink (white) 1 Brown (red) 0 Blue (black) NC Brown (red) 7 Blue (black) 1 Blue (black) 0 Brown (white) NC 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) (1) The V1 and V2 terminals as well as the G1 and G2 terminals of the I/O power supply are not connected internally. Supply power separately for V1-G1 and V2-G2. (2) Use a maximum current of 500 mA for each V1, V2, G1, and G2 terminal aside from the I/O power supply terminals on the output side. (3) When using an inductive load, such as a solenoid valve, either use a builtin diode to absorb the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. (4) Do not wire NC terminals. (5) Wire colors have been changed according to the revised JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The previous colors are shown in parentheses. 195 Section 5-3 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Dimensions (Same for CRT1-MD16TA(-1)/CRT1-MD16TAH(-1)) 60.3 53.2 180 Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 196 93.5 68.9 3.14 50 52 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4 5-4-1 Units with Connectors Eight-point Input Units (e-CON Connectors) CRT1-VID08S/CRT1-VID08S-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Installation Power supply type Power short-circuit protection Current supplied to input devices Communications power supply current consumption Weight Note Specification CRT1-VID08S 8 inputs NPN 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 11 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. CRT1-VID08S-1 PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) 1.5 ms max. 8 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track or Mounting Bracket Network power supply Operates at 50 mA/point min. 50 mA/input 35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 50 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 80 g max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. 197 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VID08S and CRT1-VID08S-1) Front Top Bottom (Mounted side) 4 01 56 789 23 4 01 56 789 23 Communications connector Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 from mounted side Input indicators 0 to 7 Communications indicators: MS and NS I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 7 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 5 2 3 4 6 2 3 4 198 1s digit of node address 7 8 5 (Front side) 10s digit of node address 9 0 1 6 7 8 9 0 1 (Mounted side) Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Internal Circuits Physical layer BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) Internal circuits BDL Photocoupler Photocoupler Input circuits BS+ BDH Input circuits CRT1-VID08S (NPN) Short protection Short protection V NC G0 IN0 V NC G1 IN1 CRT1-VID08S-1 (PNP) BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Photocoupler V0 NC G IN0 Short protection V1 NC G IN1 Input circuits Physical layer Input circuits BDL Internal circuits BS+ BDH Short protection 199 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Wiring CRT1-VID08S (NPN) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Blue (Black) 2 1 IN0 G0 NC V IN1 G1 NC V IN2 G2 NC V IN3 G3 NC V IN4 G4 NC V IN5 G5 NC V IN6 G6 NC V IN7 G7 NC V 4 3 2 IN0 G NC V0 IN1 G NC V1 IN2 G NC V2 IN3 G NC V3 IN4 G NC V4 IN5 G NC V5 IN6 G NC V6 IN7 G NC V7 3 4 Brown (White) Black (White) Blue (Black) Brown (Red) 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) CRT1-VID08S-1 (PNP) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Blue (Black) Brown (White) Black (White) 1 Blue (Black) Brown (Red) 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Note 200 Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VID08S and CRT1-VID08S-1) 90 5.3 60 66.2 23 (101.7) 96.7 (90) (102) 6.4 85.7 92.8 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted The numbers inside the parentheses are reference dimensions. (mm) Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable 99.9 When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 25.4 ■ (mm) 201 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 37 136.5 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 10 48 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 25.4 116 ■ (mm) (mm) 202 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4-2 Eight-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors) CRT1-VOD08S/CRT1-VOD08S-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Specification CRT1-VOD08S Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Installation Power supply type Current supplied to output devices Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Output handling for communications errors Weight Note 8 outputs NPN 0.3 A/output, 2 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each output terminal and the G terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 8 outputs/common CRT1-VOD08S-1 PNP 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each output terminal and the V terminal) Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track or Mounting Bracket Multi-power supply 100 mA/output 40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. 80 g max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. 203 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VOD08S and CRT1-VOD08S-1) Front Top Bottom (Mounted side) 23 4 01 56 789 23 4 01 56 789 Communications connector Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 from mounted side Output indicators 0 to 7 Communications indicators: MS and NS Output I/O power supply connector I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 7 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 5 2 3 4 6 2 3 4 204 1s digit of node address 7 8 5 (Front side) 10s digit of node address 9 0 1 6 7 8 9 0 1 (Mounted side) Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Internal Circuits CRT1-VOD08S (NPN) V G Voltage drop V NC G OUT0 BS+ Photocoupler BDH Internal circuits BDL Physical layer BS− V NC G OUT1 Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) CRT1-VOD08S-1 (PNP) V G V NC G OUT0 BS+ BDH Physical layer Photocoupler Internal circuits BDL BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) V NC G OUT1 Photocoupler Voltage drop 205 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Wiring CRT1-VOD08S (NPN) Solenoid valve, etc. 4 OUT 0 Pink (white) 1 3 2 G NC V OUT 1 G NC V OUT 2 G NC V OUT 3 G NC V OUT 4 G NC V OUT 5 G NC V OUT 6 G NC V OUT 7 G NC V V G Blue (black) Brown (red) 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) CRT1-VOD08S-1 (PNP) Solenoid valve, etc. 4 OUT 0 Pink (white) 3 G 2 1 NC V OUT 1 G NC V OUT 2 G NC V OUT 3 G NC V OUT 4 G NC V OUT 5 G NC V OUT 6 G NC V OUT 7 G NC V V G Blue (black) Brown (red) 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Note 206 When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VOD08S and CRT1-VOD08S-1) 23 60 66.2 5.3 90 (101.7) 96.7 (90) (102) 6.4 85.7 92.8 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted The numbers inside the parentheses are reference dimensions. (mm) Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable 99.9 When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 25.4 ■ (mm) 207 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 37 136.5 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 10 48 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 25.4 116 ■ (mm) (mm) 208 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4-3 Sixteen-point Input Units (e-CON Connectors) CRT1-ID16S/CRT1-ID16S-1/CRT1-ID16SH/CRT1-ID16SH-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Power supply short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Installation Power supply type Power short-circuit protection Current supplied to input devices Communications power supply current consumption Weight Note Specification CRT1-ID16S CRT1-ID16S-1 CRT1-ID16SH CRT1-ID16SH-1 16 inputs NPN PNP NPN PNP 10.5 VDC min. 10.5 VDC min. 10.5 VDC min. 10.5 VDC min. (between each (between each (between each (between each input terminal and input terminal and input terminal and input terminal and the V terminal) the G terminal) the V terminal) the G terminal) 1 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 11 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. --Operates at 50 mA/point min. --16 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Network power supply Operates at 50 mA/point min. 50 mA/input 110 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 125 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 110 g max. Operates at 0.3 mA/point max. 125 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 145 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID16S(-1) and CRT1-ID16SH(-1)) Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Input indicators 0 to 15 Communications connector I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) 209 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions. Name 0 to 15 LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. CRT1-ID16SH(-1) Only Name 0 to 15 LED status Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. Setting the Node Address I/O status Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Meaning The power supply is short-circuited. A line is not connected. The Unit is operating normally. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits CRT1-ID16S (NPN) Physical layer BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) 210 Input circuits BDL Photocoupler Photocoupler Internal circuits BDH Input circuits BS+ Short protection V NC G0 IN0 V Short protection NC G1 IN1 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors CRT1-ID16S-1 (PNP) Short protection BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Short protection Photocoupler Input circuits BDL Physical layer Internal circuits BDH Input circuits BS+ V0 NC G IN0 V1 NC G IN1 BDL Physical layer BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Internal circuits BDH Photocoupler Input circuits BS+ Input circuits CRT1-ID16SH (NPN) Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit V NC G0 IN0 V NC G1 IN1 CRT1-ID16SH-1 (PNP) BDL Physical layer BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Internal circuits BDH Photocoupler Input circuits BS+ Input circuits Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit V0 NC G IN0 Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit V1 NC G IN1 211 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G0 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 4 IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 1 V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 4 IN 8 IN 9 Blue (Black) Brown (White) 3 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) CRT1-ID16S-1/ CRT1-ID16SH-1 (PNP) Blue (Black) IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G G G G G G G G 4 IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 1 V8 V9 V10 V11 V12 V13 V14 V15 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G G G G G G G G IN 8 IN 9 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 3 Brown (White) IN 12 V1 2 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 3 4 212 IN 11 V0 1 Note IN 10 Blue (Black) V Black (White) V 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Blue (Black) V Black (White) 1 Brown (Red) CRT1-ID16S/ CRT1-ID16SH (NPN) Brown (Red) Wiring 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID16S(-1) and CRT1-ID16SH(-1)) 60.3 53.2 52 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) 95 Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 25.4 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 ■ (mm) (mm) 213 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4-4 Sixteen-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors) CRT1-OD16S/CRT1-OD16S-1/CRT1-OD16SH/CRT1-OD16SH-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Load short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Installation Power supply type Current supplied to output devices Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Specification CRT1-OD16S CRT1-OD16S-1 CRT1-OD16SH 16 outputs NPN PNP NPN 0.5 A/output, 4 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each output terminal and output terminal and output terminal and the G terminal) the V terminal) the G terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. --Supported. --- CRT1-OD16SH-1 PNP 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the V terminal) Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does not operate at over 3 mA.) 16 outputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 100 mA/output 40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 65 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 15 mA max. for 24- 60 mA max. for 24VDC power supply VDC power supply voltage voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. 40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 20 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage Output handling for communications errors Weight 110 g max. Note 214 Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD16S(-1) and CRT1-OD16SH(-1)) Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Communications connector Output indicators 0 to 15 I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) Output I/O power supply connector Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions. Name 0 to 15 LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. I/O status Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Meaning A load short-circuit occurred. A line is not connected. CRT1-OD16SH(-1) Only Name 0 to 15 LED status Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 9 0 1 Setting the Node Address The Unit is operating normally. 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 215 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Internal Circuits CRT1-OD16S (NPN) V V G G BS+ Voltage drop BDH BDL Physical layer Photocoupler V NC G OUT0 Internal circuits BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Voltage drop Photocoupler V NC G OUT1 CRT1-OD16S-1 (PNP) BS+ BDH BDL V V G G Physical layer BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Internal circuits Photocoupler V NC G OUT0 Voltage drop V NC G OUT1 Photocoupler Voltage drop 216 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors CRT1-OD16SH (NPN) V V G G BS+ BDL Voltage drop Physical layer BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Internal circuits BDH Voltage drop Photocoupler Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit V NC G OUT0 V NC G OUT1 CRT1-OD16SH-1 (PNP) BS+ BDH BDL V V G G Physical layer DC-DC converter (not isolated) Internal circuits BSDisconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Photocoupler V NC G OUT0 Voltage drop Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit V NC G OUT1 Photocoupler Voltage drop 217 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Wiring CRT1-OD16S/ CRT1-OD16SH (NPN) 1 V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G G G G G G G G Brown (red) V V V V V V V NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G G G G G G G G V G 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Brown (red) G 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Solenoid valve, etc. CRT1-OD16S-1/ CRT1-OD16SH-1 (PNP) 1 V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G G G G G G G G 3 Pink (white) Connection can be made to either G terminal. V 2 V Blue (black) Connection can be made to either V terminal. Pink (white) 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Solenoid valve, etc. 1 Blue (black) 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G G G G G G G G V V G 3 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Brown (red) G Solenoid valve, etc. Note Pink (white) Connection can be made to either G terminal. 1 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Blue (black) Connection can be made to either V terminal. Pink (white) Brown (red) Solenoid valve, etc. Blue (black) 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) (1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. (2) Two V terminals and two G terminals are provided for use as I/O power supply terminals. One set of terminals is used for the power supply for the Unit, and the other set is used for the supply power to the next Unit. Use a maximum current of 4 A per terminal. 218 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD16S(-1) and CRT1-OD16SH(-1)) 60.3 53.2 52 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) 95 Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 25.4 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 ■ (mm) (mm) 219 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4-5 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors) CRT1-MD16S/CRT1-MD16S-1/CRT1-MD16SH/CRT1-MD16SH-1 Common Specifications Item Model Installation Communications power supply current consumption Weight Specification CRT1-MD16S CRT1-MD16S-1 CRT1-MD16SH CRT1-MD16SH-1 DIN Track 75 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 60 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage voltage 95 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 90 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage voltage 120 g max. Input Section Specifications Item Specification CRT1-MD16S-1 CRT1-MD16SH Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage CRT1-MD16S 8 inputs NPN PNP 10.5 VDC min. 10.5 VDC min. (between each (between each input terminal and input terminal and the G terminal) the V terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 11 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Power supply short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Power supply type Power short-circuit protection Current supplied to input devices Note 220 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. ----8 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) Network power supply Operates at 50 mA/point min. 50 mA/input NPN 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) CRT1-MD16SH-1 PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) Operates at 50 mA/point min. Operates at 0.3 mA/point max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Load short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Power supply type Current supplied to output devices I/O power supply current consumption Output handling for communications errors Note Specification CRT1-MD16S CRT1-MD16S-1 CRT1-MD16SH CRT1-MD16SH-1 8 outputs NPN PNP NPN PNP 0.5 A/output, 2 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between DC, between DC, between DC, between each output tereach output tereach output tereach output terminal and the G minal and the V minal and the G minal and the V terminal) terminal) terminal) terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. --Supported. --Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does not operate at over 3 mA.) 8 outputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) Multi-power supply 100 mA/output 15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-MD16S(-1)/CRT1-MD16SH(-1)) Communications indicators: Node address switches: MS and NS ×10 and ×1 (from left) Input (upper) and output (lower) indicators 0 to 7 Input Output Communications connector I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) Output I/O power supply connector Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. 221 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors I/O Indicators The meanings of the I/O indicators are given in the following table. The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions. Name LED status 0 to 7 (inputs) Lit yellow. 0 to 7 (outputs) Not lit. I/O status Input or output ON Input or output OFF Meaning The input or output is ON. I/O status Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Meaning The power supply is short-circuited. A line is not connected. Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status A load short-circuit occurred. The input or output is OFF. CRT1-MD16SH(-1) Only Name 0 to 7 (inputs) LED status Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. 0 to 7 (outputs) Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. Setting the Node Address The Unit is operating normally. A line is not connected. The Unit is operating normally. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 222 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Internal Circuits CRT1-MD16S (NPN) BDH BDL Input circuits BS+ Photocoupler Physical layer Internalcircuits circuits Internal BS− Short protection Voltage drop V1 NC G0 IN0 V NC G OUT0 Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) V V G G CRT1-MD16S-1 (PNP) BDH BDL Physical layer Input circuits BS+ Photocoupler Internal circuits BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) Short protection V0 NC G1 IN0 V V G G Photocoupler V NC G OUT0 Voltage drop 223 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors CRT1-MD16SH (NPN) BDH BDL Physical layer Input circuits BS+ Photocoupler Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit V1 NC G0 IN0 Internal circuits BS− Voltage drop V NC G OUT0 Photocoupler Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit DC-DC converter (not isolated) V V G G CRT1-MD16SH-1 (PNP) BDH BDL Input circuits BS+ Photocoupler Physical layer Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Internal circuits BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) V V G G Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit V NC G OUT0 Photocoupler Voltage drop 224 V0 NC G1 IN0 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Wiring V1 V1 V1 V1 V1 V1 V1 V1 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G0 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 3 Brown (Red) Blue (Black) Brown (White) 4 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) V 1 V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G G G G G G G G G G Solenoid valve, etc. Blue (black) 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Brown (red) Connection can be made to either G terminal. V Pink (white) Connection can be made to either V terminal. Blue (Black) 1 Black (White) CRT1-MD16S CRT1-MD16SH (NPN) 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) 225 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 2 3 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 G1 IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 Brown (Red) Blue (Black) Brown (White) 4 V0 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Connection can be made to either V terminal. Connection can be made to either G terminal. V Blue (Black) 1 Black (White) CRT1-MD16S-1/ CRT1-MD16SH-1 (PNP) 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 1 V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G G G G G G G G V G G Note Blue (black) Brown (red) Solenoid valve, etc. Pink (white) 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) (1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. (2) Two V terminals and two G terminals are provided for use as I/O power supply terminals. One set of terminals is used for the power supply for the Unit, and the other set is used for the supply power to the next Unit. Use a maximum current of 4 A per terminal. (3) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. 226 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1-MD16S(-1)/CRT1-MD16SH(-1)) 60.3 53.2 50 52 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 95 (mm) Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 25.4 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 ■ (mm) (mm) 227 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4-6 Thirty-two-point Input Units (e-CON Connectors) CRT1-ID32S/CRT1-ID32S-1/CRT1-ID32SH/CRT1-ID32SH-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Power supply short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Installation Power supply type Power short-circuit protection Current supplied to input devices Communications power supply current consumption Weight Note Specification CRT1-ID32S CRT1-ID32S-1 CRT1-ID32SH CRT1-ID32SH-1 32 inputs NPN PNP NPN PNP 10.5 VDC min. 10.5 VDC min. 10.5 VDC min. 10.5 VDC min. (between each (between each (between each (between each input terminal and input terminal and input terminal and input terminal and the V terminal) the G terminal) the V terminal) the G terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 11 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. --Operates at 50 mA/point min. --32 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Network power supply Operates at 50 mA/point min. 50 mA/input 195 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 200 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 180 g max. Operates at 0.3 mA/point max. 210 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 235 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID32S(-1) and CRT1-ID32SH(-1)) Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Communications indicators: MS and NS Communications connector 228 Input indicators 0 to 15 (IN1) Input indicators 0 to 15 (IN2) I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions. Name LED status 0 to 15 (IN1) Lit yellow. 0 to 15 (IN2) Not lit. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Input OFF The input is OFF. CRT1-ID32SH(-1) Only Name 0 to 15 (IN1) 0 to 15 (IN2) LED status Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. Setting the Node Address I/O status Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Meaning The power supply is short-circuited. A line is not connected. The Unit is operating normally. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits BDL Physical layer BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Internal circuits BDH Photocoupler Input circuits BS+ Input circuits CRT1-ID32S (NPN) Short protection Short protection V NC G0 IN0 V NC G1 IN1 229 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors BDL Physical layer BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Internal circuits BDH Photocoupler Short protection V0 NC G IN0 Short protection V1 NC G IN1 Input circuits BS+ Input circuits CRT1-ID32S-1 (PNP) CRT1-ID32SH (NPN) BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Input circuits BDL Physical layer Photocoupler Internal circuits BDH Input circuits BS+ Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit V NC G0 IN0 V NC G1 IN1 CRT1-ID32SH-1 (PNP) BDL Physical layer BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) 230 Photocoupler Internal circuits BDH Photocoupler Input circuits BS+ Input circuits Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit V0 NC G IN0 V1 NC G IN1 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Wiring CRT1-ID32S/ CRT1-ID32SH (NPN) Left side V V V V V V 1 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 2 G0 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 4 IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 1 V V V V V V V V NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 4 IN 8 IN 9 V0 V1 V2 V3 2 NC NC NC NC IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 V4 V5 V6 V7 NC NC NC NC IN 15 Blue (black) Brown (white) Blue (black) Black (white) 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) V V V V V V V NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G0 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 4 IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 1 V V V V V V V V NC NC NC NC NC 3 Brown (red) Blue (black) 2 NC 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) V 2 NC 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) NC NC 3 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 4 IN 8 IN 9 IN 10 V0 V1 V2 V3 V4 V5 V6 V7 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 Black (white) Blue (black) V Brown (red) V 3 Brown (white) Right side 1 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) CRT1-ID32S-1/ CRT1-ID32SH-1 (PNP) G G G G G IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 1 V8 V9 V10 V11 V12 V13 V14 V15 2 NC 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 3 G NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G G G G G G G IN 8 IN 9 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 4 Note 3 4 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) G G G G G G G G IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 1 V8 V9 V10 V11 V12 V13 V14 V15 2 NC 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 3 G NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G G G G G G G IN 8 IN 9 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 4 Black (White) Blue (Black) G IN 2 Blue (Black) G IN 1 Brown (White) G IN 0 Black (White) Blue (Black) Blue (Black) Brown (White) 4 Brown (Red) 3 1 Brown (Red) Right side Left side 1 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. 231 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID32S(-1) and CRT1-ID32SH(-1)) 60.3 53.2 3.14 50 52 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 160 (mm) Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 232 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4-7 Thirty-two-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors) CRT1-OD32S/CRT1-OD32S-1/CRT1-OD32SH/CRT1-OD32SH-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Load short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Installation Power supply type Current supplied to output devices Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Specification CRT1-OD32S CRT1-OD32S-1 CRT1-OD32SH 32 outputs NPN PNP NPN 0.5 A/output, 4 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each DC, between each DC, between each output terminal and output terminal and output terminal and the G terminal) the V terminal) the G terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. --Supported. --- CRT1-OD32SH-1 PNP 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the V terminal) Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does not operate at over 3 mA.) 16 outputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 100 mA/output 50 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 50 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage voltage 90 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 80 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage voltage 15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 60 mA max. for 24VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. Output handling for communications errors Weight 170 g max. Note Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. 233 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD32S(-1) and CRT1-OD32SH(-1)) Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Communications indicators: MS and NS Output indicators 0 to 15 (OUT1) Output indicators 0 to 15 (OUT2) I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) Communications connector Output I/O power supply connector Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions. Name LED status 0 to 15 (OUT1) Lit yellow. 0 to 15 (OUT2) Not lit. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Output OFF The output is OFF. I/O status Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Meaning A load short-circuit occurred. A line is not connected. CRT1-OD32SH(-1) Only Name LED status 0 to 15 (OUT1) Lit red. 0 to 15 (OUT2) Flashing red. Not lit. Setting the Node Address The Unit is operating normally. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 234 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Internal Circuits CRT1-OD32S (NPN) V V G G BS+ BDH BDL Voltage drop Physical layer Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) Internal circuits BS- V NC G OUT0 Left side V V G G Voltage drop Photocoupler V NC G OUT0 Right side CRT1-OD32S-1 (PNP) V V G G BS+ BDH BDL Physical layer Photocoupler BS- V NC Left side G OUT0 DC-DC converter (not isolated) Internal circuits Voltage drop V V G G Photocoupler V NC G OUT0 Right side Voltage drop 235 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors CRT1-OD32SH (NPN) V V G G BS+ Voltage drop BDH BDL Photocoupler Physical layer Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit V NC Left side G OUT0 DC-DC converter (not isolated) Internal circuits BS− V V G G Voltage drop Photocoupler Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit V NC Right side G OUT0 CRT1-OD32SH-1 (PNP) V V G G BS+ BDH BDL Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Physical layer Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) Internal circuits BS− Voltage drop V V G G Disconnection or short-circuit detection circuit Photocoupler Voltage drop 236 V Left side NC G OUT0 Right side V NC G OUT0 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Wiring CRT1-OD32S/ CRT1-OD32SH (NPN) Left side Right side V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G G G G G G G G 1 V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G G G G G G G G V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G G G G G G G G V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G G G G G G G G V V V G G 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Solenoid valve, etc. Blue (black) Brown (red) Brown (red) Pink (white) G Blue (black) G 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Pink (white) Connection can be made to either G terminal. 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Solenoid valve, etc. 1 V Connection can be made to either V terminal. Brown (red) 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Solenoid valve, etc. 1 Blue (black) Brown (red) 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Pink (white) 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Blue (black) V Pink (white) 1 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Solenoid valve, etc. CRT1-OD32S-1/ CRT1-OD32SH-1 (PNP) Left side Right side 1 V V V V V V V V 1 V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G 3 V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G G G G G G G G V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G G G G G G G G 3 G 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 Solenoid valve, etc. 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Pink (white) Brown (red) Solenoid valve, etc. Blue (black) Blue (black) G Brown (red) G Note V V 3 G 1 V Pink (white) Connection can be made to either G terminal. 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Solenoid valve, etc. V V Connection can be made to either V terminal. Brown (red) Blue (black) Brown (red) 1 Pink (white) 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Solenoid valve, etc. Pink (white) 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Blue (black) 3 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) (1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. (2) Two V terminals and two G terminals are provided for use as I/O power supply terminals. One set of terminals is used for the power supply for the Unit, and the other set is used for the supply power to the next Unit. Use a maximum current of 4 A per terminal. 237 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD32S(-1) and CRT1-OD32SH(-1)) 60.3 53.2 31.4 50 52 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 160 (mm) Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 238 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4-8 Sixteen-point Input and Sixteen-point Output Units (e-CON Connectors) CRT1-MD32S/CRT1-MD32S-1/CRT1-MD32SH/CRT1-MD32SH-1 Common Specifications Item Model Installation Communications power supply current consumption Weight Specification CRT1-MD32S CRT1-MD32S-1 CRT1-MD32SH CRT1-MD32SH-1 DIN Track 45 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 60 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage voltage 70 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 100 mA max. for 14-VDC power supvoltage ply voltage 180 g max. Input Section Specifications Item Specification CRT1-MD32S-1 CRT1-MD32SH Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage CRT1-MD32S 16 inputs NPN PNP 10.5 VDC min. 10.5 VDC min. (between each (between each input terminal and input terminal and the G terminal) the V terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 11 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Power supply short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Power supply type Power short-circuit protection Current supplied to input devices Note 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. ----16 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) Network power supply Operates at 50 mA/point min. 50 mA/input NPN 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) CRT1-MD32SH-1 PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) Operates at 50 mA/point min. Operates at 0.3 mA/point max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. 239 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Load short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Power supply type Current supplied to output devices I/O power supply current consumption Output handling for communications errors Note Specification CRT1-MD32S CRT1-MD32S-1 CRT1-MD32SH CRT1-MD32SH-1 16 outputs NPN PNP NPN PNP 0.5 A/output, 4 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between DC, between DC, between DC, between each output tereach output tereach output tereach output terminal and the G minal and the V minal and the G minal and the V terminal) terminal) terminal) terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. --Supported. --Operates at 3 mA/point max. (Does not operate at over 3 mA.) 16 outputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) Multi-power supply 100 mA/output 20 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 15 mA max. for voltage 24-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. 60 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-MD32S(-1)/CRT1-MD32SH(-1)) Communications indicators: MS and NS Communications connector Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Input indicators 0 to 15 I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) Indicator Section Communications Indicators 240 Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. Output indicators 0 to 15 Output I/O power supply connector Section 5-4 Units with Connectors I/O Indicators The meanings of the I/O indicators are given in the following table. The detection status is also shown below for Slave Units with detection functions. Name LED status 0 to 15 (inputs) Lit yellow. 0 to 15 (outNot lit. puts) I/O status Input or output ON Meaning The input or output is ON. Input or output OFF The input or output is OFF. CRT1-MD32SH(-1) Only Name 0 to 15 (inputs) LED status Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. 0 to 15 (outputs) Lit red. Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Flashing red. Not lit. Setting the Node Address I/O status Short-circuit detection Disconnection detection Normal status Meaning The power supply is short-circuited. A line is not connected. The Unit is operating normally. A load short-circuit occurred. A line is not connected. The Unit is operating normally. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits CRT1-MD32S (NPN) Left side BDH BDL Input circuits BS+ Photocoupler Physical layer Internal circuits BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Voltage drop Photocoupler Short protection V NC G0 IN0 V NC G OUT0 Right side V V G G 241 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors BS+ BDH Photocoupler Physical layer BDL Input circuits CRT1-MD32S-1 (PNP) Left side Short protection DC-DC converter (not isolated) Internal circuits BS- V0 NC G IN0 V V G G Right side V NC G OUT0 Photocoupler Voltage drop CRT1-MD32SH (NPN) Left side BDH BDL Physical layer DC-DC converter (not isolated) 242 Photocoupler Internal circuits BS- Input circuits BS+ Voltage drop Photocoupler Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit V NC G0 IN0 V NC G OUT0 Right side V V G G Section 5-4 Units with Connectors CRT1-MD32SH-1 (PNP) BDH Physical layer BDL Photocoupler Left side Disconnection or shortcircuit detection circuit V0 NC G IN0 Internal circuits BS- Input circuits BS+ V V G G DC-DC converter (not isolated) V Right side NC G OUT0 Photocoupler Voltage drop Wiring CRT1-MD32S CRT1-MD32SH (NPN) V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G G G G G G G G G0 G1 G2 G3 G4 G5 G6 G7 3 4 IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1 V V V V V V NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G8 G9 G10 G11 G12 G13 G14 G15 4 IN 8 IN 9 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 Brown (red) V NC 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Solenoid valve, etc. IN 15 1 Connection can be made to either V terminal. V Connection can be made to either G terminal. G V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G G G G G G G G V 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 G Brown (red) V 2-wire sensor 2 NC (e.g., limit switch) Brown (Red) Black (White) Blue (Black) Blue (Black) 1 Pink (white) V Solenoid valve, etc. Pink (white) V Blue (black) V 3 Brown (White) Right side (output) V Blue (black) Left side (input) 1 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) 243 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors CRT1-MD32S-1/ CRT1-MD32SH-1 (PNP) Left side (input) V4 V5 V6 V7 1 V V V V V V V V NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G G G G G G G G G G G G G G G IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 1 V8 V9 V10 V11 V12 V13 V14 V15 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC 3 G G G G G G G G 4 IN 8 IN 9 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 3 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Brown (red) G IN 0 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Solenoid valve, etc. Connection can be made to either V terminal. 1 V V V V V V V V 2 NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC G G G G G G G G V V G 3 4 OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT OUT 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 G Brown (red) Connection can be made to either G terminal. Solenoid valve, etc. Note Pink (white) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) V3 Blue (black) Blue (Black) Brown (White) 4 V2 Pink (white) 3 V1 Blue (black) 2 Right side (output) V0 Brown (Red) Black (White) Blue (Black) 1 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) (1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. (2) Two V terminals and two G terminals are provided for use as I/O power supply terminals. One set of terminals is used for the power supply for the Unit, and the other set is used for the supply power to the next Unit. Use a maximum current of 4 A per terminal. (3) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. 244 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1-MD32S(-1)/CRT1-MD32SH(-1)) 60.3 53.2 3.14 50 52 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 160 (mm) Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 25.4 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 ■ (mm) (mm) 245 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4-9 Sixteen-point Input Units (MIL Connectors) CRT1-VID16ML/CRT1-VID16ML-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Weight Note Specification CRT1-VID16ML CRT1-VID16ML-1 16 inputs NPN PNP 17 VDC min. (between each input 17 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 16 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track or Mounting Bracket Multi-power supply 40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 5 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 80 g max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VID16ML and CRT1-VID16ML-1) Top Front Bottom (Mounted side) 23 4 01 56 789 23 4 01 56 789 Communications connector Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 from mounted side Input indicators 0 to 15 I/O connectors (MIL connectors) Communications indicators: MS and NS 246 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 15 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 5 2 3 4 1s digit of node address 6 7 8 5 (Front side) 10s digit of node address 9 0 1 6 7 8 9 0 1 (Mounted side) 2 3 4 Internal Circuits CRT1-VID16ML (NPN) BS+ BDL V Physical layer BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) Internal circuits BDH Photocoupler IN0 IN1 Photocoupler G 247 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors CRT1-VID16ML-1 (PNP) V BS+ IN0 BDH Physical layer Photocoupler Internal circuits BDL BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) IN1 Photocoupler G Wiring CRT1-VID16ML (NPN) + − 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 1 2 V 3 G Blue (Black) Brown (White) Brown (Red) Blue (Black) G Black (White) 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 248 V 4 IN 15 IN 14 IN 13 IN 12 IN 11 IN 10 IN 9 IN 8 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 IN 7 IN 6 IN 5 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 IN 0 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors CRT1-VID16ML-1 (PNP) − + 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 1 Brown (White) Blue (Black) 2 V 3 V G Brown (Red) Blue (Black) 4 G Black (White) 5 7 9 11 13 15 17 19 Note IN 15 IN 14 IN 13 IN 12 IN 11 IN 10 IN 9 IN 8 6 8 10 12 14 16 18 20 IN 7 IN 6 IN 5 IN 4 IN 3 IN 2 IN 1 IN 0 The two V terminals as well as the two G terminals are internally connected. 249 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VID16ML and CRT1-VID16ML-1) 85.7 6.4 90 (101.7) 96.7 (90) (102) 21.5 60 15 5.3 92.8 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 78.7 Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions. (mm) Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 25.4 99.9 ■ (mm) 250 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 37 136.5 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 10 48 116 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 251 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4-10 Sixteen-point Output Units (MIL Connectors) CRT1-VOD16ML/CRT1-VOD16ML-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Specification CRT1-VOD16ML Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Output handling for communications errors Weight Note 252 CRT1-VOD16ML-1 16 outputs NPN PNP 0.3 A/output, 2 A/common (See note.) 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each output terminal and the G terminal) output terminal and the V terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 16 outputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track or Mounting Bracket Multi-power supply 45 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 65 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. 70 g max. Do not use a total external load current of more than 2 A, and do not use more than 1 A per V terminal or G terminal. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VOD16ML and CRT1-VOD16ML-1) Top Front Bottom (Mounted side) 23 4 01 56 789 23 4 01 56 789 Communications Connector Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 from mounted side Output indicators 0 to 15 I/O connectors (MIL connectors) Communications indicators: MS and NS Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 15 I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 5 1s digit of node address 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 (Front side) 10s digit of node address 9 0 1 6 7 8 9 0 1 (Mounted side) 2 3 4 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. 253 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Internal Circuits CRT1-VOD16ML (NPN) Voltage drop BS+ BDH BS− OUT0 Photocoupler Internal circuits BDL Physical layer DC-DC converter (not isolated) V OUT1 Photocoupler G CRT1-VOD16ML-1 (PNP) V BS+ BDL Physical layer BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) 254 OUT0 OUT1 Photocoupler Internal circuits BDH Photocoupler Voltage drop G Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Wiring CRT1-VOD16ML (NPN) − + Solenoid valve, etc. Solenoid valve, etc. 1 2 V V 3 4 G 5 G 6 OUT 15 7 9 8 OUT 14 OUT 7 OUT 6 OUT 13 10 OUT 5 11 OUT 12 12 OUT 4 13 OUT 11 14 OUT 3 15 OUT 10 16 OUT 2 17 OUT 9 18 OUT 1 19 OUT 8 20 OUT 0 CRT1-VOD16ML-1 (PNP) + 1 − 2 V Solenoid valve, etc. 3 V G 5 7 9 Note Solenoid valve, etc. 4 OUT 15 OUT 14 G 6 8 OUT 7 OUT 6 OUT 13 10 OUT 5 11 OUT 12 12 OUT 4 13 OUT 11 14 OUT 3 15 OUT 10 16 OUT 2 17 OUT 9 18 OUT 1 19 OUT 8 20 OUT 0 (1) The two V terminals as well as the two G terminals are internally connected. If the power exceeds 1 A per terminal, or if the total external load current exceeds 2 A, then provide the output power supply externally rather than from the terminals. 255 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors (2) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VOD16ML and CRT1-VOD16ML-1) 85.7 6.4 90 (101.7) 96.7 (90) (102) 21.5 60 15 5.3 92.8 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 78.7 Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions. (mm) Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 25.4 99.9 ■ (mm) 256 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 37 136.5 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 10 48 116 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 257 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4-11 Thirty-two-point Input Units (MIL Connectors) CRT1-VID32ML/CRT1-VID32ML-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Number of simultaneous inputs Isolation method Input indicator Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Weight Note 258 Specification CRT1-VID32ML CRT1-VID32ML-1 32 inputs NPN PNP 17 VDC min. (between each input 17 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 32 inputs/common 32 max. (See note.) Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track or Mounting Bracket Multi-power supply 40 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 2 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 120 g max. When Slave Units are mounted facing upwards, and 32 inputs may all turn ON, leave the specified distance between Units according to the ambient temperature. (Refer to the Dimensions.) Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VID32ML and CRT1-VID32ML-1) Top Front Bottom (Mounted side) Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 from mounted side Input indicators I: 0 to 15 Communications II: 0 to 15 Connector I/O connectors (MIL connectors) Communications indicators: MS and NS Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. Name I 0 to I 15 (word m) II 0 to II 15 (word m+1) Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. Lit yellow. Input ON The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. Word m: The first word allocated to the Slave Unit The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 62.) The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. (Mounted side) 5 10s digit of node address 9 0 1 (Front side) 9 0 1 6 7 8 1s digit of node address 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 Setting the Node Address I/O status Input ON 2 3 4 Note LED status Lit yellow. 259 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Internal Circuits CRT1-VID32ML (NPN) Physical layer DC-DC converter (not isolated) Internal circuits BS− V IN0 IN1 Photocoupler Input circuits BDL Photocoupler Input circuits BS+ BDH G CRT1-VID32ML-1 (PNP) Physical layer BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) 260 Photocoupler Photocoupler Input circuits BDL Internal circuits BS+ BDH IN0 Input circuits V IN1 G Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Wiring CRT1-VID32ML (NPN) 40 38 36 I (word m) 34 32 30 Brown (White) 28 26 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 37 35 33 31 29 27 25 16 II (word m+1) 14 12 IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 10 IN 5 Brown (Red) 8 6 + − IN 9 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 Brown (Red) IN 14 IN 15 Black (White) G Blue (Black) 21 V 18 IN 8 23 22 20 IN 6 IN 7 4 V 19 IN 8 17 3-wire sensor (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) IN 9 15 13 11 9 7 5 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 3 G G 1 2 3-wire sensor (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 39 G 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Blue (Black) IN 1 24 Blue (Black) Black (White) IN 0 V V ∆ mark 261 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors CRT1-VID32ML-1 (PNP) 40 38 36 I (word m) 34 Brown (White) 32 30 28 Blue (Black) 26 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 24 39 IN 0 37 IN 1 35 IN 2 33 IN 3 31 IN 4 29 IN 5 27 IN 6 25 IN 7 II (word m+1) 14 Brown (Red) 12 Black (White) IN 0 15 IN 2 13 IN 3 11 IN 4 9 7 IN 6 5 IN 7 I/O Allocation Blue (Black) 3-wire sensor (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) IN 8 IN 10 IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 G 1 2 Note Black (White) IN 15 3 G 3-wire sensor (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Brown (Red) IN 14 IN 9 4 Blue (Black) IN 13 17 IN 1 IN 5 6 IN 12 V 19 10 8 IN 11 21 V 16 IN 10 G 22 18 − + IN 9 23 G 20 IN 8 V V ∆ mark All V terminals as well as all G terminals are internally connected. The following diagram shows the correspondence between MIL connector pin numbers and allocated words and bits when the first word for a Slave Unit allocated in the Master Unit is m. Input Area 15 Word m 262 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit I9 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 I 0 ... 16 inputs Word m+1 II 15 II 14 II 13 II 12 II 11 II 10 II 9 II 8 II 7 II 6 II 5 II 4 II 3 II 2 II 1 II 0 ... 16 inputs I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VID32ML and CRT1-VID32ML-1) 83.7 5 80 90.8 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) 35 Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable 25.4 When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 98 ■ (mm) 263 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 134.6 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 41.9 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 114.1 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 264 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors The following ambient operating temperature restrictions apply when multiple 32-point Slave Units with MIL Connectors are mounted in parallel. When Units Are Not Mounted Facing Upwards: Units can be densely mounted (32 points can turn ON simultaneously at an ambient operating temperature of 55°C). When Units Are Mounted Facing Upwards: If 32 points may be turned ON simultaneously, the distance between the Units must be restricted depending on the ambient operating temperature, as shown in the following graph. For example, when the ambient operating temperature is 55°C, a space of at least 10 mm is required between Units. L L Distance between Units L (mm) Note 30 20 10 0 40 45 50 55 Ambient operating temperature (˚C) 265 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4-12 Thirty-two-point Output Units (MIL Connectors) CRT1-VOD32ML/CRT1-VOD32ML-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Specification CRT1-VOD32ML Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Output handling for communications errors Weight Note 266 CRT1-VOD32ML-1 32 outputs NPN PNP 0.3 A/output, 4 A/common (See note.) 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each output terminal and the G terminal) output terminal and the V terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 32 outputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track or Mounting Bracket Multi-power supply 50 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 80 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 6.5 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. 100 g max. Do not use a total external load current of more than 4 A, and do not use more than 1 A per V terminal or G terminal. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VOD32ML and CRT1-VOD32ML-1) Top Front Bottom (Mounted side) Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 from mounted side Output indicators I: 0 to 15 Communications II: 0 to 15 Connector I/O connectors (MIL connectors) Communications indicators: MS and NS Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name I 0 to I 15 (word m) II 0 to II 15 (word m+1) Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. Lit yellow. Output ON The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. Word m: The first word allocated to the Slave Unit The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 62.) The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. (Mounted side) 5 10s digit of node address 9 0 1 (Front side) 9 0 1 6 7 8 1s digit of node address 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 Setting the Node Address I/O status Output ON 2 3 4 Note LED status Lit yellow. 267 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Internal Circuits CRT1-VOD32ML (NPN) Voltage drop BS+ Physical layer OUT1 Internal circuits BDL OUT0 Photocoupler BDH BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) V Photocoupler G CRT1-VOD32ML-1 (PNP) V BS+ BDH Physical layer Internal circuits BDL BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) 268 OUT0 OUT1 Photocoupler Photocoupler Voltage drop G Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Wiring I (word m) CRT1-VOD32ML (NPN) 40 OUT 0 39 OUT 8 38 OUT 1 37 36 OUT 2 35 OUT 10 34 OUT 3 33 OUT 11 32 OUT 4 31 OUT 12 30 OUT 5 29 OUT 13 28 OUT 6 27 OUT 14 26 OUT 7 25 OUT 15 24 23 G 22 Solenoid valve, etc. G V II (word m+1) − 21 V 20 OUT 0 19 OUT 8 18 OUT 1 17 OUT 9 16 OUT 2 15 OUT 10 14 OUT 3 13 OUT 11 12 OUT 4 11 OUT 12 10 OUT 5 9 8 7 OUT 6 6 Solenoid valve, etc. OUT 13 OUT 14 5 OUT 7 4 OUT 15 3 G G 1 2 Solenoid valve, etc. + OUT 9 V V ∆ mark 269 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors I (word m) CRT1-VOD32ML-1 (PNP) 40 OUT 0 39 OUT 8 38 OUT 1 37 36 OUT 2 35 OUT 10 34 OUT 3 33 OUT 11 32 OUT 4 31 OUT 12 30 OUT 5 29 OUT 13 28 OUT 6 27 OUT 14 26 OUT 7 25 OUT 15 24 23 G 21 V II (word m+1) V 20 OUT 0 19 OUT 8 18 OUT 1 17 OUT 9 16 OUT 2 15 OUT 10 14 OUT 3 13 OUT 11 12 OUT 4 11 OUT 12 10 OUT 5 9 8 7 OUT 6 Solenoid valve, etc. OUT 13 OUT 14 6 5 OUT 7 4 OUT 15 3 G G 1 2 V Solenoid valve, etc. − G 22 Solenoid valve, etc. + OUT 9 V ∆ mark Note (1) All V terminals as well as all G terminals are internally connected. If the power exceeds 1 A per terminal, or if the total external load current exceeds 4 A, then provide the output power supply externally rather than from the terminals. (2) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. I/O Allocation The following diagram shows the correspondence between MIL connector pin numbers and allocated words and bits when the first word for a Slave Unit allocated in the Master Unit is n. Output Area 15 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10 I9 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 I0 ... 16 outputs Word n+1 II 15 II 14 II 13 II 12 II 11 II 10 II 9 II 8 II 7 II 6 II 5 II 4 II 3 II 2 II 1 II 0 ... 16 outputs Word n 270 14 13 12 11 Bit Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VOD32ML and CRT1-VOD32ML-1) 83.7 5 80 90.8 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) 35 Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable 25.4 When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 98 ■ (mm) 271 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 134.6 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 41.9 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 114.1 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 272 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors 5-4-13 Sixteen-point Input and Sixteen-point Output Units (MIL Connectors) CRT1-VMD32ML/CRT1-VMD32ML-1 Common Specifications Item Model Installation Communications power supply current consumption Weight Specification CRT1-VMD32ML DIN Track or Mounting Bracket 45 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 70 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 110 g max. CRT1-VMD32ML-1 Input Section Specifications Item Specification Model CRT1-VMD32ML I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Number of simultaneous inputs Isolation method Input indicator Power supply type I/O power supply current consumption Note 16 inputs NPN 17 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 16 inputs/common 16 max. Photocoupler LED (yellow) Multi-power supply 2 mA max. CRT1-VMD32ML-1 PNP 17 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) When Slave Units are mounted facing upwards, and 16 inputs may all turn ON, leave the specified distance between Units according to the ambient temperature. (Refer to the Dimensions.) Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. 273 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Output Section Specifications] Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Power supply type I/O power supply current consumption Output handling for communications errors Note Specification CRT1-VMD32ML CRT1-VMD32ML-1 16 outputs NPN PNP 0.3 A/output, 2 A/common (See note.) 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.3 A DC, between each output terminal and the G terminal) output terminal and the V terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 16 outputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) Multi-power supply 6.5 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. Do not use a total external load current of more than 2 A, and do not use more than 1 A per V terminal or G terminal. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-VMD32ML and CRT1-VMD32ML-1) Top Front Bottom (Mounted side) Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 from mounted side I/O indicators I: 0 to 15 (IN) II: 0 to 15 (OUT) Communications Connector Communications indicators: MS and NS Indicator Section Communications Indicators 274 Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O connectors (MIL connectors) Section 5-4 Units with Connectors I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name I 0 to I 15 (word m) II 0 to II 15 (word n) Note Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input or output ON Meaning The input or output is ON. Not lit. Input or output OFF The input or output is OFF. Lit yellow. Input or output ON Not lit. Input or output OFF The input or output is OFF. The input or output is ON. Word m: Word allocated for Input Area of Slave Unit Word n: Word allocated for Output Area of Slave Unit The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the mounting-side rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the front-side rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. (Mounted side) 5 10s digit of node address 9 0 1 2 3 4 (Front side) 9 0 1 6 7 8 1s digit of node address 5 6 7 8 2 3 4 Internal Circuits CRT1-VMD32ML (NPN) BDH Physical layer BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Internal circuits BDL Input circuits BS+ V1 IN0 G1 Voltage drop Photocoupler V2 OUT0 G2 275 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors CRT1-VMD32ML-1 (PNP) V1 Photocoupler Physical layer BS− DC-DC converter (not isolated) 276 Internal circuits BDH BDL Input circuits BS+ IN0 G1 V2 OUT0 Photocoupler Voltage drop G2 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors Wiring CRT1-VMD32ML (NPN) 40 38 36 I (word m) 34 32 30 Brown (White) 28 26 IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 24 Blue (Black) 39 37 35 33 31 29 27 25 − IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 Brown (Red) IN 14 IN 15 Black (White) G1 Blue (Black) 21 V1 II (word n) IN 10 + 23 22 V1 20 OUT 0 19 OUT 8 18 OUT 1 17 OUT 9 16 OUT 2 15 OUT 10 14 OUT 3 13 OUT 11 12 OUT 4 11 OUT 12 10 OUT 5 9 8 7 OUT 6 6 5 4 3-wire sensor (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) + − OUT 13 OUT 14 OUT 7 OUT 15 3 G2 G2 1 2 Solenoid valve, etc. IN 9 G1 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) IN 8 V2 V2 Solenoid valve, etc. ∆ mark 277 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors CRT1-VMD32ML-1 (PNP) 40 38 36 Brown (White) I (word m) 34 32 30 28 26 Blue (Black) IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 IN 4 IN 5 IN 6 IN 7 24 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 39 37 IN 9 35 33 31 29 25 − IN 11 IN 12 IN 13 IN 14 IN 15 Black (White) G1 Blue (Black) 23 21 V1 II (word n) IN 10 + Brown (Red) 27 G1 22 V1 20 OUT 0 19 OUT 8 18 OUT 1 17 OUT 9 16 OUT 2 15 OUT 10 14 OUT 3 13 OUT 11 12 OUT 4 11 OUT 12 10 OUT 5 9 8 7 OUT 6 6 5 4 3-wire sensor (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) + − OUT 13 OUT 14 OUT 7 OUT 15 3 G2 G2 1 2 Solenoid valve, etc. IN 8 V2 V2 Solenoid valve, etc. ∆ mark Note (1) V1 terminals are internally connected, as are V2, G1, and G2 terminals. (V1 and V2 terminals are not internally connected, and G1 and G2 terminals are not internally connected.) If the power exceeds 1 A per terminal or if the total external load current exceeds 2 A, then provide the output power supply from an external source rather than from the terminals. (2) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. 278 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors I/O Allocation The following diagram shows the correspondence between MIL connector pin numbers and allocated words and bits when the first input word for a Slave Unit allocated in the Master Unit is m, and the first output word is n. Input Area 15 Word m 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 I 15 I 14 I 13 I 12 I 11 I 10 I9 I8 I7 I6 I5 I4 I3 I2 I1 I0 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Bit ... 16 inputs Output Area 15 Word n 14 13 12 11 10 9 II 15 II 14 II 13 II 12 II 11 II 10 II 9 8 II 8 7 II 7 II 6 II 5 II 4 II 3 II 2 II 1 II 0 Bit ... 16 outputs Dimensions (Same for CRT1-VMD32ML and CRT1-VMD32ML-1) 83.7 5 80 90.8 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) 35 Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable 25.4 When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 98 ■ (mm) 279 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 134.6 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 41.9 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 114.1 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 280 Section 5-4 Units with Connectors The following ambient operating temperature restrictions apply when multiple 32-point Slave Units with MIL Connectors are mounted in parallel. When Units Are Not Mounted Facing Upwards: Units can be densely mounted (16 points can turn ON simultaneously at an ambient operating temperature of 55°C). When Units Are Mounted Facing Upwards: If 16 points may be turned ON simultaneously, the distance between the Units must be restricted depending on the ambient operating temperature, as shown in the following graph. For example, when the ambient operating temperature is 55°C, a space of at least 10 mm is required between Units. L L Distance between Units L (mm) Note 30 20 10 0 40 45 50 55 Ambient operating temperature (˚C) 281 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks 5-5 5-5-1 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks Eight-point Input Units (With Screw-less Clamps) CRT1-ID08SL/CRT1-ID08SL-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage Specification CRT1-ID08SL OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Installation Power supply type Current supplied to input devices Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Weight CRT1-ID08SL-1 8 inputs NPN 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 1 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. PNP 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) 1.5 ms max. 8 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 100 mA/input 30 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 50 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 170 g max. Note Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID08SL and CRT1-ID08SL-1) Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Communications indicators: MS and NS I/O power supply indicator Input indicators 0 to 7 I/O power supply indicator Release button Communications connector Screw-less clamp terminal 282 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 7 I/O Power Supply Indicators LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. The meanings of the I/O power supply indicators are given in the following table. Name LED status Lit green. I/O Not lit. Setting the Node Address I/O status I/O power supply ON I/O power supply OFF Meaning The I/O power supply is ON. The I/O power supply is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits CRT1-ID08SL (NPN) G BS+ V BDH BDL Physical layer G Internal circuits BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler 0 to 7 V G V 283 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks CRT1-ID08SL-1 (PNP) V BS+ G BDH Physical layer V BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler Internal circuits BDL 0 to 7 G V G Wiring CRT1-ID08SL (NPN) 0 1 7 NC V V V V V G G G G G Brown (White) Blue (Black) Blue (Black) Brown (Red) Black (White) NC 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) CRT1-ID08SL-1 (PNP) 7 NC V V V V V G G G G G 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Note Blue (Black) Brown (Red) Black (White) 1 Blue (Black) 0 Brown (White) NC 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) (1) Do not wire NC terminals. (2) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. 284 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID08SL and CRT1-ID08SL-1) 60.3 53.2 3.14 52 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 96 (mm) Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 25.4 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 ■ (mm) (mm) 285 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks 5-5-2 Eight-point Output Units (With Screw-less Clamps) CRT1-OD08SL/CRT1-OD08SL-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Specification CRT1-OD08SL Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Installation Power supply type Current supplied to output devices Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Output handling for communications errors Weight Note CRT1-OD08SL-1 8 outputs NPN 0.5 A/output, 2 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the G terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 8 outputs/common PNP 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the V terminal) Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 100 mA/output 35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 55 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. 170 g max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD08SL and CRT1-OD08SL-1) Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Communications indicators: MS and NS I/O power supply indicator Output indicators 0 to 7 I/O power supply indicator Communications connector Screw-less clamp terminal 286 Release button Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 7 I/O Power Supply Indicators LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. The meanings of the I/O power supply indicators are given in the following table. Name LED status Lit green. I/O I/O status I/O power supply ON I/O power supply OFF Not lit. Setting the Node Address Meaning The I/O power supply is ON. The I/O power supply is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits CRT1-OD08SL (NPN) G BS+ V BDH Physical layer Internal circuits BDL Voltage drop BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) 0 to 7 Photocoupler G V G V 287 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks CRT1-OD08SL-1 (PNP) V BS+ G BDH Physical layer 0 to 7 Internal circuits BDL BS- Photocoupler DC-DC converter (not isolated) V Voltage drop G V G Wiring CRT1-OD08SL (NPN) 7 NC V V V V V G G G G G Solenoid valve, etc. Brown (red) 1 Pink (white) 0 Blue (black) NC 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) CRT1-OD08SL-1 (PNP) 7 NC V V V V V G G G G G Solenoid valve, etc. Note 288 Brown (red) 1 Pink (white) 0 Blue (black) NC 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) (1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks (2) Do not wire NC terminals. Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD08SL and CRT1-OD08SL-1) 60.3 53.2 3.14 52 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 96 (mm) Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 (mm) 289 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) 5-5-3 Sixteen-point Input Units (With Screw-less Clamps) CRT1-ID16SL/CRT1-ID16SL-1 Input Section Specifications Item Specification Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage CRT1-ID16SL CRT1-ID16SL-1 16 inputs NPN PNP 15 VDC min. (between each input 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) OFF voltage 5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 16 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 100 mA/input 35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 55 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Installation Power supply type Current supplied to input devices Communications power supply current consumption I/O power supply current consumption Weight Note 290 250 g max. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-ID16SL and CRT1-ID16SL-1) Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) I/O power supply indicator Communications connector Input indicators 0 to 15 I/O power supply indicator Release button Screw-less clamp terminal Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 15 I/O Power Supply Indicators LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. The meanings of the I/O power supply indicators are given in the following table. Name LED status Lit green. I/O Not lit. Meaning The I/O power supply is ON. The I/O power supply is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 9 0 1 Setting the Node Address I/O status I/O power supply ON I/O power supply OFF 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 291 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks Internal Circuits CRT1-ID16SL (NPN) G BS+ V BDH BDL Internal circuits Physical layer BS− G Photocoupler 0 to 15 V DC-DC converter (not isolated) G V CRT1-ID16SL-1 (PNP) V BS+ G BDH BDL BS− V Internal circuits Physical layer DC-DC converter (not isolated) Photocoupler 0 to 15 G V G Wiring CRT1-ID16SL (NPN) V V V V V G G G G G Black (White) NC Blue (Black) 15 Brown (Red) 1 Blue (Black) 0 Brown (White) NC 3-wire sensor with 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 292 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks CRT1-ID16SL-1 (PNP) V V V V V G G G G G Black (White) NC Blue (Black) 15 Brown (Red) 1 Blue (Black) 0 Brown (White) NC 3-wire sensor with 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Note (1) Do not wire NC terminals. (2) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Dimensions (Same for CRT1-ID16SL and CRT1-ID16SL-1) 60.3 53.2 3.14 50 52 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted (mm) 132 Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable 25.4 When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 ■ (mm) 293 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 294 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks 5-5-4 Sixteen-point Output Units (With Screw-less Clamps) CRT1-OD16SL/CRT1-OD16SL-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Installation Power supply type Current supplied to output devices Communications power supply current consumption Specification CRT1-OD16SL CRT1-OD16SL-1 16 outputs NPN PNP 0.5 A/output, 4 A/common 1.2 V max.(0.5 A DC, between each 1.2 V max.(0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the G terminal) output terminal and the V terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 16 outputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) DIN Track Multi-power supply 100 mA/output 35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 30 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage I/O power supply current consumption Output handling for commu- Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. nications errors Weight 250 g max. Note Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-OD16SL and CRT1-OD16SL-1) Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Communications I/O power indicators: MS and NS supply indicator Communications connector Output indicators 0 to 15 I/O power supply indicator Release button Screw-less clamp terminal Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. 295 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 15 I/O Power Supply Indicators I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. The meanings of the I/O power supply indicators are given in the following table. Name I/O Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. LED status Lit green. I/O status I/O power supply ON Meaning The I/O power supply is ON. Not lit. I/O power supply OFF The I/O power supply is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits CRT1-OD16SL (NPN) G BS+ V BDH Internal circuits BDL Voltage drop Physical layer BS- DC-DC converter (not isolated) 0 to 7 Photocoupler G V G V 296 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks CRT1-OD16SL-1 (PNP) V BS+ G BDH Internal circuits Physical layer BDL BS− 0 to 15 Photocoupler V Voltage drop DC-DC converter (not isolated) G V G Wiring CRT1-OD16SL (NPN) 15 NC V V V V V G G G G G Solenoid valve, etc. Brown (red) 1 Pink (white) 0 Blue (black) NC 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) CRT1-OD16SL-1 (PNP) 15 NC V V V V V G G G G G Solenoid valve, etc. Note Pink (white) 1 Brown (red) 0 Blue (black) NC 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) (1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. (2) Do not wire NC terminals. 297 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks Dimensions (Same for CRT1-OD16SL and CRT1-OD16SL-1) 60.3 53.2 3.14 52 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 132 (mm) Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 298 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks 5-5-5 Eight-point Input and Eight-point Output Units (With Screw-less Clamps) CRT1-MD16SL/CRT1-MD16SL-1 Common Specifications Item Model Installation Communications power supply current consumption Weight Specification CRT1-MD16SL CRT1-MD16SL-1 DIN Track 35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 60 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 290 g max. Input Section Specifications Item Specification Model CRT1-MD16SL I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Input indicator Power supply type Current supplied to input devices I/O power supply current consumption Note CRT1-MD16SL-1 8 inputs NPN PNP 15 VDC min. (between each input 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC min. (between each input ter- 5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) minal and the G terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 11 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 8 inputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) Multi-power supply 100 mA/input 15 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. 299 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Isolation method Output indicators Power supply type Current supplied to output devices I/O power supply current consumption Output handling for communications errors Note Specification CRT1-MD16SL CRT1-MD16SL-1 8 outputs NPN PNP 0.5 A/output, 2 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the G each output terminal and the V terminal) terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 8 outputs/common Photocoupler LED (yellow) Multi-power supply 100 mA/output 25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage Select either hold or clear from CX-Integrator. Please see "Appendix E: I/O Power Supply Current" regarding the I/O power supply current supplied to the V and G terminals. Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1-MD16SL and CRT1-MD16SL-1) Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) I/O indicators Input indicators 0 to 7 I/O power supply indicator Release button Communications Connector Screw-less clamp terminal Indicator Section Communications Indicators 300 Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. Output indicators 0 to 7 I/O power supply indicator Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks I/O Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name LED status 0 to 7 (inputs) Lit yellow. 0 to 7 (outputs) Not lit. I/O Power Supply Indicators Meaning The input or output is ON. Input or output OFF The input or output is OFF. The meanings of the I/O power supply indicators are given in the following table. Name LED status 0 to 7 (inputs) Lit green. 0 to 7 (outputs) Not lit. Setting the Node Address I/O status Input or output ON I/O status I/O power supply ON I/O power supply OFF Meaning The I/O power supply is ON. The I/O power supply is OFF. The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Internal Circuits CRT1-MD16SL (NPN) G V G BS+ BDL 0 to 7 Physical layer V G Internal circuits BDH Left side (input) Photocoupler BS− V G V DC-DC converter (nonisolated) Voltage drop 0 to 7 Photocoupler Right side (output) G V G V 301 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks CRT1-MD16SL-1 (PNP) V G V BS+ Left side (input) Photocoupler 0 to 7 BDH Physical layer G V Internal circuits BDL BS− G V G DC-DC converter (nonisolated) 0 to 7 V Photocoupler Voltage drop G Right side (output) V G Wiring CRT1-MD16SL (NPN) Right side (output) Left side (input) 1 7 NC V V V V V V V V V V G G G G G G G G G G 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 302 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Blue (black) Solenoid, valve, etc. Pink (white) 0 Brown (red) NC Black (white) NC Brown (red) 7 Blue (black) 1 Blue (black) 0 Brown (white) NC 3-wire external device with NPN input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks CRT1-MD16SL-1 (PNP) Right side (output) Left side (input) 1 7 NC V V V V V V V V V V G G G G G G G G G G 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Note 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Blue (black) Solenoid, valve, etc. Pink (white) 0 Brown (red) NC Black (white) NC Brown (red) 7 Blue (black) 1 Blue (black) 0 Brown (white) NC 3-wire external device with PNP input (Through-beam emitter of photoelectric sensor) (1) The V terminals on the left and right for the I/O power supply, as well as the G terminals on the left and right for the I/O power supply are not connected internally. Supply power separately for V-G terminals on the left side and the right side. (2) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. (3) Do not wire NC terminals. (4) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. 303 Section 5-5 Units with Clamp Terminal Blocks Dimensions (Same for CRT1-MD16SL and CRT1-MD16SL-1) 60.3 53.2 3.14 52 50 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 170 (mm) Communications Cable Dimensions when Connector and Cable Are Connected When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector I Plug Is Mounted 69.4 25.4 ■ (mm) When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector II Plug Is Mounted 106 37 ■ (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 48 10 45.5 When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted 85.5 25.4 ■ (mm) (mm) 304 SECTION 6 Analog I/O Slave Units This section describes the Analog I/O Slave Units. 6-1 6-2 6-3 6-4 Analog I/O Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 6-1-1 Analog I/O Slave Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 6-1-2 List of Data Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 306 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 6-2-1 Input Range and Conversion Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308 6-2-2 Calculation and Selection Processing of Input Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . 311 6-2-3 I/O Data Type and Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313 Summary of the Analog Output Slave Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 6-3-1 Output Range and Conversion Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319 6-3-2 I/O Data Type and Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 Status Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 322 6-4-1 Analog Input Slave Unit Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 323 6-4-2 Analog Output Slave Unit Status Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324 6-5 Analog Data Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325 6-6 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 330 6-6-1 Four-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with 2-tier Terminal Block). . 330 6-6-2 Two-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with 2-tier Terminal Block) . . 333 6-7 Units with Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337 6-7-1 Four-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with e-CON Connectors). . . . 337 6-7-2 Two-point Analog Output Slave Unit (with e-CON Connectors) . . 345 6-7-3 Four-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with MIL Connectors) . . . . . . 350 6-7-4 Two-point Analog Output Slave Unit (with MIL Connectors). . . . . 356 305 Section 6-1 Analog I/O Slave Units 6-1 6-1-1 Analog I/O Slave Units Analog I/O Slave Units In the Analog I/O Slave Unit, various functions such as a scaling function and a peak/bottom hold function can be used in addition to AD/DA conversion of the analog I/O data. Furthermore, various types of calculations for analog input values that previously had to be processed using a high level PLC ladder program can be processed in the Analog Input Slave Unit. In addition, the data calculated using these functions can be selected as "analog data", combined with status information such as "Analog Status Flag", and allocated to I/O. Allocating and monitoring of this status information, setting up Analog Unit specific functions, and data monitoring can easily be performed using CXIntegrator. 6-1-2 List of Data Processing Functions The following tables list the data processing functions that can be used with Analog I/O Slave Units. Refer to 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions and 11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions for details on functions and setting methods. Analog Input Slave Unit Function Setting of number of AD conversion points Moving average function Scaling Peak/bottom hold Top/valley hold Rate of change Comparator Disconnected line detection User adjustment 306 Details Reducing the number of input conversion points increases the speed of the conversion cycle. Averages the most recent 8 values of the analog input value. This provides a smooth input value for an input that oscillates. Performs scaling. The analog input value can be converted into industrial units that can be utilized by the user, reducing the calculation load on the ladder program of the master PLC. Scaling also supports an offset function for compensating for mounting errors in sensors and other devices. Holds the maximum value and minimum value of the analog input value. This holds the "tops of the mountains" and "bottoms of the valleys" of the analog input values. This calculates the rate of change of the analog input values for each set sampling cycle. Analog input values or data after calculation (peak value, bottom value, top value, valley value, rate of change) are compared to 4 types of set values: Alarm Trip Point High (HH), Warning Trip Point High (H), Warning Trip Point Low (L), and Alarm Trip Point Low (LL) and the results are notified using the Analog Status Flag. Detects disconnections of analog inputs. (Valid only for the input ranges 4 to 20 mA and 1 to 5 V) "Shift" generated from measurement error due to hardware can be adjusted to an arbitrary input value. Default 4 Disabled Disabled 0 to 6,000 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled Section 6-1 Analog I/O Slave Units Function Cumulated count Last maintenance date function Details Provides time integration of the analog input values. Stores the date for the last time maintenance was performed inside the unit. Default Disabled Differs for each model Analog Output Slave Units Function Scaling User adjustment Cumulative counter Communications error output setting Last maintenance date function Details Performs scaling. The analog output value can be converted into industrial units that can be utilized by the user reducing the calculation load on the ladder program in the Master Unit. "Shift" generated from measurement error due to hardware can be adjusted to an arbitrary output value. This provides time integration of the analog output values. Sets the value output when a communications error occurs for each output. Stores the date for the last maintenance was performed inside the unit. Default Disabled 0 to 6,000 Disabled Disabled Hold Differs for each model 307 Section 6-2 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units 6-2 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units Analog Input Slave Units convert (AD conversion) analog input signals such as 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA to digital data (binary values) and stores them in the Master Unit. A summary of the Analog Input Slave Unit is described below. 6-2-1 Input Range and Conversion Data Input analog signals are converted to digital data in the following manner using a set input range. If the input data exceeds the data range for which conversion is possible, the conversion data saturates at the upper or low limit. Input Range and Conversion Data ■ Input Range: 0 to 5 V Voltage of 0 to 5V is converted to data from 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000). The input data range for which conversion is possible is –0.25 to +5.25 V and here the output data is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300). When input data is a negative voltage, it is expressed as the two's complement (hexadecimal) and the output data for a disconnected line is the same as for an input of 0 V (0000 Hex). Conversion data Hexadecimal (decimal) 189C (6300) 1770 (6000) 0000 (0) −0.25 V FED4 (−300) Voltage 0V 5 V 5.25 V ■ Input Range:1 to 5 V Voltage of 1 to 5V is converted to data from 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000). The input data range for which conversion is possible is 0.8 to 5.2 V and here the output data is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300). If the input value falls below the input range such as for a disconnected line (input voltage is less than 0.76 V), a disconnected line detection function activates and data is set to 7FFF Hex. 308 Section 6-2 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units Conversion data Hexadecimal (decimal) 189C (6300) 1770 (6000) Clamped above 5.2 V. 7FFF 0000 (0) Voltage 1V FED4 (−300) 5 V 5.2 V 0.8 V 0.76 V (Disconnection detected below 0.76 V.) ■ Input Range: 0 to 10 V Voltage of 0 to 10V is converted to data from 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000). The input data range for which conversion is possible is –0.5 to +10.5 V and here the output data is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300). When input data is a negative voltage, it is expressed as the two's complement (hexadecimal) and the output data for a disconnected line is the same as for an input of 0 V (0000 Hex). Conversion data Hexadecimal (decimal) 189C (6300) 1770 (6000) 0000 (0) −0.5 V FED4 (−300) Voltage 10 V 10.5 V 0V ■ Input Range: –10 to 10 V Voltage of –10 to +10 V is converted to data from F448 to 0BB8 Hex (–3000 to +3000). The input data range for which conversion is possible is –11 to +11 V and here the output data is F31C to 0CE4 Hex (–3300 to +3300). When input data is a negative voltage, it is expressed as the two's complement (hexadecimal) and the output data for a disconnected line is the same as for an input of 0 V (0000 Hex). Conversion data Hexadecimal (decimal) 0CE4 (3300) 0BB8 (3000) −11 V −10 V 0000 (0) Voltage 0V 10 V 11 V F448 (−3000) F31C (−3300) 309 Section 6-2 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units ■ Input Range: 0 to 20 mA Current of 0 to 20 mA is converted to data from 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000). The input data range for which conversion is possible is –1 to +21 mA and here the output data is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300). When input data is a negative voltage, it is expressed as the two's complement (hexadecimal) and the output data for a disconnected line is the same as for an input of 0 mA (0000 Hex). Conversion data Hexadecimal (decimal) 189C (6300) 1770 (6000) 0000 (0) −1 mA FED4 (−300) Current 0 mA 20 mA 21 mA ■ Input Range: 4 to 20 mA Current of 4 to 20 mA is converted to data from 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000). The input data range for which conversion is possible is 3.2 to 20.8 mA and here the output data is FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300). If the input value falls below the input range such as for a disconnected line (input current is less than 3.04 mA), a disconnected line detection function activates and data is set to 7FFF Hex. Conversion data Hexadecimal (decimal) 189C (6300) 1770 (6000) Clamped above 20.8 mA. 7FFF 0000 (0) FED4 (−300) 4 mA 3.2 mA Current 20 mA 20.8 mA 3.04 mA (Disconnection detected below 3.04 mA.) Input Range Settings 1,2,3... Setting of input range is performed using Analog Input Slave Unit DIP switches, CX-Integrator, or Explicit message. The method for setting the input range using CX-Integrator is described below. Please see "11-1 CX-Integrator" on page 481 regarding details for CX-Integrator. 1. Turn ON the power to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave to be set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the Slave Unit icon and select Parameters - Edit from the menus.) 310 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units Section 6-2 3. Select the tab of the channel for which you would like to change the range and select any input range from the pull-down list of "Input Range". 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. AD Conversion Data for Negative Numbers 6-2-2 If the AD conversion data is a negative number, it is expressed as the two's complement. The NEG instruction (two’s complement conversion) can be used to obtain the absolute value of the two’s complement. Calculation and Selection Processing of Input Data Input Data Calculation The following types of calculations can be performed in the unit for external analog input values. • Scaling to desired industry unit • Moving average processing After processing, the data can be allocated to the Master Unit I/O. In addition, the following types of calculations can be performed for analog values for which the processing described above was performed. • Peak/hold operation • Top/valley operation • Rate of change operation • Cumulated count operation The values after these calculations are called "Peak Value", "Bottom Value", "Top Value", "Valley Value", "Rate of Change", and "Cumulated Count Value". 311 Section 6-2 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units The flow of data calculation is as shown in the flow chart below. Input A Moving average Scaling Analog input value A Peak/Bottom Top/Valley Peak value Top value Bottom value Valley value Cumulated count Rate of change Rate of change value Cumulated count value Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags (allocated I/O data) Hold Flag Data Flow Selection Conversion processing Selection of Allocation Data Allocated I/O data Processing results After performing each calculation, 6 types of data "Raw Value", "Peak Value", "Bottom Value", "Top Value", "Valley Value", and "Rate of Change" can be selected for allocation to I/O. The selected data becomes "Analog Data 1" and can be allocated independently or with a status flag to the Master Unit. The selection process is performed by either CX-Integrator or Explicit message. In addition, comparison calculation of "Analog Data 1" with 4 types of alarm settings (Alarm Trip Point High (HH), Warning Trip Point High (H), Warning Trip Point Low (L), Alarm Trip Point Low (LL)) can be performed. (Comparator function) Six types of data Analog value Moving average, scaling enabled/disabled Select one of the six types of data and allocate it as the Analog Data. Peak value Bottom value Analog Data 1 (allocated I/O data) Top value Allocated for I/O. Valley value Rate of change Comparator The Comparator can be used with values allocated as the Analog Data 1. Analog Status Flags (allocated I/O data) 312 Section 6-2 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units Note In default, "Raw Value" is to be allocated to I/O. Math processing Input CH2 Input CH3 6-2-3 I/O Data Math processing Other processing results Analog input value Other processing results Analog input value Other processing results Analog input value Other processing results Selected processing Math processing Analog input value Analog Data 1 Selected processing Input CH1 Math processing Analog Data 1 Selected processing Input CH0 Analog Data 1 Selected processing Furthermore, "Analog Data 1" can be selected separately for each input as described below. Analog Data 1 I/O Data Type and Allocation Analog Input Slave Units support the following four types of input data, and one type of output data. The required data can be allocated for I/O. Data allocation is performed by CX-Integrator. Input Data I/O data Analog Data 1 (4 input words (8 bytes)) Details • Used to monitor analog data. • One type of data from the 4-word analog value, peak value, bottom value, top value, valley value, and rate of change is selected and allocated. (The default is allocation of the analog value.) Note The comparator function can be used with regards to the value allocated to analog data 1. Top/Valley Detection Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags are allocated in one word. Timing Flags (1 input The flag is allocated together with the top or valley value in word (2 bytes)) order to identify the timing for the Master Unit to capture the top or valley hold value. Analog Status Flags Each of the bits for the Comparator Result Flag, Top/Valley (2 input words (4 Detection Timing Flag, Disconnected Line Detection Flag are bytes)) allocated. The function of each bit is as follows: • Comparator Result Flags Allow control of the judgement results only, without allocating analog values. • Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag Allocated simultaneously with top value and valley value and used for data capture timing. • Disconnected Line Detection Flag Disconnected line can be detected even if analog value is not allocated. Analog Data + From the start, the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag (1 word Top/Valley Detection (2 bytes)) is allocated to the end of analog data 1 (4 words (8 Timing Flags (5 input bytes)). words (10 bytes)) 313 Section 6-2 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units Output Data I/O data Hold Flags (1 output word (2 bytes)) Analog Data Selection Method Details This is used in conjunction with each type of hold function (peak, bottom, top, valley) and is used to control execution timing of the hold function on the Master Unit side. The data type to be allocated as "Analog Data 1" can be selected from a maximum of 6 types of data using various types of calculations, which are "Raw Value", "Peak Value", "Bottom Value", "Top Value", "Valley Value", and "Rate of Change". These values can be selected alone or in combination with the Status Flags. Setting Using the CXIntegrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the tab of the channel to select the analog data you want and select the type of allocation data from the "Analog Data 1 Allocation" pull-down list. 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. Allocating I/O Data Select allocation data using one of the following methods and perform remote I/O communications. 1. Only allocate analog value (default I/O data) 2. Select I/O data (pattern) for allocation (fixed I/O data combination) 314 Section 6-2 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units ■ If only allocating analog value (default I/O data) If the Analog Input Slave Unit is used with default settings, only analog value is selected as I/O data and 4 words (8 bytes) worth of data is allocated to the IN area of the Master Unit as shown below. 15 First word + 0CH First word + 1CH First word + 2CH First word + 3CH 0 Analog input value for Input CH0 Analog input value for Input CH1 Analog input value for Input CH2 Analog input value for Input CH3 ■ If I/O data (pattern) is selected for allocation (fixed I/O data combination) "Analog data 1" is combined with data such as status flag and allocated as I/O using set combinations as described below. Data that can be integrated can be selected using CX-Integrator. (Example) Case of allocating "Analog Data 1" + "Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag" to the Master Unit 15 First word + 0CH First word + 1CH First word + 2CH First word + 3CH First word + 4CH 8 7 0 Analog Data 1 for Input CH0 Analog Data 1 for Input CH1 Analog Data 1 for Input CH2 Analog Data 1 for Input CH3 Top Detection Timing Flag Valley Detection Timing Flag Method of selection using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Analog Input Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, rightclick the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the "General" tab and select I/O data (pattern) from the "Default Connection Path (In)" pull-down list. The following example shows the case for allocation of "Analog Data 1". 4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 315 Section 6-2 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. I/O Data Analog Data 1 Analog Data is used to monitor analog values. One item from "Raw Value", "Peak Value", "Bottom Value", "Top Value", "Valley Value", and "Rate of Change" can be selected for allocation. (The default is allocating of "Raw Value".) Note The comparator function can be used with regards to the value allocated to "Analog Data 1". The data format for allocation to the Master Unit is described below. The data is allocated in a two's complement form. (4 words (8 bytes)) 15 0 First word + 0CH First word + 1CH First word + 2CH First word + 3CH Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags Analog Data 1 for Input CH0 Analog Data 1 for Input CH1 Analog Data 1 for Input CH2 Analog Data 1 for Input CH3 These flags turn ON for the one-shot time when detecting the top or valley for the top/valley hold function. These flags are used to time reading the values held as the top and valley values at the Master Unit. The following data format is used when these flags are allocated in the Master Unit (1 word (2 bytes)). 15 8 7 0 +1 +0 +0 Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 +1 0 0 0 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 V_ST0 Lower byte T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 T_ST0 Upper byte The meaning for each bit is as described below. +0 Byte Abbreviation V_STx +1 T_STx Name Details Valley Detection Tim- Becomes 1 (ON) at the timing ing Flag when a valley is detected by the top/valley hold function and becomes 0 (OFF) after passing of one-shot time. Top Detection Timing Becomes 1 (ON) at the timing Flag when a top is detected by the top/valley hold function and becomes 0 (OFF) after passing of one-shot time. Note The one-shot time can be changed. For details, refer to the one-shot time settings for the top/valley hold function. Analog Status Flags The Analog Status Flags include allocations for the Comparator Result Flag, the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags, and the Disconnected Line Detection Flags. These flags are used for detection and monitoring. The data format used for each byte when these flags are allocated in the Master Unit is shown below (2 words (4 bytes)). 316 Section 6-2 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units 15 8 7 0 +1 +3 +0 +2 +0 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 BW0 T_ST0 V_ST0 Bit 4 HH0 Bit 3 H0 Bit 2 PS0 Bit 1 L0 Bit 0 LL0 +1 BW1 T_ST1 V_ST1 HH1 H1 PS1 L1 LL1 +2 BW2 T_ST2 V_ST2 HH2 H2 PS2 L2 LL2 +3 BW3 T_ST3 V_ST3 HH3 H3 PS3 L3 LL3 Input CH0 Input CH1 Input CH2 Input CH3 Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte The meaning for each bit is as described below. Bit 0 Analog Data 1 + Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags AbbreviName ation LLx Compara- Low Low Limit tor Result Alarm Flag Flag 1 Lx 2 PSx 3 Hx 4 HHx 5 V_STx 6 T_STx 7 BWx Details Turns ON when the value of data allocated in Analog Data 1 drops below the Low Low Limit alarm setting. Low Limit Alarm Turns ON when the value of data Flag allocated in Analog Data 1 drops below the Low Limit alarm setting. Normal Flag Turns ON when none of the alarms (pass signal) (High High Limit, High Limit, Low Low Limit, and Low Limit) have been output. Turns ON when the value of data allocated in Analog Data 1 exceeds the High Limit alarm setting. High High Limit Turns ON when the value of data Alarm Flag allocated in Analog Data 1 exceeds the High High Limit alarm setting. Valley DetecTurns ON at the timing when a valley Top/Valley Detec- tion Timing Flag is detected by the top/valley hold function and becomes 0 (OFF) after tion passing of one-shot time. Timing Flags Top Detection Turns ON at the timing when a top is Timing Flag detected by the top/valley hold function and becomes 0 (OFF) after passing of one-shot time. Disconnected Line DetecTurns ON when a disconnection is tion Flag detected. High Limit Alarm Flag This data pattern consists of Analog Data 1 followed by the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags and is allocated in the Master Unit using the following data format (5 words (10 bytes)). 15 8 +1 +3 +5 +7 +9 7 0 +0 +2 +4 +6 +8 317 Section 6-2 Summary of the Analog Input Slave Units Bit 7 +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 Hold Flags (Output) Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Analog Data 1 for Input CH0 Bit 1 Analog Data 1 for Input CH1 Analog Data 1 for Input CH2 Analog Data 1 for Input CH3 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V_ST3 V_ST2 T_ST3 T_ST2 Bit 0 Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte V_ST1 V_ST0 Lower byte T_ST1 T_ST0 Upper byte Hold Flags are used with the peak/bottom hold and top/valley hold functions. The Hold Flags are used to control the hold execution timing from the Master Unit and are allocated in the Master Unit using the following data format (1 word (2 bytes)). 15 8 7 0 +1 +0 +0 Bit 7 0 Bit 6 0 Bit 5 0 Bit 4 0 Bit 3 HD3 Bit 2 HD2 Bit 1 HD1 Bit 0 HD0 +1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Lower byte Upper byte The meaning for each bit is as described below. Bit 0 Note 318 Abbreviation Name HD0 Hold Flag for Input CH0 1 HD1 Hold Flag for Input CH1 2 HD2 Hold Flag for Input CH2 3 HD3 Hold Flag for Input CH3 Details The hold function is performed for Analog Input CH0 while this flag is ON. The hold function stops and the last value is held when the flag goes OFF. The hold function is performed for Analog Input CH1 while this flag is ON. The hold function stops and the last value is held when the flag goes OFF. The hold function is performed for Analog Input CH2 while this flag is ON. The hold function stops and the last value is held when the flag goes OFF. The hold function is performed for Analog Input CH3 while this flag is ON. The hold function stops and the last value is held when the flag goes OFF. After a Hold Flag is turned ON at the Master Unit, there is a transmission time delay for notification of this to the unit. Section 6-3 Summary of the Analog Output Slave Units 6-3 Summary of the Analog Output Slave Units The Analog Output Slave Unit converts (DA conversion) digital data (binary values) stored in the Master Unit into analog signals of 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA and outputs this. A summary of the Analog Output Slave Unit is described below. 6-3-1 Output Range and Conversion Data Digital data that is output is converted to analog data using a set output range as shown below. If the output data exceeds the data range for which conversion is possible, the conversion data saturates at the upper or low limit. Output Range and Conversion Data ■ Output Range: 0 to 5 V Data of 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) is converted to voltage from 0 to 5 V and output. The output data range for which conversion is possible is from FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300) and for this case the output data becomes from -0.25 to +5.25 V. Voltage 5.25 V 5V 0V 8000FED4 (−300) −0.25 V 0000 (0) 1770 189C (6000) (6300) 7FFF Conversion data Hexadecimal (decimal) ■ Output Range: 1 to 5 V Data of 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) is converted to voltage from 1 to 5 V and output. The output data range for which conversion is possible is from FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300) and for this case the output data becomes from 0.8 to 5.2 V. Voltage 5.2 V 5V 1V 8000 FED4 (−300) 0.8 V 0V 0000(0) 1770 189C (6000) (6300) 7FFF Conversion data Hexadecimal (decimal) 319 Section 6-3 Summary of the Analog Output Slave Units ■ Output Range: 0 to 10 V Data of 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) is converted to voltage from 0 to 10 V and output. The output data range for which conversion is possible is from FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300) and for this case the output data becomes from –0.5 to +10.5 V. Voltage 10.5 V 10 V 0V 8000FED4 (−300) −0.5 V 1770 189C (6000) (6300) 0000 (0) 7FFF Conversion data Hexadecimal (decimal) ■ Output Range: –10 to 10 V Data of F448 to 0BB8 Hex (–3000 to +3000) is converted to voltage from –10 to +10 V and output. The output data range for which conversion is possible is from F31C to 0CE4 Hex (–3300 to +3300) and for this case the output data becomes from –11 to +11 V. Negative voltages are specified as two's complements (16 bits). Voltage 11 V 10 V F31C F448 8000 (−3300) (−3000) 0000 (0) 0V 0BB8 0CE4 (3000) (3300) 7FFF Conversion data Hexadecimal (decimal) −10 V −11 V ■ Output Range: 4 to 20 mA Data of 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) is converted to current from 4 to 20 mA and output. The output data range for which conversion is possible is from FED4 to 189C Hex (–300 to +6300) and for this case the output data becomes from 3.2 to 20.8 mA. Current 20.8 mA 20 mA 4 mA 8000 320 FED4 (−300) 3.2 mA 0 mA 0000(0) 1770 189C (6000) (6300) 7FFF Conversion data Hexadecimal (decimal) Section 6-3 Summary of the Analog Output Slave Units ■ Output Range: 0 to 20 mA Data of 0000 to 1770 Hex (0 to 6000) is converted to current from 0 to 20 mA and output. The output data range for which conversion is possible is from 0000 to 189C Hex (0 to 6300) and for this case the output data becomes from 0 to 21 mA. Current 21 mA 20 mA 0 mA FFFF Output Range Settings 0000 (0) 1770 189C (6000) (6300) 7FFF Conversion data Hexadecimal (decimal) Setting of output range is performed using Analog Output Slave Unit DIP switches, CX-Integrator, or Explicit message. The method for setting the output range using CX-Integrator is described below. Please see "11-1 CX-Integrator" on page 481 regarding details for CX-Integrator. 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Analog Output Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, rightclick the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the tab for the channel for which you would like to change the range and select any output range from the pull-down list of "Output Range". 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 321 Section 6-4 Status Areas DA Conversion Data DA conversion data is output from the Master Unit as shown in the following diagram. 15 14 13 12 First word + 0CH First word + 1CH 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 Output CH0 DA conversion data Output CH1 DA conversion data Please indicate the two's complement as the DA conversion data for outputting of a negative voltage. Using the NEG (two's complement conversion) is convenient for obtaining the two's complement from the absolute value. 6-3-2 I/O Data Type and Allocation I/O Data Analog Output Slave Units support one type of output data. Data I/O allocation is performed by CX-Integrator. Output Data Data Type Output data (2 output words (4 bytes)) Details Used to allocate two words of analog output data. Use the CX-Integrator to allocate I/O. I/O Data Allocated in the Master Unit The Analog Output Slave Unit has the output data allocated by default. No setting is required. Two words (4 bytes) of output data is allocated. The data is output as two’s complements. 15 First word + 0CH First word + 1CH 6-4 8 7 Analog output value for Output CH0 0 Analog output value for Output CH1 Status Areas An Analog I/O Slave Unit has two status areas: the Warning Status Area and the Alarm Status Area. The status flags in these areas are turned ON and OFF based on the threshold/monitor values set for each function in that Unit. When any of the bits in the status area of the slaves connected to the Master Unit turns ON, the corresponding bit (bit 12 is for warning status area notices and bit 13 is for alarm area notices) of the status flag in the Master Unit turns ON. The Analog I/O Slave Unit's status area information can be read by using the CX-Integrator or explicit messages. 322 Section 6-4 Status Areas Master Unit The status bit detection allocated to the master is OR of all slaves Transmitted to Master Unit Analog I/O Slave Unit The Analog I/O Slave Unit has two status areas: the Warning Status Area and the Alarm Status Area. 6-4-1 Analog Input Slave Unit Status Area Warning Status Area The Analog Input Slave Unit’s Warning Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These bits indicate minor errors in the Unit. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Content Reserved Reserved Network Power Voltage Drop Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Below the monitor value) Unit Maintenance Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Higher than the monitor value) Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Analog Range Exceeded Flag OFF: Within range (Less than the set monitor value) ON: Out-of-range (More than the set monitor value) Cumulated Counter Exceeded Flag OFF: Within range (Less than the set monitor value) ON: Out-of-range (More than the set monitor value) Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Description ----Turns ON if the network power supply voltage is reduced below the set monitor value. Turns ON when the cumulative total unit conduction time exceeds the set monitor value. --------Turns ON in the case that the analog data exceeds the displayable range or if it exceeds the set monitor value set by the comparator function. Turns ON if the cumulated counter value exceeds the set monitor value. ------------- 323 Section 6-4 Status Areas Alarm Status Area The Analog Input Slave Unit’s Alarm Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These bits indicate serious errors in the Unit. Bit 0 1 10 11 12 Content Reserved EEPROM Data Error Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Disconnected Line Detection Flag OFF: Normal ON: Disconnected line detected Analog Hardware Error Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error Reserved Reserved Reserved 13 14 15 Reserved Reserved Reserved 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 6-4-2 Turns ON when there is an error in the EEPROM data. ------------Turns ON when the line is disconnected, including wiring mistakes and connected device failure. Turns ON when there is an error in the analog circuits in the Unit. ------------- Analog Output Slave Unit Status Area Warning Status Area The Analog Output Slave Unit’s Warning Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These bits indicate minor errors in the Unit. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 324 Description --- Content Reserved Reserved Network Power Voltage Drop Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Below the monitor value) Unit Maintenance Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Higher than the monitor value) Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Error Output Flag OFF: Normal ON: Output is incorrect Cumulated Counter Exceeded Flag OFF: Within range (Less than the set monitor value) ON: Out-of-range (More than the set monitor value) Description ----Turns ON if the network power supply voltage is reduced below the set monitor value. Turns ON when the cumulative total unit conduction time exceeds the set monitor value. --------Turns ON when the value set for the communications error output function is being output. Turns ON if the cumulated counter value exceeds the set monitor value. Section 6-5 Analog Data Monitor Bit 10 11 12 13 14 15 Alarm Status Area Description ------------- The Analog Output Slave Unit’s Alarm Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These bits indicate serious errors in the Unit. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 6-5 Content Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Content Reserved EEPROM Data Error Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Analog Hardware Error Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Description --Turns ON then there is an error in the EEPROM data. --------------Turns ON when there is an error in the analog circuits in the Unit. ------------- Analog Data Monitor The present value, monitor of set values, and maintenance information of analog data can be confirmed using the CX-Integrator [Monitor] screen. 325 Section 6-5 Analog Data Monitor Right-clicking on the Analog I/O Slave Unit icon on the Network Configuration Window when the CX-Integrator is on-line, and selecting "Monitor" enables displaying of the [Monitor] screen. Maintenance information is displayed in the status check box at the bottom of the screen and if the check box is ON, it shows that an error has occurred. Please see "11-1 CX-Integrator" on page 481 regarding details for CX-Integrator. Monitor Window General Tab Page Monitor Display Status Check Boxes Item Comment Last Maintenance Date Present Unit Conduction Time Present Network Power Voltage Network Power Voltage (Peak) Network Power Voltage (Bottom) Unit Maintenance Network Power Voltage Drop Cumulated Counter Over Unit error 326 Description Displays the text set by the Naming Unit function. Displays the last maintenance date that was set. Displays the total time that the Unit has been ON (cumulative power ON time). Displays the present network power supply voltage. Displays the maximum and minimum network power supply voltages up to the present time. Selected if the total Unit conduction time has exceed the monitor value set by the Unit Conduction Time Monitor Function. Selected if the network power supply voltage has fallen below the monitor value set by the Network Power Voltage Monitor Function. Selected if any of the input's cumulated time counter values has exceeded the monitor value set by the Temperature Integration Function. Turns ON when an error occurs in one of the units. Section 6-5 Analog Data Monitor Item Buttons Clear Button Update Button Save Maintenance Counter Button Description Click this button to clear the displayed values. Click this button to update the Maintenance information. Click this button to save the Maintenance Counter Value in the Unit. The previous value is retained when the power supply is turned OFF and ON again. Note Always update the information when the parameters have been edited or set. "Analog Input"/"Analog Output" tab 327 Section 6-5 Analog Data Monitor Monitor Display Item Input Range I/O Comment Analog Input Last Maintenance Date Present Value Peak Value Bottom Value Top Value Valley Value Rate of Change Status check boxes Cumulated Counter Max Value Min Value Over Range High Alarm Over High Warning Over Description Displays the input range setting. Displays the text set by the Naming Connected Device function. Displays the last maintenance date that was set. Displays the present analog value. Displays the peak value, bottom value, top value, and valley value for the analog data being held in the unit. Displays the rate of change in comparison to the previous sampling cycle. Displays the total time calculated by the cumulated count. Displays the maximum value and minimum value of the analog data being held in the unit. Turns ON if the analog data exceeds the upper limit of the displayable range. Turns ON if the analog data exceeds the set monitor value set by the comparator function. Low Warning Over Low Alarm Over Under Range Buttons 328 Turns ON if the analog data is below the lower limit of the displayable range. Broken Wire Turns ON when there is a disconnected line. (However, only for the cases when the input range is the 1 to 5 V range or the 4 to 20 mA range) Threshold Cumu- Turns ON when the time integrated values increases above the monitor value set by the lated Counter cumulated count function. Over Selected when there is an overflow in the cumuCumulated Counter Overflow lated count value. Selected when there is an underflow in the cumuCumulated lated count value. Counter Underflow Clear Buttons Clear the displayed values Section 6-5 Analog Data Monitor Item Monitor Display Description Output Range I/O Comment Analog Output Last Maintenance Date Present Value Status check boxes Buttons Note Displays the output range setting. Displays the text set by the Naming Connected Device function. Displays the last maintenance date that was set. Displays the present network power supply voltage. Cumulated Displays the total time calculated by the cumuCounter lated count. Threshold Cumu- Turns ON when the time integrated values increases above the monitor value set by the lated Counter cumulated count function. Over Cumulated Selected when there is an overflow in the cumuCounter Overflow lated count value. Selected when there is an underflow in the cumuCumulated lated count value. Counter Underflow Clear Buttons Clear the displayed values Always update the information when the parameters have been edited or set. Error History Tab Page Item Content Network Power Voltage Unit Conduction Time Clear Button Description Displays the contents of the communications errors that have occurred. Displays the power supply voltage being supplied when the error occurred. Displays the total time that the network power supply had been ON when the error occurred. Clears the error history. 329 Section 6-6 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 6-6 6-6-1 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Four-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with 2-tier Terminal Block) CRT1-AD04 General Specifications Item Specification Voltage input Model Input signal ranges Current input CRT1-AD04 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Maximum signal input ±15 V ±30 mA Input impedance Resolution Overall accuracy 1 MΩ min. 1/6,000 (full scale) Approx. 250 Ω ±0.3% FS ±0.6% FS ±0.4% FS ±0.8% FS 25°C –10 to 55°C Conversion cycle AD conversion data 1 ms / 1 point –10 to 10 V range: F448 to 0BB8 hex full scale (–3,000 to 3,000) Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex full scale (0 to 6,000) AD conversion range: ±5% FS of the above data ranges. Isolation method Mounting Power supply type Communications power current consumption Weight Photocoupler isolation (between input and communications lines) No isolation between input signal wires DIN Track mounting Multi-power supply 110 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 175 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 153 g Component Names and Functions Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Communications connector WORD NODE ADR 23 23 X10 [0-63] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 456 X1 9 01 CRT1 CR T1-AD04 AD04 ANALOG TERMINAL A/D SW ON 78 78 456 9 01 MS NS DIP switch for setting the input ranges 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 INPUT RANGE CH0,1 INPUT RANGE CH2,3 RSV LSET Removable terminal block for analog I/O Indicator Section Communications Indicators 330 Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. Section 6-6 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Switch Settings Setting the Node Address The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Setting the Input Ranges 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON Note Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Setting Input CH0/CH1 range settings (common) Specification Default setting: All pins OFF See the next table Input CH2/CH3 range settings (common) Default setting: All pins OFF See the next table Always OFF. 8 Range setting method Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may occur if it is set to ON. OFF: Use CX-Integrator. ON: Use DIP switch. (1) Always use the default setting (OFF) for pin 7. (2) Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the ranges. If this pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled. (3) The DIP switch settings are read when the power is turned ON. ■ Input CH0/CH1 range (common) Input range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Pin 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Pin 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Pin 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON 331 Section 6-6 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks ■ Input CH2/CH3 range (common) Input range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Note Pin 4 Pin 5 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Pin 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON (1) When the DIP switch is used to set the input ranges (pin 8 ON), the input signal ranges must always be the same for Inputs CH0 and CH1 and for Inputs CH2 and CH3. If it is necessary to set separate input signal ranges for Inputs 0 to 3, use the CX-Integrator rather than the DIP switch to make the settings. (2) Do not set the DIP switches or pins other than as specified in the table above. Internal Circuits V+ 510 kΩ I+ 250 Ω V− 510 kΩ AG Analog GND Terminal Arrangements Communications Connector BS+ Communications power supply + BDH Communications data high BDL Communications data low BS- Communications power supply − Analog I/O Terminal Block Short-circuit For a current input, short-circuit the V+ and I+ terminals using the enclosed jumper. V0 + AG Voltage input 0V 332 I0 + V0 − V1 + AG V1 − I2 + V2 + I1 + V2 − AG 0V I3 + V3 + AG V3 − NC NC V0 to V3: Voltage input terminals I0 to I3: Current input terminals AG: Analog ground NC: Not used. Current input Section 6-6 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks 50 66.9 Dimensions 6-6-2 3.14 (mm) 115 Two-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with 2-tier Terminal Block) CRT1-DA02 General Specifications Item Specification Model Output signal ranges External output allowable load resistance Resolution Overall accuracy 25°C –10 to 55°C Voltage output CRT1-DA02 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 1 kΩ min. 1/6,000 (full scale) ±0.4% FS ±0.8% FS Current output 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 600 Ω max. ±0.4% FS (See note.) ±0.8% FS (See note.) Conversion cycle DA conversion data 2 ms/ 2 points –10 to 10 V range: F448 to 0BB8 hex full scale (–3,000 to 3,000) Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex full scale (0 to 6,000) Isolation method Photocoupler isolation (between output and communications lines) No isolation between output signal wires. DIN Track mounting Multi-power supply 125 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 205 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 155 g DA conversion range: ±5% FS of the above data ranges. Mounting Power supply type Communications power current consumption Weight Note The specified accuracy does not apply below 0.2 mA when using the 0 to 20 mA range. 333 Section 6-6 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Component Names and Functions Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Communications connector WORD NODE ADR 23 23 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 456 X10 [0-63] A/D SW ON 78 78 456 9 01 MS NS DIP switch for setting the output ranges X1 9 01 CRT1-DA02 CRT1 ANALOG TERMINAL 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 INPUT RANGE CH0,1 INPUT RANGE CH2,3 RSV LSET Removable terminal block for analog I/O Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. Switch Settings Setting the Node Address The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Setting the Output Ranges 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON Each pin is set according to the following table. Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note 334 Setting Range settings for output CH0 Specification Default setting: All pins OFF See the next table Range settings for output CH1 Default setting: All pins OFF See the next table Always OFF. Always set this pin to OFF. Unexpected operation may result if it is turned ON. OFF: Use CompoNet Support Software. ON: Use DIP switch. Range setting method (1) Always use the default setting (OFF) for pin 7. Section 6-6 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks (2) Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the range. If this pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled. (3) The DIP switch settings are read when the power is turned ON. ■ Range for output CH0 Output range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Pin 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Pin 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Pin 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ■ Range for output CH1 Output range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Note Pin 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Pin 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Pin 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON Do not set the DIP switches or pins other than as specified in the table above. Internal Circuits I+ V+ − Analog GND The negative terminals for output CH0 and output CH1 are connected internally. Wiring Communications Connector BS+ Communications power supply + BDH Communications data high BDL Communications data low BS− Communications power supply − 335 Section 6-6 Units with Screw Terminal Blocks Analog I/O Terminal Block V0 + NC Output 0: Voltage output External device + − I0 + 0 − V1 + I1 + 1 − NC Output 1: Current output External device NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC NC V0+, V1+: Voltage output + terminal I0+, I1+: Current output + terminal 0−, 1−: Voltage/current output − terminal NC: Not used. + − 50 66.9 Dimensions 336 3.14 (mm) 115 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors 6-7 6-7-1 Units with Connectors Four-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with e-CON Connectors) CRT1-VAD04S General Specifications Item Specification Voltage input Model Input signal ranges 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V Current input CRT1-VAD04S 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Maximum signal input ±15 V ±30 mA Input impedance Resolution Overall accuracy 1 MΩ min. 1/6,000 (full scale) Approx. 250 Ω ±0.3% FS ±0.6% FS ±0.4% FS ±0.8% FS 25°C –10 to 55°C Conversion cycle AD conversion data 1 ms/ 1 point –10 to 10 V range: F448 to 0BB8 hex full scale (–3,000 to 3,000) Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex full scale (0 to 6,000) AD conversion range: ±5% FS of the above data ranges. Isolation method Mounting Power supply type Communications power current consumption Sensor power supply current (See note.) Weight Note Photocoupler isolation (between input and communications lines) No isolation between input signal wires DIN Track mount or mount for Mounting Bracket Multi-power supply 75 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 115 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply Less than 200 mA (for each CH) 85 g max. In order to provide power to the sensor through the I/O connector, a 24-VDC power supply must be connected to the sensor power supply connector. 337 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Component Names and Functions Top Front Bottom (Mounted side) Communications connector Sensor power supply mode settings switch Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 from mounted side Input range switch Voltage/Current input mode settings switch Communications indicators: MS and NS Sensor power supply connector I/O connector (e-CON connector) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. Switch Setting the Node Address The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) Rotary switch settings are read when power is turned ON. 7 8 90 1 10s digit of node address 90 1 4 5 6 (Mounted side) 1s digit of node address 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 (Front side) Input range switch (Front side) ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 338 Pin No. Setting 1 2 3 Input CH0/CH1 range settings (common) Specification See the next table Default setting: All pins OFF Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Pin No. 4 5 6 7 8 Note Setting Input CH2/CH3 range settings (common) Specification See the next table Default setting: All pins OFF Always OFF. Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may occur if it is set to ON. OFF: Use CX-Integrator. ON: Use DIP switch. Range setting method (1) Always use the default setting (OFF) for pin 7. (2) Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the ranges. If this pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled. (3) The DIP switch settings are read when power is turned ON. ■ Input CH0/CH1 range (common) Input range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Pin 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Pin 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Pin 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ■ Input CH2/CH3 range (common) Input range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Note Pin 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Pin 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Pin 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON (1) When the DIP switch is used to set the input ranges (pin 8 ON), the input signal ranges must always be the same for Inputs CH0 and CH1 and for Inputs CH2 and CH3. If it is necessary to set separate input signal ranges for Inputs CH0 to CH3, use the CX-Integrator rather than the DIP switch to make the settings. (2) Do not set the DIP switches or pins other than as specified in the table above. Sensor Power Supply Mode Settings Switch 1 2 3 4 ON 339 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Pin No. 1 2 3 4 Voltage/Current Input Mode Settings Switch 2 1 Setting Input CH0 sensor power supply mode toggle Input CH1 sensor power supply mode toggle Input CH2 sensor power supply mode toggle Input CH3 sensor power supply mode toggle 3 Specification OFF: Power supply for 2-wire or 4-wire sensor ON: Power supply for 3-wire sensor (Default setting is OFF) 4 ON Pin No. 1 2 3 4 Setting Input CH0 voltage/current input mode toggle Input CH1 voltage/current input mode toggle Input CH2 voltage/current input mode toggle Input CH3 voltage/current input mode toggle Specification OFF: Voltage input ON: Current input (Default setting is OFF) Terminal Arrangements Communications Connector BS+ Communications power supply + BDH Communications data high BDL Communications data low BS− Communications power supply − I/O Connector Pin No. 1 2 3 4 Note 340 N: 0 to 3 CH0 4 3 2 1 CH1 4 3 2 1 CH2 4 3 2 1 CH3 4 3 2 1 Signal name 24VDC (Sensor power supply+) n – (Voltage/current input–) 0V (Sensor power supply–) n + (Voltage/current input+) Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Sensor Power Supply Connector (Front side) + − Pin code Signal name + 24VDC – 0V Internal Circuits 4 510kΩ Voltage/Current input mode settings switch 510kΩ 250Ω 2 n+ n− Sensor power supply mode settings switch 3 0V Analog GND 1 24-VDC Sensor power supply 24-VDC (Sensor connector power supply)* *Supplied from external Wiring and Switch Settings 4-wire sensor 4 3 2 1 I/O connector 24-VDC (Sensor power supply+) n − (Voltage/current input−) 0V (Sensor power supply−) n + (Voltage/current input+) Input type Voltage input Current input Sensor power supply mode Voltage/Current input mode settings switch settings switch OFF (Power supply for 2-wire or OFF (Voltage input) 4-wire sensor) ON (Power supply for 2-wire or ON (Current input) 4-wire sensor) 341 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors 3-wire sensor 4 3 2 1 I/O connector 24-VDC (Sensor power supply+) n − (Voltage/current input−) /0V (Sensor power supply−) n + (Voltage/current input+) Input type Voltage input Current input Sensor power supply mode settings switch OFF (Power supply for 3-wire sensor) ON (Power supply for 3-wire sensor) Voltage/Current input mode settings switch OFF (Voltage input) ON (Current input) 2-wire sensor 4 3 2 1 I/O connector Short 24-VDC (Sensor power supply+) n + (Voltage/current input+) Or 4 3 2 1 I/O connector Short n − (Voltage/current input−) 0V (Sensor power supply−) Note Wiring is different depending on the connected sensor. Input type Current input 342 Sensor power supply mode Voltage/Current input mode settings switch settings switch OFF (Power supply for 2-wire or ON (Current input) 4-wire sensor) Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Dimensions 85.7 92.8 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 60 23 5.3 90 (101.7) 96.7 (90) (102) 6.4 The numbers inside the parentheses are reference (mm) dimensions. 66.2 Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable 25.4 99.9 ■ When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted (mm) 343 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors 37 136.5 ■ When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 10 48 (mm) 25.4 116 ■ When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted (mm) 344 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors 6-7-2 Two-point Analog Output Slave Unit (with e-CON Connectors) CRT1-VDA02S General Specifications Item Specification Voltage Output Model Output signal ranges 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V External output allowable load resistance Resolution Overall accuracy 25°C –10 to 55°C Current Output CRT1-VDA02S 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 1 kΩ min. 1/6,000 (full scale) 600 Ω max. ±0.4% FS ±0.8% FS ±0.4% FS (See note.) ±0.8% FS (See note.) Conversion cycle DA conversion data 2 ms/ 2 points –10 to 10 V range: F448 to 0BB8 hex full scale (–3,000 to 3,000) Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex full scale (0 to 6,000) Isolation method Photocoupler isolation (between output and communications lines) No isolation between output signal wires. DIN Track mount or mount for Mounting Bracket Multi-power supply 105 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 170 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 85 g max. DA conversion range: ±5% FS of the above data ranges. Mounting Power supply type Communications power current consumption Weight Note The specified accuracy does not apply below 0.2 mA when using the 0 to 20 mA range. Component Names and Functions Top Front Bottom (Mounted side) Communications connector Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 from mounted side Output range switch Communications indicators: MS and NS I/O connector (e-CON connector) 345 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. Switch Setting the Node Address The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) Rotary switch settings are read when power is turned ON. 7 8 90 1 10s digit of node address 90 1 4 5 6 (Mounted side) 1s digit of node address 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 (Front side) Output range switch (Front side) ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pin No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Note Setting Range settings for output CH0 Specification See the next table Default setting: All pins OFF Range settings for output CH1 See the next table Default setting: All pins OFF Always OFF. Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may occur if it is set to ON. OFF: Use CX-Integrator. ON: Use DIP switch. Range setting method (1) Always use the default setting (OFF) for pin 7. (2) Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the ranges. If this pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled. (3) The DIP switch settings are read when power is turned ON. 346 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors ■ Range for output CH0 Output range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Pin 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Pin 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Pin 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ■ During current output of output 1 Output range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Note Pin 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Pin 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Pin 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON Do not set the DIP switches or pins other than as specified in the table above. Terminal Arrangements Communications Connector BS+ Communications power supply + BDH Communications data high BDL Communications data low BS− Communications power supply − I/O Connector Pin No. 1 2 3 4 CH0 4 3 2 1 CH1 4 3 2 1 Signal name N.C. n – (Voltage/current output–) In + (Current output+) Vn + (Voltage output+) n: 0 or 1 347 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Internal Circuits 3 4 2 In+ Vn+ n− Analog GND Wiring Wiring for Voltage Output 4 3 2 1 I/O connector External device Wiring for Current Output 4 3 2 1 I/O connector External device Dimensions 85.7 92.8 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 23 60 66.2 348 5.3 90 (101.7) 96.7 (90) (102) 6.4 The numbers inside the parentheses are reference dimensions. (mm) Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable 25.4 99.9 ■ When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted (mm) 37 136.5 ■ When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 10 48 (mm) 349 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors 25.4 116 ■ When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted (mm) 6-7-3 Four-point Analog Input Slave Unit (with MIL Connectors) CRT1-VAD04ML General Specifications Item Specification Voltage input Model Input signal ranges 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V Current input CRT1-VAD04ML 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA Maximum signal input ±15 V ±30 mA Input impedance Resolution Overall accuracy 1 MΩ min. 1/6,000 (full scale) Approx. 250 Ω ±0.3% FS ±0.6% FS ±0.4% FS ±0.8% FS 25°C –10 to 55°C Conversion cycle AD conversion data 1 ms/ 1 point –10 to 10 V range: F448 to 0BB8 hex full scale (–3,000 to 3,000) Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex full scale (0 to 6,000) AD conversion range: ±5% FS of the above data ranges. Isolation method Mounting Power supply type Communications power current consumption Weight 350 Photocoupler isolation (between input and communications lines) No isolation between input signal wires DIN Track mount or mount for Mounting Bracket Multi-power supply 75 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 115 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 70 g max. Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Component Names and Functions Top Front Bottom (Mounted side) Communications connector Voltage/Current input mode settings switch Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 from mounted side Communications indicators: MS and NS Input range switch I/O connector (MIL connector) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. Switch Setting the Node Address The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) Rotary switch settings are read when power is turned ON. (Mounted side) 90 1 10s digit of node address 90 1 4 5 6 7 8 1s digit of node address 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 (Front side) Input range switch (Front side) ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pin No. 1 2 3 Setting Input CH0/CH1 range settings (common) Specification See the next table Default setting: All pins OFF 351 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Pin No. 4 5 6 7 8 Note Setting Input CH2/CH3 range settings (common) Specification See the next table Default setting: All pins OFF Always OFF. Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may occur if it is set to ON. OFF: Use CX-Integrator. ON: Use DIP switch. Range setting method (1) Always use the default setting (OFF) for pin 7. (2) Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the ranges. If this pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled. (3) The DIP switch settings are read when power is turned ON. ■ Input CH0/CH1 range (common) Input range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Pin 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Pin 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Pin 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ■ Input CH2/CH3 range (common) Input range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Note Pin 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Pin 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Pin 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON (1) When the DIP switch is used to set the input ranges (pin 8 ON), the input signal ranges must always be the same for Inputs CH0 and CH1 and for Inputs CH2 and CH3. If it is necessary to set separate input signal ranges for Inputs CH0 to CH3, use the CX-Integrator rather than the DIP switch to make the settings. (2) Do not set the DIP switches or pins other than as specified in the table above. Voltage/Current Input Mode Settings Switch ON 1 2 3 4 352 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Pin No. 1 Setting Input CH0 voltage/current input mode toggle 2 Input CH1 voltage/current input mode toggle Input CH2 voltage/current input mode toggle Input CH3 voltage/current input mode toggle 3 4 Specification OFF: Voltage input ON: Current input (Default setting is OFF) Terminal Arrangements Communications Connector BS+ Communications power supply + BDH Communications data high BDL Communications data low BS− Communications power supply − I/O Connector Pin No. 1 3 5 7 9 11 13 15 Note 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Signal name 0 + (Voltage/current input+) RSV 0 – (Voltage/current input–) AG (Analog GND) 2 + (Voltage/current input+) RSV 2 – (Voltage/current input–) AG (Analog GND) Pin No. 2 4 6 8 10 12 14 16 Signal name 1 + (Voltage/current input+) RSV 1 – (Voltage/current input–) AG (Analog GND) 3 + (Voltage/current input+) RSV 3 – (Voltage/current input–) AG (Analog GND) Do not connect anything to the RSV terminal. 353 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Internal Circuits n+ 510kΩ Voltage/Current input mode settings switch 510kΩ 250Ω n− Analog GND Wiring and Switch Settings n+ n + (Voltage/current input+) RSV n − (Voltage/current input−) n− AG Input type Voltage input Current input Voltage/Current input mode settings switch OFF (Voltage input) ON (Current input) Dimensions 85.7 92.8 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 15 60 78.73 354 5.3 90 (101.7) 96.7 (90) (102) 6.4 The numbers inside the parentheses are reference dimensions. (mm) Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable 25.4 99.9 ■ When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted (mm) 37 136.5 ■ When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 10 48 (mm) 355 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors 25.4 116 ■ When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted (mm) 6-7-4 Two-point Analog Output Slave Unit (with MIL Connectors) CRT1-VDA02ML General Specifications Item Specification Voltage Output Model Output signal ranges External output allowable load resistance Resolution Overall accuracy 25°C –10 to 55°C 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 1 kΩ min. 1/6,000 (full scale) ±0.4% FS ±0.8% FS Current Output CRT1-VDA02ML 0 to 20 mA 4 to 20 mA 600 Ω max. ±0.4% FS (See note.) ±0.8% FS (See note.) Conversion cycle DA conversion data 2 ms/ 2 points –10 to 10 V range: F448 to 0BB8 hex full scale (–3,000 to 3,000) Other ranges: 0000 to 1770 hex full scale (0 to 6,000) Isolation method Photocoupler isolation (between output and communications lines) No isolation between output signal wires. DIN Track mount or mount for Mounting Bracket Multi-power supply 105 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply 170 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply 75 g max. DA conversion range: ±5% FS of the above data ranges. Mounting Power supply type Communications power current consumption Weight Note 356 The specified accuracy does not apply below 0.2 mA when using the 0 to 20 mA range. Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Component Names and Functions Top Front Bottom (Mounted side) Communications connector output range switch Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 from mounted side Communications indicators: MS and NS I/O connector (MIL connector) Indicator Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. Switch Setting the Node Address The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) Rotary switch settings are read when power is turned ON. (Mounted side) 90 1 10s digit of node address 90 1 4 5 6 7 8 1s digit of node address 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 2 3 (Front side) Output range switch (Front side) ON 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Pin No. 1 2 3 Setting Range settings for output CH0 Specification See the next table Default setting: All pins OFF 357 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Pin No. 4 5 6 7 8 Note Setting Range settings for output CH1 Specification See the next table Default setting: All pins OFF Always OFF. Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may occur if it is set to ON. OFF: Use CX-Integrator. ON: Use DIP switch. Range setting method (1) Always use the default setting (OFF) for pin 7. (2) Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the ranges. If this pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled. (3) The DIP switch settings are read when power is turned ON. ■ Range for output CH0 Output range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Pin 1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Pin 2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF Pin 3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ■ Range for output CH1 Output range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Note Pin 4 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Pin 6 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON Do not set the DIP switches or pins other than as specified in the table above. Terminal Arrangements Communications Connector 358 Pin 5 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF BS+ Communications power supply + BDH Communications data high BDL Communications data low BS− Communications power supply − Section 6-7 Units with Connectors I/O Connector Pin No. 1 3 5 7 9 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Signal name V0 + (Voltage output+) I0 + (Current output+) 0 – (Voltage/current output–) N.C. N.C. Pin No. 2 4 6 8 10 Signal name V1 + (Voltage output+) I1 + (Current output+) 1 – (Voltage/current output–) N.C. N.C. Internal Circuits In+ Vn+ n− Analog GND Wiring Wiring for Voltage Output Vn+ External device In+ nN.C. N.C. Wiring for Current Output Vn+ In+ External device n− N.C. N.C. 359 Section 6-7 Units with Connectors Dimensions 85.7 92.8 When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 60 15 78.73 Communications Connector Dimensions Including the Connector and Cable 25.4 99.9 ■ When a DCN4-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted (mm) 360 5.3 90 (101.7) 96.7 (90) (102) 6.4 The numbers inside the parentheses are reference (mm) dimensions. Section 6-7 Units with Connectors 37 136.5 ■ When a DCN5-BR4 Flat Connector Plug Is Mounted (mm) ■ When a DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector Is Mounted 10 48 (mm) 25.4 116 ■ When a DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector Is Mounted (mm) 361 Units with Connectors 362 Section 6-7 SECTION 7 Temperature Input Units This section describes the Temperature Input Units. 7-1 Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 7-1-1 Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 7-1-2 List of Data Processing Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364 7-1-3 Temperature Input Unit Display Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365 Overview of Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 7-2-1 Math Operations and Processing Input Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367 7-2-2 I/O Data Type and Allocation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 369 7-3 Status Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376 7-4 Monitoring Temperature Data. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378 7-2 7-5 Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382 7-5-1 382 Temperature Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363 Section 7-1 Temperature Input Units 7-1 7-1-1 Temperature Input Units Temperature Input Units A Temperature Input Unit supports a variety of functions, such as scaling and peak/bottom hold functions. They can internally perform math operations on temperature input values, which previously required ladder programming at a host PLC. Temperature data can be obtained from math operations and allocated as I/O in combination with Temperature Status Flags or other status information. The CX-Integrator can be used to easily allocate and monitor status information, set Temperature Input Unit functions, and monitor data. 7-1-2 List of Data Processing Functions The following tables list the data processing functions that can be used with Temperature Input Units. Refer to 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions for details on functions and setting methods. Function Moving average Details Calculates the average of the past eight temperature input values, and produces a stable input value even when the input value is unsteady. Scaling Performs scaling. Scaling allows conversion of temperature input values into values using the industry unit required by the user. It reduces the number of operations requiring ladder programming in the master PLC Unit. Scaling also supports an offset function for compensating for mounting errors in sensors and other devices. Peak/bottom hold Holds the maximum and minimum temperature input values. Top/valley hold Holds the top and valley temperature input values. Rate of change Calculates the rate of change for temperature input values for each sampling period. Comparator Temperature input value or data after calculation (peak value, bottom value, top value, valley value, rate of change) are compared to 4 types of set values: Alarm Trip Point High (HH), Warning Trip Point High (H), Warning Trip Point Low (L), and Alarm Trip Point Low (LL) and the results are provided using the Temperature Data Status Flag. Input Error Detection Disable Can be used to disable detection of input errors (including Function disconnection). This function is used when there are unused inputs. Off-wire detection Detects disconnections of analog inputs. User adjustment Can be used to adjust the input value when an offset occurs due to hardware errors. Last maintenance date Records the date of the last maintenance in the Unit. Input temperature variation Makes a relative comparison of two inputs and detects a detection function temperature difference between two inputs. Compiles the total heat exposure of a device or sensor by ReplaceTemperature ment moni- integration func- multiplying the temperature and measurement time. toring tion functions Top/Valley count Counts the number of heating cycles handled by a device function or application that has fixed cycles of temperature changes. Temperature Measures how long the system is at a user-set temperaRange Count ture or within a user-set temperature range. 364 Default Moving average disabled. Disabled 0 to 28,000 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Enabled Disabled 2008/10/1 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Temperature Input Units Section 7-1 Note Data will be undefined if default values are set using the CX-Integrator or other Support Software. 7-1-3 Temperature Input Unit Display Modes Temperature Input Units have two Display Modes: normal and 1/100 display. Normal Display Mode (Default Setting) The input temperature data is converted to 4-digit hexadecimal digital data and transmitted to the Master Unit. If the conversion data is negative, the negative value is expressed as the two's complement. Four words are allocated in the Master Unit for the four inputs, as shown in the following diagram. If the data for the input type contains a digit below the decimal place, the value sent to the master will be 10 times the actual value. (The decimal point is omitted.) 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 First word + 0CH Input CH0 Temperature conversion data First word + 1CH Input CH1 Temperature conversion data First word + 2CH Input CH2 Temperature conversion data First word + 3CH Input CH3 Temperature conversion data 2 1 0 • Example 1: R type thermocouple at 1,000°C 1,000 converted to hexadecimal → 03E8 hex • Example 2: U type thermocouple at 350.0°C 350 × 10 = 3,500 converted to hexadecimal → 0DAC hex 1/100 Display Mode The input temperature data for all input types is transmitted to the Master as data with precision to 0.01 digits. The temperature data is multiplied by 100 and converted to 8-digit hexadecimal digital data (four long values). If the conversion data is negative, the negative value is expressed as the two’s complement. 365 Section 7-1 Temperature Input Units Eight words are allocated in the Master Unit for the four inputs, as shown in the following diagram. 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 First word + 0CH Input CH0 Temperature conversion data (rightmost) First word + 1CH Input CH0 Temperature conversion data (leftmost) First word + 2CH Input CH1 Temperature conversion data (rightmost) First word + 3CH Input CH1 Temperature conversion data (leftmost) First word + 4CH Input CH2 Temperature conversion data (rightmost) First word + 5CH Input CH2 Temperature conversion data (leftmost) First word + 6CH Input CH3 Temperature conversion data (rightmost) First word + 7CH Input CH3 Temperature conversion data (leftmost) • Example 1: 850.00°C 850 × 100 = 85,000 converted to hexadecimal → 0001 4C08 hex Rightmost data = 4C08 hex; Leftmost data = 0001 hex • Example 2: −200.00°C −200 × 100 = −20,000 converted to hexadecimal → FFFF B1E0 hex Rightmost data = B1E0 hex; Leftmost data = FFFF hex Setting the 1/100 Display Mode 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. With the CX-Integrator, double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit to open the Configuration Window. 3. Click the General Tab and select Temperature Data1 (1/100) in the Default Connection Path (In) Field. 366 Overview of Temperature Input Units Section 7-2 4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. Note 1. The 1/100 Display Mode must be enabled by setting the connection path with the CX-Integrator. If the Normal Display Mode is selected for the I/O data from the CX-Integrator, the temperature data will change to 0. 2. In 1/100 Display Mode, the temperature data will be converted to two decimal places even though the actual resolution is not 0.01°C (or °F). Consequently, the display for temperatures in 0.1 °C/°F or 0.01 °C/°F ranges may jump back and forth between values. Treat any values displayed in Normal Display Mode beyond the specified input resolution as reference data. 7-2 7-2-1 Overview of Temperature Input Units Math Operations and Processing Input Data Performing Math Operations on Input Data The following math operations can be performed on external temperature input values. • Scaling to user-specified industrial units • Moving average processing Processed data can be allocated as I/O in the Master Unit. The following math operations can be performed on temperature input values that have undergone the above processing. • Peak/hold operation • Top/valley operation • Rate of change calculations • Cumulative operation The values after processing are called peak value, bottom value, top value, valley value, rate of change, and cumulated value. Math operations are performed according to the following flowchart. 367 Section 7-2 Overview of Temperature Input Units Input A Moving average Scaling Analog or Temp. input value 1 A Peak/Bottom Top/Valley Peak value 2 Top value 4 Bottom value 3 Valley value 5 Rate of change Rate of change value 6 Cumulated value Cumulated value Top/Valley detection timing (allocated I/O data) Hold Flag Data Flow Selection Conversion processing Allocated I/O data Processing results Selecting Allocation Data After performing math operations, select the data to be allocated to I/O in the Master Unit from the following six values: temperature input value, peak value, bottom value, top value, valley value, and rate of change. The selected data will be Temperature Data 1, and can be allocated in the Master Unit alone or in combination with Status Flags. The data is selected using the CX-Integrator or explicit messages. Comparison with four alarm set values, HH, H, L, and LL can be performed for Temperature Data 1. This is called the comparator function. Flow of Data in Temperature Input Units 368 In a Temperature Input Unit, it is possible to switch the display mode of the data selected from the six values. The Display Mode can be the Normal Display Mode or the 1/100 Display Mode. The data can be allocated in either mode for Temperature Data 1. Section 7-2 Overview of Temperature Input Units Moving average and scaling enabled/disabled Six values Temperature input value 1/100 Display Mode (2 words/input) Peak value Temperature Data 1 (allocated I/O data) Bottom value Display mode (Set from CX-Integrator.) Top value Normal Display Mode (1 word/input) Temperature Data 1 (allocated I/O data) Data can be allocated for I/O as Temperature Data 1 in either mode. Valley value Rate of change Comparator The Comparator can be used for the value allocated as Temperature Data 1. Temperature Data Status Flag (allocated I/O data) Note By default, the temperature input value will be allocated as I/O. Math processing Input value Other processing results Input value Input 2 Math processing Input 3 Math processing Other processing results Input value 7-2-2 Other processing results Selected processing Input 1 Other processing results Temperature Data 1 Selected processing Math processing Temperature Data 1 Temperature Data 1 Selected processing Input value Input 0 Selected processing Temperature Data 1 can be set separately for each input, as shown in the following diagram. Temperature Data 1 I/O Data Type and Allocation A Temperature Input Unit support the following four types of input data and one type of output data. Required data can be allocated to I/O and used. Data is allocated using the CX-Integrator. 369 Section 7-2 Overview of Temperature Input Units Input Data Input data Description Temperature Data 1 • Allocated to monitor temperature data. Normal Display: 4 input words • Select one of the following values: temperature input value, peak value, bottom value, top value, (8 bytes) valley value, or rate of change. (The temperature 1/100 Display: 8 input words input value is allocated by default.) (16 bytes) Note The comparator function can be used with the value allocated as Temperature Data 1. Top/Valley Detection Timing Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags are allocated to Flags (1 input word (2 bytes)) one input word. These flags are allocated together with the top/valley value and used to time the reading of value held as the top or valley value. Temperature Data Status These words contain the bits for the Comparator Flag (2 input words (4 bytes)) Result Flag, Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag, and Disconnected Line Detection Flag. The function of each bit is as follows: • Comparator Result Flags: Allow control of the judgement results even if temperature input value is not allocated. • Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags: These flags are allocated together with the top/valley value and used to time the reading of value held as the top or valley value. • Off-wire Detection Flags: Disconnections can be detected even when the temperature input value is not allocated. Temperature Data 1 + Top/ These words contain Temperature Data 1 followed by Valley Detection Timing Flags the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags. Normal Display: 5 input words (10 bytes) 1/100 Display: 9 input words (18 bytes) Output Data Output data Hold Flags 1 output word (2 bytes) Description These flags are used with the hold functions (peak, bottom, top, and valley) to control the execution timing of hold functions from the Master Unit. Note Data can be allocated using other data combinations if an OMRON CS/CJseries Master Unit is used. The settings are made in the Master Unit. Selecting Temperature Data The data can be selected from six calculated values to allocate as Temperature Data 1. Select one of the following: temperature input value, peak value, bottom value, top value, valley value, or rate of change. The selected data is allocated in the Master Unit alone or in combination with Status Flags. Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the table for the input where the temperature data is to be selected and select the data to allocated in the Allocate Temperature Data 1 Field. 370 Section 7-2 Overview of Temperature Input Units 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. Selecting I/O Data for Allocation Use one of the following methods to select data for allocation and then perform remote I/O communications. 1,2,3... 1. Allocating only the temperature input values (default I/O data) 2. Allocating selected I/O data patterns (fixed I/O data combinations) ■ Allocating Only the Temperature Input Values When using the Temperature Input Unit's default settings, only the temperature input values are selected as I/O data and allocated in the four words (eight bytes) of the Master Unit's Input Area, as shown in the following diagram. 15 First word + 0CH First word + 1CH First word + 2CH First word + 3CH 0 Temperature Input Value for Input CH0 Temperature Input Value for Input CH1 Temperature Input Value for Input CH2 Temperature Input Value for Input CH3 If the 1/100 Display Mode is set for the temperature input value with the CXIntegrator, eight words (sixteen bytes) will be allocated in the Master's Input Area, as shown in the following diagram. First word + 0CH First word + 1CH First word + 2CH First word + 3CH First word + 4CH First word + 5CH First word + 6CH First word + 7CH 15 0 Temperature Input Value for Input CH0, Lower Word Temperature Input Value for Input CH0, Upper Word Temperature Input Value for Input CH1, Lower Word Temperature Input Value for Input CH1, Upper Word Temperature Input Value for Input CH2, Lower Word Temperature Input Value for Input CH2, Upper Word Temperature Input Value for Input CH3, Lower Word Temperature Input Value for Input CH3, Upper Word 371 Section 7-2 Overview of Temperature Input Units ■ Allocating Selected I/O Data Patterns Data such as Status Flags can be allocated together with Temperature Data 1 as I/O in the following combinations. The data to be combined can be selected from the CX-Integrator. Example: Allocating Temperature Data 1 + Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags in the Master Unit using normal display. 15 First word + 0CH First word + 1CH First word + 2CH First word + 3CH First word + 4CH ■ 1,2,3... 8 7 0 Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0 Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1 Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2 Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3 Top Detection Timing Flag Valley Detection Timing Flag Using the CX-Integrator 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the General Tab and select an I/O data pattern in the Default Connection Path (In) Field. The following example shows selecting the temperature data and status flags. 4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. I/O Data Temperature Data 1 Temperature Data 1 is used to monitor the temperature input value. The temperature input value is allocated as the default setting, but any of the following data can be allocated: temperature input value, peak value, bottom value, top value, valley value, or rate of change. Note The comparator function can be used for the data allocated as Temperature Data 1. 372 Section 7-2 Overview of Temperature Input Units The following tables show the data format used for allocating data in the Master Unit. Data is allocated as two's complements. Normal Display (4 Words (8 Bytes)) 15 0 First word + 0CH First word + 1CH First word + 2CH First word + 3CH Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0 Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1 Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2 Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3 1/100 Display Mode (8 Words (16 Bytes)) 15 First word + 0CH First word + 1CH First word + 2CH First word + 3CH First word + 4CH First word + 5CH First word + 6CH First word + 7CH Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags 0 Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0, Lower Word Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0, Upper Word Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1, Lower Word Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1, Upper Word Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2, Lower Word Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2, Upper Word Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3, Lower Word Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3, Upper Word These flags turn ON for the one-shot time when a top or valley is detected for the top/valley hold function. These flags are allocated when detecting the time to read the values held as the top or valley values at the Master Unit. The following data format is used when these flags are allocated in the Master Unit (1 word (2 bytes)). 15 8 7 +1 +0 +1 Bit 7 0 0 Bit 6 0 0 0 +0 Bit 5 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 V_ST0 Lower byte T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 T_ST0 Upper byte Each bit is described in the following table. +0 Byte Abbreviation V_STx Name Valley Detection Timing Flag +1 T_STx Top Detection Timing Flag Description Turns ON when a valley is detected by the top/valley hold function and then turns OFF after the one-shot time has elapsed. Turns ON when a top is detected by the top/valley hold function and then turns OFF after the one-shot time has elapsed. Note The one-shot time can be changed. For details, refer to 11-6-4 Top/Valley Hold. Temperature Data Status Flag The Temperature Status Flags include the Comparator Result Flag, the Top/ Valley Detection Timing Flags, and the Disconnected Line Detection Flags. These flags are allocated for detection and monitoring. The data format used for each byte when these flags are allocated in the Master Unit is shown below (2 words (4 bytes)). 373 Section 7-2 Overview of Temperature Input Units 15 8 7 0 +1 +3 +0 +2 +0 Bit 7 BW0 Bit 6 Bit 5 T_ST0 V_ST0 Bit 4 HH0 Bit 3 H0 Bit 2 PS0 Bit 1 L0 Bit 0 LL0 +1 BW1 T_ST1 V_ST1 HH1 H1 PS1 L1 LL1 +2 BW2 T_ST2 V_ST2 HH2 H2 PS2 L2 LL2 +3 BW3 T_ST3 V_ST3 HH3 H3 PS3 L3 LL3 Input CH0 Input CH1 Input CH2 Input CH3 Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Each bit is described in the following table. Bit 0 Temperature Data 1 + Top/ Valley Detection Timing Flags 374 AbbreviName ation LLx Compara- Low Low Limit tor result Alarm Flag 1 Lx 2 PSx 3 Hx 4 HHx 5 V_STx 6 T_STx 7 BWx Description Turns ON when the value of data allocated in Temperature Data 1 drops below the Low Low Limit alarm setting. Low Limit Alarm Turns ON when the value of Flag data allocated in Temperature Data 1 drops below the Low Limit alarm setting. Normal Flag Turns ON when none of the (pass signal) alarms (High High Limit, High Limit, Low Low Limit, and Low Limit) have been output. High Limit Turns ON when the value of Alarm Flag data allocated in Temperature Data 1 exceeds the High Limit alarm setting. High High Limit Turns ON when the value of Alarm Flag data allocated in Temperature Data 1 exceeds the High High Limit alarm setting. Valley DetecTurns ON when a valley is Top/Valley Detec- tion Timing Flag detected by the top/valley hold function and then turns OFF tion after the one-shot time has Timing elapsed. Flag Top Detection- Turns ON when a top is Timing Flag detected by the top/valley hold function and then turns OFF after the one-shot time has elapsed. Off-wire Detection Flag Turns ON when a disconnection is detected. This data pattern consists of Temperature Data 1 followed by the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags. It is allocated in the Master Unit using the following data format. Section 7-2 Overview of Temperature Input Units Normal Display (5 Words (10 Bytes)) 15 8 7 +1 +3 +5 +7 +9 Bit 7 Bit 6 +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 0 +0 +2 +4 +6 +8 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0 Bit 0 Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1 0 0 0 0 Lower byte Upper byte Lower byte Upper byte Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2 Lower byte Upper byte Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3 Lower byte Upper byte 0 0 V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 V_ST0 Lower byte 0 0 T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 T_ST0 Upper byte 1/100 Display Mode (9 Words (18 Bytes)) 15 8 +1 +3 +5 +7 +9 +11 +13 +15 +17 Bit 7 +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 +12 +13 +14 +15 +16 +17 0 0 7 0 +0 +2 +4 +6 +8 +10 +12 +14 +16 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0, Lower Word Lower byte Upper byte Temperature Data 1 for Input CH0, Upper Word Lower byte Upper byte Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1, Lower Word Lower byte Upper byte Temperature Data 1 for Input CH1, Upper Word Lower byte Upper byte Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2, Lower Word Lower byte Upper byte Temperature Data 1 for Input CH2, Upper Word Lower byte Upper byte Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3, Lower Word Lower byte Upper byte Temperature Data 1 for Input CH3, Upper Word Lower byte Upper byte 0 0 0 V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 V_ST0 Lower byte 0 0 0 T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 T_ST0 Upper byte 375 Section 7-3 Status Areas Hold Flags (Output) The Hold Flags are used with the peak/bottom hold and top/valley hold functions. They are used to control the hold execution timing from the Master Unit. They are allocated in the Master Unit using the following data format (1 word (2 bytes)). 15 8 7 0 +1 Bit 7 0 0 +0 +1 Bit 6 0 0 +0 Bit 5 0 0 Bit 4 0 0 Bit 3 HD3 0 Bit 2 HD2 0 Bit 1 HD1 0 Bit 0 HD0 0 Lower byte Upper byte Each bit is described in the following table. Bit 0 Note 7-3 Abbreviation Name HD0 Hold Flag for Input 0 1 HD1 Hold Flag for Input 1 2 HD2 Hold Flag for Input 2 3 HD3 Hold Flag for Input 3 Description The hold function is performed for Temperature Input 0 while this flag is ON. The hold function stops and the last value is held when the flag goes OFF. The hold function is performed for Temperature Input 1 while this flag is ON. The hold function stops and the last value is held when the flag goes OFF. The hold function is performed for Temperature Input 2 while this flag is ON. The hold function stops and the last value is held when the flag goes OFF. The hold function is performed for Temperature Input 3 while this flag is ON. The hold function stops and the last value is held when the flag goes OFF. A transmission delay may occur between when the Master Unit's power is turned ON and the status of the Hold Flag is transferred to the Temperature Input Unit. Status Areas A Temperature Input Unit has two status areas. The flags are turned ON and OFF based on the threshold values set by the user for each function in that Unit. When any of the bits in the status area of the slaves connected to the Master Unit turns ON, the corresponding bit (bit 12 is for warning status area notices and bit 13 is for alarm area notices) of the status flag in the Master Unit turns ON. The Temperature Input Unit's status area information can be read by using the CX-Integrator or explicit messages. 376 Section 7-3 Status Areas Master Unit The status bit detection allocated to the master is OR of all slaves Transmitted to Master Unit Temperature Input Unit The Status Area in the Temperature Input Unit has a Warning Status Area and an Alarm Status Area. Warning Status Area The Temperature Input Unit's Warning Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These bits indicate minor errors in the Unit. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 Content Reserved. Reserved. Network Power Voltage Drop Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Voltage dropped below threshold.) Unit Maintenance Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.) Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Temperature Input Warning Flag OFF: Within range (below set monitor value) ON: Out-of-range (equal to or above set monitor value) Cumulative Counter Exceeded Flag OFF: Within range (below set monitor value) ON: Out-of-range (equal to or above set monitor value) Input Temperature Variation Detection Threshold Exceeded Flag OFF: Within range (below set monitor value) ON: Out-of-range (equal to or above set monitor value) Set Temperature Range Total Time Exceeded Flag OFF: Within range (below set monitor value) ON: Out-of-range (equal to or above set monitor value) Description Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Turns ON when the Network Power Voltage drops below the voltage set as the threshold for monitoring. Turns ON when the Total Unit Conduction Time exceeds the value set as the threshold for monitoring. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Turns ON when the temperature data exceeds the displayable range or the monitor value set for the comparator function. Turns ON when the cumulative value exceeds the set monitor value. Turns ON when the difference between input temperatures exceed the set monitor value. Turns ON when time in the set temperature range exceeds the set monitor value. 377 Section 7-4 Monitoring Temperature Data Bit 12 13 14 15 Alarm Status Area Description Turns ON when the number of tops or valleys exceeds the set monitor value. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. The Temperature Input Unit's Alarm Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These bits indicate serious errors in the Unit. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Content Reserved. EEPROM Data Error Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error Reserved. Description Cannot be used. Turns ON when there is an error with data in the EEPROM. Cannot be used. 10 11 12 13 14 Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Disconnected Line Detection Flag OFF: Normal or input error detection is disabled ON: Disconnected line detected or cold junction compensator error occurred Cold Junction Compensator Offwire Flag (CRT1-TS04T only) OFF: Normal ON: Disconnected line detected Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. 15 Reserved. Cannot be used. 9 7-4 Content Number of Top/Valley Exceeded Set Value Flag OFF: Within range (below set monitor value) ON: Out-of-range (equal to or above set monitor value) Reserved. Reserved. Reserved. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Cannot be used. Turns ON when the line is disconnected or when there is a Cold Junction Compensator Error. Turns ON when the cold junction compensator is disconnected. Monitoring Temperature Data The Monitor Window of the CX-Integrators can be used to monitor the set values and current status of temperature data, and to check Unit maintenance information. With the CX-Integrator connected online, right-click a Temperature Input Unit icon in the Network Configuration Window and select Monitor from the popup menu to display the Monitor Window. The check boxes (flags) shown in the following table will be selected if the corresponding error had occurred. Refer to 11-1 CX-Integrator on page 481 for details on the CX-Integrator. 378 Section 7-4 Monitoring Temperature Data Monitor Window General Tab Page Monitor Display Status Check Boxes Item Comment Last Maintenance Date Present Unit Conduction Time Present Network Power Voltage Network Power Voltage (Peak) Network Power Voltage (Bottom) Unit Maintenance Network Power Voltage Drop Cumulated Counter Over Buttons Note Description Displays the text set as the Unit comment. Displays the last maintenance date that was set. Displays the total time that the Unit has been ON (cumulative power ON time). Displays the present network power supply voltage. Displays the maximum and minimum network power supply voltages up to the present time. Selected if the total Unit conduction time has exceed the monitor value set by the Unit Conduction Time Monitor Function. Selected if the network power supply voltage has fallen below the monitor value set by the Network Power Voltage Monitor Function. Selected if any of the input's cumulative time counter values has exceeded the monitor value set by the Temperature Integration Function. Selected if a Unit Error has occurred in the Unit memory. Selected if a Temperature Resistance Sensor Disconnection error has occurred. EEPROM Data Error Temperature Resistance Sensor Disconnected Clear Button Click this button to clear the displayed values. Update Button Click this button to update the Maintenance information. Click this button to save the Maintenance Counter Save MainteValue in the Unit. The previous value is retained nance Counter when the power supply is turned OFF and ON again. Button Always update the information when the parameters have been edited or set. 379 Section 7-4 Monitoring Temperature Data Temperature Input Tab Page Monitor Display Item Input Type Display Mode I/O Comment Last Maintenance Date Present Value Peak Value Bottom Value Top Value Valley Value Rate of Change Temperature Total Time Top/Valley Count Cumulative Counter Max Value Min Value 380 Description Displays the present input sensor type. Indicates the number of digits displayed. 0000: No decimal point 0000.0: One digit below the decimal point 0000.0: Two digits below the decimal point Displays the text set as the connected device comment. Displays the last maintenance date that was set. Displays the present temperature input value. Display the peak value, bottom value, top value, and valley value of the temperature data retained by the Unit. Displays the rate of change in comparison to the previous sampling cycle. Displays the total time the temperature has been within the set temperature range. Displays the count measured by the Top/Valley Count Function. Displays the total time calculated by the cumulative counter. Displays the maximum and minimum values of the temperature data retained in the Unit. Section 7-4 Monitoring Temperature Data Item Status check boxes Buttons Note Description Over Range High Alarm Over High Warning Over Low Warning Over Low Alarm Over Under Range Selected when the temperature data is above the displayable range. Selected when the temperature data exceeds the monitor value set for the comparator function. Selected when the temperature data is below the displayable range. Broken Wire Selected when there is a disconnected wire. Threshold Cumu- Selected when the cumulated time exceeds the monitor value set for the Cumulative Temperature lated Counter Function. Over Cumulative Selected when there is an overflow in the cumuCounter Overflow lative counter value. Selected when there is an underflow in the cumuCumulative lative counter value. Counter Underflow Temperature Selected when the present value in the set temTotal Time Over perature range exceeds the monitor value. Top/Valley Count Selected when the top or valley count exceeds Over the monitor value. User Adjustment Selected when the user-set adjustment function is operating. Clear Buttons Clear the displayed values Always update the information when the parameters have been edited or set. Data Comparison between Channels Tab Page Item Comparison Contents Calculation Result Description Displays the inputs used in the error calculation. Displays the calculation results. 381 Section 7-5 Temperature Input Units Note If either of the comparison inputs is disconnected, the results will be 0.00 Error History Tab Page Item Content Network Power Voltage Unit Conduction Time Clear Button 7-5 7-5-1 Description Displays the contents of the communications errors that occurred. Displays the power supply voltage being supplied when the error occurred. Displays the total time that the network power supply had been ON when the error occurred. Clears the error history. Temperature Input Units Temperature Input Units Specifications Item Model Input type 382 Specifications CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P Switchable between R, S, K, J, T, E, B, N, L, Switchable between PT100 (−200 to 850°C) U, W, and PL2 and PT100 (−200 to 200°C) When set with CX-Integrator: Input types can When set with CX-Integrator: Input types can be set individually for each input. be set individually for each input. Wen set with DIP switch: The same input type Wen set with DIP switch: The same input type setting applies to all 4 inputs. setting applies to all 4 inputs. Section 7-5 Temperature Input Units Item Indicator accuracy Specifications (±0.3% of indication value or ±1°C, whichever −200 to 850°C input range: is larger) ±1 digit max. (See note.) (±0.3% of indication value or ±0.8°C, whichever is larger) ±1 digit max. Indicator Accuracy in Exceptional Cases −200 to 200°C input range: Input type and Input accuracy (±0.3% of indication value or ±0.5°C, whichtemperature range ever is larger) ±1 digit max. K, T, and N below ±2°C ±1 digit max. −100°C Conversion cycle Temperature conversion data Isolation method U and L ±2°C ±1 digit max. R and S below 200°C ±3°C ±1 digit max. B below 400°C Not specified. W ±0.3% of indication value or ±3°C (whichever is larger) ±1 digit max. PL2 ±0.3% of indication value or ±2°C (whichever is larger) ±1 digit max. 250 ms/4 points Binary data (4-digit hexadecimal when Normal Display Mode is selected or 8-digit hexadecimal when 1/100 Display Mode is selected.) Between input and communication lines: Photocoupler isolation Between temperature input signals: Photocoupler isolation 35-mm DIN track mounting (See note.) 75 mA max. at 24 VDC 75 mA max. at 24 VDC 110 mA max. at 14 VDC 110 mA max. at 14 VDC 148 g max. 147 g max. Mounting method Communications power supply current Weight Note Effects of Mounting Direction on Accuracy There are specifications that apply to the mounting direction and input accuracy. Refer to the next page for details. A cold junction compensator is included in the Terminal Block of the CRT1TS04T. The input accuracy depends on the mounting direction if only the Unit is replaced. Mounting direction Mounted normally Mounted in any direction other than the above Input accuracy As specified in the Performance Specifications. ±0.3% of indication value or ±2°C (whichever is larger) ±1 digit max. Indicator Accuracy in Exceptional Cases Input type and temperature range Input accuracy K, T, and N below −100°C ±3°C ±1 digit max. U and L ±3°C ±1 digit max. R and S below 200°C ±4°C ±1 digit max. B below 400°C Not specified. W ±0.3% of indication value or ±4°C (whichever is larger) ±1 digit max. PL2 ±0.3% of indication value or ±3°C (whichever is larger) 383 Section 7-5 Temperature Input Units Names and Functions of Parts CRT1-TS04T Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: x10 and x1(from left) DIP switch (Sets the input range.) Communications connector TS 89 234 567 89 234 567 01 01 Removal Input Terminal Block CRT1-TS04P Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: x10 and x1(from left) DIP switch (Sets the input range.) Communications connector TS 234 89 01 234 567 89 567 01 Removal Input Terminal Block Display Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. Node Address Settings The node address of the Temperature Input Unit is set as a decimal value using the left rotary switch for the ten's digit and the right rotary switch for the one's digit. (Up to 63 nodes can be set.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 Note The rotary switch settings are read when the power is turned ON. 0 1 Node address, x1 Node address, x10 384 Section 7-5 Temperature Input Units Setting the Input Type Setting with the DIP Switch The input type can be set using the DIP switch or the CX-Integrator. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ON Set each pin according to the following table. Pin No. Setting SW1 Sets the input type (input range) SW2 SW3 SW4 SW5 Always OFF Specifications Refer to the following table. Default setting: All pins OFF Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may occur if it is set to ON. OFF: °C conversion ON: °F conversion Default setting: OFF Always set this pin to OFF. Malfunctions may occur if it is set to ON. SW6 Selects °C or °F display. SW7 Always OFF SW8 Selects the input type set- OFF: Set with CX-Integrator. ting method. ON: Set with DIP switch. Note When the input type is set with the DIP switch, all inputs are set to the same input type. To set different input types, use the CX-Integrator to make the settings. CRT1-TS04T SW1 OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON OFF ON Note SW2 OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF OFF ON ON SW3 OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON SW4 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON Input type R S K (−200 to 1300°C) K (0.0 to 500.0°C) J (−100 to 850°C) J (0.0 to 400.0°C) T E L (−100 to 850°C) L (0.0 to 400.0°C) U N W B PL2 Not used. If the settings are incorrect, the MS Indicator will flash red and the Unit will not operate. In this case, make the settings again and reset the power supply. 385 Section 7-5 Temperature Input Units CRT1-TS04P SW1 Always OFF Note Note SW2 OFF ON SW3 Always OFF. SW4 Input type PT100 (−200 to 850°C) PT100 (−200 to 200°C) If the settings are incorrect, the MS Indicator will flash red and the Unit will not operate. In this case, make the settings again and reset the power supply. 1. Always set pin 5 and pin 7 to OFF (default). 2. Always set pin 8 to ON if the DIP switch is used to set the ranges. If this pin is OFF, the DIP switch settings will not be enabled. 3. The DIP switch settings are read when the power is turned ON. 4. °C/°F display settings cannot be set individually for each input. Setting Using the CXIntegrator 1,2,3... Input types can be set for each temperature input using the CX-Integrator. Use the following procedure. 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the tab for the input where the input type is to be set and select an input type in the Input Type Field. 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. Temperature Ranges by Input Type The following tables show the temperature ranges for each input type. CRT1-TS04T Input type R S K (−200 to 1300°C) 386 Temperature range (°C) 0 to 1,700 0 to 1,700 −200 to 1,300 Temperature range (°F) 0 to 3,000 0 to 3,000 −300 to 2,300 Section 7-5 Temperature Input Units Input type K (0.0 to 500.0°C) J (−100 to 850°C) J (0.0 to 400.0°C) T E L (−100 to 850°C) L (0.0 to 400°C) U N W B PL2 Temperature range (°C) 0.0 to 500.0 −100 to 850 0.0 to 400.0 −200.0 to 400.0 0 to 600 −100 to 850 0.0 to 400.0 −200.0 to 400.0 −200 to 1,300 0 to 2,300 100 to 1,800 0 to 1,300 Temperature range (°F) 0.0 to 900.0 −100 to 1,500 0.0 to 750.0 −300.0 to 700.0 0 to 1,100 −100 to 1,500 0.0 to 750.0 −300.0 to 700.0 −300 to 2,300 0 to 4,100 300 to 3,200 0 to 2,300 Input type PT100 (−200 to 850°C) Temperature range (°C) −200.0 to 850.0 Temperature range (°F) −300.0 to 1,500.0 PT100 (−200 to 200°C) −200.0 to 200.0 −300.0 to 380.0 CRT1-TS04P Note The temperature ranges listed above are the ranges in which the input accuracy is within the specified range. Convertible Temperature Ranges The convertible data range depends on the selected input type, as shown in the following tables. CRT1-TS04T Data Ranges Note Input type R S K (−200 to 1,300°C) K (0.0 to 500.0°C) °C −20 to 1,720 −20 to 1,720 −220 to 1,320 Display FFEC to 06B8 FFEC to 06B8 FF24 to 0528 °F −20 o 3,020 −20 to 3,020 −320 to 2,3200 Display FFEC to 0BCC FFEC to 0BCC FEC0 to 0910 −20.0 to 520.0 FF38 to 1450 −20.0 to 920.0 FF38 to 23F0 J (−100 to 850°C) J (0.0 to 400.0°C) T E L (−100 to 850°C) L (0.0 to 400.0°C) U N W B PL2 −120 to 870 FF88 to 0366 −120 to 1,520 FF88 to 05F0 −20.0 to 420.0 FF38 to 1068 −20.0 to 770.0 FF38 to 1E14 −220.0 to 420.0 −20 to 620 −120 to 870 F768 to 1068 FFEC to 026C FF88 to 0366 −320.0 to 720.0 −20 to 1,120 −120 to 1,520 F380 to 1C20 FFEC to 0460 FF88 to 05F0 −20.0 to 420.0 FF38 to 1068 −20.0 to 770.0 FF38 to 1E14 −220.0 to 420.0 −220 to 1,320 −20 to 2,320 80 to 1,820 −20 to 1,320 F768 to 1068 FF24 to 0528 FFEC to 0910 0050 to 071C FFEC to 0528 −320.0 to 720.0 −320 to 2,320 −20 to 4,120 280 to 3,220 −20 to 2,320 F380 to 1C20 FEC0 to 0910 FFEC to 1018 0118 to 0C94 FFEC to 0910 1. The display data will be clamped at the minimum value when the value is below the minimum display value but higher than the value at which an offwire condition is detected. 387 Section 7-5 Temperature Input Units 2. When an off-wire condition is detected, the display data will be 7FFF. (In 1/100 Display Mode, the display data will be 7FFF FFFF.) CRT1-TS04P Data Ranges Input type °C PT100 −220.0 to 870.0 (−200 to 850°C) PT100 −220.0 to 220.0 (−200 to 200°C) Note Display F768 to 21FC °F −320.0 to 1,520.0 Display F380 to 3B60 F768 to 0898 −320.0 to 400.0 F380 o 0FA0 1. If the Unit is subjected to sudden temperature changes, moisture may condense in the Unit and cause incorrect indications. If there is condensation, remove the Unit from service and keep it at a steady temperature for about 1 hour before using it again. 2. If the input temperature exceeds the convertible range, the temperature data will be clamped at the minimum or maximum value. If the temperature exceeds the convertible range by a certain value, an offwire condition (broken or disconnected input wire) will be detected and the temperature data will be set to 7FFF Hex. If the input temperature returns to the convertible range, the off-wire detection function will be reset automatically and normal conversion data will be stored. Terminal Arrangement CRT1-TS04T 0 + NC 0 − NC 1 + NC 1 − NC 2 + NC NC 2 − 3 + NC 3 − NC Cold junction compensator Adjusts the input temperature. Do not touch or remove the compensator. The correct temperature data will not be displayed if the compensator is disturbed. CRT1-TS04P 0A NC 0B 0B 1A NC 1B 1B NC NC 2A NC 2B 2B 3A NC Wiring CRT1-TS04T Thermocouple input 0 + NC 0 − 388 CRT1-TS04P Platinum-resistance thermometer input 0A 0B 0B 3B 3B Section 7-5 Temperature Input Units Note If there are inputs that are not connected because they are not being used, an off-wire condition may be detected. To prevent an off-wire detection, wire the unused input terminals as shown in the following diagram. Alternatively, set the Input Error Detection Disable Function from the CX-Integrator. CRT1-TS04T Thermocouple input CRT1-TS04P Platinum-resistance thermometer input 0 + NC 0 − 0A 0B 0B Short the terminals. Connect a resistance of 50 Ω to 150 Ω. 66.9 50.1 3.14 50 Dimensions (Same for CRT1-TS04T and CRT1-TS04P) 115 (mm) 389 Temperature Input Units 390 Section 7-5 SECTION 8 Expansion Units This section describes the Expansion Units. 8-1 8-2 Expansion Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 392 Expansion Unit Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 8-2-1 Eight-point Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 394 8-2-2 Eight-point Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 397 8-2-3 Sixteen-point Input Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 400 8-2-4 Sixteen-point Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403 391 Section 8-1 Expansion Units 8-1 Expansion Units One Expansion Unit can be combined with one Digital I/O Slave Unit (CRT1ID16(-1), CRT1-OD16(-1), CRT1-ROS16, or CRT1-ROF16). The following Expansion Units are available. They can be combined in various ways for flexible I/O capacity expansion. Model XWT-ID08 XWT-ID08-1 XWT-OD08 XWT-OD08-1 XWT-ID16 XWT-ID16-1 XWT-OD16 XWT-OD16-1 I/O points 8 DC inputs (NPN) 8 DC inputs (PNP) 8 transistor outputs (NPN) 8 transistor outputs (PNP) 16 DC inputs (NPN) 16 DC inputs (PNP) 16 transistor outputs (NPN) 16 transistor outputs (PNP) Input capacity 8 8 0 0 16 16 0 0 Output capacity 0 0 8 8 0 0 16 16 Installing Expansion Units 1,2,3... 1. Remove the cover from the right side of the Digital I/O Slave Unit. 2. Align the connector on the Expansion Unit with the connector on the Digital I/O Slave Unit and press the Units together. 3. Press the Expansion Unit and Digital I/O Slave Unit together until they click into place with the connectors properly mated. I/O Power Supply 392 If an Expansion Input Unit is connected to a Digital Input Slave Unit, then I/O power must be supplied only to the Digital I/O Slave Unit. If any other combination of Units is used, I/O power must be supplied to both the Digital I/O Slave Unit and Expansion Unit. This includes connecting an Expansion Input Unit to a Digital Output Slave Unit, an Expansion Output Unit to a Digital Input Slave Unit, or an Expansion Output Unit to a Digital Output Slave Unit. Section 8-1 Expansion Units Refer to the following table and write the I/O power correctly when connecting an Expansion Unit. Combination Digital Input Slave Unit with Expansion Input Unit Example: CRT1-ID16 + XWT-ID16 Digital Input Slave Unit with Expansion Output Unit Example: CRT1-ID16 + XWT-OD16 Digital Output Slave Unit with Expansion Input Unit Example: CRT1-OD16 + XWT-ID16 Digital Output Slave Unit with Expansion Output Unit Example: CRT1-OD16 + XWT-OD16 Note I/O power supply to Expansion Slave Unit Not required. (The Expansion Unit uses the same I/O power supply as the Digital I/O Slave Unit.) Required (I/O power must be supplied to both Units.) Required (I/O power must be supplied to both Units.) Required (I/O power must be supplied to both Units.) Do not connect Expansion Units while the power supply is ON. 393 Section 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications 8-2 8-2-1 Expansion Unit Specifications Eight-point Input Units XWT-ID08/XWT-ID08-1 Input Section Specifications Item Specification Model XWT-ID08 Internal I/O common I/O capacity ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common NPN 8 inputs 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. XWT-ID08-1 PNP 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) 1.5 ms max. 8 inputs/common Component Names and Functions (Same for XWT-ID08 and XWT-ID08-1) Indicator Section Shows the status of each input. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 IN XWT-ID08 REMOTE TERMINAL Removable terminal block Operation Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 7 394 LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. Section 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications Internal Circuits XWT-ID08 (NPN) Photocoupler V 24 VDC 0 Internal circuits 1 Photocoupler G XWT-ID08-1 (PNP) V 24 VDC Photocoupler 0 Internal circuits 1 Photocoupler G Wiring XWT-ID08 (NPN) 24 VDC 6 7 V 1 2 G 9 3 3 0 10 5 4 2 7 5 4 6 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Blue (Black) Brown (White) Blue (Black) I/O power supply Black (White) + Brown (Red) − 8 1 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 395 Section 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications XWT-ID08-1 (PNP) 24 VDC 6 7 V 1 2 G 9 3 3 0 4 7 5 4 6 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Brown (White) Blue (Black) Brown (Red) Black (White) + I/O power supply Note 10 5 2 Blue (Black) − 8 1 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Dimensions (Same for XWT-ID08 and XWT-ID08-1) 13 396 66 3.1 50 43.9 29.9 49.7 (mm) Section 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications 8-2-2 Eight-point Output Units XWT-OD08/XWT-OD08-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model Internal I/O common I/O capacity Rated output current Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Specification XWT-OD08 XWT-OD08-1 NPN 8 outputs 0.5 A/output, 2.0 A/common 1.2 V max.(0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the G terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 8 outputs/common PNP 1.2 V max.(0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the V terminal) 0.1 mA max. Component Names and Functions (Same for XWT-OD08 and XWT-OD08-1) Indicator Section Shows the status of each output. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 0UT XWT-OD08 REMOTE TERMINAL Removable terminal block Operation Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 7 LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. 397 Section 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications Internal Circuits Photocoupler Voltage drop XWT-OD08 (NPN) V 24 VDC 0 Internal circuits 1 Photocoupler G XWT-OD08-1 (PNP) V 24 VDC Photocoupler 0 Photocoupler Voltage drop Internal circuits 1 398 G Section 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications Wiring XWT-OD08 (NPN) 24 VDC 6 7 V 1 8 1 2 G − 9 3 3 0 10 5 4 2 7 5 4 6 + I/O power supply Solenoid, valve, etc. Solenoid, valve, etc. XWT-OD08-1 (PNP) 24 VDC 6 7 V 1 2 G − 8 1 9 3 3 0 10 5 4 2 7 5 4 6 + I/O power supply Solenoid, valve, etc. Note Solenoid, valve, etc. When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. Dimensions (Same for XWT-OD08 and XWT-OD08-1) 50 43.9 66 3.1 29.9 13 49.7 (mm) 399 Section 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications 8-2-3 Sixteen-point Input Units XWT-ID16/XWT-ID16-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model Internal I/O common I/O capacity ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Specification XWT-ID16 NPN 16 inputs 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) 1.0 mA max. At 24 VDC: 6.0 mA max./input At 17 VDC: 3.0 mA min./input 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 16 inputs/common XWT-ID16-1 PNP 15 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the G terminal) Component Names and Functions (Same for XWT-ID16 and XWT-ID16-1) Indicator Section Shows the status of each input. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 IN XWT-ID16 REMOTE TERMINAL Removable terminal block Operation Indicators The meanings of the input indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 15 400 LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. Section 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications Internal Circuits XWT-ID16 (NPN) Photocoupler V 24 VDC 0 Internal circuits 1 Photocoupler G XWT-ID16-1 (PNP) V 24 VDC Photocoupler 0 Internal circuits 1 Photocoupler G Wiring XWT-ID16 (NPN) 24 VDC 10 11 V 1 2 G 13 3 3 0 14 5 4 2 5 4 15 7 6 6 16 9 7 8 17 11 8 10 18 13 15 9 12 14 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Blue (Black) Brown (White) Blue (Black) I/O power supply Brown (Red) + Black (White) − 12 1 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 401 Section 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications XWT-ID16-1 (PNP) 24 VDC 10 11 V 1 2 G 13 3 3 0 15 7 5 4 16 9 6 6 17 11 7 8 18 13 8 10 9 12 14 Brown (White) Blue (Black) Brown (Red) Black (White) 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Dimensions (Same for XWT-ID16 and XWT-ID16-1) 12 94 3.1 50 43.9 402 15 + I/O power supply Note 14 5 4 2 Blue (Black) − 12 1 29.9 49.7 (mm) Section 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications 8-2-4 Sixteen-point Output Units XWT-OD16/XWT-OD16-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model Internal I/O common I/O capacity Rated output current Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Specification XWT-OD16 XWT-OD16-1 NPN 16 outputs 0.5 A/output, 4.0 A/common 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the G terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 16 outputs/common PNP 1.2 V max. (0.5 A DC, between each output terminal and the V terminal) 0.1 mA max. Component Names and Functions (Same for XWT-OD16 and XWT-OD16-1) Indicator Section Shows the status of each output. 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 OUT XWT-OD16 REMOTE TERMINAL Removable terminal block Operation Indicators The meanings of the output indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 15 LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. 403 Section 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications Internal Circuits Internal Circuits Photocoupler Voltage drop XWT-OD16 (NPN) V 24 VDC 0 1 Photocoupler G XWT-OD16-1 (PNP) V 24 VDC Photocoupler 0 Photocoupler Voltage drop Internal Circuits 1 404 G Section 8-2 Expansion Unit Specifications Wiring XWT-OD16 (NPN) 24 VDC 10 11 V 12 1 1 2 G 3 0 − 13 3 14 5 4 2 15 7 5 4 16 9 6 6 7 8 18 17 11 15 13 8 10 9 14 12 + I/O power supply Solenoid, valve, etc. Solenoid, valve, etc. XWT-OD16-1 (PNP) 24 VDC 10 11 V 1 2 G 13 3 3 0 − 12 1 14 5 4 2 5 4 15 7 16 9 6 6 17 11 7 8 8 10 18 13 15 9 12 14 + I/O power supply Solenoid, valve, etc. Note Solenoid, valve, etc. When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. Dimensions (Same for XWT-OD16 and XWT-OD16-1) 12 94 3.1 50 43.9 29.9 49.7 (mm) 405 Expansion Unit Specifications 406 Section 8-2 SECTION 9 Bit Slave Units This section describes the Bit Slave Units. 9-1 Status Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 408 9-2 Allocating I/O Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 9-3-1 Two-point Input Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411 9-3-2 Two-point Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 415 9-3-3 Two-point Input Units (IP54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 419 9-3-4 Two-point Output Units (IP54). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 423 9-3-5 Four-point Input Units (IP54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 427 9-4 Clamp Terminal Blocks. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 Two-point Input/Two-point Output Units (IP54) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 432 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 9-5-1 Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 437 9-5-2 Two-point Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 438 9-5-3 Two-point Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 442 9-5-4 Four-point Input Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 446 9-5-5 Four-point Output Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 452 9-5-6 One-point Input/One-point Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 457 9-5-7 Two-point Input/Two-point Output Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 463 9-4-1 407 Section 9-1 Status Areas 9-1 Status Areas A Bit Slave Unit has two status areas: the Warning Status Area and the Alarm Status Area. The status flags in these areas are turned ON and OFF based on the threshold values set by the user for each function in that Unit. When any of the bits in the status area of the slaves connected to the Master Unit turns ON, the corresponding bit (bit 12 is for warning status area notices and bit 13 is for alarm area notices) of the status flag in the Master Unit turns ON. The Bit Slave Unit's status area information can be read by using the CX-Integrator or explicit messages. Master Unit The status bit detection allocated to the master is OR of all slaves Transmitted to Master Unit Bit Slave Unit The Bit Slave Unit has two status areas: the Warning Status Area and Alarm Status Area. Warning Status Area The Bit Slave Unit’s Warning Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These bits indicate minor errors in the Unit. Bit 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 Note 408 Content Reserved Reserved Network Power Voltage Drop Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Voltage dropped below threshold.) Unit Maintenance Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.) Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Operation Time Monitor Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.) Connected Device Maintenance Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.) Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Description ----Monitors the voltage set as the threshold for the network power voltage monitor function. Monitors the power ON time warning value set as the threshold for the Unit Conduction Time Monitor function. --------Turns ON when the threshold set for the operation time monitor function is exceeded. Turns ON when the threshold set for the contact operation monitor function or the total ON time monitor function is exceeded. ------------- For Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors, all bits are reserved. Section 9-2 Allocating I/O Data Alarm Status Area The Bit Slave Unit’s Alarm Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These bits indicate serious errors in the Unit. Bit 0 1 --Turns ON when there is an error in the EEPROM data. 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Power Short-circuit Detection Flag OFF: Normal ON: Short-circuit 11 Load Short-circuit Detection Flag OFF: Normal ON: Short-circuit Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved --------------Turns ON when there is a short in the power supply connection to the connected devices, including wiring mistakes and connected device failure. Turns ON when there is a short in the load connection, including wiring mistakes and connected device failure. 12 13 14 15 9-2 Description Reserved EEPROM Data Error Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error occurred Reserved 2 Note Content --- --------- Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors support only the EEPROM Data Error Flag. Allocating I/O Data Bit Slave Units are allocated node address areas in units of two points (two bits). • Input Units and Output Units Units with two points are allocated two bits (the node address set for the Unit). Units with four points are allocated four bits (the node address set for the Unit and the next node address area). • I/O Units Units are allocated four bits (the input and output node address areas). Two-point Input Units Bit Input Area 1 0 1 0 Four-point Input Units Bit Input Area 3 2 409 Section 9-2 Allocating I/O Data Two-point Output Units Bit Output Area 1 0 1 0 Not used. (See note.) 0 Not used. (See note.) 0 Four-point Output Units Bit Output Area 3 2 Two-point I/O Units Bit Output Area Bit Input Area Note Upper bits indicated “not used” for two-point Output Units are unused bits. Treat unused bits as follows: • Unused bits in bit output area: Use 0. • Unused bits in bit input area: 0 is input. Four-point I/O Units Bit Output Area 1 0 1 0 Bit Input Area Bit Slave Units are allocated node address areas in order without leaving any bits unused in the middle. For example, eight, two-point Slave Units are allocated one word. Likewise, four, two-point Slave Units and two, four-point Slave Units are also allocated one word. 410 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors 9-3 9-3-1 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Two-point Input Units CRT1B-ID02S/CRT1B-ID02S-1 Input Section Specifications Item Specification Model CRT1B-ID02S I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current Sensor power supply voltage ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Power short-circuit detection Isolation method Input indicators Degree of protection Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption (See note.) Input device supply current Weight CRT1B-ID02S-1 2 inputs NPN PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each input 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input ter- 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) minal and the G terminal) 1.0 mA max. 3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC) Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.) 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 2 inputs/common Supported. No isolation LEDs (yellow) IEC standard IP20 Screw installation (M4) Network power supply 65 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 80 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 80 mA/2 points 70 g max. Note 45 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 65 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula. Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption × number of sensors used) 411 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-ID02S and CRT1B-ID02S-1) Power short-circuit indicator (SHT0) I/O indicators 0 and 1 Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×100, ×10, and ×1 MS NS SHOT 0 1 Flat Cable (attached) I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) Display Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input and status indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 1 SHT0 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. Lit red. Power short-circuit The power supply is short-circuited. The node address is set as a decimal number between 0 and 127 with the 100s digit set on the left rotary switch, the 10s digit set on the middle rotary switch, and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. 2 3 4 7 8 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 100s digit of node address 412 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Internal Circuits CRT1B-ID02S (NPN) V NC G DC-DC converter (not isolated) BS− BD H IN0 Internal circuits BS+ V NC G BD L IN1 Load shortcircuit protection circuit CRT1B-ID02S-1 (PNP) V NC G DC-DC converter (not isolated) BS− BD H IN0 Internal circuits BS+ V NC G BD L IN1 Load shortcircuit protection circuit Wiring The I/O connector section uses e-CON connectors. Pin arrangements and signals are shown below. CRT1B-ID02S (NPN) V 2 NC 3 Blue (Black) Brown (White) 4 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) V NC G G IN 0 IN 1 Brown (Red) Black (White) Blue (Black) 1 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 413 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors CRT1B-ID02S-1 (PNP) 2 3 Blue (Black) Brown (White) 4 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Note V V NC NC G G IN 0 IN 1 Brown (Red) Black (White) Blue (Black) 1 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-ID02S and CRT1B-ID02S-1) 48 (548) 32.1 48 414 5.7 Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions. (mm) Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors 9-3-2 Two-point Output Units CRT1B-OD02S/CRT1B-OD02S-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Load power supply voltage Specification CRT1B-OD02S CRT1B-OD02S-1 2 outputs NPN PNP 0.2 A/output Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1.2 V (min.) 1.2 V max. (0.2 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.2 A DC, between each output terminal and BS−) output terminal and BS+) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Load short-circuit detection Isolation method Output indicators Degree of protection Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption (See note.) Weight 1.5 ms max. 2 outputs/common Supported. No isolation LEDs (yellow) IEC standard IP20 Screw installation (M4) Network power supply 55 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 75 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 59 g max. Note 55 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 70 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all outputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include the output device load current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O power supply for actuators. Be sure to consider the actuator load current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula. Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (actual load current × number of actuators used) 415 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-OD20S and CRT1B-OD20S-1) Power short-circuit indicator (SHT0) I/O indicators 0 and 1 Communications indicators: MS and NS Node address switches: ×100, ×10, and ×1 MS NS SHOT 0 1 Flat Cable (attached) I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) Display Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output and status indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 1 LED status Lit yellow. SHT0 Setting the Node Address I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. Lit red. Load power short-circuit detection The load power supply is short-circuited. The node address is set as a decimal number between 0 and 127 with the 100s digit set on the left rotary switch, the 10s digit set on the middle rotary switch, and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. 2 3 4 7 8 7 8 9 2 3 4 5 6 0 1 5 6 9 0 1 5 6 7 8 9 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address 100s digit of node address 416 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Internal Circuits CRT1B-OD02S (NPN) V NC NC Load shortcircuit protection circuit DC-DC converter (not isolated) BS− BD H Internal Circuits BS+ BD L OUT0 V NC NC Load shortcircuit protection circuit OUT1 CRT1B-OD02S-1 (PNP) NC NC G Load shortcircuit protection circuit DC-DC converter (not isolated) BS− BD H BD L Wiring Internal Circuits BS+ OUT0 NC NC G Load shortcircuit protection circuit OUT1 The I/O connector section uses e-CON connectors. Pin arrangements and signals are shown below. CRT1B-OD02S (NPN) 1 V V 2 NC NC 3 NC NC 4 OUT OUT 0 1 Solenoid valve, Solenoid valve, etc. etc. 417 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors CRT1B-OD02S-1 (PNP) 1 NC NC 2 NC NC 3 G G 4 OUT OUT 0 1 Solenoid valve, Solenoid valve, etc. etc. Note When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-OD02S and CRT1B-OD02S-1) 48 (548) 32.1 48 418 5.7 Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions. (mm) Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors 9-3-3 Two-point Input Units (IP54) CRT1B-ID02SP/CRT1B-ID02SP-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage Specification CRT1B-ID02SP CRT1B-ID02SP-1 2 inputs NPN PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) input terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) 1.0 mA max. 3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC) Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.) 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. OFF voltage OFF current Input current Sensor power supply voltage ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Power short-circuit detection Isolation method Input indicators Degree of protection Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption (See note.) Input device supply current Weight Note 2 inputs/common Supported. No isolation LEDs (yellow) IEC standard IP54 Screw installation (M4) Network power supply 65 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 80 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 80 mA/2 points 184 g max. The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula. Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption × number of sensors used) 419 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-ID02SP and CRT1B-ID02SP-1) Node address switches: ×100, ×10, and ×1 Power short-circuit indicator (SHT0) Communications indicators: MS and NS I/O indicators 0 and 1 I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) Flat Cable (attached) Display Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input and status indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 1 SHT0 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. Lit red. Power short-circuit The power supply is short-circuited. The node address is set as a decimal number between 0 and 127 with the 100s digit set on the top rotary switch, the 10s digit set on the middle rotary switch, and the 1s digit set on the bottom rotary switch. 3 4 9 5 6 0 1 2 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 100s digit of node address 4 9 5 6 0 1 2 7 8 3 10s digit of node address 9 7 8 420 4 5 6 0 1 2 7 8 3 1s digit of node address Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Internal Circuits CRT1B-ID02SP (NPN) V BS+ DC-DC converter (not isolated) BS− BD H Internal Circuits NC G IN0 V NC G BD L IN1 Load shortcircuit protection circuit CRT1B-ID02SP-1 (PNP) V NC DC-DC converter (not isolated) BS− BD H Internal Circuits G BS+ IN0 V NC G BD L IN1 Load shortcircuit protection circuit Wiring The I/O connector section uses e-CON connectors. Pin arrangements and signals are shown below. CRT1B-ID02SP (NPN) V G IN 0 IN 1 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Blue (Black) G 4 Brown (Red) NC NC 3 Blue (Black) Brown (White) 2 V Black (White) 1 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 421 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors CRT1B-ID02SP-1 (PNP) V 1 G IN 1 Brown (Red) Blue (Black) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Note Blue (Black) G IN 4 0 3 Black (White) NC NC 2 Brown (White) V 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-ID02SP and CRT1B-ID02SP-1) (594.5) 50 51 113 96.27 73 94.5 61.25 Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions. (mm) 422 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors 9-3-4 Two-point Output Units (IP54) CRT1B-OD02SP/CRT1B-OD02SP-1 Output Section Specifications Item Specification Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Load power supply voltage CRT1B-OD02SP CRT1B-OD02SP-1 2 outputs NPN PNP 0.2 A/output Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1.2 V (min.) Residual voltage 1.2 V max. (0.2 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.2 A DC, between each output terminal and BS−) output terminal and BS+) Leakage current 0.1 mA max. ON delay 0.5 ms max. OFF delay 1.5 ms max. Number of circuits per common 2 outputs/common Load power short-circuit detection Supported. Isolation method No isolation Output indicators LEDs (yellow) Degree of protection IEC standard IP54 Installation Screw installation (M4) Power supply type Network power supply Communications power supply 50 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage current consumption (See note.) 75 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage Weight 169 g max. Note The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all outputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include the output device load current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O power supply for actuators. Be sure to consider the actuator load current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula. Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (actual load current × number of actuators used) 423 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-OD02SP and CRT1B-OD02SP-1) Node address switches: ×100, ×10, and ×1 Power short-circuit indicator (SHT0) Communications indicators: MS and NS I/O indicators 0 and 1 I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) Flat Cable (attached) Display Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the output and status indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 1 SHT0 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit. Output OFF The output is OFF. Lit red. Load short-circuit detection The load is short-circuited. The node address is set as a decimal number between 0 and 127 with the 100s digit set on the top rotary switch, the 10s digit set on the middle rotary switch, and the 1s digit set on the bottom rotary switch. 3 4 9 5 6 0 1 2 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 100s digit of node address 4 9 5 6 0 1 2 7 8 3 10s digit of node address 9 7 8 424 4 5 6 0 1 2 7 8 3 1s digit of node address Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Internal Circuits CRT1B-OD02SP (NPN) V NC NC Load shortcircuit protection circuit DC-DC converter (not isolated) BS− BD H Internal Circuits BS+ BD L OUT0 V NC NC Load shortcircuit protection circuit OUT1 CRT1B-OD02SP-1 (PNP) NC NC G DC-DC converter (not isolated) BS− BD H BD L Wiring Internal Circuits BS+ Load shortcircuit protection circuit OUT0 NC NC G Load shortcircuit protection circuit OUT1 The I/O connector section uses e-CON connectors. Pin arrangements and signals are shown below. CRT1B-OD02SP (NPN) 1 V V 2 NC NC 3 NC NC 4 OUT OUT 0 1 Solenoid, valve, etc. Solenoid, valve, etc. 425 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors CRT1B-OD02SP-1 (PNP) 1 2 3 NC NC NC NC G G 4 OUT OUT 0 1 Solenoid, valve, etc. Note Solenoid, valve, etc. When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-OD02SP and CRT1B-OD02SP-1) (594.5) 73 51 113 96.27 50 94.5 61.25 426 Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions. (mm) Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors 9-3-5 Four-point Input Units (IP54) CRT1B-ID04SP/CRT1B-ID04SP-1 Input Section Specifications Item Specification Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage OFF voltage OFF current Input current Sensor power supply voltage ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Power short-circuit detection Isolation method Input indicators Degree of protection Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption (See note.) Input device supply current Weight Note CRT1B-ID04SP CRT1B-ID04SP-1 4 inputs NPN PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) input terminal and the G terminal) 5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) 1.0 mA max. 3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC) Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.) 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 4 inputs/common Supported. No isolation LEDs (yellow) IEC standard IP54 Screw installation (M4) Network power supply 85 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 90 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 80 mA/2 points 188 g The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula. Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption × number of sensors used) 427 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-ID04SP/CRT1B-ID04SP-1) Node address switches: ×100, ×10, and ×1 Power short-circuit indicator (SHT0) I/O indicators 0 and 3 Communications indicators: MS and NS I/O connectors (e-CON connectors) Flat Cable (attached) Display Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O Indicators The meanings of the input and status indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 3 SHT0 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit. Input OFF The input is OFF. Lit red. Power short-circuit The power supply is short-circuited. The node address is set as a decimal number between 0 and 127 with the 100s digit set on the top rotary switch, the 10s digit set on the middle rotary switch, and the 1s digit set on the bottom rotary switch. 3 4 9 5 6 0 1 2 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 100s digit of node address 4 9 5 6 0 1 2 7 8 3 10s digit of node address 9 7 8 428 4 5 6 0 1 2 7 8 3 1s digit of node address Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors Internal Circuits CRT1B-ID04SP (NPN) V0 NC G0 BS+ IN0 DC-DC converter (not isolated) BS− V0 BD H NC G0 BD L Internal Circuits IN1 Load shortcircuit protection circuit V1 NC G1 IN2 V1 NC G1 IN3 Load shortcircuit protection circuit 429 Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors CRT1B-ID04SP-1 (PNP) V0 NC G0 BS+ IN0 DC-DC converter (not isolated) BS− V0 BD H NC G0 BD L Internal Circuits IN1 Load shortcircuit protection circuit V1 NC G1 IN2 V1 NC G1 IN3 Load shortcircuit protection circuit Wiring The I/O connector section uses e-CON connectors. Pin arrangements and signals are shown below. V0 V1 V1 2 NC NC NC NC G0 G0 G1 G1 IN 0 IN 1 IN 2 IN 3 3 Blue (Black) Brown (White) 4 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) 430 Blue (Black) V0 Brown (Red) 1 Black (White) CRT1B-ID04SP (NPN) 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Section 9-3 Bit Slave Units with e-CON Connectors CRT1B-ID04SP-1 (PNP) V0 1 2 NC V1 NC NC NC IN 3 Brown (Red) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Blue (Black) IN 2 Blue (Black) IN 1 Black (White) IN 0 4 Note V1 G0 G0 G1 G1 3 Brown (White) V0 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-ID04SP and CRT1B-ID04SP-1) (594.5) 73 51 113 96.27 50 94.5 61.25 Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions. (mm) 431 Section 9-4 Clamp Terminal Blocks 9-4 9-4-1 Clamp Terminal Blocks Two-point Input/Two-point Output Units (IP54) CRT1B-MD04SLP/CRT1B-MD04SLP-1 Input Section Specifications Item Specification Model CRT1B-MD04SLP CRT1B-MD04SLP-1 I/O capacity Internal I/O common line ON voltage 2 inputs NPN PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each input 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) OFF voltage 5 VDC max. (between each input 5 VDC max. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) terminal and the G terminal) OFF current 1 mA max. Input current 3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC) Sensor power supply voltage Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.) ON delay 1.5 ms max. OFF delay 1.5 ms max. Number of circuits per common 2 inputs/common Power short-circuit detection Supported. Isolation method No isolation Input indicators LEDs (yellow) Degree of protection IEC standard IP54 Installation Screw installation (M4) Power supply type Network power supply Communications power supply 80 mA max. for 24-VDC power sup- 75 mA max. for 24-VDC power supcurrent consumption (See note.) ply voltage ply voltage 90 mA max. for 14-VDC power sup- 85 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage ply voltage Input device supply current 80 mA/2 points Weight 191 g max. 191 g max. Note The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs and outputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device current consumption or output load current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O power supply for sensors and actuators. Be sure to consider the sensor and actuator current consumption and the number of sensors and actuators connected. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula. Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption × number of sensors used) + (actual load current x number of actuators used) 432 Section 9-4 Clamp Terminal Blocks Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Load power supply voltage Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Load power short-circuit detection Isolation method Input indicators Specification CRT1B-MD04SLP CRT1B-MD04SLP-1 2 outputs NPN PNP 0.2 A/output Communications power supply voltage + 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage − 1.2 V (min.) 1.2 V max. (0.2 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.2 A DC, between each output terminal and BS−) output terminal and BS+) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 2 outputs/common Supported. No isolation LEDs (yellow) Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-MD04SLP/CRT1B-MD04SLP-1) Node address switches: ×100, ×10, and ×1 Power short-circuit indicators (SHT0 and SHT1) Communications indicators: MS and NS I/O indicators 0 and 3 I/O connectors (screwless clamp terminals) Flat Cable (attached) Display Section Communications Indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. 433 Section 9-4 Clamp Terminal Blocks I/O Indicators The meanings of the I/O and status indicators are given in the following table. Name 0 to 3 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. I/O status Input/output ON Meaning The input/output is ON. Not lit. Input/output OFF The input/output is OFF. SHT0 Lit red. SHT1 Lit red. Power short-circuit detected Load short-circuit detected The power supply is short-circuited. The load is short-circuited. The node address is set as a decimal number between 0 and 127 with the 100s digit set on the top rotary switch, the 10s digit set on the middle rotary switch, and the 1s digit set on the bottom rotary switch. 3 4 9 5 6 0 1 2 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 100s digit of node address 4 9 5 6 0 1 2 7 8 3 10s digit of node address 4 9 5 6 0 1 2 7 8 3 1s digit of node address 7 8 Internal Circuits CRT1B-MD04SLP (NPN) V0 NC BS+ G0 DC-DC converter (not isolated) IN0 BS− V1 BD H NC G1 BD L Internal Circuits IN1 Load short-circuit protection circuit V0 NC Load shortcircuit protection circuit NC OUT0 V1 NC NC Load shortcircuit protection circuit 434 OUT1 Section 9-4 Clamp Terminal Blocks CRT1B-MD04SLP-1 (PNP) V NC BS+ G BS− IN0 Internal Circuits DC-DC converter (not isolated) BD H V NC G BD L IN1 Load short-circuit protection circuit NC NC G Internal Circuits Load shortcircuit protection circuit Wiring OUT0 NC NC G Load shortcircuit protection circuit OUT1 The I/O connector section uses a screw-less clamp terminal block. Pin arrangements and signals are shown below. V 2 NC NC 3 Blue (Black) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Brown (White) 4 1 G G IN 0 IN 1 V V 2 NC NC 3 NC NC Blue (Black) V Brown (Red) 1 Black (White) CRT1B-MD04SLP (NPN) 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 4 OUT OUT 0 1 Solenoid, valve, etc. Solenoid, valve, etc. 435 Section 9-4 Clamp Terminal Blocks CRT1B-MD04SLP-1 (PNP) G G IN IN 1 4 0 1 NC NC 2 NC 3 G Brown (Red) Blue (Black) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Brown (White) 3 NC NC G Blue (Black) 2 NC V Black (White) V 1 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 4 OUT OUT 0 1 Solenoid, valve, etc. Note Solenoid, valve, etc. (1) When using an inductive load (such as a solenoid valve), either use a built-in diode for absorbing the counterelectromotive force or install an external diode. (2) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-MD04SLP and CRT1B-MD04SLP-1) (594.5) 73 51 113 96.27 50 94.5 61.25 436 Figures in parentheses are reference dimensions. (mm) Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors 9-5 9-5-1 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors Connecting to Communications Cables The following communications connectors can be connected to Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors. Applicable Communications Connectors Name Model Open Type Connector (for Unit connection) Flat Connector Plug Multidrop Connector Plug for Flat Cable I HCN-TB4LMZG+ (Honda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.) DCN4-BR4 DCN5-BR4 DCN4-MR4 Hook Internal Internal Internal Internal Applicable communications cable Round Cable I and Round Cable II Flat Cable I Flat Cable II Flat Cable I The DCN4-TB4 Open Type Connector and DCN4-MD4 Multidrop Connector cannot be used with Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors. For information on how to process and attach the communications connectors, refer to 3-3 Preparing Flat Connectors. Applicable Functions Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors do not include functionality to collect data to help shorten startup and recovery time for control systems and maintenance systems. For details, refer to 1-1-3 CompoNet Slave Unit Functions on page 7. Checking the Communications Power Supply Voltage Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors do not support a network power supply voltage monitor. Use either of the following methods to check the voltage if a Flat Cable is connected. • Connect a Flat Connector Socket connected to a cable to a Flat Connector Plug or Flat Cable I Multidrop Connector Plug at the location where a Bit Slave Unit with Compact Connectors is to be connected, secure the extended cable with the terminal block so as not to cause a short circuit, and measure the voltage using a voltmeter. • Use a tester or voltmeter to measure between the V and G terminals of the I/O connector. Note (1) Be careful to not cause a short-circuit when performing the measurement. The system or Unit may be damaged if a short-circuit is created. (2) Always turn OFF the output from the Output Unit before measuring between the V and G terminals of the I/O connector. The Unit may be damaged if a short-circuit is made with a signal pin for which the output is ON when the measurement is performed. Continuous Short- circuit Protection Circuit This prevents the network power supply from continuously remaining shortcircuited if a short-circuit occurs in I/O wiring. This protection circuit may become damaged when a short-circuit occurs, and cause the Unit to not operate correctly. 437 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors 9-5-2 Two-point Input Unit CRT1B-ID02JS/CRT1B-ID02JS-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage Specification CRT1B-ID02JS CRT1B-ID02JS-1 2 inputs NPN PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) input terminal and the G terminal) OFF voltage ----OFF current 1.0 mA max. Input current 3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC) Sensor power supply voltage Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.) ON delay 1.5 ms max. OFF delay 1.5 ms max. Number of circuits per common 2 inputs/common Power short-circuit detection Not supported. Isolation method No isolation Input indicators LEDs (yellow) Degree of protection IEC standard IP20 Installation M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket Power supply type Network power supply Communications power supply 25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage current consumption (See note.) 30 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage Input device supply current 50 mA/point (G terminal) 50 mA/point (V terminal) Weight 16 g max. Note The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula. Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption × number of sensors used) 438 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-ID02JS and CRT1B-ID02JS-1) CompoNet communications connector (internal hook) Communications I/O indicators indicators (MS, NS) (IN0, IN1) Node Address Setting Switch I/O connectors (IN0, IN1) IN0 IN1 Left side of Unit Front of Unit I/O connector labels Right side of Unit Display Section Communications indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O indicators The indicators show the status of the inputs. Name IN0, IN1 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. Status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit Input OFF The input is OFF. Using the node address switch, set the node address to a 7-bit binary value between 00000000 and 1111111 (0 to 127 decimal). Communications will not be performed if the node address is set out of range. The factory setting is 0000000. ON RSV: Not used (keep OFF). 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Refer to Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors for the relation between decimal node addresses and switch settings. 439 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Internal circuits CRT1B-ID02JS (NPN) V0 BS+ IN0 BDH BS- DC-DC Converter (not isolated) Internal circuits BDL G0 V1 IN1 Continuous short-circuit protection circuit G1 Continuous short-circuit protection circuit V0 CRT1B-ID02JS-1 (PNP) BS+ IN0 BDL BS- DC-DC Converter (not isolated) Internal circuits BDH G0 V1 IN1 G1 440 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Wiring The I/O connector section uses compact connectors. Pin arrangements and signals are shown below. V 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Signal G S Brown (white) S Blue (black) G Brown (red) G Black (white) V Blue (black) G Signal CRT1B-ID02JS (NPN) V V 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) V 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Note G Signal S V Brown (white) S V Blue (black) G Brown (red) G Black (white) V Blue (black) G Signal CRT1B-ID02JS-1 (PNP) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-ID02JS and CRT1B-ID02JS-1) 21.65 15 24 48.9 (mm) 441 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors 9-5-3 Two-point Output Units CRT1B-OD02JS/CRT1B-OD02JS-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Load power supply voltage Specification CRT1B-OD02JS CRT1B-OD02JS-1 2 outputs NPN PNP 0.1 A/output Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1.2 V (min.) 1.2 V max. (0.1 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.1 A DC, between each output terminal and G terminal) output terminal and V terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Load short-circuit detection Isolation method Output indicators Degree of protection Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption (See note.) Output device supply current Weight 1.5 ms max. 2 outputs/common Not supported. No isolation LEDs (yellow) IEC standard IP20 M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket Network power supply 25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 30 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 30 mA/point (G terminal) 16 g max. Note 30 mA/point (V terminal) The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all outputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include the output device load current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O power supply for actuators. Be sure to consider the actuator load current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula. Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (actual load current × number of actuators used) 442 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-OD02JS and CRT1B-OD02JS-1) CompoNet communications connector (internal hook) Node Address Setting Switch I/O indicators Communications indicators (MS, NS) (OUT0, OUT1) I/O connectors (OUT0, OUT1) OUT0 OUT1 Left side of Unit Front of Unit I/O connector labels Right side of Unit Display Section Communications indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O indicators The indicators show the status of the outputs. Name OUT0, OUT1 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. Status Output ON Meaning The output is ON. Not lit Output OFF The output is OFF. Using the node address switch, set the node address to a 7-bit binary value between 00000000 and 1111111 (0 to 127 decimal). Communications will not be performed if the node address is set out of range. The factory setting is 0000000. ON RSV - Not used (keep OFF). 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Refer to Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors for the relation between decimal node addresses and switch settings. 443 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Internal circuits CRT1B-OD02JS (NPN) V0 BS+ OUT0 BDH DC-DC Converter (not isolated) Continuous short-circuit protection circuit BS- Internal circuits BDL G0 V1 OUT1 G1 CRT1B-OD02JS-1 (PNP) V0 BS+ BS- DC-DC Converter (not isolated) Internal circuits BDL Continuous short-circuit protection circuit OUT0 BDH G0 V1 OUT1 G1 444 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Wiring The I/O connector section uses compact connectors. Pin arrangements and signals are shown below. S V G V S V Emitter OFF input G G V Signal G Signal CRT1B-OD02JS (NPN) Photoelectric sensor, emitter, etc. Solenoid, valve, etc. G S G V G V S V Emitter OFF input G V Signal Signal CRT1B-OD02JS-1 (PNP) Photoelectric Solenoid, valve, etc. sensor, emitter, etc. Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-OD02JS and CRT1B-OD02JS-1) 21.65 15 24 48.9 (mm) 445 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors 9-5-4 Four-point Input Unit CRT1B-ID04JS/CRT1B-ID04JS-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage Specification CRT1B-ID04JS OFF voltage OFF current Input current Sensor power supply voltage ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Power short-circuit detection Isolation method Input indicators Degree of protection Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption (See note.) Input device supply current Weight Note CRT1B-ID04JS-1 4 inputs NPN PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) input terminal and the G terminal) ----1.0 mA max. 3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC) Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.) 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 4 inputs/common Not supported. No isolation LEDs (yellow) IEC standard IP20 M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket Network power supply 35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 40 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 50 mA/point (G terminal) 50 mA/point (V terminal) 21 g max. The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula. Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption × number of sensors used) 446 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-ID04JS and CRT1B-ID04JS-1) CompoNet communications connector (internal hook) Node Address Setting Switch Left side of Unit Communications indicators (MS, NS) I/O indicators (IN0 to IN3) Front of Unit I/O connectors (IN0 to IN3) IN2 IN0 IN3 IN1 I/O connector labels Right side of Unit Display Section Communications indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O indicators The indicators show the status of the inputs. Name IN0 to IN3 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. Status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit Input OFF The input is OFF. Using the node address switch, set the node address to a 7-bit binary value between 00000000 and 1111110 (0 to 126 decimal). Communications will not be performed if the node address is set out of range. The factory setting is 0000000. ON RSV - Not used (keep OFF). 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Refer to Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors for the relation between decimal node addresses and switch settings. 447 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Internal circuits CRT1B-ID04JS (NPN) V0 BS+ IN0 BDH BDL BS- G0 DC-DC Converter (not isolated) V1 Internal circuits IN1 Continuous short-circuit protection circuit G1 V2 IN2 G2 V3 IN3 Continuous short-circuit protection circuit 448 G3 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors CRT1B-ID04JS-1 (PNP) Continuous short-circuit protection circuit BS+ V0 IN0 BDH BDL G0 DC-DC Converter (not isolated) V1 IN1 Internal circuits BS- G1 Continuous short-circuit protection circuit V2 IN2 G2 V3 IN3 G3 449 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Wiring The I/O connector section uses compact connectors. Pin arrangements and signals are shown below. V 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) G Signal S V V Brown (white) S Blue (black) G Brown (red) G Black (white) V Blue (black) G Signal CRT1B-ID04JS (NPN) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) V 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Note 450 G Signal S V Brown (white) S V Blue (black) G Brown (red) G Black (white) V Blue (black) G Signal CRT1B-ID04JS-1 (PNP) 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-ID04JS and CRT1B-ID04JS-1) 20 6.65 24 62.9 (mm) 451 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors 9-5-5 Four-point Output Units CRT1B-OD04JS/CRT1B-OD04JS-1 Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Load power supply voltage Specification CRT1B-OD04JS CRT1B-OD04JS-1 4 outputs NPN PNP 0.1 A/output Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1.2 V (min.) 1.2 V max. (0.1 A DC, between each 1.2 V max. (0.1 A DC, between each output terminal and G terminal) output terminal and V terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Load short-circuit detection Isolation method Output indicators Degree of protection Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption (See note.) Output device supply current Weight 1.5 ms max. 4 outputs/common Not supported. No isolation LEDs (yellow) IEC standard IP20 M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket Network power supply 30 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 35 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 30 mA/point (G terminal) 21 g max. Note 30 mA/point (V terminal) The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all outputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include the output device load current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O power supply for actuators. Be sure to consider the actuator load current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula. Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (actual load current × number of actuators used) 452 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-OD04JS and CRT1B-OD04JS-1) CompoNet communications connector (internal hook) Node Address Setting Switch Left side of Unit Communications indicators (MS, NS) I/O indicators (OUT0 to OUT3) Front of Unit I/O connectors (OUT0 to OUT3) OUT2 OUT0 OUT3 OUT1 I/O connector labels Right side of Unit Display Section Communications indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O indicators The indicators show the status of the inputs. Name LED status OUT0 to OUT3 Lit yellow. Not lit Setting the Node Address Status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Input OFF The input is OFF. Using the node address switch, set the node address to a 7-bit binary value between 00000000 and 1111110 (0 to 126 decimal). Communications will not be performed if the node address is set out of range. The factory setting is 0000000. ON RSV - Not used (keep OFF). 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Refer to Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors for the relation between decimal node addresses and switch settings. 453 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Internal circuits CRT1B-OD04JS (NPN) V0 OUT0 BS+ BDH G0 BDL BS- DC-DC Converter (not isolated) V1 Continuous short-circuit protection circuit Internal circuits OUT1 G1 V2 OUT2 G2 V3 OUT3 G3 454 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors CRT1B-OD04JS-1 (PNP) V0 OUT0 BS+ BDH G0 BDL DC-DC Converter (not isolated) Continuous short-circuit protection circuit V1 Internal circuits BS- OUT1 G1 V2 OUT2 G2 V3 OUT3 G3 Wiring The I/O connector section uses compact connectors. Pin arrangements and signals are shown below. S V G G V S V Emitter OFF input G V Signal G Signal CRT1B-OD04JS (NPN) Photoelectric sensor, emitter, etc. Solenoid, valve, etc. 455 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors S G V G V S V Emitter OFF input G V Signal G Signal CRT1B-OD04JS-1 (PNP) Solenoid, valve, etc. Photoelectric sensor, emitter, etc. Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-OD04JS and CRT1B-OD04JS-1) 20 6.65 24 62.9 (mm) 456 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors 9-5-6 One-point Input/One-point Output Unit CRT1B-MD02JS/CRT1B-MD02JS-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage Specification CRT1B-MD02JS OFF voltage OFF current Input current Sensor power supply voltage ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Power short-circuit detection Isolation method Input indicators Degree of protection Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption (See note.) Input device supply current Weight Note CRT1B-MD02JS-1 1 input NPN PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) input terminal and the G terminal) ----1.0 mA max. 3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC) Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.) 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 1 input/common Not supported. No isolation LEDs (yellow) IEC standard IP20 M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket Network power supply 25 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 30 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 50 mA/point (G terminal) 50 mA/point (V terminal) 16 g max. The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula. Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption × number of sensors used) 457 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Load power supply voltage Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Load short-circuit detection Isolation method Output indicators Degree of protection Installation Power supply type Output device supply current 458 Specification CRT1B-MD02JS CRT1B-MD02JS-1 1 output NPN PNP 0.1 A/output Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1.2 V (min.) 1.2 V max. (DC, 0.1 A, between each 1.2 V max. (DC, 0.1 A, between each output terminal and G terminal) output terminal and V terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 1 output/common Not supported. No isolation LEDs (yellow) IEC standard IP20 M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket Network power supply 30 mA/point (G terminal) 30 mA/point (V terminal) Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-MD02JS and CRT1B-MD02JS-1) CompoNet communications connector (internal hook) Node Address Setting Switch Communications indicators (MS, NS) I/O indicators (IN0, OUT0) I/O connectors (IN0, OUT0) IN0 OUT0 Front of Unit Left side of Unit I/O connector labels Right side of Unit Display Section Communications indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O indicators The indicators show the status of the input and output. Name IN0, OUT0 Setting the Node Address Lit yellow. LED status Status I/O ON Meaning The I/O is ON. Not lit I/O OFF The I/O is OFF. Using the node address switch, set the node address to a 7-bit binary value between 00000000 and 1111111 (0 to 127 decimal). Communications will not be performed if the node address is set out of range. The factory setting is 0000000. ON RSV - Not used (keep OFF). 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Refer to Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors for the relation between decimal node addresses and switch settings. 459 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Internal circuits CRT1B-MD02JS (NPN) V BS+ IN0 BDH DC-DC Converter (not isolated) G Continuous short-circuit protection circuit BS- Internal circuits BDL V OUT0 G CRT1B-MD02JS-1 (PNP) V BS+ IN0 BS- DC-DC Converter (not isolated) Continuous short-circuit protection circuit BDL Internal circuits BDH G V OUT0 G 460 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Wiring The I/O connector section uses compact connectors. Pin arrangements and signals are shown below. CRT1B-MD02JS (NPN) Brown (red) 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) G S V G V S G V G Signal Signal G V V S V Emitter OFF input V Brown (white) S Blue (black) G Signal Output Connectors G Black (white) V Blue (black) G Signal Input Connectors 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Solenoid, valve, etc. Photoelectric sensor, emitter, etc. CRT1B-MD02JS-1 (PNP) Brown (red) G 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) Note S V 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) G S V G G Signal Signal V S V V Emitter OFF input V Brown (white) S G V Blue (black) G Signal Output Connectors G Black (white) V Blue (black) G Signal Input Connectors Solenoid, valve, etc. Photoelectric sensor, emitter, etc. Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. 461 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Dimensions (CRT1B-MD02JS and CRT1B-MD02JS-1) 21.65 15 24 48.9 (mm) 462 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors 9-5-7 Two-point Input/Two-point Output Unit CRT1B-MD04JS/CRT1B-MD04JS-1 Input Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common ON voltage Specification CRT1B-MD04JS OFF voltage OFF current Input current Sensor power supply voltage ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Power short-circuit detection Isolation method Input indicators Degree of protection Installation Power supply type Communications power supply current consumption (See note.) Input device supply current Weight Note CRT1B-MD04JS-1 2 inputs NPN PNP 10.5 VDC min. (between each 10.5 VDC min. (between each input terminal and the V terminal) input terminal and the G terminal) ----1.0 mA max. 3.0 mA min./input (at 10.5 VDC) Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1 V (min.) 1.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 2 inputs/common Not supported. No isolation LEDs (yellow) IEC standard IP20 M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket Network power supply 35 mA max. for 24-VDC power supply voltage 40 mA max. for 14-VDC power supply voltage 50 mA/point (G terminal) 50 mA/point (V terminal) 21 g max. The current consumption is for Bit Slave Unit communications current when all inputs are OFF, i.e., it does not include input device current consumption. The communications power supply is also used for the I/O power supply for sensors. Be sure to consider the sensor current consumption and the number of sensors connected in addition to the communications power. The power supply current consumption is expressed by the following formula. Communications power supply current consumption = Bit Slave Unit communications current consumption + (Bit Slave Unit input current × number of inputs used) + (sensor current consumption × number of sensors used) 463 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Output Section Specifications Item Model I/O capacity Internal I/O common Rated output current Load power supply voltage Residual voltage Leakage current ON delay OFF delay Number of circuits per common Load short-circuit detection Isolation method Output indicators Degree of protection Installation Power supply type Output device supply current 464 Specification CRT1B-MD04JS CRT1B-MD04JS-1 2 outputs NPN PNP 0.1 A/output Communications power supply voltage 0 V (max.) Communications power supply voltage −1.2 V (min.) 1.2 V max. (DC, 0.1 A, between each 1.2 V max. (DC, 0.1 A, between each output terminal and G terminal) output terminal and V terminal) 0.1 mA max. 0.5 ms max. 1.5 ms max. 2 outputs/common Not supported. No isolation LEDs (yellow) IEC standard IP20 M4 screw mounting using CRT1B-ATT03 Mounting Bracket Network power supply 30 mA/point (G terminal) 30 mA/point (V terminal) Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Component Names and Functions (Same for CRT1B-MD04JS and CRT1B-MD04JS-1) CompoNet communications connector (internal hook) Node Address Setting Switch Communications indicators (MS, NS) I/O indicators (IN0, IN1, OUT0, OUT1) Front of Unit Left side of Unit I/O connectors (IN0, IN1, OUT0, OUT1) OUT0 IN0 OUT1 IN1 I/O connector labels Right side of Unit Display Section Communications indicators Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. I/O indicators The indicators show the status of the inputs. Name IN0, IN1, OUT0, OUT1 Setting the Node Address LED status Lit yellow. Status Input ON Meaning The input is ON. Not lit Input OFF The input is OFF. Using the node address switch, set the node address to a 7-bit binary value between 00000000 and 1111111 (0 to 127 decimal). Communications will not be performed if the node address is set out of range. The factory setting is 0000000. ON RSV - Not used (keep OFF). 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Refer to Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors for the relation between decimal node addresses and switch settings. 465 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Internal circuits CRT1B-MD04JS (NPN) V BS+ IN0 BDH BDL BS- G DC-DC Converter (not isolated) V Internal circuits IN1 Continuous short-circuit protection circuit G V Continuous short-circuit protection circuit OUT0 G V OUT1 G 466 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors CRT1B-MD04JS-1 (PNP) Continuous short-circuit protection circuit BS+ V IN0 BDH BDL G DC-DC Converter (not isolated) V Internal circuits IN1 G V Continuous short-circuit protection circuit BS- OUT0 G V OUT1 G 467 Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Wiring The I/O connector section uses compact connectors. Pin arrangements and signals are shown below. CRT1B-MD04JS (NPN) Brown (red) 3-wire sensor with NPN output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) G S V G V S G V G Signal Signal G V S V V Emitter OFF input V Brown (white) S Blue (black) G Black (white) G Signal Output Connectors V Blue (black) G Signal Input Connectors 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) Solenoid, valve, etc. Photoelectric sensor, emitter, etc. CRT1B-MD04JS-1 (PNP) Brown (red) G Note V 2-wire sensor (e.g., limit switch) G S V G G Signal Signal Signal S V S V V Emitter OFF input V Brown (white) S G V Blue (black) G 3-wire sensor with PNP output (photoelectric sensor or proximity sensor) 468 Output Connectors G Black (white) V Blue (black) G Signal Input Connectors Solenoid, valve, etc. Photoelectric sensor, emitter, etc. Wire colors have been changed according to revisions in the JIS standards for photoelectric and proximity sensors. The colors in parentheses are the wire colors prior to the revisions. Section 9-5 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors Dimensions (Same for CRT1B-MD04JS and CRT1B-MD04JS-1) 20 6.65 24 62.9 (mm) 469 Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors 470 Section 9-5 SECTION 10 Repeater Units This section describes the Repeater Unit. 10-1 Status Areas. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 472 10-2 Repeater Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 10-2-1 Repeater Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 474 471 Section 10-1 Status Areas 10-1 Status Areas An Repeater Unit has two status areas: the Warning Status Area and the Alarm Status Area. The status flags in these areas are turned ON and OFF based on the threshold/monitor values set for each function in that Unit. When any of the bits in the status area of the slaves connected to the Master Unit turns ON, the corresponding bit (bit 12 is for warning status area notices and bit 13 is for alarm area notices) of the status flag in the Master Unit turns ON. The Repeater Unit's status area information can be read by using the CX-Integrator or explicit messages. Master Unit The status bit detection allocated to the master is OR of all slaves Transmitted to Master Unit Repeater Unit The Repeater Unit has two status areas: the Warning Status Area and the Alarm Status Area. Warning Status Area The Repeater Unit’s Warning Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These bits indicate minor errors in the Unit. Bit 0 1 2 Description ----Turns ON when the voltages drops below the voltage set for the network power voltage monitor function. 11 12 13 Content Reserved Reserved Network Power Voltage Drop Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Voltage dropped below threshold.) Unit Maintenance Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Threshold exceeded.) Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Downstream Network Voltage Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error (Power OFF.) Reserved Reserved Reserved 14 15 Reserved Reserved ----- 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 472 Turns ON when the threshold set for the Unit Conduction Time Monitor function is exceeded. ------------Turns ON when the power supply to the downstream network is OFF. ------- Section 10-1 Status Areas Alarm Status Area The Repeater Unit’s Alarm Status Area contains the following 16 bits. These bits indicate serious errors in the Unit. Bit 0 1 Content Description --Turns ON when there is an error in the EEPROM data. 2 Reserved EEPROM Data Error Flag OFF: Normal ON: Error Reserved 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved --------------------- 13 14 15 Reserved Reserved Reserved ------- --- 473 Section 10-2 Repeater Unit 10-2 Repeater Unit 10-2-1 Repeater Unit CRT1-RPT01 Specifications Item Model Communications ports Maximum number of layers Number of nodes per network (per Master Unit) Number of nodes per trunk line or sub-trunk line Communications power supply connector Communications power supply connector allowable current capacity Noise immunity Vibration resistance Shock resistance Dielectric strength Insulation resistance Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Ambient operating atmosphere Storage temperature Storage humidity Installation Weight Communications power supply voltage Communications power supply current consumption 474 Specification CRS1-RPT01 Upstream port (port 1): Trunk line or sub-trunk line Downstream port (port 2): Sub-trunk line (Can be wired with the same communications specifications as the Master Unit.) Different types of communications cable can be connected to the upstream and downstream ports. Up to two extra segment layers can be created from the Master Unit 64 nodes 32 nodes One downstream communications port power supply connector Note Communications power for the Repeater Unit is supplied from the BS+ and BS− terminals on the upstream port communications connector (PORT1). 5 A max. (UL: 4 A) Conforms to IEC 61000-4-4, 2 kV (power line). 10 to 150 Hz with double-amplitude of 0.7 mm or 50 m/s2 150 m/s2 500 VAC (between isolated circuits) 20 MΩ min. (between isolated circuits) −10 to 55°C 25% to 85% (with no condensation) No corrosive gases −25 to 65°C 25% to 85% (with no condensation) DIN Track or M4 screws 73 g 14 to 26.4 VDC 95 mA max. Section 10-2 Repeater Unit Component Names and Functions Node address switches: ×10 and ×1 (from left) Communications indicators: MS and NS Port 1: Upstream port communications 23 23 MS NS 456 789 01 RPT NODE ADR 789 456 01 PORT1 X10 [0-63] RPT X1 CRS1-RPT01 CRS1 RPT01 NETWORK POWER SUPPLY PORT2 BS+ BSDC24V INPUT Downstream port communications power supply connector (removable) Port 2: Downstream port communications connector Indicator Section Communications Indicators The communications indicators have the following meanings. MS (Module Status): Indicates the status of the node with a two-color LED (green/red). NS (Network Status): Indicates the status of communications with a two-color LED (green/red). Name MS Indicator status Lit green. Status Normal status Meaning The Unit is operating normally. Flashing green. Lit red. --- --- Flashing red. Not lit. NS Lit green. Flashing green. Lit red. Flashing red. Not lit. Fatal error A hardware error has occurred in the Unit. The watchdog timer has timed-out. Non-fatal error There is an error in the settings. An EEPROM checksum error has occurred. Power OFF/Startup The power supply is OFF, the Unit is being reset, or the Unit is being initialized. Online and participating Normal communications are in progress and the node is participating in the network. Online but not participatNormal communications are in progress but the node is not ing yet participating in the network. Fatal communications The address is set out of range or the same address has error been set for more than one node. Non-fatal communications Polling has timed out. The network has timed out. error Power OFF/Baud rate not The power supply is OFF or the baud rate has not been yet detected. detected. Note When flashing, indicators are lit for 0.5 s and not lit for 0.5 s. 475 Section 10-2 Repeater Unit Setting the Node Address The node address is set as a decimal number with the 10s digit set on the left rotary switch and the 1s digit set on the right rotary switch. (The maximum node address is 63.) 7 8 2 3 4 5 6 9 5 6 7 8 9 0 1 2 3 4 The setting on the rotary switches is read when power is turned ON. 0 1 1s digit of node address 10s digit of node address Terminal Arrangement BS+ Communications power supply + BDH Communications data high BDL Communications data low BS− Communications power supply − The BS+ and BS− terminals are the communications power for the Repeater Unit. BDL BS+ Downstream Port Communications Connector (Port 2) BDH Note BS− Upstream Port Communications Connector (Port 1) Communications power supply − Communications data low Communications data high Communications power supply + Downstream Port Communications Power Supply Connector This connector supplies communications power to Slave Units and Repeater Units connected to the downstream communications connector (port 2). BS+ Communications power supply + BS− Communications power supply − Note 476 Communications power for the Repeater Unit is supplied from the BS+ and BS− terminals on the upstream port communications connector (port 1). Section 10-2 Repeater Unit 27.5 42.3 3.1 50 Dimensions 95 (mm) 477 Repeater Unit 478 Section 10-2 SECTION 11 Smart Functions This section individually describes the functions provided by CompoNet Slave Unit. The functions are divided into those supported by all CompoNet Slave Units and those supported only by specific CompoNet Slave Units. 11-1 CX-Integrator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1-1 Offline Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1-2 Online Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2 Functions Common to All Slave Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2-1 Automatic Baud Rate Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2-2 Hold/Clear Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2-3 Network Power Voltage Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2-4 Unit Conduction Time Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2-5 Naming Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2-6 Naming Connected Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2-7 Communications Error History Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-2-8 Last Maintenance Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3-1 I/O Power Status Monitor (Digital I/O Slave Units Only) . . . . . . . . 11-3-2 Input Filter (Input Units Only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3-3 Error Prevention for Surge Current at Startup (Input Units Only) . . 11-3-4 Contact Operation Monitor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3-5 Total ON Time Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3-6 Operation Time Monitor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3-7 Power Supply Short-circuit Detection (Inputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-3-8 Load Short-circuit Detection (Outputs) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4-1 AD Conversion Point Setting (only Input Unit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4-2 Moving Average Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4-3 Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4-4 Peak/Bottom Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4-5 Top/Valley Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4-6 Rate of Change Calculation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4-7 Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4-8 Disconnected Line Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4-9 User Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4-10 Cumulated Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-4-11 Last Maintenance Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5-1 Scaling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5-2 User Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5-3 Cumulated Count . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-5-4 Setting Output Value for Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 481 481 482 486 486 486 487 488 490 491 492 494 495 495 496 497 498 499 502 504 505 507 507 508 509 513 515 518 520 524 524 526 529 530 530 534 537 539 479 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-1 Moving Average Processing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-2 Scaling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-3 Peak/Bottom Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-4 Top/Valley Hold . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-5 Top/Valley Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-6 Rate of Change Calculation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-7 Comparator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-8 Temperature Range Count. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-9 Data Comparison between Channels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-10 Input Error Detection Disable Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-11 Off-wire Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-12 Last Maintenance Date . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-13 Cumulated Counter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-6-14 User Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 480 540 540 541 544 546 549 550 552 556 558 560 561 561 562 565 Section 11-1 CX-Integrator 11-1 CX-Integrator There are two main network display windows in the CX-Integrator: the Online Window and the Offline Window. 11-1-1 Offline Window The Offline Window has a white background and is displayed when the CXIntegrator is started. Normally, parameters and other settings are made in this window. The devices parameters for any Slave Unit can be set or edited simply by double-clicking on the Slave Unit in the Offline Window. Refer to 11-2 Functions Common to All Slave Units for details on how to set and edit functions for each Slave Unit. Also refer to the settings methods provided for each Slave Unit. Offline Window Workspace Window Network Configuration Window Component List Configuration Window The Configuration Window is used to set and edit functions. To display the Configuration Window, double-click the icon for Slave Unit or right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu. 481 Section 11-1 CX-Integrator 11-1-2 Online Window The Online Window is used to monitor information for CompoNet Slave Units. Use the following procedure to switch from offline to online. 1. Click the icon in the menu, or select Network - Work Online from the menu. The background color of the Network Configuration Window will change to gray. 2. Right-click the network name in the Workspace Window, and select Connect from the pop-up menu. Toggles to on-line status. While connected online, information on the CompoNet Slave Units is displayed in the Monitor Window. Open this window to monitor the CompoNet Slave Units. Note 482 The Monitor Window displays data that is uploaded with the network. The data is not constantly updated through communications. To obtain the latest CompoNet Slave Unit status, click the Update Button in the Monitor Window to read the data from the network. Section 11-1 CX-Integrator Online Window Online Connection Information Window Monitor Window To display the Monitor Window for a CompoNet Slave Unit, right-click the icon for that Slave Unit and select Monitor from the pop-up window. Maintenance information: Displays the generated maintenance information. Update Button: Refreshes the current Slave Unit maintenance information. Save Maintenance Counter Button: The maintenance counter value can be saved to the flash memory in the Slave Unit. ■ OUT, IN, and Operation Time Tab Pages More detailed maintenance information can be found on the OUT, IN, and Operation Time Tab Pages. 483 CX-Integrator 484 Section 11-1 CX-Integrator Section 11-1 485 Functions Common to All Slave Units Section 11-2 11-2 Functions Common to All Slave Units This section describes the functions common to all CompoNet Slave Units and the procedures for using these functions. The functions described in 11-2-1 Automatic Baud Rate Detection and 11-2-2 Hold/Clear Outputs are supported by Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors. 11-2-1 Automatic Baud Rate Detection Description The CompoNet Slave Units are automatically set to the same baud rate as the Master Unit. It is not necessary to set the baud rate separately for any Slave Unit. The baud rate is set when communications is established with the Master Unit after the power is turned ON. The baud rate setting is stored in memory until the power is turned ON again or until the Master Unit baud rate setting is changed. 11-2-2 Hold/Clear Outputs Description Output Units can be set to hold or clear outputs when an error occurs. Procedure Using CXIntegrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Click the OUT Tab. 4. Double-click I/O Comment for the terminal to be set. The Edit Terminal Window will be displayed. Select either to clear or hold outputs when a communications error (Fault Action) and idle state (Idle Action) occurs, and then click the OK Button. 486 Section 11-2 Functions Common to All Slave Units Fault Action Clear Hold Clears all output data from the Master Unit to 0 when a communications error occurs. Holds all output data from the Master Unit at its current status when a communications error occurs. A communications error occurs when communications with the Master Unit are interrupted. Idle Action Clear Hold Clears all output data from the Master Unit to 0 when idle action occurs. Holds all output data from the Master Unit at its current status when idle action occurs. Idle action is the status that results when an idle output specification is received from the Master Unit. An idle output is specified when a CPU Unit monitoring error occurs in a CS/CJ-series Master Unit. 5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 6. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-2-3 Network Power Voltage Monitor Description The Network Power Voltage Monitor function stores the present value, minimum value, and maximum value of the network power voltage in the Slave Unit memory. If a monitor voltage is set using the CX-Integrator, the monitor voltage is stored in the Slave Unit memory. (The default is 14 V.) If the voltage drops below the monitor voltage, a flag in a status area in the Slave Unit will turn ON to notify the Master Unit. The notification details can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages. Note (1) The minimum communications power voltage for the CompoNet network itself is 14 V, so if the network power voltage drops below 14 V, it may not be possible to read a measurement value using the CX-Integrator. (2) The maximum and minimum values of the network power voltage are cleared when the network power is turned OFF. Settings Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 487 Functions Common to All Slave Units Section 11-2 3. Click the General Tab. Enter the desired value in the Network Power Voltage Threshold Field. (The default is 14 V.) 4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-2-4 Unit Conduction Time Monitor Description The cumulative time that power is ON (i.e., the Total ON Time) to the Slave Unit's internal circuits can be stored in the Slave Unit memory. (This data can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.) The monitor value is stored in the Slave Unit memory so once the total ON time reaches the monitor value, a flag in a status area in the Slave Unit turns ON to notify the Master Unit. The notification details can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages. • Measurement time: 0 to 429,496,729.5 h (Stored data: 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex) • Measurement unit: 0.1 h • Storage unit: 0.2 h 488 Section 11-2 Functions Common to All Slave Units Slave Unit Stored in Slave Unit memory Total ON time CompoNet network Total ON time Internal circuit power supply Note ON OFF The Unit Conduction Time Monitor Function adds up the time the CompoNet Slave Unit network power supply is ON. The time when the power is OFF is not included. Settings Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Click the General Tab. Enter the desired value in the Unit Conduction Time Threshold Field. 4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 489 Section 11-2 Functions Common to All Slave Units 11-2-5 Naming Units Description The user can set any name for each Unit (with up to 32 characters) as a comment. The name is stored in the Slave Unit memory. The CX-Integrator or explicit messages can be used to read/write the name (i.e., the comment). CX-Integrator Unit name (comment) CompoNet network Slave Unit Unit name Stored in Unit memory Settings Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Click the General Tab. Enter the desired value in the Comment Field. 4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 490 Section 11-2 Functions Common to All Slave Units 11-2-6 Naming Connected Devices Description The user can set any name for each I/O contact in the Unit (with up to 32 characters). These names are stored in the Slave Unit memory. Connected devices can be checked for each I/O contact, which is useful for remote maintenance and other applications where, for example, devices with errors need to be identified. The CX-Integrator or explicit messages can be used to read/ write the name (i.e., comment). CX-Integrator Connected device name (comment) CompoNet network Slave Unit Connected device name Stored in Slave Unit memory Connected device Settings Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Click the IN or OUT Tab. 491 Section 11-2 Functions Common to All Slave Units 4. Double-click in the I/O Comment Column of the device for which a comment is to be added. The Edit Terminal Window will be displayed. Enter the desired name in the I/O Comment Field and click the OK Button. 5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 6. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-2-7 Communications Error History Monitor Description Enables storing the error (communication failure details, the communications power supply voltage at the time of failure, and the Unit conduction time) for the most recent 4 communication failures within the slave unit. The communications error history can be read using the CX-Integrator. CompoNet network Status when communications error occurred Slave Unit 1st error 2nd error 3rd error 4th error 492 Recorded in Slave Unit memory Functions Common to All Slave Units Section 11-2 Checking Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Switch to the Online Window, and then right-click the icon for the desired CompoNet Slave Unit in the Network Configuration Window and select Monitor from the pop-up menu. 3. Click the Error History Tab in the Monitor Window. The communications error history showing the previous four errors will be displayed, as shown below. To reset the entire error history, click the Clear Button. 4. Click the Close Button and exit the window. 493 Functions Common to All Slave Units Section 11-2 11-2-8 Last Maintenance Date Description This function can be used to write the date for the last date maintenance was performed in the Slave Unit memory. This makes it easier to decide when the next maintenance should be performed. This maintenance date can be written using the CX-Integrator. Settings Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Click the General Tab and select a date from the Last Maintenance Date Field. (To enter the current date, select Today from the bottom of the pulldown menu.) 4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 494 Section 11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units 11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units Bit Slave Units support the I/O filter described in 11-3-2 Input Filter (Input Units Only). 11-3-1 I/O Power Status Monitor (Digital I/O Slave Units Only) Description The I/O power status monitor function can be used to detect whether the I/O power is ON. When the I/O power is turned OFF, a flag in a status area in the Slave Unit turns ON to notify the Master Unit. The notification details can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages. Slave Unit I/O power supply voltage I/O power supply Sensor Monitors whether or not the I/O power supply is ON. Note A detection voltage cannot be set for the I/O power supply. Checking Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Switch to the Online Window, and then right-click the icon for the desired CompoNet Slave Unit in the Network Configuration Window and select Monitor from the pop-up menu. If IO Power Supply 1 Error is selected in the Monitor Window, it means that the I/O power is not ON. 3. Click the Close Button and exit the window. 495 Section 11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units 11-3-2 Input Filter (Input Units Only) Description An input value is read more than once during a set time interval. The input value can be set to be enabled only when all the read values are the same. This function operates for all input points in one Slave Unit. Input Time Constant When the input data turns ON, the input data is read 4 times at a set time (1/4 of the time setting). The internal input data turns ON only when all four values are ON. The ON timing is delayed by the value of the input time constant. The same function is supported when the input data turns OFF. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 ON ON ON ON 4 ON ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF The internal input data remains OFF because the read input data was not ON all 4 times. ON The internal input data turns ON because the read input data was ON all 4 times. Input data Input data ON ON OFF OFF ON delay (= input filter time) OFF Response Time When the input data turns OFF, the input data is read 5 times at a set interval (1/5 of the OFF response time setting). The internal input data turns OFF only when all values are OFF. The OFF timing is delayed by the value of the OFF response time. This function can also be used to implement an OFF delay. To enable reading pulses shorter than the communications cycle time, set the OFF response time to a value longer than the communications cycle time. (The input may remain ON if the input pulse interval is too short.) 1 2 3 4 1 5 2 3 4 5 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON Input data OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF The internal input data remains ON because read input data was not OFF all 5 times. Input data ON The internal input data turns OFF because the read input data was OFF all 5 times. ON OFF OFF OFF-delay time Settings Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Click the IN Tab. Select the Input Time Constant and OFF Delay from the pull-down lists. 496 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units Section 11-3 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-3-3 Error Prevention for Surge Current at Startup (Input Units Only) Description This function can be used to prevent reading inputs while the I/O power is OFF and for 100 ms after the I/O power is turned ON (i.e., until the Slave Unit stabilizes). It helps avoid input errors caused by inrush current from connected devices when the I/O power supply is turned ON. This function is enabled or disabled by the CX-Integrator or by explicit messages. Settings Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Click the IN Tab, and select Enable for the Sensor Power ON Delay. 497 Section 11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-3-4 Contact Operation Monitor Description The number of times each input contact or output contact is turned ON can be counted (resolution: 50 Hz max.) and stored in Slave Unit memory. (This data can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.) A monitor value can be stored in the Slave Unit memory so once the number of contact operations reaches the monitor value, a flag in a status area in the Slave Unit turns ON to notify the Master Unit. The notification details can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages. • No. of times measured: 0 to 4,294,967,295 (Stored data: 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex) • Measurement unit: No. of operations Slave Unit Stored in Slave Unit memory No. of operations OFF → ON I/O power supply Output device (e.g., relay) Note No. of times output contact turns ON: 1 2 (1) The contact operation monitor and the total ON time monitor cannot be used for the same contact at the same time. Select only one of these functions under the Detection Mode. (2) This function does not operate if the I/O power is not turned ON. 498 3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units Section 11-3 Settings Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Click the IN Tab. 4. Double-click the I/O Comment column for the terminal to be set. The Edit Terminal Window will be displayed. Select Count for the Detection Mode, enter the monitor value, and then click the OK Button. 5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 6. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-3-5 Total ON Time Monitor Description This function totals the time that each input and output contact is ON (unit: s) and stores this total time in the Slave Unit memory. (This data can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.) A monitor value can be stored in the Slave Unit memory so once the set total time has been reached, a flag in a status area in the Slave Unit turns ON to notify the Master Unit. The notification details can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages. 499 Section 11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units • Measurement time: 0 to 4,294,967,295 s (Stored data: 0000 0000 to FFFF FFFF hex) • Measurement unit: s Slave Unit Stored in Slave Unit memory Total ON time I/O power supply Sensor Total ON time Connected device ON OFF Note (1) The total ON time monitor and the contact operation monitor cannot be used for the same contact at the same time. Select only one of these functions under the Detection Mode. (2) This function does not operate if the I/O power is not turned ON. (3) The Total ON Time Monitor Function checks at 1 second intervals whether or not the connected device is turned ON. Keep this in mind when measuring total ON times for inputs of less than 1 s. ■ Measuring an ON Time of 0.5 s As shown in Figure A, the actual ON time is 1.5 s (3 × 0.5 s) but the total ON time is measured only as 1 s because the input is ON only once when a measurement is taken. Measured approx. every 1 s ON OFF 0.5 s Figure A In Figure B, the actual ON time is 1.5 s (3 × 0.5 s) but the total ON time is measured as 2 s because the input is ON twice when a measurement is taken. Measured approx. every 1 s ON OFF 0.5 s Figure B ■ Measuring an ON Time of 1.5 s In Figure C, the actual ON time is 3 s (2 × 1.5 s) but the total ON time is measured as 4 s because the input is ON 4 times when a measurement is taken. 500 Section 11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units Measured approx. every 1 s ON OFF 1.5 s Figure C Settings Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Click the IN Tab. 4. Double-click the I/O Comment column for the terminal to be set. The Edit Terminal Window will be displayed. Select Time for the Detection Mode, enter the monitor value in the Value Field, and then click the OK Button. 5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 6. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 501 Section 11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units 11-3-6 Operation Time Monitor Description This function can be used to measure the contact I/O timing (ON/OFF) in the Slave Unit (measurement unit: ms) and store the measurement in the Slave Unit memory. (This data can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages.) The operation time of various combinations of contacts can be monitored in the Slave Unit (e.g., input-output, output-input, input-input, and output-output). In addition, the trigger edge pattern can be set to ON→OFF, ON→ON, OFF→OFF, or OFF→ON. Any input number and output number combination can also be set. (The number of contact points that can be set depends on the Unit.) This function allows high-precision measurement of the operation time without being affected by the communications cycle. A monitor value can be stored in the Slave Unit memory so once the set monitor time has been exceeded, a flag in a status area in the Slave Unit turns ON to notify the Master Unit. The notification details can be read using the CX-Integrator or using explicit messages. • The operation time is stored after the time lag from when the output turns ON until when the input turns ON is measured. The operation time continues to be measured internally until the next output turns ON. The measurement value is refreshed if the input turns ON again before the next output turns ON. For cylinders and other applications with reciprocating operation that receive inputs during the operating time, the measurement taken during operation (outward motion) may be refreshed during the release (return motion). Alternatively, if the output turns ON twice before the input turns ON, the time measured is from when the second output turns ON till when the input turns ON. Output ON OFF Input ON OFF t1 t3 t2 Operation Time Monitor Output (Previous value) t1 t2 t3 ON OFF ON Input OFF Measures this time period. Note (1) If the same contact is used for the start and end of measurement and the same trigger edge pattern is used for both, the measured time will always be 0 ms. (2) If monitor settings are changed while this function is being used, the accuracy of subsequent monitoring operations cannot be guaranteed. Cor- 502 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units Section 11-3 rect monitoring operations will begin again from the point of the next start trigger. (3) If the measurement start trigger is input and the monitoring set value expires, the flag in the internal Unit Status Area turns ON even if the measurement end trigger has not been input. The Unit's operation time monitor value will retain the previous measurement value until the measurement end trigger is input. Settings Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Click the Operation Time Tab. 4. Double-click the Equipment Name to be monitored. The Edit Terminal Window will be displayed. Enter the set value in the Operation Time Field and select the points to be monitored from the pull-down lists of the Start Point and End Point Fields. Then select the ON edge or OFF edge monitoring in the Edge Pattern Field and click the OK Button. 5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 6. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 503 Section 11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units 11-3-7 Power Supply Short-circuit Detection (Inputs) Description This function monitors the current in the sensor power supply section and detects a power supply short-circuit if the current per input contact exceeds a rated value. Power supply short-circuit detection functions in two different ways depending on Unit specifications. For some Units, the I/O power supply is turned OFF to the entire Unit if a short-circuit is detected for even one input. For other Units, the I/O power is turned OFF individually for each input. For information on load short-circuit detection, refer to the power short-circuit protection and input device power supply specifications for the applicable Unit. An indicator on the Slave Unit can be used to see if a power supply short-circuit has been detected. Also, if a short-circuit has been detected, an internal status bit will turn ON in the Slave Unit to inform the Master Unit. The current status can be read using the CX-Integrator or an explicit message. Once the cause of the short-circuit has been removed, operation will recover automatically and power will be output to the connector where the short-circuit was detected. Short-circuit Is the sensor power supply short-circuited? Sensor Note Use a power supply device with a rating of 100 W or higher as the communications power supply for network power supply. A short-circuit is detected if a current that exceeds a specified value flows in the sensor power supply output of the Unit. Also, the communications power supply may temporarily turn OFF when a short circuit occurs. Operation will automatically be restored once the cause of the short circuit has been removed, but implement an external circuit so that the system operates safely while the outputs are turned OFF. Use the following formula as a guide for Sensor communications power supply capacity. • Total network current = Total Unit current consumption + Total Sensor current consumption • Communications power supply capacity used ≥ (Total network current + (Short-circuit detection current)) × (CompoNet network voltage used) Monitoring Status with the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Go online, right-click the icon of the applicable CompoNet Slave Unit in the Network Configuration Window, and select Monitor. 3. Make sure that the Sensor Power Supply Short-circuit Check Box is selected. 504 Section 11-3 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units 4. Click the Close Button. The window will close. 11-3-8 Load Short-circuit Detection (Outputs) Description This function monitors the load current in the output section and detects a load short-circuit if the current per contact (or common) exceeds a rated value. If a load short-circuited is detected, the outputs are turned OFF to prevent damage to the Unit output circuits. Load short-circuit detection functions in two different ways depending on Unit specifications. For some Units, the outputs are turned OFF for the entire Unit if a short-circuit is detected for even one output. For other Units, the outputs are turned OFF individually. For information on load short-circuit detection, refer to the rated output current and internal circuits in the specifications for the applicable Unit. An indicator on the Slave Unit can be used to see if a load short-circuit has been detected. Also, if a short-circuit has been detected, an internal status bit will turn ON in the Slave Unit to inform the Master Unit. The current status can be read using the CX-Integrator or an explicit message. Once the cause of the short-circuit has been removed, operation will recover automatically and power will be output to the connector where the short-circuit was detected. Short-circuit Output forced OFF Is the load short-circuited? Load Note An OMRON S82J-series Power Supply device is recommended for the I/O power supply. Load short-circuits may not be detected if a power supply with vertical-drop overcurrent protection characteristics is used. If a power supply 505 Functions of Digital I/O Slave Units Section 11-3 device with vertical-drop overcurrent protection characteristics is used, use one with a rating of 100 W min. Monitoring Status with the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Go online, right-click the icon of the applicable CompoNet Slave Unit in the Network Configuration Window, and select Monitor. 3. Make sure that the External Load Short-circuit Protection Check Box is selected. 4. Click the Close Button. The window will close. 506 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions 11-4-1 AD Conversion Point Setting (only Input Unit) Description Normally, when using a four-point Input Unit, the values for the four inputs are converted in sequence. The setting can be changed, however, so that unused inputs are not converted. By reducing the number of conversion points, the conversion cycle speed is increased. Conversion points 4 points (default) Details Converts Input CH0, CH1, CH2, and CH3. CRT1-AD 0 1 2 3 All points used. 3 points Converts Input CH0, CH1, and CH2. CRT1-AD 0 1 2 3 Used points 2 points Converts Input CH0 and CH1. CRT1-AD 0 1 2 3 Used points 1 point Converts Input CH0 only. CRT1-AD 0 1 2 3 Used points Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 507 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions 3. Click the General Tab and select the number of conversion points from the inputs listed on the pull-down menu under the Available Channels Field. 4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-4-2 Moving Average Processing Description This function calculates the average value (moving average) of the previous eight inputs, and uses the resulting value as conversion data. When the input value fluctuates frequently, as shown in the following diagram, averaging can be used to produce a stable input value. Input analog value Actual input Averaged input Time Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the Tab Page for the input where moving average processing is to be performed, and select Moving Average under the Function Choice heading 508 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-4-3 Scaling Description The default setting is used to perform AD conversion of analog input values, scaling them to a count between 0 and 6,000. Scaling can be used to change scaled values that correspond to the input signal range into other values required by the user (industry unit values). Scaling also eliminates the need for ladder programming in the Master Unit to perform math operations. The following two methods of input scaling can be used. Default Scaling Analog input values (count values) are converted to the original voltage and current values. The units used are mV or µA. When default scaling is selected, scaling is performed according to the range used, as shown in the following table. Input range 0 to 5 V 100% 5,000 mV 0% Disconnected line 0000 mV 0000 hex 0 to 10 V 10,000 mV 0000 mV 0000 hex 5,000 mV −10 to 10 V 0 to 4 to (CRT120 mA 20 mA AD04 only) 10,000 mV 20,000 µA 20,000 µA 1,000 mV 7FFF hex –10,000 mV 0000 µA 0000 hex 0000 hex 1 to 5 V 4,000 µA 7FFF hex 509 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions User Scaling Analog input values (count values) are scaled to user-defined values. The conversion values for 100% and 0% are set using the CX-Integrator. Input range 100% 0% Disconnected line −10 to 10 V 0 to (CRT120 mA AD04 only) Set using CX-Integrator (–28,000 to 28,000) Set using CX-Integrator (–28,000 to 28,000) 0000 hex 0000 hex 7FFF hex 0000 hex 0000 hex 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V 4 to 20 mA 7FFF hex Scaling value Value for 100% set by user (Scaling point 2) Conversion Value for 0% set by user (Scaling point 1) Input signal range 0% 100% Note Reverse scaling, where the 0% scaling value is higher than the 100% scaling value, is also supported. Offset Compensation Scaling the analog input values of linear sensors to distances produces mounting error in the sensor. Offset compensation compensates for the error that occurs during scaling. The offset amount is added to the scaled line before processing, as shown in the following diagram. The offset (error) value can be input between –28,000 to 28,000, but make sure that underflow or overflow does not occur. The High Limit is 7FFE hex and the Low Limit is 8000 hex. Note The offset value can be set even when using default scaling. Upper limit: 7FFE hex (32766) 100% scaling value Scaled line 0% scaling Offset value (–28,000 to 28,000) Lower limit: 8000 hex (−32768) 0% 100% Input signal range Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 510 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions Section 11-4 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the Tab Page for the input where scaling is to be performed, and select Scaling under the Function Choice heading. 4. Click the Scaling Tab, and select either Default Scaling or User Scaling. 511 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions Section 11-4 5. When User Scaling is selected, set the 0% value in the Scaling Point (0%) Field, and set the 100% value in the Scaling Point (100%) Field. 6. For offset compensation, set the offset value in the Scaling Offset Field. Either Default Scaling or User Scaling can be set in the Scaling Type Field. 7. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 8. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 512 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions 11-4-4 Peak/Bottom Hold Description Peak/bottom hold is used to hold the maximum (peak) value or minimum (bottom) value of the analog input value. When the Hold Flag (output) allocated in the OUT Area turns ON, the hold function starts, searching for the peak or bottom value until the Hold Flag turns OFF. (The peak/bottom value is refreshed when the Hold Flag turns OFF.) The comparator function can be used to compare the peak or bottom values allocated as analog data. (Refer to details on the comparator function.) ■ Example of Bottom Hold Analog input value The bottom value will be updated. Hold value Previous value Hold Flag ON Hold function starts Bottom hold value OFF Hold function stops Note A delay in network transmission time will occur from the time the Hold Flag turns ON (or OFF) in the Master Unit’s ladder program until notification of the flag’s status is actually sent to the Slave. Therefore, even when the Hold Flag is ON, the first analog data transmitted to the Master Unit after the CPU Unit power is turned ON may be the data from when the Hold Flag was OFF. To collect peak/bottom hold data using the Hold Flag at the Master Unit, configure a ladder program that considers the transmission delay when the Hold Flag is turned ON, and enables only the peak/bottom hold values after a fixed time lag. Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the Tab Page for the input where Peak/Bottom is to be set, and select Peak/Bottom under the Function Choice heading. 513 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions Section 11-4 4. To allocate the Hold Flags (output) in the default connection path, click the General Tab and select Holding Value from the pull-down menu in the Default Connection Path (Out) Field. 5. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 6. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 514 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions 11-4-5 Top/Valley Hold Description Top/valley hold is used to hold the top and valley values of the analog input value. Analog values that fluctuate more than twice the hysteresis value are monitored, and the top or valley values are held. The top or valley value is allocated along with the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags, which can be used to check the hold timing. When the Hold Flag (output) allocated in the OUT Area turns ON, the hold function starts, refreshing the top or valley value until the Hold Flag turns OFF. (The last value is held when the Hold Flag turns OFF, but the next time the Hold Flag turns ON, the hold value is initialized as soon as a top or valley occurs.) The comparator can be used to compare the top or valley value allocated as analog data. (Refer to details on the comparator function.) ■ Example of Valley Hold Analog input value Valley hold value Last value is held. Hold value Hold Flag Hold function starts Hold function stops Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag One-shot time Note 1. A delay in network transmission time will occur from the time the Hold Flag turns ON (or OFF) in the Master Unit’s ladder program until notification of the flag’s status is actually sent to the Slave. Therefore, even after the Hold Flag is ON, the first analog data transmitted to the Master Unit after the CPU Unit power is turned ON may be the data from when the Hold Flag was OFF. To collect top/valley hold data using the Hold Flag at the Master Unit, configure a ladder program which considers the transmission delay time when the Hold Flag is turned ON, and enables only the top/valley hold values after a fixed time lag. 2. The time that the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags are ON can be adjusted by setting the one-shot time. Use the CX-Integrator to set the one-shot time (the setting range is 1 to 65,535 ms). 3. If the Hold Flag turns OFF during the time the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag is set to be ON, both flags will turn OFF simultaneously. Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the Tab Page for the input where top/valley hold is to be set, and select Top/Valley under the Function Choice heading. 515 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions Section 11-4 4. To allocate the Hold Flag (output) in the default connection path, click the General Tab, and select Holding Value from the pull-down menu in the Default Connection Path (Out) Field. 5. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 6. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 516 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions Hysteresis Setting The hysteresis value can be set using the CX-Integrator to prevent detection of top or valley values that occur due to minor fluctuations in the analog input value. This will cause the start of data holding to be delayed after the actual top or valley value occurs, as shown in the following diagram. Timing for Setting Data Analog input value Set hysteresis value × 2 Valley hold value Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag Delay Setting Hysteresis Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Input the value for hysteresis in the Hysteresis Field in the Top/Valley Tab under the Function Choice heading. 2. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button. 3. Click the OK Button and exit the window. Note The hysteresis value set for the top/valley hold function is also used as the hysteresis value for the comparator function. 517 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions One-shot Time Setting 1,2,3... 1. Input the desired value in the SHOT Off Delay Field of the Top/Valley Tab under the Function Choice heading. 2. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button. 3. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-4-6 Rate of Change Calculation Description The rate of change can be obtained for each sampling cycle set for the analog input data. This function calculates the difference between each set sampling cycle and value obtained in the previous cycle. The default setting for the sampling cycle is 100 ms and the sampling cycle setting range is 10 to 65,530 ms (in units of 10 ms). Analog input value Analog data Time 0 Rate of change Differentiation data Note If the sampling cycle is set to a small value, the rate of change will be sensitive to small changes. If the analog data is subject to minute fluctuations, and the 518 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions sampling cycle is shorter than the cycle of fluctuation, the fluctuation will be regarded as the rate of change. To prevent this occurring, use moving average processing, which will set a longer sampling cycle. Desired gradient Fluctuation in analog value Short sampling cycle Long sampling cycle Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the Tab Page for the input where rate of change is to be set, and select Rate of Change under the Function Choice heading. 4. Click the Rate of Change Tab and input the desired value for the sampling cycle in the Sampling Rate Field. 519 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions 5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 6. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-4-7 Comparator Description Four values can be set in the Slave Unit, and compared with the Analog Data values. The four set values are the Alarm Trip Point High (HH), the Warning Trip Point High (H), the Warning Trip Point Low (L), and the Alarm Trip Point Low (LL). When the analog data value exceeds the set value, the Comparator Result Flag in the area for Analog Status Flags turns ON. If an alarm does not occur, the Normal Flag (pass signal) turns ON. HH H Set values L LL HH alarm Comparator Result Flag (in Analog Status Flags) ON/OFF H alarm Normal Flag (Pass signal) L alarm LL alarm Note When the analog input value changes earlier than the conversion cycle, the High Limit alarm may turn ON without the Normal Flag (pass signal) turning ON for the Low Limit alarm. Configure ladder programs to prevent this occurring. 520 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions Setting Hysteresis The Comparator Result Flag turns OFF when the value is lower than the hysteresis width (H or HH alarm occurs) or exceeds it (L or LL alarm occurs), as shown in the following diagram. If the analog value fluctuates around the threshold, and the flag repeatedly turns ON and OFF, set the hysteresis to stabilize the flag operation. HH set value or H set value Hysteresis width Hysteresis width LL set value or L set value HH Alarm Flag or H Alarm Flag OFF Delay LL Alarm Flag or L Alarm Flag The time until the Comparator Result Flag turns OFF can be extended. For example, even if the Flag is ON momentarily, the OFF delay can be set so that the Master Unit can receive notification of the Flag’s status. HH set value Hysteresis width OFF delay HH Alarm Flag Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the Tab Page for the input where the comparator function is to be set, and select Comparator under the Function Choice heading. 521 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions Section 11-4 4. Click the Comparator Tab and set the four trip points. The example here shows the setting for Alarm Trip Point High (HH). 5. To set the hysteresis value, input the desired value in the Hysteresis Field. 522 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions Section 11-4 Note The hysteresis value set for the comparator function is also used as the hysteresis value for the top/valley hold function. 6. To set the OFF delay function, input the desired value in the Comparator Off Delay Field. 7. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 523 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions 8. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-4-8 Disconnected Line Detection Description When a disconnection occurs in an analog input line (voltage input or current input), the Disconnected Line Detection Flag turns ON for each input that is valid in the number of AD conversion points. The Disconnected Line Detection Flags are included in the Analog Status Flags. When Disconnected Line Detection is enabled, the value of AD conversion data is set to 7FFF hex. When the input returns to a value within the range that can be converted, the Disconnected Line Detection function will automatically be turned OFF, and normal data conversion will occur. Disconnected Line detection is supported for input ranges of 1 to 5 V or 4 to 20 mA only. With the 1 to 5 V input range, a disconnected line is detected when the input voltage is below 0.76 V (less than 6%). With the 4 to 20 mA input range, a disconnected line is detected when the input current is below 3.04 mA. 11-4-9 User Adjustment Description Depending on factors such as the characteristics and connection methods of the input device, the input can be adjusted to compensate for error in the input voltage or current. The following diagram shows when compensation is applied to the conversion line at the two points for 0% and 100%. Conversion data After adjustment Before adjustment 0% 100% Voltage/current The following table shows the input ranges that support user adjustment. Input range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Low Limit –0.25 to 0.25 V 0.8 to 1.2 V –0.5 to 0.5 V –11 to –9.0 V 3.2 to 4.8 mA –1.0 to 1.0 mA High Limit 4.75 to 5.25 V 4.8 to 5.2 V 9.5 to 10.5 V 9.0 to 11 V 19.2 to 20.8 mA 19 to 21 mA Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 524 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions Section 11-4 3. Select the Tab Page for the input to be adjusted, and click the Adjustment Button. (At this time, set the input range.) 4. Input the voltage (or current) transmitted from the connected device to the Unit’s input terminal that is equivalent to the 100% value. 5. Click the Fix Upper Adjusting Value Button in the Adjustment Window, and input the adjusted value. 6. Input the voltage (or current) transmitted from the connected device to the Unit’s input terminal that is equivalent to the 0% value. 7. Click the Fix Lower Adjusting Value Button, and input the adjusted value. 525 Section 11-4 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions To return the set value to the default setting, click the Default Setting Button. 8. Click the Close Button to close the Adjustment Window. 9. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 10. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-4-10 Cumulated Count Description The cumulated count calculates an approximation to the integral of analog input values over time. The cumulated value can be calculated in “count hours” (by selecting “hours”) or “count minutes” (by selecting “minutes”). The count value is the analog input value in the industry unit obtained after scaling. For example, 100.0 count hours indicates a value equivalent to an analog input value of 100 counts continuing for one hour. The counter range for a four-byte area (two words) for count hours or count minutes is –214,748,364.8 to 214,748,364.7. Data is displayed on the CX-Integrator in units of 0.1 hour or minute. Monitor values can be set in the Slave Unit. When the cumulated count value exceeds the set monitor value, the Cumulated Counter Flag in the area for Generic Status Flags turns ON. Analog input value Cumulated value (count × hour or count × minute) Time Division width (See note.) Note The following table shows the divisions for the cumulated counter. Unit Hour Minute 526 Divisions 3.6 s (1/1,000 hour) 60 ms (1/1,000 minute) Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions Section 11-4 Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the Tab Page for the input where the cumulated counter is to be set, and select Cumulated Count under the Function Choice heading. 4. To set the counter unit, click the Cumulated Count Tab and select Hour or Minute from the pull-down menu in the Cumulated Timer Field. 527 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions Section 11-4 5. To set the monitor value, click the Cumulated Count Tab, and input the desired value in the Threshold Cumulated Counter Field. 6. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 7. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 528 Analog I/O Slave Unit (input) Functions Section 11-4 11-4-11 Last Maintenance Date Description Writes the maintenance date to the unit, individually to units and connected devices. It enables the user to easily determine the next maintenance date. The date can be set using the CX-Integrator. Setting Using the CX-Integrator ■ Setting the Last Maintenance Date of the Unit 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Click the General Tab and select a date from the Last Maintenance Date Field. (To enter the current date, select Today from the bottom of the pulldown menu.) 4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. ■ Setting the Last Maintenance Date of the Connected Device 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Click the Tab Page for the input that is connected to a device requiring the last maintenance date to be set. Select the applicable date from the pulldown menu in the Last Maintenance Date Field. (To enter the current date, select Today, which is at the bottom of the pull-down menu.) 529 Section 11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions 11-5-1 Scaling Description In default setting, the output values are scaled to a count between 0 to 6,000 and converted to analog values in the output signal range. The scaling function allows user-specified scaling (or industry-specific units) for output signal ranges. The function eliminates the need for ladder programming in the Master Unit to perform math operations. The following two methods of scaling can be used. Default Scaling Default scaling converts analog output values into voltage or current values. The units used are mV or µA. When default scaling is selected, scaling is performed according to the output range, as shown in the following table. Output 0 to 5 V range 100% 5,000 mV 0% Disconnected line 530 0000 mV --- 0 to 10 V 10,000 mV 0000 mV --- 1 to 5 V –10 to 10 V 0 to 4 to 20 mA 20 mA 20,000 µA 20,000 µA 5,000 mV 10,000 mV 1,000 mV 7FFF hex –10,000 mV 0000 µA ----- 4,000 µA 7FFF hex Section 11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions User Scaling User scaling allows analog output values to be scaled to user-defined values. The conversion values for 100% and 0% are set using the CX-Integrator. Input range 100% 0% Disconnected line 0 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 1 to 5 V –10 to 10 V Set using CX-Integrator (–28,000 to 28,000) Set using CX-Integrator (–28,000 to 28,000) ----7FFF hex --- 0 to 20 mA --- 4 to 20 mA 7FFF hex Scaling value 100% value set by user (scaling point 2) Output conversion 0% value set by user (scaling point 1) Output signal ran 0% 100% Note Reverse scaling, where the 0% scaling value is higher than the 100% scaling value, is also supported. Offset Compensation Offset compensation is used to compensate for error that occurs during scaling. The offset amount is added to the scaled line before processing, as shown in the following diagram. The offset (error) value can be input between –28,000 and 28,000, but if underflow or overflow occurs in the scaled line, the 100% or 0% output will not be possible. The High Limit is 7FFE hex and the Low Limit is 8000 hex. Note The offset value can be set even when using default scaling. Upper limit 7FFE hex (32766) Scaling line 100% scaling value Offset value (–28,000 to +28,000) 0% scaling value Cannot output 100% value even if it is set to 7FFF. Lower limit 8000 hex (−32768) 0% 100% Output (signal) range 531 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions Section 11-5 Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the Tab Page for the output where scaling is to be performed, and select Scaling under the Function Choice heading. 4. To select the scaling type, click the Scaling Tab, and select either Default Scaling or User Scaling. 532 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions Section 11-5 5. When user scaling is selected, set the 0% value in the Scaling Point (0%) Field, and set the 100% value in the Scaling Point (100%) Field. 6. For offset compensation, set the offset value in the Scaling Offset Field. Also select either Default Scaling or User Scaling in the Scaling Type Field. 533 Section 11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions 7. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 8. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-5-2 User Adjustment Description Depending on factors such as the characteristics and connection methods of the output device, the output can be adjusted to compensate for error in the final output. The following diagram shows when compensation is applied to the conversion line at the two points for 0% and 100%. Conversion data After adjustment Before adjustment 0% 100% Voltage/current The ranges supported for adjustment (–5% to 5%) are shown in the following table. If adjustment cannot be performed within the following ranges, check the method being used to connect the output device. Output range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V 534 Low Limit –0.25 to 0.25 V 0.8 to 1.2 V –0.5 to 0.5 V High Limit 4.75 to 5.25 V 4.8 to 5.2 V 9.5 to 10.5 V Section 11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions Output range –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Low Limit –11 to –9.0 V 3.2 to 4.8 mA 0.2 to 1.0 mA High Limit 9.0 to 11 V 19.2 to 20.8 mA 19 to 21 mA Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the Tab Page for the output to be adjusted, and click the Adjustment Button. (At this time, set the output range.) Adjusting the Low Limit 4. Output the value from the Master Unit that is equivalent to 0%. Always perform adjustment with the 0% value. 5. Adjust the analog value that is output from the terminal using the Lower Adjustment slide bar, as shown in the following window. Repeat adjustments until the correct 0% value is output from the output device. After compensation is completed, click the Fix Lower Adjusting Value Button. 535 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions Adjusting the High Limit Section 11-5 6. Output the value from the Master Unit that is equivalent to the Output Unit’s maximum (100%) value. Adjustment using the 100% value is highly recommended, but adjustment can be performed using a lower value. 7. Adjust the analog value that is output from the terminal using the High Adjustment slide bar, as shown in the following window. Repeat adjustments until the correct 100% value is output from the output device. After compensation is completed, click the Fix Upper Adjusting Value Button. To return to the default settings, click the Default Setting Button. 8. Click the Close Button to close the Adjustment Window. 9. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 10. Click the OK Button and exit the window. Note In Analog Output Slave Units, always adjust the Low Limit first. If the Low Limit is adjusted without adjusting the High Limit 100%, dislocation may occur. 536 Section 11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions 11-5-3 Cumulated Count Description The cumulated count calculates an approximation to the integral of analog output values over time. The cumulated value can be calculated in “count hours” (by selecting “hours”) or “count minutes” (by selecting “minutes”). The count value is the analog output value in the industry unit obtained after scaling. For example, 100.0 count hours indicates a value equivalent to an analog output value of 100 counts continuing for one hour. The counter range for a two-word area (four bytes) for count hours or count minutes is –214,748,364.8 to 214,748,364.7. Data is displayed on the CX-Integrator in units of 0.1 hours or minutes. Monitor values can be set in the Slave Unit. When the cumulated count value exceeds the set monitor value, the Cumulated Counter Flag in the area for Generic Status Flags turns ON. Analog output value Cumulated value (count × hour or minute) Time t Division width (See note.) Note The following table shows the divisions for the cumulated counter. Unit Hour Minute Divisions 3.6 s (1/1,000 hour) 60 ms (1/1,000 minute) Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the tab page for the output where the cumulated counter is to be set, and select the Cumulated Count Check Box under the Function Choice heading. 537 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions Section 11-5 4. To set the counter unit, click the Cumulated Count Tab and select Hour or Minute from the pull-down menu in the Cumulated Time Field. 5. To set the monitor value, click the Cumulated Count Tab, and input the desired value in the Threshold Cumulated Counter Field. 538 Section 11-5 Analog I/O Slave Unit (output) Functions 6. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 7. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-5-4 Setting Output Value for Errors Description The value that is output when communications errors (time-out and BusOff errors) occur can be set for each output. The four output settings are set using the CX-Integrator. Setting Patterns Low limit High limit Hold last state Outputs the values in the following table according to the output range. Outputs the values in the following table according to the output range. Holds and outputs the value from immediately before the error occurred. Zero count Outputs the value when 0 is written from the Host. This setting will be affected by scaling settings that are used. Output Ranges and Values Output range 0 to 5 V 1 to 5 V 0 to 10 V –10 to 10 V 4 to 20 mA 0 to 20 mA Low limit –0.25 V 0.8 V –0.5 V –11 V 3.2 mA 0 mA High limit 5.25 V 5.2 V 10.5 V 11 V 20.8 mA 21 mA Hold last state Holds value. Holds value. Holds value. Holds value. Holds value. Holds value. Note When a node address has been used more than once or a Unit error has occurred, the current output will be 0 mA and the voltage output will be 0 V, regardless of the setting. 539 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions Setting Using the CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the CompoNet Slave Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Slave Unit to set in the Network Configuration Window to open the Configuration Window. (Alternatively, right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit from the pop-up menu.) 3. Select the Tab Page for the output where the communications error output value is to be set, and select the desired item from the pull-down menu in the Fault State Field. 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions 11-6-1 Moving Average Processing Description This function calculates the moving average of the previous eight input values, and uses the resulting value as the converted data. When the input value fluctuates frequently, the moving average can be used to produce a stable input value, as shown in the following diagram. Temperature input value Actual input Averaged input Time 540 Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 Setting Using CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the tab for the input where moving average processing is to be performed, and select the Moving Average Check Box in the Function Choice Area. 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-6-2 Scaling Description Scaling can be used to convert the temperature input values (measured values) to display values at the scale required by the user. Scaling also eliminates the need for ladder programming in the Master Unit to perform these basic math operations. 541 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions To scale the temperature input values to the scale required by the user, use the CX-Integrator to set the conversion values (−28,000 to 28,000) for two points in the scale (the 100% value and 0% value). Scaling value Value for 100% set by user (Scaling point 2) Conversion Value for 0% set by user (Scaling point 1) Input signal range 0% Note 100% 1. The default values are 0 and 28,000. 2. Reverse scaling, where the 0% scaling value is higher than the 100% scaling value, is also supported. Offset Compensation The scaling function is equipped with offset compensation, which can compensate for any error that occurs during scaling. The offset amount is added to the scaled line as shown in the following diagram. The offset value can be input between −28,000 to 28,000. Make sure that underflow or overflow does not occur. The High Limit is 7FFE hex and the Low Limit is 8000 hex. (The High Limit is 7FFFFFFE Hex and the Low Limit is 80000000 Hex for 1/100 Display Mode.) Note The offset value can be set even when using default scaling. Upper limit: 7FFE hex (32766) 100% scaling value Scaled line 0% scaling Offset value (–28,000 to 28,000) Lower limit: 8000 hex (−32768) 0% 100% Input signal range Setting Using CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the tab for the input where scaling is to be performed, and select the Scaling Check Box in the Function Choice Area. 542 Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 4. Set 0% value in the Scaling Point (0%) Field, and set the 100% value in the Scaling Point (100%) Field. 5. To offset the scaled values, set the offset value in the Scaling Offset Field. 543 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions 6. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 7. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-6-3 Peak/Bottom Hold Description Peak/bottom hold is used to hold the maximum (peak) value or minimum (bottom) value of the temperature input value. When the Hold Flag allocated in the Output Area turns ON, the hold function starts, searching for the peak or bottom value until the Hold Flag turns OFF. (The peak/bottom value is refreshed when the Hold Flag turns OFF.) The comparator function can be used to compare the peak or bottom values allocated as temperature data 1. (Refer to details on the comparator function.) Example of Bottom Hold Temperature input value The bottom value is updated. Hold value Previous value Hold Flag ON Hold function starts. Bottom hold value OFF Hold function stops. Note A delay in network transmission time will occur from the time the Hold Flag turns ON (or OFF) in the Master Unit's ladder program until notification of the flag's status is actually sent to the Slave. Therefore, even when the Hold Flag is ON, the first temperature data transmitted to the Master Unit when the CPU Unit power is turned ON may be the data from when the Hold Flag was OFF. To collect peak/bottom hold data using the Hold Flag at the Master Unit, con- 544 Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 figure a ladder program that considers the transmission delay when the Hold Flag is turned ON, then enables the peak/bottom hold values after a fixed time interval. Setting Using CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the tab for the input where peak/bottom hold is to be set, and select the Peak/Bottom Check Box in the Function Choice Area. 4. To allocate the Hold Flag (output) in the default connection path, click the General Tab Page and select Holding Value in the Default Connection Path (Out) Field. 5. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 545 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions 6. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-6-4 Top/Valley Hold Description The top/valley hold function is used to hold the top and valley values of the temperature input value. Temperature values that fluctuate more than twice the hysteresis value are monitored, and the top or valley values are held. The top or valley value is allocated along with the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags, which can be used to check the hold timing. When the Hold Flag (output) allocated in the OUT Area turns ON, the hold function starts, refreshing the top or valley value until the Hold Flag turns OFF. (The last value is held when the Hold Flag turns OFF, but the next time the Hold Flag turns ON, the hold value is initialized as soon as a top or valley occurs.) The comparator can be used to compare the top or valley value allocated as Temperature Data 1. (Refer to details on the comparator function.) Example of Valley Hold Temperature input value Valley hold value Last value is held. Hold value Hold Flag Hold function starts. Hold function stops. Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag One-shot time Note 1. A delay in network transmission time will occur from the time the Hold Flag turns ON (or OFF) in the Master Unit's ladder program until notification of the flag's status is actually sent to the Slave. Therefore, even when the Hold Flag is ON, the first temperature data transmitted to the Master Unit when the CPU Unit power is turned ON may be the data from when the Hold Flag was OFF. To collect top/valley hold data using the Hold Flag at the Master Unit, configure a ladder program which considers the transmission delay time when the Hold Flag is turned ON, then enables the top/valley hold values after a fixed time interval. 2. The time that the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags are ON can be adjusted by setting the one-shot time. Use the CX-Integrator to set the one-shot time (the setting range is 1 to 65,535 ms). 3. If the Hold Flag turns OFF during the time the Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag is set to be ON, both flags will turn OFF simultaneously. Setting Using CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 546 Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 3. Click the tab for the input where top/valley hold is to be set, and select the Top/Valley Check Box in the Function Choice Area. 4. To allocate the Hold Flag (output) in the default connection path, click the General Tab Page and select Holding Value in the Default Connection Path (Out) Field. 5. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 6. Click the OK Button and exit the window. Hysteresis Setting The hysteresis value can be set using the CX-Integrator to prevent detection of top or valley values that occur due to minor fluctuations in the temperature input value. This will cause the start of data holding to be delayed after the actual top or valley value occurs, as shown in the following diagram. 547 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions Timing for Setting Data Temperature input value Set hysteresis value × 2 Valley hold value Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag Delay Setting the Hysteresis Using CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Click the Top/Valley Tab and input the hysteresis in the Hysteresis Field. 2. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 3. Click the OK Button and exit the window. Note The hysteresis set for the top/valley hold function is also used by the comparator function. Setting the One-shot Time 1,2,3... 548 1. Select the Top/Valley Tab Page and input the desired value in the Shot Off Delay Field. Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions 2. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 3. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-6-5 Top/Valley Counter Description The top/value count function counts the number of temperature tops or valleys in devices or applications that have repetitive constant temperature rises (or drops). A monitor value can be set for the counter to indicate when maintenance is required for the Unit or sensor. The status can be read in the Monitor Window or via an explicit message to know when the monitor value has been exceeded. Valley Counter Operation Temperature input value Valley hold value Last value is held. Hold value Hold Flag Hold function starts. Hold function stops. The Valley Count function counts the number of valleys in the temperature input value. Setting Using CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 549 Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 3. Click the tab for the input where top/valley count is to be used, and select the Top/Valley Check Box in the Function Choice Area. 4. Select the Top/Valley Tab Page and select Top Count or Valley Count in the Count Type Field. 5. Set the monitor value for the top/valley counter. 6. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 7. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-6-6 Rate of Change Calculation Description 550 The rate of change can be obtained for each sampling cycle set for the temperature input data. This function calculates the difference between the current sampling cycle the previous cycle. The sampling cycle can be set to Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions between 250 ms and 65,500 ms in 250-ms increments. The default setting for the sampling cycle is 250 ms. Temperature input value Temperature data Time Rate of change 0 Derivative data Note If the sampling cycle is set to a small value, the rate of change will be sensitive to small changes. If the temperature data is subject to minute fluctuations, and the sampling cycle is shorter than the cycle of fluctuation, the fluctuation will be regarded as the rate of change. To prevent this occurring, use moving average processing, which will set a longer sampling cycle. Desired gradient Fluctuation in the temperature input value Short sampling cycle Long sampling cycle Setting Using CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the tab for the input where rate of change is to be calculated, and select the Rate of Change Check Box in the Function Choice Area. 551 Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 4. Click the Rate of Change Tab and input the desired value for the sampling cycle. 5. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 6. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-6-7 Comparator Description When the High High Limit, High Limit, Low Low Limit, and Low Limit are set in the Unit, a status flag will be turned ON when a value exceeds the set range. The four set values are High High Limit (HH), High Limit (H), Low Low Limit (LL), and Low Limit (L). The values are compared with those in Temperature Data 1. (The comparator function cannot be used with Temperature Data 2.) The setting range is −415,000 to 415,000. In each case where settings are exceeded, the comparator results bit in the "Temperature Data Status Flag" is turned ON. If a warning is not set, a Normal Flag (Pass signal) is turned ON. 552 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions HH H Set values L LL HH alarm Comparator results (within Temperature Data Status Flag) bit ON/OFF H alarm Normal Flag (Pass signal) L alarm LL alarm Note When the temperature input value changes faster than the conversion cycle, the status may go from a Low Limit alarm directly to a High Limit alarm without having the Normal Flag (pass signal) go ON in between. Write ladder programs to allow for this. Setting Hysteresis The Comparator Result Flag turns OFF when the value is lower than the hysteresis width (H or HH alarm occurs) or exceeds it (L or LL alarm occurs), as shown in the following diagram. If the temperature input value fluctuates around the threshold and the flag repeatedly turns ON or OFF, set hysteresis to stabilize the flag operation. The setting range is 0 to 16,383. HH set value or H set value Hysteresis width Hysteresis width LL set value or L set value HH Alarm Flag or H Alarm Flag LL Alarm Flag or L Alarm Flag Note When setting the hysteresis value, allow for the decimal point position or the 1/100 Display Mode for each input. Always correct the hysteresis value after changing the display mode or replacing the input with one that has a different decimal point position. Examples for an Hysteresis of 10°C: • R thermocouple (normal display) setting: 0010 decimal • T thermocouple (normal display) setting: 0100 decimal • Setting for any input with 1/100 display: 1000 decimal 553 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions OFF Delay The time until the Comparator Result Flag turns OFF can be extended. For example, even if the Flag is ON momentarily, the OFF delay can be set so that the Master Unit can receive notification of the Flag's status. HH set value Hysteresis width OFF delay HH Alarm Flag Setting Using CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the tab for the input where comparator function is to be set, and select the Comparator Check Box in the Function Choice Area. 4. Click the Comparator Tab and set each of the alarm values. The example here shows the setting for Alarm Trip Point High (HH). 554 Temperature Input Unit Functions Note Section 11-6 When setting the alarm value, allow for the decimal point position or the 1/100 Display Mode for each input. Always correct the alarm value after changing the display mode or replacing the input with one that has a different decimal point position. Example: Alarm value setting for 250° R thermocouple (normal display) setting: 00250 decimal T thermocouple (normal display) setting: 02500 decimal Setting for any input with 1/100 display: 25000 decimal 5. To set the hysteresis value, input the desired value in the Hysteresis Field. Note The hysteresis value set for the comparator function is also used by the top/ valley hold function. 6. To set the OFF delay function, input the desired value in the Comparator Off Delay Field. 555 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions 7. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 8. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-6-8 Temperature Range Count Description This function times (in 1-second units) how long the temperature input value is within a user-set temperature range. The range count (zone count) can indicate when preventative maintenance is required for devices or applications that deteriorate at a fixed rate within the user-set temperature range. Select the temperature range settings on the Comparator Tab Page. The temperature range boundaries are defined by the High High Limit (HH), High Limit (H), Low Low Limit (LL), or Low Limit (L). If the time within the set temperature range exceeds the monitor value, it indicates that a threshold value has been exceeded. The status can be read in the Monitor Window or via an explicit message to know when a threshold has been exceeded. The Over Threshold status can be read in the Maintenance Information Window or via an explicit message. Temperature 10°C Counting starts when this 85°C temperature is exceeded. When the temperature range is set to 10°C above the set temperature (95°C), the function counts how long the temperature is within that 10°C range. Time Counting starts Counting stops Counting starts Setting Using CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 556 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the tab for the input where time is to be measured, and select the Comparator Check Box in the Function Choice Area. 4. Click the Comparator Tab and select the desired type of temperature range in the Zone Type Field. 5. Set the monitor value in the Monitoring Zone Counter Field to indicate when the temperature has been in the temperature range longer than the set value. 557 Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 6. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 7. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-6-9 Data Comparison between Channels Description This function can be used to compare the temperature values between of two inputs (inputs 0 to 3) and monitor the relative temperature difference. A monitor value can be set to detect an excessive temperature difference for preventative maintenance in devices in which the temperature difference may cause or indicate a problem. The comparison result can be checked in the Monitor Window on the Data Comparison between Channels Tab Page. The comparison result and status can be read in the Monitor Window or via an explicit message. Note 1. The comparison operation can be performed only on the data set as Temperature Data 1. 2. When the peak value or bottom value is selected as the temperature data for Temperature Data 1, that processed value will be used in the comparison operation and not the actual temperature input value. 558 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions 3. The comparison result will be read to a precision of 0.01, regardless of the setting. The temperature difference with device B is much higher than the other devices. Is it an error? Device A 540°C Device B Device C 543°C 580°C? Compare Compare Device D 538°C Compare Detect temperature differences with each input. Temperature Input Terminal Setting Using CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the Data Comparison Between Channels Tab. 4. Double-click the Calculation Data1 or Calculation Data2 cell to open the Edit Calculation Data Window. 5. Select the two temperature inputs to be compared in the Calculation Data1 and Calculation Data2 Fields. Set a monitor value in the Monitor Value Field. Always set the threshold value to two decimal places. For example, when setting 10°C, input 1000 for 10.00°C. 559 Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 6. Click the OK Button. The Edit Calculation Data Window will close. 7. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 8. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-6-10 Input Error Detection Disable Function Description If there are inputs that are not being used, input error detection (including offwire detection) can be disabled. If this function is used, the Temperature Input Warning Flag and Off-wire Detection Flags will be OFF regardless of the connection status of the input sensor or temperature range. When this function is enabled, the temperature data is set to 7FFF hex (7FFF FFFFF when 1/100 Display Mode is being used). 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the tab for the input where the input error detection disable function is to be set, and select the Disable Input Error’s Detection Check Box in the Function Choice Area. 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. Note 560 Use this function only if there are unused inputs. If this function is used while a sensor is connected, it will not detect input errors (including disconnections). Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 11-6-11 Off-wire Detection Description If the input sensor is disconnected, the Disconnected Line Detection Flag for each channel is turned ON. The Disconnected Line Detection Flag is included in "Temperature Data Status Flag". When an off-wire condition is detected, the value of AD conversion data is set to 7FFF hex (7FFF FFFF when 1/100 Display Mode is being used). When the input returns to a value within the range that can be converted, the Off-wire Detection function will automatically be turned OFF, and normal data conversion will resume. 11-6-12 Last Maintenance Date Description The last maintenance date can be set within the Unit for the Unit and for each of the connected devices. This enables the user to easily determine the next maintenance date. The date can be set using the CX-Integrator. Setting Using CX-Integrator ■ Setting the last maintenance date in the Unit 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the General Tab, and select a date in the Last Maintenance Date Field. (To enter the current date, select Today from the bottom of the pulldown menu.) 4. Click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. ■ Setting the Last Maintenance Date for a Connected Device 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 561 Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the tab for the input to which the device to be set is connected, and select a date in the Last Maintenance Date Field. (To enter the current date, select Today from the bottom of the pull-down menu.) 4. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 5. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 11-6-13 Cumulated Counter Description The cumulated counter integrates the temperature input value over time to determine the amount of heat endured by a sensor or device. The cumulated value can be calculated in hours (°C × hours or °F × hours) or minutes (°C × minutes or °F × minutes). For example, when the units are set to hours, a cumulated value of 100 hours indicates a temperature value equivalent to 100°C continuing for one hour. The value stored in the four-byte area (two words) is the integral value for 300 time divisions. The data is displayed according to the set conditions. (See notes 1 and 2.) Monitor values can also be set in the Unit. When the cumulated count value exceeds the set monitor value, the Cumulated Counter Exceeded Flag in the area for Generic Status Flags turns ON. Note 1. When °F units are selected, the integration is performed on the °F values. 2. Even if the 1/100 display mode is selected, the integration is performed on the original (×100) temperature values. 3. The meaning of the integral value depends on the decimal point position for the temperature input value. 562 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions Temperature input value Integral value (°C × hours or °C × minutes) Time Time division (See note.) Note The following table shows the time divisions and number of measurements. Units Hours Minutes Time division 12 seconds 200 ms Number of measurements 300 300 Setting Using CX-Integrator 1,2,3... 1. Turn ON the power supply to the Temperature Input Unit. 2. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameter - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 3. Click the tab for the input where the cumulated counter is to be set, and select the Cumulated Count Check Box in the Function Choice Area. 4. To set the counter unit, click the Cumulated Count Tab and select Hour or Minute in the Cumulated Timer Field. 563 Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 5. To set the monitor value, click the Cumulated Count Tab, and input the desired value in the Threshold Cumulated Counter Field. Note When the Threshold Cumulated Counter is set to 0, the cumulated value will not be monitored. 6. Return to the General Tab Page, click the Transfer [PC to Unit] Button to download the data, and then click the Reset Button to reset the Unit. 7. Click the OK Button and exit the window. 564 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions 11-6-14 User Adjustment Description This function can be used to compensate for offsets in the input value caused by factors such as the characteristics and connection methods of the input sensor. Conversion data After adjustment 0% 100% Temperature input value Before adjustment Note 1. Temperature Input Units are properly adjusted at the factory before shipment, so it is normally unnecessary to make adjustments. Use the User Adjustment function only when absolutely necessary. OMRON is not responsible for the results of user adjustments. If a mistake is made in the adjustments, the adjustment data can be cleared to return to the factory default settings. 2. The Temperature Input Unit continues the temperature conversion operations even after user adjustments have been made. It is possible for temperature data values to change suddenly from previous values after the user adjustments are made, so always consider the effects on the operating environment before applying user adjustments. 565 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions Adjustment Procedure for the CRT1-TS04T Adjustment Procedure Use the following procedure to adjust the Temperature Input Units. Follow the flowchart closely for proper adjustment. Prepare the device that requires adjustment. Connect the device that requires adjustment. When performing upper/lower limit adjustment, open end of the cold junction compensator to disable it. First adjustment? No Yes Turn ON the power to the associated system devices. Wait at least 30 minutes for the CRT1TS04T’s internal temperature to stabilize. This stabilization time is the time required when the power is turned ON for the first time. This step can be skipped when adjusting the second and following inputs. Refer to the Operating Manuals for the other devices in the system for details on their required stabilization times, if any. Set the input's lower limit adjustment value. Set the input's upper limit adjustment value. Prepare to adjust the bias compensation. Short the leads of the cold junction compensator and wait at least 60 minutes for the temperature to stabilize. A cold junction compensator and compensating conductor are required for the thermocouple being adjusted. Set the input's bias compensation. Yes Adjust other inputs? No Test indication accuracy after adjustment. End Note The only sensors that can be adjusted are ones that operate while the power supply is ON. When adjusting for sensors that are not presently in use, change the input type setting, toggle the power supply or reset the Unit from the CX-Integrator, and perform the adjustment procedure from the beginning of the flowchart. 566 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions Connecting the Devices Required for Adjustment The following paragraphs explain how to connect the devices that must be connected to the CRT1-TS04T for user adjustment. Wire the following devices properly when adjusting the CRT1-TS04T. ■ Reference Voltage/Current Generator and Precision Digital Multimeter Used to make adjustments at the upper limit and lower limit. Prepare devices that can generate accurate 0 mV, 20 mV, and 50 mV voltages. Use a precision digital multimeter that can measure the output voltage and indicate when the voltage/current generator is not producing an accurate voltage output. ■ Cold Junction Compensator (such as a ZERO-CON 0°C Bath) and Compensating Conductors Used to adjust the bias compensation value. The cold junction compensator (the ZERO-CON 0°C bath is used in following examples) is a device that maintains an accurate 0°C (32°F) temperature for thermocouple sensors. Use a cold junction compensator compatible with the sensor being adjusted. Note When using an R, S, E, B, or W type thermocouple, a K type can be substituted. Set the ZERO-CON to 0°C (32°F). ■ CX-Integrator Actual adjustments are made from the CX-Integrator windows. Adjustment Device Connection Diagram Connect the reference voltage/current generator (STV), precision digital multimeter (DMM), and ZERO-CON to the input terminals. Connect to the corresponding input terminals when adjusting inputs 0 to 3. CompoNet CRT1-TS04T Compensating conductors DeviceNet Configurator CX-Integrator Reference voltage/current generator (STV) Remove when performing bias compensation. Precision digital multimeter (DMM) Use to confirm that the STV is generating an accurate voltage. Cold junction compensator (such as a ZERO-CON) Leave open (disabled) until performing bias compensation. Note The personal computer (CX-Integrator) is connected through CompoNet in the above diagram. If a CS1W-CRM21 or CJ1W-CRM21 Master Unit is being used, the Temperature Input Unit can be adjusted by connecting the CX-Integrator through the Master Unit using a peripheral bus connection. 567 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions Input Terminal Connections Wiring for Adjusting the Upper and Lower Limits DMM Ferrule for two wires NC NC 0 + 0 − NC NC 1 + NC NC 1 − 2 + 2 − NC NC 3 + 3 − Cold junction compensator STV Lead wires for adjusting bias NC NC 0 + 0 − NC NC 1 + NC 1 − NC 2 + 2 − NC NC 3 + 3 − Cold junction compensator Compensating conductors ZERO-CON (0°C bath) 0°C/32°F INPUT Checking the Wiring and Making Adjustments 1,2,3... Short-circuit OUTPUT Adjusting the Upper and Lower Limit Values 1. Set the wiring for adjusting the upper and lower limits. If connecting the precision digital multimeter (DMM), use a ferrule for two wires. 2. Check the sensor and input type being used. Note When using an R, S, B, E, or W sensor, use a compensating conductor for a K thermocouple. In addition, when using an R, S, or B sensor, set the input type to K (0.0 to 500.0°C). When using an E or W sensor, set the input type to K (−200 to 1,300°C). 3. Connect the CX-Integrator to the CompoNet network and go online. 4. Upload settings to the CX-Integrator. 5. Turn ON the power supplies of all Units, including the Temperature Input Unit to be adjusted. Wait approximately 30 minutes for the Temperature Input Unit's internal temperature to stabilize. 6. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 7. Click the tab for the input that will be adjusted and click the Adjustment Button. 568 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions 8. Adjust the lower limit value. Input 0 mV from the reference voltage/current generator (STV) to the Temperature Input Unit's input terminals. Wait at least 1 minute for the input to stabilize. 9. Click the Fix lower adjusting Value Button in the Adjustment Window to write the adjustment value. 10. Adjust the upper limit value. Input the upper limit voltage from the reference voltage/current generator to the input terminals of the input to be adjusted. Refer to the following table for the appropriate voltage. Wait at least 1 minute for the input to stabilize. Type K (−200 to 1300°C) K (0.0 to 500.0°C) J (−100 to 850°C) J (0.0 to 400.0°C) T L (−100 to 850°C) L (0.0 to 400.0°C) U N PL2 Input voltage 50 mV 20 mV 50 mV 20 mV 20 mV 50 mV 20 mV 20 mV 50 mV 50 mV 11. Click the Fix upper adjusting Value Button and write the adjustment value. 569 Temperature Input Unit Functions Section 11-6 Checking That the Adjustment Is Effective 1,2,3... 1. Right-click the Unit icon to be adjusted and select Monitor. The Monitor Window will be displayed. 2. Click the tab for the temperature input that was adjusted. If the User Adjustment Check Box is selected, the Unit is operating with user-set adjustment values. Note (1) When checking whether the user adjustment values have been set correctly, refresh the data by clicking the Update Button in the Monitor Window's General Tab Page or uploading the settings again. For details on the Monitor Window, refer to 7-4 Monitoring Temperature Data. (2) If the correct reference voltage was not input, the adjustment values may not be accepted. Adjusting the Bias Compensation Value 1,2,3... 1. Disconnect the wiring for adjusting the upper and lower limits and change to wiring for bias compensation. 2. After completing the wiring, wait at least 20 minutes with the temperature data in a stable state, and click the Fix Bias Value Button in the Bias Adjustment Window. The bias compensation value will be written in the Unit. Resetting Adjustments If it is necessary to reset the upper limit adjustment value, lower limit adjustment value, and bias compensation value to the factory defaults, click the Default Setting Button. The settings will be returned to the factory settings. The upper/lower limit adjustment values and bias compensation value are all initialized at the same time. 570 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions Note 1. The bias compensation value may not be accepted if there is a large temperature difference between the Terminal Block and ZERO-CON (0°C bath). If this problem occurs, correct the adjustment system by using a ZERO-CON compatible with the sensor being adjusted or other means. 2. Always test the indication accuracy after making user adjustments to verify that the adjustments are correct. Test the indication accuracy at three points: the lower limit value, an intermediate value, and the upper limit value. • Connect the external devices as shown in the following diagram. • After verifying that the ZERO-CON is set to 0°C, set the STV’s output voltage to produce a voltage equivalent to the test voltage. Note Always use the compensating conductors (the same kind that will be used with the sensor being adjusted) to connect the ZERO-CON to the CRT2-TS04T’s input terminals. ZERO-CON (0°C bath) Compensating conductors CRT1-TS04T Input (+) STV OUTPUT INPUT Input (–) 571 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions Stabilization Times required in Each Step The following diagram shows the stabilization times (waiting times) required when adjusting all 4 inputs. Step Timing chart Input Unit’s power supply ON Wiring for input 0 adjustment Input 0 upper/lower limit adjustment Wait at least 30 minutes. (Check whether additional time is required for devices such as the STV, DMM, and ZERO-CON.) Stabilization time Temperature Input Terminal’s stabilization time Terminal Block temperature stabilization time 1 after wiring 10 minutes Input 0 bias compensation Change wiring for input 1 adjustment Input 1 upper/lower limit adjustment Input 1 bias compensation Change wiring for input 2 adjustment Input 2 upper/lower limit adjustment Input 2 bias compensation Change wiring for input 3 adjustment Input 3 upper/lower limit adjustment 40 minutes Terminal Block temperature stabilization time 2 after wiring is changed 40 minutes Terminal Block temperature stabilization time 3 after wiring is changed 40 minutes Terminal Block temperature stabilization time 4 after wiring is changed Input 3 bias compensation (End of adjustment) Note (1) The terminal block temperature stabilization time does not affect the upper/lower limit adjustment after changing the wiring for input 1, so the adjustment can be performed immediately if 30 minutes have passed since the Temperature Input Unit's power was turned ON. (2) To perform the adjustment procedure properly, always allow sufficient time for the temperature to stabilize. Also allow sufficient time for devices such as the STV, DMM, and ZERO-CON to stabilize. Refer to each device's operating manual for details. 572 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions Adjustment Procedure for the CRT1-TS04P Adjustment Procedure Use the following procedure to adjust the Temperature Input Unit. Follow the flowchart closely for proper adjustment. Prepare the device required for adjustment. Connect the adjustment devices. To make the upper/lower limit adjustment, connect a six-dial resistance box to the Temperature Input Unit that is being adjusted. Turn ON the power to the system devices. Wait at least 30 minutes for the internal temperature to stabilize. Set the input's lower limit adjustment value. Set the input's upper limit adjustment value. Yes Adjust other inputs? No Test indication accuracy after adjustment. End Note Connecting the Devices Required for Adjustment Only sensors that operate while the power supply is ON can be adjusted. When adjusting sensors that are not presently in use, change the input type setting, reset the power or CX-Integrator, and then perform the adjustment procedure from the beginning of the flowchart. The following paragraphs explain how to connect the devices that must be connected to the Temperature Input Unit for user adjustment. Wire the following devices properly when making adjustments. Six-dial Resistance Box and Precision Digital Multimeter These devices are used to make adjustments at the upper limit and lower limit. Prepare devices that can provide accurate resistance values. Use a precision digital multimeter that can measure the resistance values and indicate when the six-dial resistance box is not producing an accurate resistance. CX-Integrator Actual adjustments are made from the CX-Integrator. 573 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions Adjustment Device Connection Diagram Connect the six-dial resistance box to the input terminals. Connect them to the input terminals for the required input from input 0 to 3. CompoNet CX-Integrator CRT1-TS04P Six-dial resistance box Connect to the input terminals of the input being adjusted. Precision digital multimeter (DMM) Use to confirm that the six-dial resistance box is providing an accurate resistance. Note (1) When connecting the six-dial resistance box, use a cable with the same gauge as the one that will be used for operation. (2) The personal computer (CX-Integrator) is connected through CompoNet in the above diagram. If a CS1W-CRM21 or CJ1W-CRM21 Master Unit is being used, it can be connected through the Master Unit using a peripheral bus connection to adjust the Temperature Input Unit. Input Terminal Connections 0A NC 0B 0B 1A NC 1B 1B NC NC 2A NC 2B 2B 3A NC Six-dial resistance box Checking the Wiring and Making Adjustments 1,2,3... 3B 3B DMM Adjusting the Upper and Lower Limit Values 1. Set the resistance value on the six-dial resistance box equivalent to the test value and properly wire the box to the input of the Temperature Input Unit that is being adjusted. 2. If the correct resistance cannot be obtained, properly wire the digital multimeter to the six-dial resistance box and measure the resistance. 3. Connect the CX-Integrator to the CompoNet network and go online. 4. Upload settings to the CX-Integrator. 5. Turn ON the power supplies of all Units, including the Temperature Input Unit to be adjusted. Wait approximately 30 minutes for the Temperature Input Unit's internal temperature to stabilize. 6. Double-click the icon of the Temperature Input Unit to be set in the Network Configuration Window or right-click the icon and select Parameters - Edit. The Configuration Window will be displayed. 7. Click the tab for the input that will be adjusted and click the Adjustment Button. 574 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions 8. Adjust the lower limit value. Input 18 Ω from the six-dial resistance box to the Temperature Input Unit's input terminals. Wait at least 1 minute for the input to stabilize. 9. Click the Fix Lower Adjusting Value Button in the Adjustment Window to write the adjustment value. 10. Adjust the upper limit value. Input the resistance from the six-dial resistance box. Refer to the following table for the appropriate resistance to input. Wait at least 1 minute for the input to stabilize. Type PT100 (−200 to 850°C) PT100 (−200 to 200°C) Input resistance for upper limit adjustment 390 Ω 180 Ω 11. Click the Fix Upper Adjusting Value Button to write the adjustment value. 575 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions Checking That the Adjustment Is Effective 1,2,3... 1. Right-click the Unit icon to be adjusted and select Monitor. The Monitor Window will be displayed. 2. Click the tab for the temperature input that was adjusted. If the User Adjustment Check Box is selected, the Unit is operating with user-set adjustment values. Note When checking whether the user adjustment values have been set correctly, refresh the data by clicking the Update Button in the Monitor Window's General Tab Page or uploading the settings again. For details on the Monitor Window, refer to 7-4 Monitoring Temperature Data. Resetting Adjustments If it is necessary to reset the upper limit adjustment value, and lower limit adjustment value to the factory defaults, click the Default Setting Button. The settings will be returned to the factory settings. Note Always test the indication accuracy after making user adjustments to verify that the adjustments are correct. Test the indication accuracy at three points: the lower limit value, an intermediate value, and the upper limit value. • Connect the external devices as shown in the following diagram. • Wait at least 30 minutes after the Temperature Input Terminal’s power is turned ON and set the resistance value on the six-dial resistance box equivalent to the test value. 576 Section 11-6 Temperature Input Unit Functions Note If the power supply is not turned OFF after making an adjustment, it is not necessary to wait 30 minutes before continuing testing. CRT2-TS04P Six-dial resistance box Input A Input b Input B 577 Temperature Input Unit Functions 578 Section 11-6 SECTION 12 Troubleshooting and Maintenance This section provides troubleshooting information that can be used in the event a problem occurs in CompoNet Slave Unit operation. It also provides information on maintenance that should be performed to ensure optimum application of the CompoNet Slave Units. 12-1 Indicator Meanings and Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 580 12-2 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 12-2-1 Troubleshooting for Errors Shown by Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 581 12-2-2 Troubleshooting by Slave Unit Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 582 12-3 Device Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 12-3-1 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 12-3-2 Inspections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 588 12-3-3 Handling when Replacing Units. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 589 579 Section 12-1 Indicator Meanings and Troubleshooting 12-1 Indicator Meanings and Troubleshooting MS and NS indicators Meaning Remarks Lit green Remote I/O communications or message communications are in progress. Remote I/O communications are being executed. Either remote I/O communications, message communications, or both are being executed. Status is normal. MS Lit green Synchronizing speed. Waiting for connection with Master Unit. NS Not lit If only certain Slave Units show this status, check that the baud rate is the same and then restart the Slave Units. MS Lit green Waiting for a connection. Waiting for a connection with the Master Unit to be established. Watchdog timer error A watchdog timer error has occurred in the Slave Unit. Illegal switch setting A DIP switch or other switch setting is illegal. EEPROM data error MS Lit green NS NS Flashing green MS Lit red NS Not lit NS Flashing red NS Not lit MS Lit green NS Lit red MS Lit green NS NS NS 580 EEPROM checksum error Configuration error Communications timeout Flashing red Flashing red Lit red Configuration error Replace the Slave Unit. Alternatively, check the Expansion Unit connection. Check the switch settings then restart the Slave Units. Use the CX-Integrator to restore the default data. Check that the node address is set within the • The same node allowable range and that it is used only once. address has been used more than once. Check the Repeater Unit configuration and • Repeater Unit configu- then restart the Slave Units. If the node address and Repeater Unit configuration are ration error correct, check the following items, and then restart the Slave Units. • Are the baud rates the same for the Master Unit and Slave Units? • Is the cable length (trunk line/branch lines) OK? • Is the cable disconnected or loose? • Is there a Terminating Resistor on each end of the trunk line? • Is there too much noise? --Check the following items then restart the Slave Units: Is the baud rate the same for the Master Unit and Slave Units? Is the cable length (trunk line/branch lines) OK? Is the cable disconnected or loose? Is there a Terminating Resistor on each end of the trunk line? Is there too much noise? A node address has been set out of range. Make sure that the node address is set within the specified range, and then restart the Slave Unit. Troubleshooting Section 12-2 12-2 Troubleshooting 12-2-1 Troubleshooting for Errors Shown by Indicators Indicators Are Lit or Flashing Red Problem MS indicator is lit red. Cause and possible corrections • The Slave Unit is malfunctioning. Replace the Slave Unit. • The Expansion Unit is disconnected. Check the Expansion Unit connection. MS indicator is flashing • The DIP switch or other setting is illegal. Check the switch settings then restart the Slave red. Unit. • There is an error in the Slave Unit's EEPROM memory data. Double-click the icon for the Slave Unit in the CX-Integrator. The Configuration Window will open. Click the Default Setting Button and then click the Reset Button. Replace the Slave Unit if the MS indicator keeps flashing red even after the data has been returned to the default settings. The NS indicator lights Check the following items, and then restart the Slave Unit with the error. red without flashing • The node address has been set out of range or duplicated, or a Repeater Unit configuration green. error has occurred. Check all node addresses and check the Repeater Unit configuration and change the settings if required. • Make sure that the I/O words allocated to the Slave Unit are not used by any other Slave Unit. If the same words are being used by more than one Slave Unit, change the node address. • Refer to the next item “The NS indicator lights green momentarily and then changes to red”. • Replace the Slave Unit if its NS indicator is always lit red. Check the following items then restart the Slave Unit with the error. The NS indicator lights green momentarily and • Check that a Terminating Resistor (121 Ω) is connected to each end of the network's trunk then changes to red. The line. If the correct Terminating Resistors are not set, connect a Terminating Resistor of NS indicator lights green 121 Ω. momentarily and then • Check that all Slave Units are set correctly. changes to flashing red. • Check that the communications cable is wired correctly. • Check that the power supply cable and power supply are wired correctly and that the settings are correct. • Check connector wiring for all nodes to make sure that the communications cable and power supply cables are not disconnected. • Check that the communications power is supplied correctly. • If there are devices in the vicinity that generate noise, take necessary measures against the noise to protect the Master Unit and Slave Units and the communications cable. • If using an OMRON Master Unit, refer to the manual for that Master Unit if an error has occurred in the Master Unit. If using a Master from another manufacturer, refer to the user's manual for that product if an error has occurred in the Master. • Replace the Slave Unit if its NS indicator is always lit red. 581 Section 12-2 Troubleshooting Cannot Participate in Network Problem NS indicator remains not lit and status does not change. NS indicator remains lit green and status does not change. Cause and possible corrections • Check that all Slave Unit connectors are connected correctly. • Check that the Master Unit is operating correctly. If using an OMRON Master Unit, check the Master Unit mode and the Slave Unit node addresses. • If using a Master from another manufacturer, refer to the user's manual for that Master. • Check that the communications cable is wired correctly. • Check that the power supply cable and power supply are wired correctly and that the settings are correct. • Check connector wiring to make sure that the communications cable and power supply cables are not disconnected. Check the following items and take corrective measures based on the Master Unit indicator display. • Check that the Master Unit is operating correctly. Refer to the manual for the Master Unit. • Check that the Slave Unit is registered in the Master Unit registration table. • Re-register the registration table. • Check that the Slave Unit I/O area is not outside the area permitted by the Master Unit. Change the node address if the I/O area is outside the permitted area. 12-2-2 Troubleshooting by Slave Unit Type Model All Slave Units Problem The MS and NS indicators do not light green. The Network Power Voltage Drop Flag does not turn ON even if the network power supply voltage drops. Cause Refer to 4-1-3 Communications Indicators. The monitor value for the network power supply voltage is set too low. --Increase the network power voltage monitor value. Note The default setting is 14 V or less. The Network Power Voltage The monitor value for the netDrop Status is ON even though work power supply voltage is the network power supply volt- set too high. age is appropriate. Decrease the network power voltage monitor value. The attempted setting is outside the setting range (14 to 26.4 V). Cannot set the name of a con- The name (comment) exceeds nected device or Unit. 32 characters. The status for Unit MainteThe status flag will be OFF nance Date and Connected regardless if the monitor value Device Maintenance Date do is set to 0 (function not exenot turn ON. cuted). Set the voltage within the 14 to 26.4-V range. Cannot set the network power voltage monitor value. When the Unit power was turned ON again, the following values did not change to the ones immediately after the power was turned OFF. Word Slave Units: Unit Conduction Time and Maintenance Counter 582 Possible correction The Maintenance Counter value is stored in internal EEPROM memory every 12 minutes while the power is ON. Execute Save Maintenance Counter to save the value. If the power is turned OFF without executing saving the maintenance counter, the value saved previously (from up to 12 minutes earlier) will be read. Set a name within 32 characters. Set the monitor value to a value other than 0. Execute Save Maintenance Counter in the Maintenance Information Window of the CXIntegrator before turning OFF the power. Section 12-2 Troubleshooting Model Problem Cause All models other than The Maintenance Counter Analog I/O Slave returned to 0. Units • The Maintenance Counter will return to 0 if the Unit is reset. • The Maintenance Counter will always return to 0 when the setting is switched between the Total ON Time Monitor Function and the Contact Operation Monitor Function. Some functions do not change The functions that have been even after parameters have changed are enabled only after been edited or set. the power is cycled. The Maintenance Counter is The I/O power supply is OFF. not counting even though outputs are turned ON. The number of I/O points Slave Units to which I/O communications stopped Expansion Units can after mounting or removing an increase or decrease when Expansion Unit and turning ON Expansion Units are mounted be mounted the power. or removed. The number of I/O points may not match the I/O table registered in the Master Unit. Expansion Units cannot be The MS indicator lights red after mounting or removing an mounted or removed online. Expansion Unit online. Slave Units with The Operation Time Monitor • If the input filter is set, there is Operation Time Moni- does not show the expected a delay with the ON or OFF tor Function values. time. • The operation time ON or OFF edge selection may not be on the intended setting. • The selected operation time combination is not supported. If the operation time monitor does not show the expected values, the settings may be different from the intended settings. The accuracy is ±6 ms. The status flag for the Opera- The Operation Time Flag is tion Time Monitor value turns refreshed every measurement cycle, after the operation time ON and OFF. is compared with the monitor value. The Operation Time Flag turns ON for one cycle and turns OFF, if the operation time drops below the monitor value at refreshing. There is another flag that holds the contents of monitor value exceeded flags. Slave Units with out- Cannot hold outputs when The Unit is set to clear outputs puts communication errors occur. for communications errors. Slave Units with inputs Cannot clear outputs when communication errors occur. The Unit is set to hold outputs for communications errors. There is a delay with the ON and OFF timing for input values. An input filter may be set. Possible correction --- Cycle the power or reset the CX-Integrator. Check that the I/O power supply is turned ON. Change the Master Unit I/O table settings. Turn OFF the power before mounting or removing Expansion Units. • Use the Operation Time Monitor function considering the filter setting or set the filter constant to 0 ms. • Check the operation time combination set for Slave Units for which the operation time edge can be set. --- Change the setting to hold outputs for communications errors. Change the setting to clear outputs for communications errors. Set the input filter value to 0. Alternatively, change the input filter to an appropriate value. 583 Section 12-2 Troubleshooting Model Problem Slave Units with Power Short-circuit Detection Function Cause Possible correction The short-circuit detection status does not turn OFF after a power short-circuit has been detected, even though the error has been fixed. The Unconnected Line DetecSlave Units with tion Status Flag turned ON for Unconnected Line an unused input. Detection Function The Unconnected Line Detection Status Flag turned ON even though the sensor power supply was connected. The short-circuit detection status does not turn OFF after a unconnected line has been detected, even though the error has been fixed. Slave Units with Load The short-circuit detection status does not turn OFF after a Short-circuit Detecload short-circuit has been tion Function detected, even though the error has been fixed. Slaves with DisconThe Disconnected Line Detecnected Line Detection Status Flag turned ON for tion an unused output. The Disconnected Line Detection Status Flag turned ON even though the external load was connected. The status will not turn OFF until the power for the node where the error was detected is reset. Cycle the communications power after fixing the error. Unconnected line detection is enabled for an unused input. Disable unconnected line detection for that input. Current consumption is low. (Output current: 3 mA max.) Disable unconnected line detection for that input (so that the unconnected line detection function does not operate.) Cycle the communications power after fixing the error. The short-circuit detection status does not turn OFF after a load short-circuit has been detected, even though the error has been fixed. Communications are operating correctly, and the correct area is ON, but the output and the output indicator are not ON. The status will not turn OFF until the power for the node where the error was detected is reset. Output Slave Units with Continuous Short-circuit Protection Circuit 584 The status will not turn OFF until the power for the node where the error was detected is reset. The status will not turn OFF until the power for the node where the error was detected is reset. Cycle the communications power after fixing the error. Disconnected line detection is enabled for an unused output. Disable disconnected line detection for that output. Current consumption is low. (Output current: 3 mA max.) Disable disconnected line detection for that output (so that the disconnected line detection function does not operate.) Cycle the communications power after fixing the error. The output current exceeds the rated output current, continuous short-circuit protection operates, and the outputs are turned OFF. Once operation is performed, all outputs remain OFF until the power supply is reset. Remove the cause of the error and restart the communications power supply once operation has been recovered. Section 12-2 Troubleshooting Model Analog I/O Slave Units and Temperature Input Units Problem The status does not turn ON even if the monitor value is exceeded. Cause • The required Analog Smart Function is not enabled. The status will be OFF unconditionally if the monitor value is set to 0. The following conditions apply to Temperature Input Units only. • The input's decimal point position for a Temperature Input Unit was in the wrong place when the monitor value was set. • The changes will not be • The expected analog input enabled until the power is value is not received or the expected analog output is not cycled or the CX-Integrator is used to reset the Unit. output after changing the input type, display mode, or unit. • The Unit does not operate as expected after changing the allocated I/O data or a function enable bit. Possible correction Enable the required function. Set the monitor value setting to a value other than 0. (Check the decimal point position then set the monitor value again.) Check the decimal point position and enter the monitor value again. • Cycle the power or reset the CX-Integrator. 585 Section 12-2 Troubleshooting Model Analog I/O Slave Units and Temperature Input Units Problem Cause • The analog data values are • The I/O data function allocadifferent from expected or the tions are not correct. analog data error is too large. • A disconnection is detected • The scaling function is opereven though it is not disconating. nected. • The connected Sensor is different from the set input type. • The user adjustment error is too large. The following conditions apply to Temperature Input Units only. • The setting for the 1/100 Display Mode/Normal Display Mode is incorrect. • The sensor's decimal point position was read incorrectly. The following conditions apply to the CRT1-TS04T only. Possible correction • Check again that the analog data type to be set is correctly allocated for the I/O data. • If using the Scaling function, check again that the scaling value is correct. • Remove the Scaling function if it has been allocated by mistake. • Check the input type again. • Execute user adjustment again. The following conditions apply to Temperature Input Units only. • In Normal Display Mode, the display value is multiplied by x1 or x10, depending on the input type setting. • In 1/100 Display Mode, the display value is multiplied by x100, regardless of the input type setting. Check the settings and input type again. • Check the Unit's mounting direction. • The Unit is mounted vertically or face-down. • The Unit was replaced, but the terminal block was not changed. (The accuracy may be reduced if the components are not replaced as a set.) • SW8 is turned OFF (default). • Turn ON SW 8. Cannot set using external switches. The user adjustment and bias • Attempted to calibrate with compensation settings are not inputs outside the setting accepted for the CRT1-TS04T. range. The Top/Valley Detection Timing Flag will not go ON. The Top/Valley Count Over Flag will not go ON (Temperature Input Units only). The Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags go ON too frequently. The top/valley count is unexpectedly high for a Temperature Input Unit. 586 The hysteresis setting is too high. The hysteresis setting is 0. The hysteresis setting is too low. • Calibrate again with the correct input voltage (current). • Change the adjustment system if necessary. Adjust the hysteresis setting. Section 12-2 Troubleshooting Model Analog I/O Slave Units (Inputs) Problem The disconnection display does not clear. No disconnection display. Analog I/O Slave Units (Outputs) Temperature Input Units Cause Possible correction • The Sensor is disconnected. • Restore the Sensor connection. • Check the connected Sensor and input type again. --- • Disconnection is not displayed for ranges other than 1 to 5 V and 4 to 20 mA. The conversion cycle is too • The setting of the number of • Reduce the number of points if some inputs are unneceslong. AD conversion points is on sary, and execute conversion the maximum (4 points). again. • The processing time gets longer each time a function is • Delete any unused functions, and execute conversion added. again. The expected value is not held • The output value that is set • Check the output setting for when communications errors for communications errors is communications errors. occur. incorrect. The 1/100 Display Mode has The allocated word is the one Either change the default conbeen set, but the display reads word in the normal display nection path to the 1/100 dis0. area. play area or select a connection path in the Master Unit for the 1/100 display area. The temperature range The comparator function is not Enable the comparator. (The effective. power must be turned OFF counter is not counting even and then ON again.) though the temperature value is set as the count condition. The Top/Valley Count Over • The top/valley hold function is • Enable the top/valley hold Flag will not go ON. not enabled. function. (The power must be turned OFF and then ON again.) • The hysteresis setting is too • Adjust the hysteresis setting. high. • The hysteresis setting is 0. The comparator does not oper- • The temperature display set- Check the decimal point posiate as expected even though ting has been switched (°C to tion and °C/°F display for the the function and hysteresis °F or vice versa). input type and display mode. value have been set. If these settings have been changed during operation, check the comparator and hysteresis settings and correct if necessary. • The decimal point position was read incorrectly. 587 Section 12-3 Device Maintenance 12-3 Device Maintenance This section describes routine device maintenance, in particular cleaning methods, inspection methods, and how to replace Units. 12-3-1 Cleaning Perform the following cleaning regularly to ensure the network is kept in the best condition possible. • Wipe the network over with a soft, dry cloth when doing daily cleaning. • If dirt remains even after wiping with a soft, dry cloth, wipe over with a cloth that has been wet with a sufficiently diluted detergent (2%) and wrung dry. • Units will become stained if items such as rubber or vinyl products or adhesive tape are left on the Unit for a long period. Remove such items during regular cleaning. Note Never use benzine, thinners, or other volatile solvents, or chemical cloths. The Unit coating may change if these products are used. 12-3-2 Inspections Always perform periodic inspections to ensure the network is kept in the best possible condition. Periodic inspections should occur every 6 months to a year. Periodic inspections should occur more frequently, however, for Units that are used in environments subject to high temperatures, high humidity, or a lot of dust. Materials Required for Inspections The following materials are required to perform periodic inspections. Materials Used Regularly Phillips screwdrivers and flat-blade screwdrivers Screwdrivers for communications connectors Testers (or digital voltmeters) Industrial alcohol and pure cotton cloth Materials Sometimes Required Synchroscope Pen oscilloscope Thermometer and hygrometer Inspection Items Periodically inspect the following items to ensure that they do not deviate from the criteria. If the items deviate from the criteria, adjust the environment so the criteria are met or adjust the Unit itself. Inspection item Environment 588 Inspection details Are the ambient and in-panel temperatures appropriate? Is the ambient and inpanel humidity appropriate? Has dust collected? Criteria Refer to the specifications for each Slave Unit. Refer to the specifications for each Slave Unit. No dust Inspection method Thermometer Hygrometer Visual inspection Section 12-3 Device Maintenance Inspection item Installation Inspection details Has the Unit been secured? Are the communications cable connectors inserted properly? Are the external wiring screws loose? Are the connection cables damaged? Criteria Inspection method No looseness Phillips screwdriver No looseness Phillips screwdriver No looseness Phillips screwdriver No visible damage Visual inspection 12-3-3 Handling when Replacing Units Networks are constructed from a Master Unit and Slave Units. If a Unit is malfunctioning, the entire network will be affected. The malfunctioning Unit must be replaced quickly. To restore network functions as quickly as possible, it is recommended that spare Units are kept on hand ready to replace malfunctioning Units immediately. Precautions When Replacing Units Heed the following precautions when replacing nodes after a periodic inspection has revealed a problem. Check that the new Unit does not have errors after replacement. If returning malfunctioning devices for repair, attach a detailed description of the malfunction to the device and send the device to the OMRON representative listed at the end of this manual or to your OMRON representative. If contacts are defective, wipe them with a clean pure cotton cloth that has been soaked in industrial alcohol. Settings after Unit Replacement After replacing a Unit, make the switch and other settings the same as before the Unit was replaced. 589 Device Maintenance 590 Section 12-3 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages CompoNet explicit messages sent from the CompoNet Master Unit to a CompoNet Slave Unit can be used to read or write any parameter of the specified Slave Unit. The CompoNet Slave Units process the commands sent from the Master Unit and then return responses. Sending Explicit Messages by FINS Commands FINS commands are used to send CompoNet explicit messages from a CS/CJ-series CompoNet Master Unit. For details on FINS commands, refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP-series and SYSMAC One NSJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (Cat. No. W342). Message Flow FINS commands are sent by using the CX-Programmer's CMND instruction. When a FINS command is sent from the CPU Unit to the CompoNet Master Unit, the CompoNet Master Unit converts the FINS command to a CompoNet explicit message and sends it to a CompoNet Slave Unit. The response from the Slave Unit is then converted by the Master Unit from a CompoNet explicit message to a FINS response and sent back to the CPU Unit. CPU Unit Explicit message CMND instruction (See note.) FINS header FINS header Explicit message CompoNet Network Note: The command code for the FINS command is 2802. FINS header CompoNet Slave Unit CompoNet Master Unit FINS command Response FINS header Response FINS response FINS Format The FINS command code of 2802 hex is used to send CompoNet explicit messages. Command Format 28 532 bytes max. 02 Service Code Class ID Command code Destination node address Instance ID Service Data Response Format • When a Normal Response Is Returned for a CompoNet Explicit Message 28 02 Command code 00 00 End code 532 bytes max. Number of bytes received Service Code Service Data Destination node address • When an Error Response Is Returned for a CompoNet Explicit Message (CompoNet Explicit Message Communications Error) 591 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages 28 02 Command code 00 00 End code 00 Number of bytes received 94 Error code Service Code (always 0094 hex) Destination node address • When a CompoNet Explicit Message Transmission Failure or Timeout Occurs (FINS Communications Error) 28 02 Command code End code Description of Parameters Destination Node Address (Command) Specifies the Slave Unit destination node address for the explicit message. Word, input or mixed 10xx hex Word, output 20xx hex Bits, input or mixed 30xx hex Bits, output 50xx hex Repeater 70 xx hex The Slave Unit's node address (hex) is entered in xx. Service Code (Command, Response) In a command this parameter specifies the service code defined by the CompoNet Network. For details, refer to the following table. In a normal response, a value is returned with the leftmost bit turned ON for the service code specified by the command. In an error response, 0094 hex is returned to indicate an error. Service Codes Service Command Normal response Read 0E hex 8E hex Write 10 hex 90 hex Reset 05 hex 85 hex Save 16 hex 96 hex Class ID (Response) Specifies the class ID for the explicit message. Instance ID (Command) Specifies the instance ID for the explicit message. Service Data (Command, Response) In a command, the data defined for the service code is specified for this parameter. In a response, the reception data defined for the service code is returned. Number of Bytes Received (Response) The number of bytes received in the data from the destination node address onwards is returned. Destination Node Address (Response) The node address of the remote Slave Unit (the source of the response) is returned. Error Code (Response) The error code defined by the CompoNet Network is returned. For details, refer to the list of error codes in the following table. List of Error Codes Response code 08FF 09FF 592 Error name Service not supported Invalid attribute value Cause The Service code is incorrect. The specified Attribute value is not supported. The data written was outside valid range. CompoNet Explicit Messages Response code 16FF 15FF 13FF 0CFF 20FF 0EFF Error name Object does not exist Too much data Not enough data Object state conflict Invalid parameter Attribute not settable 10FF 14FF 19FF Device state conflict Attribute not supported Store operation failure Appendix A Cause The specified Instance ID is not supported. The data is larger than the specified size. The data is smaller than the specified size. The specified command cannot be executed due to an internal error. The specified operation command data is not supported. An Attribute ID supported only for reading has been executed for a write service code. The specified command cannot be executed due to an internal error. The specified Attribute is not supported. The data cannot be stored in memory. End Code The FINS communications end code is returned. For details, refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ/CP-series and SYSMAC One NSJ-series Communications Commands Reference Manual (Cat. No. W342). 593 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Explicit Messages Common to Slave Units Refer to 1-1-3 CompoNet Slave Unit Functions for information on which functions are supported by the various Slave Units. Setting and Monitoring the Unit Conduction Time Explicit message Read/ write Function Service code Command Class ID Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 95 hex 01 hex 73 hex --- Unit Main- Read tenance Set Value Reads the set value 0E hex for Unit Conduction Time (unit: 0.1 hr) Write Writes the set value 10 hex for Unit Conduction Time (unit: 0.1 hr) 95 hex 01 hex 73 hex Unit Maintenance Present Value Read Reads the present value for Unit Conduction Time (unit: 0.1 hr) 0E hex 95 hex 01 hex 71 hex Unit Maintenance Flag Read Reads the monitor status of Unit Conduction Time 0E hex 95 hex 01 hex 72 hex Response Service data 4 bytes 00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex (0 to 4294967295) --- 4 bytes 0000000 0 to FFFFFFF F hex (0 to 4294967 295) --4 bytes 00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex (0 to 4294967295) --1 byte 00 hex: Within range 01 hex: Out of range (over the monitor value) Reading Warning Status and Alarm Status Explicit message Warning Status Read Alarm Status Read Read/ write Read Read Function 0E hex 95 hex Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 01 hex C5 hex --- 0E hex 95 hex 01 hex Service code Reads the Slave Unit’s warning status area. Reads the Slave Unit’s alarm status area. Class ID C6 hex --- Response Service data 2 bytes 2 bytes Note For information on individual bits in the status areas of a Slave Unit, refer to the Status Areas section for the Slave Unit. 594 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Explicit Messages for Digital I/O Slave Units Setting and Monitoring Inputs Explicit message Read/ write Function Service code Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 08 hex 01 to 20 65 hex --hex Class ID Response Service data Read Terminal Maintenance Information Monitor Mode 0E hex Reads the monitor mode for maintenance information of the input (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. Write Writes the monitor 10 hex mode for maintenance information of the input (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. 08 hex 01 to 20 hex 65 hex Read Reads the set value for 0E hex the total ON time (unit: s) or number of contact operations (unit: operations) of the input (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. Writes the set value for 10 hex the total ON time (unit: s) or number of contact operations (unit: operations) of the input (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. 0E hex Reads the total ON time (unit: s) or number of contact operations (unit: operations) for the input (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. 05 hex Resets the total ON time (unit: s) or number of contact operations (unit: operations) for the input (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. 08 hex 01 to 20 hex 68 hex 08 hex 01 to 20 hex 68 hex --4 bytes 00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex (0 to 4294967295) 08 hex 01 to 20 hex 66 hex --- 4 bytes 00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex (0 to 4294967295) 08 hex 01 to 20 hex 66 hex --- --- 08 hex 01 to 20 hex 67 hex --- 1 byte 00 hex: Within range 01 hex: Out of range (over the monitor value) Set Value for Input Total ON Time or Contact Operation Counter Write Input Total Read ON Time or Contact Operation Counter Read Input Total Reset ON Time or Contact Operation Counter Reset Monitor Read Status for Input Total ON Time or Contact Operation Counter Read Reads the monitor sta- 0E hex tus for total ON time or number of contact operations for the input (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. 1 byte 00 hex: Total ON time mode 01 hex: Contact operation counter mode --- 1 byte 00 hex: Total ON time mode 01 hex: Contact operation counter mode --- 4 bytes 00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex (0 to 4294967295) 595 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Setting and Monitoring the Outputs Explicit message Read /write Function Service code Class ID Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 01 to 20 65 hex --hex Response Service data Terminal Read Reads the monitor mode 0E hex Maintefor maintenance infornance Information of the output (No. mation 1 to 32) specified by the Monitor Instance ID. Mode 09 hex Write Writes the monitor mode 10 hex for maintenance information of the output (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. 09 hex 01 to 20 hex 65 hex Read Reads the set value for 0E hex the total ON time (unit: s) or number of contact operations (unit: operation) for the output (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. Write Writes the set value for 10 hex the total ON time (unit: s) or number of contact operations (unit: operation) for the output (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. Read Reads the total ON time 0E hex (unit: s) or number of contact operations (unit: operation) for the output (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. 09 hex 01 to 20 hex 68 hex 09 hex 01 to 20 hex 68 hex 4 bytes --00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex (0 to 4294967295) 09 hex 01 to 20 hex 66 hex --- 4 bytes 00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex (0 to 4294967295) Set Value for Output Total ON Time or Contact Operation Counter Output Total ON Time or Contact Operation Counter Read 1 byte 00 hex: Total ON time mode 01 hex: Contact operation counter mode --- 1 byte 00 hex: Total ON time mode 01 hex: Contact operation counter mode --4 bytes 00000000 to FFFFFFFF hex (0 to 4294967295) Reset for Output Total ON Time or Contact Operation Counter Reset Reset Resets the total ON time 05 hex (unit: s) or number of contact operations (unit: operation) for the output (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID to 0. 09 hex 01 to 20 hex 66 hex --- --- Monitor Status for Output Total ON Time or Contact Operation Counter Read Read Reads the monitor sta0E hex tus for total ON time or contact operation counter for the output (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. 09 hex 01 to 20 hex 67 hex --- 1 byte 00 hex: Within range 01 hex: Out of range (over the monitor value) 596 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Setting and Monitoring Operation Time Explicit message Read /write Function Service code Class ID Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID Response Service data Operation Time Monitor Status Read Read Reads the monitor sta0E hex tus for the time (unit: ms) from the start point trigger until the end point trigger specified by the Instance ID (No. 1 to 8). 97 hex 01 to 08 hex 66 hex --- Operation Time Monitor Setting Read Reads the setting for the 0E hex time (unit: ms) from the start point trigger until the end point trigger specified by the Instance ID (No. 1 to 8). 97 hex 01 to 08 hex 67 hex --- Write Writes the setting for the 10 hex time (unit: ms) from the start point trigger until the end point trigger specified by the Instance ID (No. 1 to 8). Read Reads the peak value for 0E hex Operation the time (unit: ms) from Time Monithe start point trigger tor Peak Value Read until the end point trigger specified by the Instance ID (No. 1 to 8). 05 hex Reset Resets to the present Operation value the peak value for Time Monithe time (unit: ms) from tor Peak the start point trigger Value until the end point trigger Reset specified by the Instance ID (No. 1 to 8) Operation Read Reads the monitor his0E hex Time Monitory for the time (unit: tor History ms) from the start point trigger until the end point trigger specified by the Instance ID (No. 1 to 8). 97 hex 01 to 08 hex 67 hex --- 2 bytes (See note.) 97 hex 01 to 08 hex 68 hex --- 2 bytes 0000 to FFFF hex (0 to 65535) 97 hex 01 to 08 hex 68 hex --- --- 97 hex 01 to 08 hex 6D hex --- Reset Resets the monitor his- 05 hex tory for the time (unit: ms) from the start point trigger until the end point trigger specified by the Instance ID (No. 1 to 8) to 0. 97 hex 01 to 08 hex 6D hex --- 1 byte 00 hex: Value not exceeded 01 hex: Value exceeded --- Operation Time Monitor History Reset 1 byte 00 hex: Threshold not passed 01 hex: Threshold passed 2 bytes (See note.) Note Refer to the note on page 613. 597 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Setting Hold/Clear for Communications Errors for Outputs Explicit message Read /write Function Service code 0E hex Setting for Read Reads whether hold or clear is set as the output Output Stastatus after a communitus (Hold or cations error for an outClear) after put (No. 1 to 32) Communispecified by the Instance cations ID. The setting can be Error read for a specified number of points. 10 hex Setting for Write Sets whether hold or clear is set as the output Output Stastatus after a communitus (Hold or cations error for an outClear) after put (No. 1 to 32) Communispecified by the Instance cations ID. The setting can be Error set for a specified number of points. Class ID 09 hex 09 hex Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 01 to 20 05 hex --hex 01 to 20 hex 05 hex 1 byte 00 hex: Clear 01 hex: Hold Response Service data 1 byte 00 hex: Clear 01 hex: Hold --- Note The default setting is for all outputs to be cleared (0). Monitoring Power Short-circuit Detection (Slave Units with Input Shortcircuit and Disconnected Line Detection) Explicit message Read /write Function Service code Class ID Read Reads the sensor power 0E hex supply short-circuit status for the input (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. 08 hex Power Read Reads the sensor power 0E hex Short-cirsupply short-circuit stacuit Status tus for all Slave Units. for all Slave Units Read at Once 1D hex Power Short-circuit Detection Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 01 to 20 69 hex --hex 01 hex 67 hex --- Note The response data size is 1 byte for 8 inputs, 2 bytes for 16 inputs, or 4 bytes for 32 inputs. 598 Response Service data 1 byte 00 hex: Normal 01 hex: Short-circuit 1 byte, 2 bytes, or 4 bytes 00 hex: Normal Other than 00 hex: Sensor power supply short-circuit for applicable terminal (Inputs 0 to 31: Bits 0 to 31) (See note.) Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Monitoring and Setting Unconnected Line Detection (Slave Units with Input Short-circuit and Disconnected Line Detection) Explicit message Read /write Function Service code Class ID Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 01 to 20 6B hex --hex UnconRead Reads the unconnected 0E hex nected Line line detection setting for Detection the input (No. 1 to 32) Setting specified by the Instance ID 08 hex Write Writes the unconnected 10 hex line detection setting for the input (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. 08 hex 01 to 20 hex 6B hex 0E hex UnconRead Reads the connection/ nected Line unconnected status for Status the input (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. 08 hex 01 to 20 hex 6A hex 1 byte 00 hex: Disabled (Not used.) 01 hex: Enabled (Used.) --- UnconRead Reads the connection/ nected Line unconnected status for Status for all Slave Units. all Slave Units Read at Once 1D hex 01 hex 68 hex --- 0E hex Response Service data 1 byte 00 hex: Disabled (Not used.) 01 hex: Enabled (Used.) --- 1 byte 00 hex: Connected (or detection not set). 01 hex: Unconnected. 1 byte, 2 bytes, or 4 bytes 00 hex: Normal Other than 00 hex: Applicable input connector is not connected. (Inputs 0 to 31: Bits 0 to 31) (See note.) Note The response data size is 1 byte for 8 inputs, 2 bytes for 16 inputs, or 4 bytes for 32 inputs. 599 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Monitoring Load Short-circuit Detection (Slave Units with Output Shortcircuit and Disconnected Line Detection) Explicit message Read /write Function Service code Class ID Load Short- Read Reads the load short-cir- 0E hex circuit cuit status for the output Detection (No. 1 to 32) specified by Status the Instance ID. 09 hex Load Short- Read Reads the load short-cir- 0E hex cuit status for all Slave circuit StaUnits. tus for all Slave Units Read at Once 1E hex Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 01 to 20 69 hex --hex 01 hex 64 hex --- Response Service data 1 byte 00 hex: Normal 01 hex: Short-circuit 1 byte, 2 bytes, or 4 bytes 00 hex: Normal Other than 00 hex: Load shortcircuit at applicable terminal. (Outputs 0 to 31: Bits 0 to 31) (See note.) Note The response data size is 1 byte for 8 outputs, 2 bytes for 16 outputs, or 4 bytes for 32 outputs. 600 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Monitoring and Setting Load Unconnected Line Detection (Slave Units with Output Short-circuit and Disconnected Line Detection) Explicit message Read /write Function Service code Class ID Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 01 to 20 6B hex --hex Load Read Reads the load uncon0E hex Unconnected line detection nected Line setting for the output Detection (No. 1 to 32) specified by Setting the Instance ID. 09 hex Write Writes the load uncon10 hex nected line detection setting for the output (No. 1 to 32) specified by the Instance ID. 09 hex 01 to 20 hex 6B hex 0E hex Read Reads the load unconLoad nected line detection Unconsetting for the output nected Line (No. 1 to 32) specified by Detection the Instance ID. Status 09 hex 01 to 20 hex 6A hex 1 byte 00 hex: Disabled (Not used.) 01 hex: Enabled (Used.) --- 0E hex 1E hex 01 hex 68 hex --- Read Reads the load line disLoad Line connection status for all Disconnecoutput Slave Units. tion Status for all Slave Units Read at Once Response Service data 1 byte 00 hex: Disabled (Not used.) 01 hex: Enabled (Used.) --- 1 byte 00 hex: Normal 01 hex: Line disconnection 1 byte, 2 bytes, or 4 bytes 00 hex: Normal Other than 00 hex: Load line disconnection at applicable terminal. (Inputs 0 to 31: Bits 0 to 31) (See note.) Note The response data size is 1 byte for 8 outputs, 2 bytes for 16 outputs, or 4 bytes for 32 outputs. Writing Maintenance Information Explicit message Maintenance Counter Save Read/ write Function Save Stores the maintenance counter in the Slave Unit's memory. Command Service code 16 hex Class ID Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 95 hex 01 hex 75 hex --- Response Service data --- 601 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Reading Operation Time Monitor and Total ON Time/Contact Operation Counter for All Slave Units at Once Explicit message Read /write Function Service code Monitor Read Reads the monitor sta- 0E hex Status for tus for total operation Operation time monitor for all Time MoniSlave Units. tor for All Slave Units Read at Once Read Reads the monitor sta- 0E hex Monitor tus for total ON time or Status for contact operation Total ON counter for all Slave Time or Units. Contact Operation Counter for All Slave Units Read at Once Note Command Class ID Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 95 hex 01 hex 7E hex --- 95 hex 01 hex 7F hex --- Response Service data +00: Response size +01: 02 hex (fixed) +02: Response area 1 +03: Response area 2 (See note 1.) +00: Response size +01: 08 hex (fixed) +02: Response area 1 +03: Response area 2 +04: Response area 3 +05: Response area 4 +06: Response area 5 +07: Response area 6 +08: Response area 7 +09: Response area 8 (See note 2.) (1) The Attribute (7E hex) is bit 6 of the Generic Status and so the size is fixed at 4 bytes and has the following format. +00 +01 +02 +03 Size, 0002 Fixed IN+OUT combined, terminals 0 to 7 Not used. The bit turns ON when the set value is exceeded. •Depending on the Unit size, not all bits are used. • A value of 14FF is returned for all Units except Mixed I/O Units. (2) The Attribute (7F hex) is bit 7 of the Generic Status and so the size is fixed at 6 bytes and has the following format. Offset (byte) +00 +01 +02 +03 +04 +05 Up to 32 inputs Up to 16 inputs 4 No. of data items (UNIT) Up to 32 inputs Inputs and outputs IN Area, terminals 0 to 7 IN Area, terminals 8 to 15 IN Area, terminals 16 to 23 IN Area, terminals 24 to 31 OUT Area, terminals 0 to 7 OUT Area, terminals 8 to 15 OUT Area, terminals 16 to 23 OUT Area, terminals 24 to 31 IN Area, terminals 0 to 7 IN Area, terminals 8 to 15 OUT Area, terminals 0 to 7 OUT Area, terminals 8 to 15 Not used. OUT Area, terminals 0 to 7 OUT Area, terminals 8 to 15 •Depending on the Unit size, not all bits are used. 602 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Explicit Messages for Analog I/O Slave Units Reading DIP Switch Settings Explicit message DIP Switch Status Read Read /write Function Read Reads the status of the Input/Output Terminals DIP switch. Service code Class ID 0E hex 94 hex Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 01 hex 68 hex --- Response Service data 1 byte Setting and Reading for Analog Input Units Explicit message Analog Data 1 Value Analog Data 2 Value Setting the Number of AD Conversion Points Read /write Function Command Response Service code Class ID Read Reads the value for Analog Data 1. 0E hex 0A hex Read Reads the value for Analog Data 2. 0E hex 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 65 hex --- 2 bytes Write/ Sets the number of AD Read conversion points. Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 0A hex 00 hex 64 hex 2 bytes 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 07 hex 1 byte 1 byte 0E hex 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 66 hex --- 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 68 hex 1 byte 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 69 hex 1 byte 1 byte Input Write/ Sets the input range. Range Set- Read −10 to 10 V: 0 ting 0 to 5 V: 1 0 to 10 V: 2 4 to 20 mA: 3 1 to 5 V: 7 0 to 20 mA: 8 Analog Sta- Read Reads the status of the tus Flag Analog Status Flags. Read LL = 0; L = 1; Pass signal = 2; H = 3; HH = 4; Valley shot = 5; Top shot = 6; Disconnected line detection = 7 Analog Write/ Selects the data alloData 1 Allo- Read cated to Analog Data 1. cation Analog input value: 0 Selection Peak value: 1, Bottom value: 2, Top value: 3, Valley value: 4, Rate of change value: 5 Write/ Selects the data alloAnalog Data 2 Allo- Read cated to Analog Data 2. cation Analog input value: 0 Selection Peak value: 1, Bottom value: 2, Top value: 3, Valley value: 4, Rate of change value: 5 Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 01 to 04 03 hex --hex Service data 2 bytes 603 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Explicit message Read /write Function Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID Response Service data Service code Class ID Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 6E hex 1 byte 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex Scaling Write/ Sets an analog value as Write: Point 1 Set- Read the 0% value for user 10 hex ting scaling. Read: 0E hex Scaling Write/ Sets an analog value as Write: Point 2 Set- Read the 100% value for user 10 hex ting scaling. Read: 0E hex Offset Write/ Compensates for scal- Write: Compensa- Read ing errors with an offset 10 hex value. tion after Read: Scaling 0E hex Read: Maximum Read/ Reads the maximum 0E hex Value Read Reset value after power is turned ON. Reset: 35 hex Read: Minimum Read/ Reads the minimum 0E hex Value Read Reset value after power is turned ON. Reset: 35 hex Peak Value Read The peak value is held 0E hex Read while the hold function is enabled. The held value is read by this message. Bottom Read The bottom value is held 0E hex Value Read while the hold function is enabled. The held value is read by this message. Top Value Read The top value is held 0E hex Read while the hold function is enabled. The held value is read by this message. 0E hex Top Detec- Read Reads the timing for detecting top values. tion Timing Flag Read Valley Read The valley value is held 0E hex Value Read and read. 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 6F hex 1 byte 1 byte 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 70 hex 2 bytes (−28000 to 28000) 2 bytes (−28000 to 28000) 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 71 hex 2 bytes (−28000 to 28000) 2 bytes (−28000 to 28000) 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 72 hex 2 bytes (−28000 to 28000) 2 bytes (−28000 to 28000) 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 73 hex --- 2 bytes 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 74 hex --- 2 bytes 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 75 hex --- 2 bytes 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 76 hex --- 2 bytes 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 77 hex --- 2 bytes 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 78 hex --- 1 byte 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 79 hex --- 2 bytes Function Setting Scaling Type Setting 604 Write/ Sets each function. Read Bit status: ON: Enabled, OFF: Disabled Moving average: 0; Scaling: 1; Peak/bottom hold: 2; Top/valley hold: 3; Comparator: 4; Cumulative counter: 5; Rate of change: 6 Write/ Default scaling: 0: Read User scaling: 1 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Explicit message Read /write Function Write/ Read H Value Setting Write/ Read L Value Setting Write/ Read Scaled Analog Input Value Read Rate of Change Value Read Sampling Cycle Setting Read Response Service data Class ID 0E hex 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 7A hex --- 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex Sets the LL value. Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex Sets the H value. Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex Sets the L value. Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex Reads analog input val- 0E hex ues for which have only been scaled. 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 7D hex 2 bytes (−32768 to 32767) 2 bytes (−32768 to 32767) 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 7E hex 2 bytes (−32768 to 32767) 2 bytes (−32768 to 32767) 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 7F hex 2 bytes (−32768 to 32767) 2 bytes (−32768 to 32767) 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 80 hex 2 bytes (−32768 to 32767) 2 bytes (−32768 to 32767) 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 8D hex --- 2 bytes 0E hex 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 8E hex --- 2 bytes Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex Read: 0E hex Reset: 35 hex Read: 0E hex 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 90 hex 2 bytes (10 to 65535) 2 bytes (10 to 65535) 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 91 hex --- 4 bytes (−214748364.8 to 214748364.8) 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 92 hex --- 1 byte Valley Read Reads the timing for Detection detecting valley values. Timing Flag Read HH Value Write/ Sets the HH value. Setting Read LL Value Setting Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID Service code Read Reads the rate of change for each sampling cycle. Write/ Sets the sampling cycle Read for obtaining the rate of change based on the previous value. Cumulated Read/ Reads the cumulated Value Read Reset analog input value. Cumulative Counter Flag Read Read Reads the cumulative count status in the Cumulative Counter Flag in the area for Generic Status Flags. 0: Counter overflow 1: Counter underflow 7: Set value overflow Cumulative Counter Monitor Value Setting Cumulative Counter Unit Setting Write/ Writes/reads the set Read monitor value for the cumulative counter. Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 93 hex 4 bytes 4 bytes Write/ Sets the unit for the Read cumulative counter. 0: Hour (count hours); 1: Minute (count minutes) Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 0A hex 01 to 04 hex 94 hex 1 byte 1 byte 605 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Setting and Reading for Analog Output Units Explicit message Read /write Function Service code Analog Out- Read Reads analog output put Value values. Read Output Write/ Sets the output range. Range Set- Read 4 to 20 mA: 0; ting 0 to 10 V: 1; 0 to 20 mA: 2; −10 to 10 V: 3; 0 to 5 V: 4; 1 to 5 V: 6 Communi- Write/ Sets the communicacations Read tions error output value Error Outfor each output. put Setting 0: Hold last state 1: Low limit 2: High limit 3: Zero count Function Write/ Sets the function. Setting Read Scaling: 0; Cumulative counter: 1 Scaling Type Setting Write/ Scaling Point 2 Set- Read ting Offset Write/ Compensa- Read tion after Scaling Cumulated Read/ Value Read Reset Cumulative Counter Flag Read 606 Read Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID Response Service data 0E hex 0B hex 01 to 02 hex 03 hex --- 2 bytes 0E hex 0B hex 01 to 02 hex 07 hex --- 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 0B hex 01 to 02 hex 09 hex 1 byte 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 0B hex 01 to 02 hex 6E hex 1 byte 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex Sets a conversion value Write: as the 0% value for user 10 hex scaling. Read: 0E hex Sets a conversion value Write: 10 hex as the 100% value for user scaling. Read: 0E hex Compensates for scal- Write: ing errors with an offset 10 hex value. Read: 0E hex Reads the cumulated Read: analog output value. 0E hex Reset: 35 hex Reads the cumulative Read: count status in the 0E hex Cumulative Counter Flag in the area for Generic Status Flags. 0: Counter overflow 1: Counter underflow 7: Set value overflow 0B hex 01 to 02 hex 6F hex 1 byte --- 0B hex 01 to 02 hex 70 hex 2 bytes (−28000 to 28000) 2 bytes (−28000 to 28000) 0B hex 01 to 02 hex 71 hex 2 bytes (−28000 to 28000) 2 bytes (−28000 to 28000) 0B hex 01 to 02 hex 72 hex 2 bytes (−28000 to 28000) 2 bytes (−28000 to 28000) 0B hex 01 to 02 hex 91 hex --- 4 bytes (−214748364.8 to 214748364.8) 0B hex 01 to 02 hex 92 hex --- 1 byte Write/ Default scaling: 0: Read User scaling: 1 Write/ Scaling Point 1 Set- Read ting Class ID Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Explicit message Cumulative Counter Monitor Value Setting Cumulative Counter Unit Setting Read /write Function Service code Class ID Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID Response Service data Write/ Writes/reads the set Read monitor value for the cumulative counter. Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 0B hex 01 to 02 hex 93 hex 4 bytes 4 bytes Write/ Sets the unit for the Read cumulative counter. 0: Hour (count hours); 1: Minute (count minutes) Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 0B hex 01 to 02 hex 94 hex 1 byte --- Explicit Messages for Temperature Input Units Explicit message Read /write Function Service code Class ID Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 00 hex 64 hex --- Response Service data Display For- Read Reads the display for- 0E hex mat Read mat. (Normal or Normal display: 0 1/100) 1/100 display: 1 Read Reads the value of tem- 0E hex Temperaperature data 1. ture 1 Read for Normal Display 31 hex 1 byte 31 hex 01 to 04 hex A5 hex --- 2 bytes TemperaRead Reads the value of temture 1 Read perature data 1. for 1/100 Display Input Type Write/ Sets the input type. Set Read R=0, S=1, K1=2, K2=3, J1=4, J2=5, T=6, E=7, L1=8, L2=9, U=A, N=B, W=C, B=D, PL2=E, PT=F, PT2=11 User Read Checks to see if user Adjustment adjustment has been Check performed for the temperature conversion constant. User adjustment: 1 Default setting: 0 Display Unit Read Reads the display unit. Read °C: 1200, °F: 1201 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 06 hex --- 4 bytes Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex A2 hex 1 byte 1 byte 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 84 hex --- 1 byte 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 04 hex --- 2 bytes 607 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Explicit message Read /write Function Reading of Read Reads the status of the the TemperTemperature Data Staature Data tus Flag. Status Flag LL = 0; L = 1; Pass signal = 2; H = 3; HH = 4; Valley shot = 5; Top shot = 6; Off-wire detection = 7 TemperaWrite/ Selects the data alloture Data 1 Read cated to Temperature Allocation Data 1. Selection Temperature input value: 0; Peak value: 1; Bottom value: 2; Top value: 3; Valley value: 4; Rate of change value: 5 Function Write/ Sets each function. Setting Read Bit status: ON: Enabled, OFF: Disabled Moving average: 0; Scaling: 1; Peak/bottom hold: 2; Top/valley hold: 3; Comparator: 4; Cumulative counter: 5; Rate of change: 6 Input error detection disable: 7 Scaling Write/ Sets an temperature Point 1 Set- Read value as the 0% value ting for user scaling. Scaling Point 2 Setting Offset Compensation Maximum Value Read Minimum Value Read 608 Service code Class ID Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID Response Service data 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 66 hex --- 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 68 hex 1 byte 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 6E hex 2 bytes 2 bytes 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 70 hex 2 bytes 2 bytes 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 71 hex 2 bytes 2 bytes 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 72 hex 2 bytes 2 bytes 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 73 hex --- 4 bytes 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 74 hex --- 4 bytes Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex Write/ Sets an temperature Write: Read value as the 100% 10 hex value for user scaling. Read: 0E hex Write/ Compensates for scal- Write: Read ing errors with an offset 10 hex value. Read: 0E hex Read/ Reads the maximum Read: 0E Reset value after power is hex turned ON. Reset: 35 hex Read/ Reads the minimum Read: 0E Reset value after power is hex turned ON. Reset: 35 hex Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Explicit message Read /write Function Peak Value Read Read The peak value is held and read if the hold function is being executed. Bottom Read The bottom value is Value Read held and read if the hold function is being executed. Top Value Read The top value is held Read and read if the hold function is being executed. Top Detec- Read Reads the timing for detecting top values. tion Timing Flag Read Valley Read The valley value is held Value Read and read if the hold function is being executed. Valley Read Reads the timing for detecting valley values. Detection Timing Flag Read HH Value Write/ Sets the HH value. Setting Read LL Value Setting Write/ Sets the LL value. Read H Value Setting Write/ Sets the H value. Read L Value Setting Write/ Sets the L value. Read Scaled Read Reads temperature Temperainput values for which ture Input have only been scaled. Value Read Rate of Read Reads the rate of Change change for each samValue Read pling cycle. Reads the Write/ Sets the sampling cycle Read for obtaining the rate of rate of change based on the change for previous value. each sampling cycle. Set in multiples of 250 ms. (Default: 250 ms) Service code Class ID Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID Response Service data 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 75 hex --- 4 bytes 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 76 hex --- 4 bytes 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 77 hex --- 4 bytes 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 78 hex --- 1 byte 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 79 hex --- 4 bytes 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 7A hex --- 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 11 hex 4 bytes 4 bytes (−415000 (−415000 to to 415000) 415000) 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 12 hex 4 bytes 4 bytes (−415000 (−415000 to to 415000) 415000) 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 15 hex 4 bytes 4 bytes (−415000 (−415000 to to 415000) 415000) 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 16 hex 4 bytes 4 bytes (−415000 (−415000 to to 415000) 415000) 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 8D hex --- 4 bytes 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 8E hex --- 4 bytes Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 90 hex 2 bytes (250 to 65500) 2 bytes (250 to 65500) Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 609 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Explicit message Read /write Function Service code --- 4 bytes (−214748364.8 to 214748364.7) 01 to 04 hex 92 hex --- 1 byte 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 93 hex 4 bytes 4 bytes Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex 94 hex 1 byte 1 byte 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex A3 hex --- 1 byte Read: 0E 31 hex hex Reset: 35 hex Reads whether the top/ 0E hex 31 hex valley count has exceeded the threshold value. 0: Counter overflow 7: Set value overflow Selects counting either Write: 31 hex tops or valleys. 10 hex Count tops = 0 Read: 0E hex Count valleys = 1 Sets the threshold value Write: 31 hex to compare with the top/ 10 hex valley count. Read: 0E hex Reads (in seconds) the Read: 0E 31 hex time the system has hex been in a user-set tem- Reset: 35 perature range. hex 01 to 04 hex A9 hex --- 4 bytes 01 to 04 hex AA hex --- 1 byte 01 to 04 hex AB hex 1 byte 1 byte 01 to 04 hex AC hex 4 bytes 4 bytes 01 to 04 hex AD hex 4 bytes 4 bytes Read Reads the cumulative count status in the Cumulative Counter Monitor Flag in the general status area. 0: Counter overflow 1: Counter underflow 7: Set value overflow Write: Write/ Writes/reads the set Read monitor value for the 10 hex cumulative counter. Read: 0E hex Top/Valley Count Threshold Status Read Read Top/Valley Counting Selection Write/ Read Top/Valley Count Threshold Set Write/ Read Time in Temperature Range Read Read/ Reset Response Service data 91 hex Cumulative Counter Monitor Value Setting Cumulative Write/ Sets the unit for the Counter Read cumulative counter. Unit Setting 0: Hour (count hours 1: Minute (count minutes) Read Reads the position of Decimal the decimal point. Position Read 0000 = 0 0000.0 = 1 0000.00 = 2 Top/Valley Read/ Reads the number of Count Read Reset tops or valleys that have been counted. 610 Read: 0E 31 hex hex Reset: 35 hex 0E hex 31 hex Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID 01 to 04 hex Cumulated Read/ Reads the cumulated Value Read Reset temperature input value. Cumulative Counter Flag Read Class ID Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Explicit message Read /write Function Read Compares the time the system has been in a user-set temperature range with a threshold value. 0: Counter overflow 7: Set value overflow Write/ Sets the range for timRange for Read ing the time in the set Time in temperature range. Temperature Range Above HH = 0, Between Set HH and H = 1, Pass = 2, Between L and LL = 3, Below LL = 4 Write/ Sets (in seconds) the Threshold for Compar- Read threshold value that is compared to the time in ison with the user-set temperaTime in ture range. Temperature Range Set/Read Input Tem- Read Reads the result of input temperature variaperature tion detection. Variation Detection Read Variation Read Compares the input Detection temperature variation Threshold detection result with a Compare threshold value and outputs the result. 0: Counter overflow 1: Counter underflow 6: Invalid data 7: Set value overflow Input Tem- Write/ Sets the threshold for perature Read comparison with the Variation detection result of temDetection perature difference Threshold between inputs. Set Threshold Status for Time in Temperature Range Read Service code Class ID Command Instance Command data ID Attribute Data ID Response Service data 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex AE hex --- 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex AF hex 1 byte 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 31 hex 01 to 04 hex B0 hex 4 bytes 4 bytes 0E hex 69 hex 01 to 06 hex 67 hex --- 4 bytes 0E hex 69 hex 01 to 06 hex 68 hex --- 1 byte Write: 10 hex Read: 0E hex 69 hex 01 to 06 hex 6E hex 4 bytes 4 bytes 611 CompoNet Explicit Messages Appendix A Example of Using Explicit Messages Example of Sending an Explicit Message with the CMND Instruction CompoNet Master Unit Unit number: 0 CMND instruction executed to send explicit message CPU Unit Unit address: 20 hex (See note.) Explicit message Input Slave Unit Node address: 11 Note: The CompoNet Master Unit (or Special I/O Unit) unit address is the unit number + 20 hex. Operation The unit maintenance PV (class ID: 95 hex, instance ID: 01 hex, attribute ID: 71 hex) is read from the Slave Unit. The command data is read by using the EXPLICIT MESSAGE SEND command (28 02). The command data is written in words starting from D01000 in the CPU Unit and the response data is stored in words starting from D02000. 612 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages Command Details [CMND S D C] Contents of S Address D01000 D01001 D01002 D01003 D01004 D01005 Contents (hex) 28 02 10 0B 00 0E 00 95 00 01 71 00 Meaning Command code Destination node address (Input Slave Unit: node address 11) Service code: 0E hex Class ID: 0095 hex Instance ID: 0001 hex Attribute ID: 71 hex (The rightmost 00 hex is not read because the number of bytes of command data is set to 11 bytes.) D: First Response Storage Word Contents of C Address D00000 D00001 D00002 D00003 Contents (hex) 00 0B 00 0E 00 00 00 20 D00004 00 00 D00005 00 64 Meaning Number of bytes of command data: 11 bytes Number of bytes of response data: 14 bytes Destination Master Unit network address: 0 Destination Master Unit node address: 0 Destination Master Unit unit address: 20 hex Response required Communications port number: 0 Number of retries: 0 Response monitoring time Response Contents of D Address D02000 D02001 D02002 D02003 D02004 D02005 Contents (hex) 28 02 00 00 00 08 10 0B 00 8E 2F 07 D02006 00 00 Note Meaning ------Destination node address: 11 (0B hex) Normal completion: 8E hex The Unit maintenance PV (0000072F hex) is stored in order from leftmost to rightmost. (See note.) --- (1) The service data is stored for the command format with the lower byte stored first followed by the upper byte for word (2-byte) or double-word (4-byte) data. For example, with word data, 1234 hex would be specified by setting 34 hex first followed by 12 hex. With double-word data, 12345678 hex would be specified by setting 78 hex first followed by 56 hex, 34 hex, and then 12 hex. This is illustrated below. Example for 1234 hex 34 Example for 12345678 hex 12 Service data 78 56 34 12 Service data Data is thus set in I/O memory starting from the address specified for operand S of the CMND in- 613 Appendix A CompoNet Explicit Messages struction as follows: Example for 1234 Hex Starting from the Upper Byte of I/O Memory Bit S+n 15 08 07 34 00 12 Example for 12345678 Hex Starting from the Upper Byte of I/O Memory Bit Starting from the Lower Byte of I/O Memory Bit 15 08 07 00 Bit S+n S+n 34 12 15 S+n 08 07 00 78 56 34 12 Starting from the Lower Byte of I/O Memory 15 08 07 00 78 56 34 12 (2) The service data is stored in the same way for the response format, i.e., when word (2-byte) or double-word (4-byte) data is received, the lower byte is stored first. 614 Appendix B Object Mounting Identity Object (0x01) Object class Object instance Attribute Service Attribute Service ID 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Not supported Not supported Contents Vendor Device type Product code Revision Status (bits supported) Serial number Product name Get (read) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 State Code Description 05 Reset 0E Get_Attribute_Single Set (write) No No No No No No No No Value 47 See note. See note. 1.1 Bit 0 only Unique for each Unit See note. No Parameter option No No Note The product code and product name depend on the type of Slave Unit being used, as shown in the following table. Basic Unit CRT1-ID08 CRT1-ID08-1 CRT1-OD08 CRT1-OD08-1 CRT1-ID16 CRT1-ID16-1 Model Expansion Unit --- Device type Product code Product name None XWT-ID08 XWT-ID16 XWT-OD08 XWT-OD16 XWT-ID08-1 XWT-ID16-1 XWT-OD08-1 XWT-OD16-1 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 1557 1558 1559 1560 1327 1328 1329 1330 1331 1332 1333 1334 1335 CRT1-ID08 CRT1-ID08-1 CRT1-OD08 CRT1-OD08-1 CRT1-ID16 CRT1-ID16 CRT1-ID16 CRT1-ID16 CRT1-ID16 CRT1-ID16 CRT1-ID16 CRT1-ID16 CRT1-ID16 None XWT-ID08 XWT-ID16 XWT-OD08 XWT-OD16 XWT-ID08-1 XWT-ID16-1 XWT-OD08-1 XWT-OD16-1 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 1345 1346 1347 1348 1349 1350 1351 1352 1353 CRT1-ID16-1 CRT1-ID16-1 CRT1-ID16-1 CRT1-ID16-1 CRT1-ID16-1 CRT1-ID16-1 CRT1-ID16-1 CRT1-ID16-1 CRT1-ID16-1 615 Appendix B Object Mounting Basic Unit CRT1-OD16 CRT1-OD16-1 CRT1-MD16 CRT1-MD16-1 CRT1-ROS08 CRT1-ROF08 CRT1-ROS16 CRT1-ROF16 CRT1-ID08TA CRT1-ID08TA-1 CRT1-OD08TA CRT1-OD08TA-1 CRT1-ID08TAH CRT1-ID08TAH-1 CRT1-OD08TAH CRT1-OD08TAH-1 616 Model Expansion Unit None XWT-ID08 XWT-ID16 XWT-OD08 XWT-OD16 XWT-ID08-1 XWT-ID16-1 XWT-OD08-1 XWT-OD16-1 None XWT-ID08 XWT-ID16 XWT-OD08 XWT-OD16 XWT-ID08-1 XWT-ID16-1 XWT-OD08-1 XWT-OD16-1 --- None XWT-ID08 XWT-ID16 XWT-OD08 XWT-OD16 XWT-ID08-1 XWT-ID16-1 XWT-OD08-1 XWT-OD16-1 None XWT-ID08 XWT-ID16 XWT-OD08 XWT-OD16 XWT-ID08-1 XWT-ID16-1 XWT-OD08-1 XWT-OD16-1 --- Device type Product code 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 1336 1337 1338 1339 1340 1341 1342 1343 1344 1354 1355 1356 1357 1358 1359 1360 1361 1362 1561 1562 1593 1594 1511 1512 1513 1514 1515 1516 1517 1518 1519 1520 1521 1522 1523 1524 1525 1526 1527 1528 1563 1564 1565 1566 1567 1568 1569 1570 Product name CRT1-OD16 CRT1-OD16 CRT1-OD16 CRT1-OD16 CRT1-OD16 CRT1-OD16 CRT1-OD16 CRT1-OD16 CRT1-OD16 CRT1-OD16-1 CRT1-OD16-1 CRT1-OD16-1 CRT1-OD16-1 CRT1-OD16-1 CRT1-OD16-1 CRT1-OD16-1 CRT1-OD16-1 CRT1-OD16-1 CRT1-MD16 CRT1-MD16-1 CRT1-ROS08 CRT1-ROF08 CRT1-ROS16 CRT1-ROF16 CRT1-ID08TA CRT1-ID08TA-1 CRT1-OD08TA CRT1-OD08TA-1 CRT1-OD08TAH CRT1-OD08TAH-1 CRT1-OD08TAH CRT1-OD08TAH-1 Appendix B Object Mounting Basic Unit CRT1-ID16TA CRT1-ID16TA-1 CRT1-OD16TA CRT1-OD16TA-1 CRT1-MD16TA CRT1-MD16TA-1 CRT1-ID16TAH CRT1-ID16TAH-1 CRT1-OD16TAH CRT1-OD16TAH-1 CRT1-MD16TAH CRT1-MD16TAH-1 CRT1-VID08S CRT1-VID08S-1 CRT1-VOD08S CRT1-VOD08S-1 CRT1-ID16S DRT1-ID16S-1 CRT1-OD16S CRT1-OD16S-1 CRT1-MD16S CRT1-MD16S-1 CRT1-ID16SH CRT1-ID16SH-1 CRT1-OD16SH CRT1-OD16SH-1 CRT1-MD16SH CRT1-MD16SH-1 CRT1-ID32S CRT1-ID32S-1 CRT1-OD32S CRT1-OD32S-1 CRT1-MD32S CRT1-MD32-S CRT1-ID32SH CRT1-ID32SH-1 CRT1-OD32SH CRT1-OD32SH-1 CRT1-MD32SH CRT1-MD32SH-1 CRT1-VID16ML CRT1-VID16ML-1 CRT1-VOD16ML CRT1-VOD16ML-1 CRT1-VID32ML CRT1-VID32ML-1 CRT1-VOD32ML CRT1-VOD32ML-1 Model Expansion Unit --- Device type Product code 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 1529 1530 1531 1532 1533 1534 1595 1596 1597 1598 1571 1572 1710 1711 1712 1713 1535 1536 1537 1538 1539 1540 1599 1600 1601 1602 1579 1580 1573 1574 1575 1576 1577 1578 1581 1582 1583 1584 1585 1586 1706 1707 1708 1709 1700 1701 1702 1703 Product name CRT1-ID16TA CRT1-ID16TA-1 CRT1-OD16TA CRT1-OD16TA-1 CRT1-MD16TA CRT1-MD16TA-1 CRT1-ID16TAH CRT1-ID16TAH-1 CRT1-OD16TAH CRT1-OD16TAH-1 CRT1-MD16TAH CRT1-MD16TAH-1 CRT1-VID08S CRT1-VID08S-1 CRT1-VOD08S CRT1-VOD08S-1 CRT1-ID16S DRT1-ID16S-1 CRT1-OD16S CRT1-OD16S-1 CRT1-MD16S CRT1-MD16S-1 CRT1-ID16SH CRT1-ID16SH-1 CRT1-OD16SH CRT1-OD16SH-1 CRT1-MD16SH CRT1-MD16SH-1 CRT1-ID32S CRT1-ID32S-1 CRT1-OD32S CRT1-OD32S-1 CRT1-MD32S CRT1-MD32-S CRT1-ID32SH CRT1-ID32SH-1 CRT1-OD32SH CRT1-OD32SH-1 CRT1-MD32SH CRT1-MD32SH-1 CRT1-VID16ML CRT1-VID16ML-1 CRT1-VOD16ML CRT1-VOD16ML-1 CRT1-VID32ML CRT1-VID32ML-1 CRT1-VOD32ML CRT1-VOD32ML-1 617 Appendix B Object Mounting Model Basic Unit Expansion Unit CRT1-VMD32ML --CRT1-VMD32ML-1 CRT1-ID08SL CRT1-ID08SL-1 CRT1-OD08SL CRT1-OD08SL-1 CRT1-ID16SL CRT1-ID16SL-1 CRT1-OD16SL CRT1-OD16SL-1 CRT1-MD16SL CRT1-MD16SL-1 CRT1B-ID02S CRT1B-ID02S-1 CRT1B-OD02S CRT1B-OD02S-1 CRT1B-ID02SP CRT1B-ID02SP-1 CRT1B-OD02SP CRT1B-OD02SP-1 CRT1B-ID04SP CRT1B-ID04SP-1 CRT1B-MD04SLP CRT1B-MD04SLP-1 CRT1B-ID02JS CRT1B-ID02JS-1 CRT1B-OD02JS CRT1B-OD02JS-1 CRT1B-MD02JS CRT1B-MD02JS-1 CRT1B-ID04JS CRT1B-ID04JS-1 CRT1B-OD04JS CRT1B-OD04JS-1 CRT1B-MD04JS CRT1B-MD04JS-1 CRT1-AD04 CRT1-DA02 CRT1-VAD04S CRT1-VDA02S CRT1-VAD04ML CRT1-VDA02ML CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P CRS1-RPT01 618 Device type Product code 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 07 hex 00 hex 00 hex 00 Hex 00 Hex 00 Hex 00 Hex 00 hex 00 hex 26 hex 1704 1705 1587 1588 1589 1590 1541 1542 1543 1544 1591 1592 1364 1365 1366 1367 1368 1369 1370 1371 1372 1373 1374 1375 1727 1728 1725 1726 1729 1730 1733 1734 1731 1732 1735 1736 65 66 1715 1717 1714 1716 1631 1632 1363 Product name CRT1-VMD32ML CRT1-VMD32ML-1 CRT1-ID08SL CRT1-ID08SL-1 CRT1-OD08SL CRT1-OD08SL-1 CRT1-ID16SL CRT1-ID16SL-1 CRT1-OD16SL CRT1-OD16SL-1 CRT1-MD16SL CRT1-MD16SL-1 CRT1B-ID02S CRT1B-ID02S-1 CRT1B-OD02S CRT1B-OD02S-1 CRT1B-ID02SP CRT1B-ID02SP-1 CRT1B-OD02SP CRT1B-OD02SP-1 CRT1B-ID04SP CRT1B-ID04SP-1 CRT1B-MD04SLP CRT1B-MD04SLP-1 CRT1B-ID02JS CRT1B-ID02JS-1 CRT1B-OD02JS CRT1B-OD02JS-1 CRT1B-MD02JS CRT1B-MD02JS-1 CRT1B-ID04JS CRT1B-ID04JS-1 CRT1B-OD04JS CRT1B-OD04JS-1 CRT1B-MD04JS CRT1B-MD04JS-1 CRT1-AD04 CRT1-DA02 CRT1-VAD04S CRT1-VDA02S CRT1-VAD04ML CRT1-VDA02ML CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P CRT1-RPT01 Appendix B Object Mounting Message Router Object (0x02) Object class Object instance Attribute Service Attribute Service Not supported Not supported Not supported Not supported None Vendor specification addition Assembly Object (0x04) Object class Object instance Attribute Service Attribute Service Not supported Not supported ID 1 2 3 Code 0E Contents Number of members in list Member list Data Description Get_Attribute_Single Get No Set No No Yes No No Parameter option None Value The assembly instances for CompoNet Slave Units are given below. 619 Appendix B Object Mounting Digital Input Slave Units Instance number Assembly instance 2 2 inputs Type Input --- --- --- Assembly instance 3 4 inputs Assembly instance 4 8 inputs Input --- --- --- --- 3 Input 7 6 5 4 3 Assembly instance 5 16 inputs Input Assembly instance 6 32 inputs Input Assembly instance 7 24 inputs Input 620 Bit allocation ------- 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 23 31 7 15 23 14 22 30 6 14 22 13 21 29 5 13 21 12 20 28 4 12 20 11 19 27 3 11 19 10 18 26 2 10 18 9 17 25 1 9 17 8 16 24 0 8 16 Supported model CRT1B-ID02S(-1) CRT1B-ID02SP(-1) CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1) CRT1B-ID02JS(-1) CRT1B-MD02JS(-1) CRT1B-MD04JS(-1) CRT1B-ID04SP(-1) CRT1B-ID04JS(-1) CRT1-ID08(-1) CRT1-OD16(-1) + XWT-ID08(-1) CRT1-MD16(-1) CRT1-ROS16 + XWT-ID08(-1) CRT1-ROF16 + XWT-ID08(-1) CRT1-ID08TA(-1) CRT1-ID08TAH(-1) CRT1-MD16TA(-1) CRT1-MD16TAH(-1) CRT1-VID08S(-1) CRT1-MD16S(-1) CRT1-MD16SH(-1) CRT1-ID08SL(-1) CRT1-MD16SL(-1) CRT1-ID16(-1) CRT1-ID16(-1) + XWT-OD08(-1) CRT1-ID16(-1) + XWT-OD16(-1) CRT1-OD16(-1) + XWT-ID16(-1) CRT1-ROS16 + XWT-ID16(-1) CRT1-ROF16 + XWT-ID16(-1) CRT1-ID16TA(-1) CRT1-ID16TAH(-1) CRT1-ID16S(-1) CRT1-ID16SH(-1) CRT1-MD32S(-1) CRT1-MD32SH(-1) CRT1-VID16ML(-1) CRT1-VMD32ML(-1) CRT1-ID16SL(-1) CRT1-ID16(-1) + XWT-ID16(-1) CRT1-ID32S(-1) CRT1-ID32SH(-1) CRT1-VID32ML(-1) CRT1-ID16(-1) + XWT-ID08(-1) Appendix B Object Mounting Digital Output Slave Units Instance number Assembly instance 32 2 outputs Type Output --- --- --- Bit allocation ------- Assembly instance 33 4 outputs Assembly instance 34 8 outputs Output --- --- --- --- 3 Output 7 6 5 4 3 Assembly instance 35 16 outputs Output Assembly instance 36 32 outputs Output 1 0 2 1 0 2 1 0 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 15 23 31 14 22 30 13 21 29 12 20 28 11 19 27 10 18 26 9 17 25 8 16 24 Supported model CRT1B-OD02S(-1) CRT1B-OD02SP(-1) CRT1B-MD04SLP(-1) CRT1B-ID02JS(-1) CRT1B-MD02JS(-1) CRT1B-MD04JS(-1) CRT1B-OD04JS(-1) CRT1-OD08(-1) CRT1-ID16(-1) + XWT-OD08(-1) CRT1-MD16(-1) CRT1-ROS08 CRT1-ROF08 CRT1-OD08TA(-1) CRT1-OD08TAH(-1) CRT1-MA16TA(-1) CRT1-MD16TAH(-1) CRT1-VOD08S(-1) CRT1-MD16S(-1) CRT1-MD16SH(-1) CRT1-OD08SL(-1) CRT1-MD16SL(-1) CRT1-ID16(-1) + XWT-OD16(-1) CRT1-OD16(-1) CRT1-OD16(-1) + XWT-ID08(-1) CRT1-OD16(-1) + XWT-ID16(-1) CRT1-ROS16 CRT1-ROS16 + XWT-ID08(-1) CRT1-ROS16 + XWT-ID16(-1) CRT1-ROF16 CRT1-ROF16 + XWT-ID08(-1) CRT1-ROF16 + XWT-ID16(-1) CRT1-OD16TA(-1) CRT1-OD16TAH(-1) CRT1-OD16S(-1) CRT1-OD16SH(-1) CRT1-MD32S(-1) CRT1-MD32SH(-1) CRT1-VOD16ML(-1) CRT1-VMD32ML(-1) CRT1-OD16SL(-1) CRT1-OD16(-1) + XWT-OD16(-1) CRT1-ROS16 + XWT-OD16(-1) CRT1-ROF16 + XWT-OD16(-1) CRT1-OD32S(-1) CRT1-OD32SH(-1) CRT1-VOD32ML(-1) 621 Appendix B Object Mounting Instance number Assembly instance 37 24 outputs Type Output 7 15 23 6 14 22 5 13 21 Bit allocation 4 3 2 12 11 10 20 19 18 1 9 17 0 8 16 Supported model CRT1-OD16(-1) + XWT-OD08(-1) CRT1-ROS16 + XWT-OD08(-1) CRT1-ROF16 + XWT-OD08(-1) Analog Input Slave Units Instance number Instance 104 Analog Data (input) Byte +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 Bit allocation Input 0, Analog Data 1 Input 1, Analog Data 1 Input 2, Analog Data 1 Input 3, Analog Data 1 Instance 122 Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags +0 +1 0 0 Instance 134 Analog Status Flags +0 BW0 T_ST0 V_ST0 HH0 +1 +2 +3 BW1 BW2 BW3 T_ST1 V_ST1 T_ST2 V_ST2 T_ST3 V_ST3 HH1 HH2 HH3 Instance 174 Analog Data 1 + Top/ Valley Detection Timing Flags +0 Supported model CRT1-AD04 CRT1-VAD04S CRT1-VAD04ML 0 0 0 0 0 0 V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 V_ST0 CRT1-AD04 T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 T_ST0 CRT1-VAD04S CRT1-VAD04ML H0 PS0 L0 LL0 CRT1-AD04 H1 PS1 L1 LL1 CRT1-VAD04S H2 PS2 L2 LL2 CRT1-VAD04ML H3 PS3 L3 LL3 Input 0, Analog Data 1 CRT1-AD04 CRT1-VAD04S CRT1-VAD04ML +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 Input 1, Analog Data 1 Input 2, Analog Data 1 Input 3, Analog Data 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 V_ST0 T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 T_ST0 Analog Output Slave Units Instance number Byte Instance 190 Hold Flags +0 Instance 192 Analog output data +0 +1 +2 +3 622 Bit allocation --- --- Input 0, Analog Data Input 1, Analog Data --- --- HD3 HD1 HD1 HD0 Supported model CRT1-DA02 CRT1-VDA02S CRT1-VDA02ML CRT1-DA02 CRT1-VDA02S CRT1-VDA02ML Appendix B Object Mounting Temperature Input Terminals (Inputs) Instance number Byte Instance 104 Temperature data 1, normal display +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 +12 +13 Instance 108 Temperature data 1, 1/100 display) Instance 122 Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags Instance 134 Temperature Data Status Flag Instance 174 Temperature data 1, normal display + Top/valley detection timing flag Bit allocation Supported model CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P Ch0 Temperature Data 1 Ch1 Temperature Data 1 Ch2 Temperature Data 1 Ch3 Temperature Data 1 Ch0 Temperature Data 1 CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P Ch1 Temperature Data 1 Ch2 Temperature Data 1 Ch3 Temperature Data 1 +14 +15 +0 0 0 0 0 V_ST3 V_ST2 V_ST1 +1 0 0 0 0 T_ST3 T_ST2 T_ST1 HH0 HH1 HH2 HH3 H0 H1 H2 H3 PS0 PS1 PS2 PS3 L0 L1 L2 L3 +0 +1 +2 +3 +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 BW0 T_ST0 V_ST0 BW1 T_ST1 V_ST1 BW2 T_ST2 V_ST2 BW3 T_ST3 V_ST3 Ch0 Temperature Data 1 V_ST0 CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P T_ST0 LL0 LL1 LL2 LL3 CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P Ch1 Temperature Data 1 Ch2 Temperature Data 1 Ch3 Temperature Data 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V_ST3 T_ST3 V_ST2 T_ST2 V_ST1 T_ST1 V_ST0 T_ST0 623 Appendix B Object Mounting Instance number Byte Instance 178 Temperature data 1, 1/100 display + Top/ valley detection timing flag +0 +1 +2 +3 +4 +5 +6 +7 +8 +9 +10 +11 +12 +13 +14 +15 +16 +17 Bit allocation Supported model CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P Ch0 Temperature Data 1 Ch1 Temperature Data 1 Ch2 Temperature Data 1 Ch3 Temperature Data 1 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 V_ST3 T_ST3 V_ST2 T_ST2 V_ST1 T_ST1 V_ST0 T_ST0 Temperature Input Terminals (Output) Instance number Instance 190 Hold flag 624 Byte +0 Bit allocation --- --- --- --- HD3 HD1 HD1 HD0 Supported model CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P Appendix B Object Mounting Connection Object (0x05) Object class Attribute Service Maximum number of active connections Object instance Section 1 Instance type Production trigger Transport type Transport class Attribute Information Polled I/O Cyclic Server 2 ID Contents 1 State 2 Instance type 3 Transport class trigger 4 5 6 7 8 9 12 13 14 15 16 17 Service Not supported Not supported 1 Code 05 0E 10 Maximum number of instances 1 --- Get (read) Yes Yes Yes Set (write) No No No Yes No 01 (hexadecimal) 82H (Input and Mixed I/O Slave Units) 80H (Output Slave Units and Repeater Units) --- Yes No --- Yes No 01 (hexadecimal) Yes No See note. Yes No See note. Yes Yes --- Yes No 00 (hexadecimal) Yes No See note. Yes No See note. Yes No See note. Yes No See note. Yes No 0000 (hexadecimal) Produced connection ID Consumed connection ID Initial comm. characteristics Produced connection size Consumed connection size Expected packet rate Watchdog timeout action Produced connection path length Produced connection path Consumed connection path length Consumed connection path Production inhibit time Description Reset None Get_Attribute_ None Single Set_Attribute_ None Single Value Parameter option Note The data depends on the type of Slave Unit being used, as shown in the following table. 625 Appendix B Object Mounting Model Name Basic Unit Expansion Unit CRT1B-ID02S (-1) Input Data Produced Produced Produced Consumed Consumed Consumed connection connection connection connection connection connection size path length path size path length path 0001 0006 CRT1B-OD02S (-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1B-ID02SP (-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1B-OD02SP (-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1B-ID04SP (-1) Input Data 0001 0006 CRT1B-MD04SLP (-1) Input Data 0001 0006 0001 Output Data --- 0000 CRT1B-ID02JS(-1) Input Data 0001 0006 CRT1B-ID04JS(-1) Input Data 0001 0006 CRT1B-OD02JS(-1) Output Data --- CRT1B-OD04JS(-1) CRT1B-MD02JS(-1) CRT1B-MD04JS(-1) 20_04_24_ 03_30_03 20_04_24_ 02_30_03 --- 0000 --- 0001 0006 --- 0000 20_04_24_ 02_30_03 --- 0001 0006 --- 0000 20_04_24_ 02_30_03 --- --- 0000 --- 0001 0006 --- 0000 20_04_24_ 02_30_03 --- --- 0000 --- 0000 0001 0006 Output Data --- 0000 --- 0001 0006 Input Data 0006 20_04_24_ 02_30_03 --- --- 0000 20_04_24_ 20_30_03 20_04_24_ 21_30_03 --- 0001 0006 --- 0000 0001 0006 --- 0000 0001 0006 --- 0000 20_04_24_ 22_30_03 --- --- 0000 --- --- 0000 --- --- 0000 --- 0001 0006 --- 0000 20_04_24_ 22_30_03 --- 0002 0006 0001 Output Data --- 0000 Input Data 0006 0001 0000 CRT1-ID08(-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1-OD08(-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1ID16 (-1) Input Data 0002 0006 0003 0006 0004 0006 0002 0006 --- 0000 XWT-ID08 Input Data (-1) XWT-ID16 Input Data (-1) XWT-OD08 Input Data (-1) Output Data 0001 XWT-OD16 Input Data 0002 (-1) Output Data --- 626 20_04_24_ 02_30_03 --- --- 20_04_24_ 02_30_03 20_04_24_ 03_30_03 --- Output Data --- NA 20_04_24_ 02_30_03 --- 0006 0000 20_04_24_ 02_30_03 --20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --20_04_24_ 05_30_03 20_04_24_ 07_30_03 20_04_24_ 06_30_03 20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --- 20_04_24_ 20_30_03 --20_04_24_ 20_30_03 --- 20_04_24_ 23_30_03 Appendix B Object Mounting Model Basic Unit Expansion Unit CRT1OD16 (-1) Name Produced Produced Produced Consumed Consumed Consumed connection connection connection connection connection connection size path length path size path length path NA Output Data --- 0000 --- 0002 0006 XWT-ID08 (-1) Output Data 0000 --- 0002 0006 0006 20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --- --- 0000 0002 0006 Input Data XWT-ID16 (-1) 0001 Output Data --- 0000 Input Data 0002 0006 XWT-OD08 Output Data --(-1) XWT-OD16 Output Data --(-1) CRT1-MD16(-1) Input Data 0001 --- 0000 0000 20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --- 0003 0006 0000 --- 0004 0006 0006 --- 0000 0001 0006 Output Data --- 0000 20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --- CRT1-ROS08 Output Data --- 0000 --- 0001 0006 CRT1-ROF08 Output Data --- 0000 --- 0001 0006 CRT1ROS16 NA Output Data --- 0000 --- 0002 0006 XWT-ID08 (-1) Output Data --- 0000 --- 0002 0006 Input Data 0006 20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --- --- 0000 0002 0006 XWT-ID16 (-1) CRT1ROF16 0001 Output Data --- 0000 Input Data 0006 XWT-OD08 Output Data --(-1) XWT-OD16 Output Data --(-1) NA Output Data --- 0000 20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --- 0000 --- 0004 0006 0000 --- 0002 0006 XWT-ID08 (-1) Output Data --- 0000 --- 0002 0006 Input Data 0006 20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --- --- 0000 0002 0006 XWT-ID16 (-1) 0002 0001 Output Data --- 0000 Input Data 0002 0006 XWT-OD08 Output Data --(-1) XWT-OD16 Output Data --(-1) CRT1-ID08TA(-1) Input Data 0001 CRT1-OD08TA(-1) 0000 Output Data --- --- 0000 0003 0006 --- 0000 0000 20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --- 0003 0006 0000 --- 0004 0006 0006 20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --- --- 0000 0001 0006 20_04_24_ 23_30_03 20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --20_04_24_ 25_30_03 20_04_24_ 24_30_03 --20_04_24_ 22_30_03 20_04_24_ 22_30_03 20_04_24_ 22_30_03 20_04_24_ 23_30_03 20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --20_04_24_ 25_30_03 20_04_24_ 24_30_03 20_04_24_ 23_30_03 20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --20_04_24_ 25_30_03 20_04_24_ 24_30_03 --20_04_24_ 22_30_03 627 Appendix B Object Mounting Model Basic Unit Expansion Unit Name Produced Produced Produced Consumed Consumed Consumed connection connection connection connection connection connection size path length path size path length path CRT1-ID08TAH(-1) Input Data 0001 CRT1-OD08TAH(-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-ID16TA(-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1-OD16TA(-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-MD16TA(-1) Input Data 0006 0002 0001 0006 Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-ID16TAH(-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1-OD16TAH(-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-MD16TAH(-1) Input Data 0006 0002 0001 Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-VID08S Input Data 0006 CRT1-VOD08S Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-ID16S(-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1-OD16S(-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-MD16S(-1) Input Data 0006 0001 0002 0001 Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-ID16SH(-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1-OD16SH(-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-MD16SH(-1) Input Data 0006 0002 0001 Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-ID32S(-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1-OD32S(-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-MD32S(-1) Input Data 0006 0002 0002 Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-ID32SH(-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1-OD32SH(-1) Output Data --- 628 0004 0000 20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --20_04_24_ 06_30_03 --20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --20_04_24_ 06_30_03 --- --- 0000 --- 0001 0006 --- 0000 20_04_24_ 22_30_03 --- 0002 0006 --- 0000 0001 0006 --- 0000 0002 0006 --- 0000 0001 0006 --- 0000 0001 0006 20_04_24_ 22_30_03 --- 0000 --- 0002 0006 --- 0000 20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --- 0001 0006 --- 0000 0002 0006 --- 0000 0001 0006 --- 0000 0002 0006 --- 0000 0002 0006 --- 0000 0004 0006 20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --20_04_24_ 22_30_03 --20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --20_04_24_ 22_30_03 ---- 20_04_24_ 22_30_03 --20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --20_04_24_ 22_30_03 --20_04_24_ 24_30_03 --20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --20_04_24_ 24_30_03 Appendix B Object Mounting Model Basic Unit Expansion Unit CRT1-MD32SH(-1) Name Input Data Produced Produced Produced Consumed Consumed Consumed connection connection connection connection connection connection size path length path size path length path 0002 0006 Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-VID16ML(-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1-VOD16ML(-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-VID32ML(-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1-VOD32ML(-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-VMD32ML(-1) Input Data 0006 0002 0004 0002 Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-ID08SL(-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1-OD08SL(-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-ID16SL(-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1-OD16SL(-1) Output Data --- 0000 CRT1-MD16SL(-1) Input Data 0006 CRT1-AD04 CRT1-VAD04S CRT1-VAD04ML 0001 0002 0001 20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --- --- 0000 --- 0002 0006 --- 0000 20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --- 0002 0006 --- 0000 0004 0006 --- 0000 0002 0006 --- 0000 0001 0006 --- 0000 0002 0006 20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --- 0000 --- 0001 0006 20_04_24_ 68_30_03 20_04_24_ 79_30_03 20_04_24_ 7A_30_03 20_04_24_ 86_30_03 0000 0000 20_04_24_ 22_30_03 --- 0000 0000 --- 0000 0000 --- 0000 0000 --- 20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --20_04_24_ 06_30_03 --20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --20_04_24_ 05_30_03 --20_04_24_ 04_30_03 --- 20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --20_04_24_ 24_30_03 --20_04_24_ 23_30_03 --20_04_24_ 22_30_03 --- Output Data --- 0000 Analog Data 1 Generic Status Top and Valley shot Analog Status Top and Valley shot + Generic status Analog Status + Generic status Analog data 1 + Top and valley shot Analog data + Top and valley shot + generic status Hold control 0008 0006 0001 0006 0002 0006 0004 0006 0003 0006 20_04_24_ 97_30_03 0000 0000 --- 0005 0006 20_04_24_ A4_30_03 0000 0000 --- 000A 0006 20_04_24_ AE_30_03 0000 0000 --- 000B 0006 20_04_24_ B8_30_03 0000 0000 --- 0000 0000 --- 0001 0006 20_04_24_ BE_30_03 629 Appendix B Object Mounting Model Basic Unit Expansion Unit CRT1-DA02 CRT1-VDA02S CRT1-VDA02ML CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P 630 Name Produced Produced Produced Consumed Consumed Consumed connection connection connection connection connection connection size path length path size path length path Generic Status Analog Data Temperature Data 1 (Normal) Temperature Data 1 (1/100 display) 0001 0006 --- --- 0008 0006 0010 Top and Valley shot Temperature Status Temperature data 1 (Normal) + Top and valley shot Temperature data 1 (1/100 display) + Top and valley shot 20_04_24_ 79_30_03 --- --- --- --- 0004 0006 20_04_24_ 68_30_03 0000 0000 20_04_24_ C0_30_03 --- 0006 20_04_24_ 6C_30_03 0000 0000 --- 0002 0006 0000 0000 --- 0004 0006 0000 0000 --- 000A 0006 20_04_24_ 7A_30_03 20_04_24_ 86_30_03 20_04_24_ AE_30_03 0000 0000 --- 0012 0006 20_04_24_ B2_30_03 0000 0000 --- Hold control 0000 0000 --- 0001 0006 20_04_24_ BE_30_03 Appendix C Current Consumption Summary Digital I/O Slave Units Model CRT1-ID08 CRT1-ID08-1 CRT1-OD08 CRT1-OD08-1 CRT1-ID16 CRT1-ID16-1 CRT1-OD16 CRT1-OD16-1 CRT1-MD16 CRT1-MD16-1 CRT1-ROS08 CRT1-ROF08 CRT1-ROS16 CRT1-ROF16 CRT1-ID08TA CRT1-ID08TA-1 CRT1-OD08TA CRT1-OD08TA-1 CRT1-ID08TAH CRT1-ID08TAH-1 CRT1-OD08TAH Communications current consumption 30 mA max. (for 24 V) 50 mA max. (for 14 V) 30 mA max. (for 24 V) 50 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 55 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 55 mA max. (for 14 V) 55 mA max. (for 24 V) 85 mA max. (for 14 V) 55 mA max. (for 24 V) 85 mA max. (for 14 V) 55 mA max. (for 24 V) 85 mA max. (for 14 V) 55 mA max. (for 24 V) 85 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 95 mA max. (for 24 V) 150 mA max. (for 14 V) 60 mA max. (for 24 V) 90 mA max. (for 14 V) 155 mA max. (for 24 V) 255 mA max. (for 14 V) 85 mA max. (for 24 V) 130 mA max. (for 14 V) 30 mA max. (for 24 V) 50 mA max. (for 14 V) 30 mA max. (for 24 V) 50 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 55 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 55 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 55 mA max. (for 14 V) 631 Current Consumption Summary Model CRT1-OD08TAH-1 CRT1-ID16TA CRT1-ID16TA-1 CRT1-OD16TA CRT1-OD16TA-1 CRT1-MD16TA CRT1-MD16TA-1 CRT1-ID16TAH CRT1-ID16TAH-1 CRT1-OD16TAH CRT1-OD16TAH-1 CRT1-MD16TAH CRT1-MD16TAH-1 CRT1-VID08S CRT1-VID08S-1 CRT1-VOD08S CRT1-VOD08S-1 CRT1-ID16S CRT1-ID16S-1 CRT1-OD16S CRT1-OD16S-1 CRT1-MD16S CRT1-MD16S-1 CRT1-ID16SH 632 Communications current consumption 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 55 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 55 mA max. (for 14 V) 37 mA max. (for 24 V) 55 mA max. (for 14 V) 45 mA max. (for 24 V) 65 mA max. (for 14 V) 45 mA max. (for 24 V) 65 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 70 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 70 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 70 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 70 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 70 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 70 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 50 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 50 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 110 mA max. (for 24 V) 125 mA max. (for 14 V) 110 mA max. (for 24 V) 120 mA max. (for 14 V) 38 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 39 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 75 mA max. (for 24 V) 95 mA max. (for 14 V) 75 mA max. (for 24 V) 95 mA max. (for 14 V) 125 mA max. (for 24 V) 145 mA max. (for 14 V) Appendix C Current Consumption Summary Model CRT1-ID16SH-1 CRT1-OD16SH CRT1-OD16SH-1 CRT1-MD16SH CRT1-MD16SH-1 CRT1-ID32S CRT1-ID32S-1 CRT1-OD32S CRT1-OD32S-1 CRT1-MD32S CRT1-MD32S-1 CRT1-ID32SH CRT1-ID32SH-1 CRT1-OD32SH CRT1-OD32SH-1 CRT1-MD32SH CRT1-MD32SH-1 CRT1-VID16ML CRT1-VID16ML-1 CRT1-VOD16ML CRT1-VOD16ML-1 CRT1-VID32ML CRT1-VID32ML-1 CRT1-VOD32ML Appendix C Communications current consumption 125 mA max. (for 24 V) 145 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 65 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 65 mA max. (for 14 V) 60 mA max. (for 24 V) 90 mA max. (for 14 V) 60 mA max. (for 24 V) 90 mA max. (for 14 V) 195 mA max. (for 24 V) 200 mA max. (for 14 V) 195 mA max. (for 24 V) 200 mA max. (for 14 V) 50 mA max. (for 24 V) 80 mA max. (for 14 V) 50 mA max. (for 24 V) 80 mA max. (for 14 V) 45 mA max. (for 24 V) 70 mA max. (for 14 V) 45 mA max. (for 24 V) 70 mA max. (for 14 V) 210 mA max. (for 24 V) 235 mA max. (for 14 V) 210 mA max. (for 24 V) 235 mA max. (for 14 V) 50 mA max. (for 24 V) 90 mA max. (for 14 V) 50 mA max. (for 24 V) 90 mA max. (for 14 V) 60 mA max. (for 24 V) 100 mA max. (for 14 V) 60 mA max. (for 24 V) 100 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 45 mA max. (for 24 V) 65 mA max. (for 14 V) 45 mA max. (for 24 V) 65 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 40 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 50 mA max. (for 24 V) 80 mA max. (for 14 V) 633 Current Consumption Summary Model CRT1-VOD32ML-1 CRT1-VMD32ML CRT1-VMD32ML-1 CRT1-ID08SL CRT1-ID08SL-1 CRT1-OD08SL CRT1-OD08SL-1 CRT1-ID16SL CRT1-ID16SL-1 CRT1-OD16SL CRT1-OD16SL-1 CRT1-MD16SL CRT1-MD16SL-1 XWT-ID08 (See note.) XWT-ID08-1 (See note.) XWT-OD08 (See note.) XWT-OD08-1 (See note.) XWT-ID16 (See note.) XWT-ID16-1 (See note.) XWT-OD16 (See note.) XWT-OD16-1 (See note.) Appendix C Communications current consumption 50 mA max. (for 24 V) 80 mA max. (for 14 V) 45 mA max. (for 24 V) 70 mA max. (for 14 V) 45 mA max. (for 24 V) 70 mA max. (for 14 V) 30 mA max. (for 24 V) 50 mA max. (for 14 V) 30 mA max. (for 24 V) 50 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 55 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 55 mA max. (for 14 V) 34 mA max. (for 24 V) 55 mA max. (for 14 V) 34 mA max. (for 24 V) 55 mA max. (for 14 V) 37 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 37 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 60 mA max. (for 14 V) 5 mA max. 5 mA max. 5 mA max. 5 mA max. 10 mA max. 10 mA max. 10 mA max. 10 mA max. Note The communications current consumption indicated for Expansion Units is the additional current consumed when the Expansion Unit is connected to a Basic Unit. For example, the current consumption for the case of combining CRT1-ID16 + XWT-OD16 is 55 + 10 = 65 mA for a communications power supply voltage of 24 VDC and 85 + 10 = 95 mA for a communications power supply voltage of 14 VDC. Analog I/O Slave Units Model CRT1-AD04 CRT1-DA02 CRT1-VAD04S 634 Communications current consumption 110 mA max. (for 24 V) 175 mA max. (for 14 V) 125 mA max. (for 24 V) 205 mA max. (for 14 V) 75 mA max. (for 24 V) 115 mA max. (for 14 V) Current Consumption Summary Model CRT1-VDA02S CRT1-VAD04ML CRT1-VDA02ML Appendix C Communications current consumption 105 mA max. (for 24 V) 170 mA max. (for 14 V) 75 mA max. (for 24 V) 115 mA max. (for 14 V) 105 mA max. (for 24 V) 170 mA max. (for 14 V) Temperature Input Units Model CRT1-TS04T CRT1-TS04P Communications current consumption 75 mA max. (for 24 V) 110 mA max. (for 14 V) 75 mA max. (for 24 V) 110 mA max. (for 14 V) Bit Slave Units Model CRT1B-ID02S CRT1B-ID02S-1 CRT1B-OD02S CRT1B-OD02S-1 CRT1B-ID02SP CRT1B-ID02SP-1 CRT1B-OD02SP CRT1B-OD02SP-1 CRT1B-ID04SP CRT1B-ID04SP-1 CRT1B-MD04SLP CRT1B-MD04SLP-1 Communications current consumption 65 mA max. (for 24 V) 80 mA max. (for 14 V) 45 mA max. (for 24 V) 65 mA max. (for 14 V) 55 mA max. (for 24 V) 75 mA max. (for 14 V) 55 mA max. (for 24 V) 70 mA max. (for 14 V) 65 mA max. (for 24 V) 80 mA max. (for 14 V) 65 mA max. (for 24 V) 80 mA max. (for 14 V) 50 mA max. (for 24 V) 75 mA max. (for 14 V) 50 mA max. (for 24 V) 75 mA max. (for 14 V) 85 mA max. (for 24 V) 90 mA max. (for 14 V) 85 mA max. (for 24 V) 90 mA max. (for 14 V) 80 mA max. (for 24 V) 90 mA max. (for 14 V) 75 mA max. (for 24 V) 85 mA max. (for 14 V) 635 Current Consumption Summary Bit Slaves with Compact Connectors Model CRT1B-ID02JS CRT1B-ID02JS-1 CRT1B-OD02JS CRT1B-OD02JS-1 CRT1B-ID04JS CRT1B-ID04JS-1 CRT1B-OD04JS CRT1B-OD04JS-1 CRT1B-MD02JS CRT1B-MD02JS-1 CRT1B-MD04JS CRT1B-MD04JS-1 Communications current consumption 25 mA max. (for 24 V) 30 mA max. (for 14 V) 25 mA max. (for 24 V) 30 mA max. (for 14 V) 25 mA max. (for 24 V) 30 mA max. (for 14 V) 25 mA max. (for 24 V) 30 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 40 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 40 mA max. (for 14 V) 30 mA max. (for 24 V) 35 mA max. (for 14 V) 30 mA max. (for 24 V) 35 mA max. (for 14 V) 25 mA max. (for 24 V) 30 mA max. (for 14 V) 25 mA max. (for 24 V) 30 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 40 mA max. (for 14 V) 35 mA max. (for 24 V) 40 mA max. (for 14 V) Repeater Unit Model CRS1-RPT01 636 Communications current consumption 95 mA max. Appendix C Appendix D Precautions with Connecting Two-wire DC Sensors When using a two-wire sensor with a Slave Unit with DC inputs, check that the following conditions have been met. Failure to meet these conditions may result in operating errors. Relation between ON Voltage of Slave Unit with DC Inputs and Sensor Residual Voltage VON ≤ VCC − VR VCC: I/O power supply voltage (The allowable power supply voltage range is 20.4 to 26.4 V, so 20.4 V will be used here to allow for the worst possible conditions.) VON: ON voltage for a Slave Unit with DC Inputs VR : Sensor's output residual voltage It is sometimes possible to satisfy the above equation by adjusting the I/O power supply voltage (VCC) to 26.4 V. Relation between ON Current of Slave Unit with DC Inputs and Sensor Control Output (Load Current) IOUT (min) ≤ ION ≤ IOUT (max.) IOUT: Sensor control output (load current) ION: ON current of Input Slave Unit with DC inputs ION is calculated as follows: ION = (VCC − VR − VF)/RIN VF : Internal residual voltage of a Slave Unit with DC Inputs RIN: Input impedance of a Slave Unit with DC Inputs When ION is smaller than IOUT (min), connect a bleeder resistor R. The bleeder resistor constant can be calculated using the following equation. R ≤ (VCC − VR)/(IOUT (min.) − ION) Power W ≥ (VCC − VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin] 2-wire sensor Slave Unit with DC Inputs 637 Precautions with Connecting Two-wire DC Sensors Appendix D Relation between OFF Current of Slave Unit with DC Inputs and Sensor Leakage Current IOFF ≥ Ileak IOUT: OFF current of a Slave Unit with DC Inputs Ileak: Sensor's leakage current Connect a bleeder resistor if the Sensor's leakage current is greater than the OFF current of a Slave Unit with DC Inputs. The bleeder resistor constant can be calculated using the following equation. R ≤ (IOFF × RIN + VF)/(Ileak − VOFF) Power W ≥ (VCC − VR)2/R × 4 [allowable margin] 638 Appendix E I/O Power Supply Current The I/O power supply current to be supplied to the V and G terminals of each Digital I/O Slave Unit is provided by the following equation. The points to which I/O power must be supplied are divided into small blocks. The I/O power supply currents supplied to these points are calculated in block units. For example, in a CRT1-ID16TA Slave Unit, the points are divided into two blocks. One includes 8 points on the left: Inputs 0 to 7. The other contains 8 points on the right: Inputs 8 to 15. Currents are calculated for each block. Input Unit The I/O power supply current supplied to V and G terminals = input current (for number of points used) + current supplied to input devices (for number of points used) * + I/O power supply current consumption * This value does not apply to 2-tier terminal block type slaves. Calculate using I/O power supply current supplied to V and G terminals = input current (for number of points used) + I/O power supply current consumption. Output Unit The I/O power supply current supplied to V and G terminals = rated output current (for number of points used) * + current supplied to input devices (for number of points used) + I/O power supply current consumption * Compare with the restricted value for common and apply whichever value is the smallest. (Example) Case of having seven 30-mA sensors connected to the CRT1-ID08TA I/O power supply current supplied to V and G terminals = (6 mA x 7 points) + (30 mA x 7 points) + 5 mA = 257 mA 639 I/O Power Supply Current 640 Appendix E Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors BIT NODE ADR 000 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR 005 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR 010 021 026 031 022 027 032 023 028 033 024 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 019 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 018 014 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 017 013 009 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR 030 016 012 008 004 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR 025 011 007 003 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR 020 006 002 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR 015 001 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 029 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 034 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 641 Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors BIT NODEADR 035 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 040 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 045 642 056 061 066 057 062 067 058 063 068 059 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 054 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 053 049 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 052 048 044 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 065 051 047 043 039 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 060 046 042 038 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 055 041 037 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 050 036 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 064 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 069 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors BIT NODEADR 070 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 075 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 080 091 096 101 092 097 102 093 098 103 094 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 089 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 088 084 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 087 083 079 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 100 086 082 078 074 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 095 081 077 073 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 090 076 072 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 085 071 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 099 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 104 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 643 Appendix F Node Address Settings for Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors BIT NODEADR 105 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 110 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 115 644 116 121 126 117 122 127 118 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 123 114 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 113 109 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 112 108 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 125 111 107 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR 120 106 BIT NODE ADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 119 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 BIT NODEADR ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 124 ON RSV 64 32 16 8 4 2 1 Index A AD conversion data, 311 analog data 1, 312, 313, 316 Bottom, 314 Peak, 314 Rate of Change, 314 Raw Value, 314 selecting, 312 Top, 314 Valley, 314 Analog Data Selection Method, 314 Analog I/O Slave Units, 24 overview, 306 analog input value, 311 Analog Slaves peak/bottom hold, 544 scaling, 541 top/valley hold, 546 applications precautions, xx assembly object, 619 automatic baud rate detection, 2, 486 CompoNet networks, 32 Configurator writing maintenance dates, 561 connection object, 625 contact operation monitor, 2, 498 control system, 2 cumulated count, 526, 537 cumulated value, 311 cumulative counter, 4, 562 D data processing functions, 306 communications error output setting, 307 comparator, 306 cumulative counter, 307 disconnected line detection, 306 moving average, 306 peak/bottom hold, 306 rate of change, 306 scaling, 306 top/valley hold, 306 user adjustment, 306 Digital I/O Slave Units, 20 B bottom value, 311 branch lines, 33 branches, 33 multidrop connections, 34 T-branch connections, 34 C cables DCA4-4F10 Standard Flat Cable, 37 DCA5-4F10 Sheathed Flat Cable, 38 selecting cable types, 38 CMND instruction, 612 communications power supply, 34 communications cables, xx disconnected line detection, 5, 524 E EC Directives, xxii electromagnetic fields, xxii EMC Directives, xxii EMI Standard, xxii EMS Standard, xxii error codes, 592 Error History Window, 329 explicit messages, 591, 594 example, 612 external load short-circuit detection, 3 F communications error history monitor, 3, 492 FALS instruction, xix communications error output setting, 3 flags Analog Status Flags, 313, 316 Hold Flags, 314, 318 Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags, 313, 316 communications power supply, 85 comparator, 4, 520 Comparator Result Flag, 552, 553 645 Index G Generic Status Flags, 562 N naming connected devices, 3, 491 naming Units, 3, 490 H Network Power Supply Slave Units, 86 network power voltage monitor, 3, 487 Hold Flag, 544, 546 noise, xxii hold/clear outputs, 486 NS indicators, 580 hysteresis, 547, 553 number of conversion points, 4 hysteresis setting, 517, 521 I O OFF delay, 521 I/O power status monitor, 3, 495 offset compensation, 510, 531 I/O power supply, 85, 98 Off-wire Detection, 561 identity object, 615 one-shot time setting, 518 indicator meanings and troubleshooting, 580 operating environment precautions, xix input filter, 3, 496 operation time monitor, 2, 502 input range and conversion data, 308 output data, 322 inrush current, 3 preventing malfunctions, 497 output range and conversion data, 319 installation location, xix L outputs precautions, xix P peak value, 311 last maintenance date, 4, 494, 529 peak/bottom hold, 4, 513, 544 locking devices precautions, xx power supply, xxii precautions, xxi wiring, 85 M maintenance cleaning, 588 device maintenance, 588 inspections, 588 writing maintenance dates, 561 Maintenance Information Window, 325, 483 maintenance system, 2 precautions, xvii applications, xx general, xviii operating environment, xix safety, xviii preventing malfunctions, 3 R Master Units, 32 radiated emission, xxii message router object, 619 radioactivity, xxii moving average, 4 moving average processing, 508 rate of change, 311 calculation, 4, 518 MS indicators, 580 Repeater Units, 33 Multi-power Supply Slave Units, 85 replacing parts precautions, xxi replacing Units 646 Index precautions, xxi S V valley value, 311 Voltage/Current Input Mode Settings Switch, 340 safety precautions, xviii scaling, 4, 509, 530, 541 default scaling, 509, 530 user scaling, 510, 531 screw-less clamp, 111 Selecting Temperature Data, 370 W wiring trunk line-branch line formation, 35, 36 unrestricted wiring formation, 36 sensor power short-circuit detection, 3 Sensor Power Supply Connector, 341 Sensor Power Supply Mode Settings Switch, 339 setting output value for errors, 539 short-circuits precautions, xxi signals precautions, xxi Slave Units, 33 models, 19 specifications, 116 Standard Window, 481 static electricity, xxii status areas, 120, 322, 392, 408, 472 Alarm Status Area, 121, 324, 325, 409, 473 Warning Status Area, 120, 323, 324, 408, 472 T Temperature Data Status Flag, 370, 373 Terminating Resistor, 33 top value, 311 top/valley hold, 4, 515, 546 Top/Valley Detection Timing Flags, 546 total ON time monitor, 2, 499 troubleshooting, 581 errors shown by indicators, 581 specific slave troubleshooting, 582 trunk lines, 33 U unit conduction time monitor, 3, 488 user adjustment, 5, 524, 534 647 Index 648 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual. Cat. No. W457-E1-07 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the previous version. Revision code 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Date Revised content September 2006 Original production July 2007 Additions to include Digital I/O Slave Units (16-point Input Unit with 3-tier terminal block, 16-point Output Unit with 3-tier terminal block, 8-point Input/8-point Output Unit with 3-tier terminal block, and 16-point Output Unit with relay outputs). Connector names were also changed globally. October 2007 Information was added on the following. Digital I/O Slave Units: 16-input Units (Connector Model and Clamp Model), 16-output Unit (2-tier Terminal Block Model with SSR Outputs, Connector Model, and Clamp Model) 8-input and 8-output Units (Connector Model) May 2008 Added information on the following Digital I/O Slaves 8-point Input Units (with 2-tier terminal block, with 3-tier terminal block, with e-CON connector, or with screwless clamp terminals), 8-point Output Units (with 2-tier terminal block, with 2-tier terminal block and relay outputs, with 2-tier terminal block and SSR outputs, with 3-tier terminal block, with e-CON connector, or with screwless clamp terminals), 8-point Input/8point Output Units (with 2-tier terminal block, with 3-tier terminal block and detection function, with e-CON connector and detection function, or with screwless clamp terminals), 16-point Input Units (with 3-tier terminal block and detection function, with eCON connector and detection function, or with MIL connector), 16-point Output Units (with 3-tier terminal block and detection function, with e-CON connector and detection function, or with MIL connector), 32-point Input Units (with e-CON connector or with MIL connector), 32-point Output Unit (with e-CON connector or with MIL connector), and 16-point Input/16-point Output Units (with e-CON connectors or with MIL connector). October 2008 Added information on Temperature Input Units (4 inputs). December 2008 Revised through addition of Analog I/O Slave Unit [4 point input unit (e-CON connector type/MIL connector type)/2 point output unit (e-CON connector type/MIL connector type)] October 2009 Added information on Bit Slave Units with Compact Connectors (2-point Input Unit, 2-point Output Unit, 4-point Input Unit, 4-point Output Unit, 2-point I/O Unit, and 4point I/O Unit). Added information on multidrop connectors for Flat Cable I. 649 Revision History 650 OMRON Corporation Industrial Automation Company Control Devices Division H.Q. Network Devices Department Shiokoji Horikawa, Shimogyo-ku, Kyoto, 600-8530 Japan Tel: (81) 75-344-7116/Fax: (81) 75-344-7149 2-2-1 Nishikusatsu, Kusatsu-shi, Shiga, 525-0035 Japan Tel: (81) 77-565-5219/Fax: (81) 77-565-5569 Regional Headquarters OMRON EUROPE B.V. Wegalaan 67-69-2132 JD Hoofddorp The Netherlands Tel: (31)2356-81-300/Fax: (31)2356-81-388 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC One Commerce Drive Schaumburg, IL 60173-5302 U.S.A. Tel: (1) 847-843-7900/Fax: (1) 847-843-7787 Authorized Distributor: OMRON ASIA PACIFIC PTE. LTD. No. 438A Alexandra Road # 05-05/08 (Lobby 2), Alexandra Technopark, Singapore 119967 Tel: (65) 6835-3011/Fax: (65) 6835-2711 OMRON (CHINA) CO., LTD. Room 2211, Bank of China Tower, 200 Yin Cheng Zhong Road, PuDong New Area, Shanghai, 200120, China Tel: (86) 21-5037-2222/Fax: (86) 21-5037-2200 OMRON Industrial Automation Global: www.ia.omron.com © OMRON Corporation 2006 All Rights Reserved. In the interest of product improvement, specifications are subject to change without notice. Printed in Japan Cat. No. W457-E1-07 1009